This is a modern-English version of The Art of Writing & Speaking the English Language: Word-Study and Composition & Rhetoric, originally written by Cody, Sherwin.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Produced by Andrew Hodson
Created by Andrew Hodson
Language = USA English. Characters with { } around them show those added as there are some mistakes in the book & for other reasons & ¤¬ִªЪđəפּזłһ$ show the extras of #-.abdegilns. (I changed mathematical & meter (rhythmic arrangement of syllables in verse) but maybe they are correct and the others are wrong). I did not change Shak{e}spe{a}re, mortgagəor & some words in lists. Broad a has 1 dot before & 1 under instead of 2 dots under it & the character ұ should have its line over the letter y. This arrow sign after a word shows that the next 1 should start the next column. “Special SYSTEM Edition” brought from frontispiece. The 2nd. book of “Composition & Rhetoric” is also in this file.
Language = USA English. Characters with { } around them show those added as there are some mistakes in the book & for other reasons & ¤¬ִªЪđəפּזłһ$ show the extras of #-.abdegilns. (I changed mathematical & meter (rhythmic arrangement of syllables in verse) but maybe they are correct and the others are wrong). I did not change Shak{e}spe{a}re, mortgagəor & some words in lists. Broad a has 1 dot before & 1 under instead of 2 dots under it & the character ұ should have its line over the letter y. This arrow sign after a word shows that the next 1 should start the next column. “Special SYSTEM Edition” brought from frontispiece. The 2nd. book of “Composition & Rhetoric” is also in this file.
THE ART σƒ WRITING & SPEAKING ךђℓ ENGLISH LANGUAGE
THE ART OF WRITING & SPEAKING IN ENGLISH LANGUAGE
SHERWIN CODY
Special S Y S T E M Edition
Special S Y S T E M Edition
WORD-STUDY
The Old Greek Press Chicago New{ }York Boston
The Old Greek Press Chicago New{ }York Boston
Revised Edition.
Updated Edition.
Copyright,1903,
Copyright, 1903
By SHERWIN CODY.
By SHERWIN CODY.
Note. The thanks of the author are due to Dr. Edwin H. Lewis, of the Lewis Institute, Chicago, and to Prof. John F. Genung, Ph. D., of Amherst College, for suggestions made after reading the proof of this series.
Note. The author would like to thank Dr. Edwin H. Lewis from the Lewis Institute in Chicago and Prof. John F. Genung, Ph. D., from Amherst College for their feedback after reviewing the proof of this series.
CONTENTS.
THE ART OF WRITING AND SPEAKING THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE.
GENERAL INTRODUCTION… 7
WORD-STUDY
INTRODUCTION——THE STUDY OF SPELLING
CHAPTER I. LETTERS AND SOUNDS {VOWELS CONSONANTS EXERCISES THE DICTIONARY}
CHAPTER II. WORD-BUILDING {PREFIXES}
CHAPTER III. WORD-BUILDING———Rules and Applications {EXCEPTIONS}
CHAPTER IV. PRONUNCIATION
CHAPTER V. A SPELLING DRILL
APPENDIX
The Art of Writing and Speaking the English Language
The Art of Writing and Speaking in English
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
If there is a subject of really universal interest and utility, it is the art of writing and speaking one's own language effectively. It is the basis of culture, as we all know; but it is infinitely more than that: it is the basis of business. No salesman can sell anything unless he can explain the merits of his goods in effective English (among our people), or can write an advertisement equally effective, or present his ideas, and the facts, in a letter. Indeed, the way we talk, and write letters, largely determines our success in life.
If there's a topic that truly interests everyone and is super useful, it's the skill of writing and speaking your own language effectively. It’s the foundation of culture, as we all know; but it's much more than that: it's the foundation of business. No salesperson can sell anything unless they can explain the benefits of their products in effective English (to our audience), write an equally compelling advertisement, or convey their ideas and facts in a letter. In fact, the way we communicate, both in conversation and in writing, greatly influences our success in life.
Now it is well for us to face at once the counter-statement that the most ignorant and uncultivated men often succeed best in business, and that misspelled, ungrammatical advertisements have brought in millions of dollars. It is an acknowledged fact that our business circulars and letters are far inferior in correctness to those of Great Britain; yet they are more effective in getting business. As far as spelling is concerned, we know that some of the masters of literature have been atrocious spellers and many suppose that when one can sin in such company, sinning is, as we might say, a “beauty spot”, a defect in which we can even take pride.
Now let’s address the claim that the most uneducated and unrefined people often do the best in business, and that poorly spelled, ungrammatical ads have made millions. It’s a known fact that our business brochures and letters are much less accurate than those from Great Britain; however, they are more successful at attracting business. When it comes to spelling, we know that some great authors have been terrible spellers, and many believe that if they can mess up in such company, making mistakes is, as we might say, a “beauty spot”—a flaw we can even take pride in.
Let us examine the facts in the case more closely. First of all, language is no more than a medium; it is like air to the creatures of the land or water to fishes. If it is perfectly clear and pure, we do not notice it any more than we notice pure air when the sun is shining in a clear sky, or the taste of pure cool water when we drink a glass on a hot day. Unless the sun is shining, there is no brightness; unless the water is cool, there is no refreshment. The source of all our joy in the landscape, of the luxuriance of fertile nature, is the sun and not the air. Nature would be more prodigal in Mexico than in Greenland, even if the air in Mexico were as full of soot and smoke as the air of Pittsburg{h}, or loaded with the acid from a chemical factory. So it is with language. Language is merely a medium for thoughts, emotions, the intelligence of a finely wrought brain, and a good mind will make far more out of a bad medium than a poor mind will make out of the best. A great violinist will draw such music from the cheapest violin that the world is astonished. However is that any reason why the great violinist should choose to play on a poor violin; or should one say nothing of the smoke nuisance in Chicago because more light and heat penetrate its murky atmosphere than are to be found in cities only a few miles farther north? The truth is, we must regard the bad spelling nuisance, the bad grammar nuisance, the inártistic and rambling language nuisance, precisely as we would the smoke nuisance, the sewer-gas nuisance, the stock-yards' smell nuisance. Some dainty people prefer pure air and correct language; but we now recognize that purity is something more than an esthetic fad, that it is essential to our health and well-being, and therefore it becomes a matter of universal public interest, in language as well as in air.
Let’s take a closer look at the facts of the case. First of all, language is just a medium; it’s like air for land animals or water for fish. When it’s completely clear and pure, we don’t notice it any more than we notice fresh air when the sun is shining in a clear sky, or the refreshing taste of cool water when we take a sip on a hot day. Without sunlight, there’s no brightness; without cool water, there’s no refreshment. The source of all our joy in the landscape, of the richness of fertile nature, is the sun, not the air. Nature would thrive more in Mexico than in Greenland, even if the air in Mexico was as polluted as in Pittsburgh or filled with chemicals from a factory. The same goes for language. Language is simply a medium for thoughts, emotions, and the intelligence of a well-crafted mind, and a good mind can make much more out of a poor medium than a poor mind can make out of the best. A great violinist can create incredible music from the cheapest violin, astonishing everyone. But does that mean the great violinist should choose to play on a bad violin? Should we ignore the pollution in Chicago just because more light and heat come through its smoggy air than in cities just a few miles north? The reality is, we should view issues like poor spelling, bad grammar, and unclear, rambling language the same way we view pollution from smoke, sewer gas, or the smell from stockyards. Some people prefer clean air and correct language, but we now understand that purity is more than just an aesthetic trend; it’s essential for our health and well-being, making it a matter of universal public concern, both in language and in air.
There is a general belief that while bad air may be a positive evil influence, incorrect use of language is at most no more than a negative evil: that while it may be a good thing to be correct, no special harm is involved in being incorrect. Let us look into this point.
There’s a common belief that while bad air might have a negative impact, misusing language is at worst just a minor issue: that while it’s good to be accurate, there isn’t really any significant harm in being inaccurate. Let’s explore this idea.
While language as the medium of thought may be compared to air as the medium of the sun's influence, in other respects it is like the skin of the body; a scurvy skin shows bad blood within, and a scurvy language shows inaccurate thought and a confused mind. And as a disease once fixed on the skin reacts and poisons the blood in turn as it has first been poisoned by the blood, so careless use of language if indulged reacts on the mind to make it permanently and increasingly careless, illogical, and inaccurate in its thinking.
While language as a way of expressing thoughts can be compared to air as the means through which the sun affects us, in other ways it is similar to the skin of the body; a bad skin reveals poor health underneath, and poor language reveals unclear thinking and a muddled mind. Just as a disease that afflicts the skin can negatively impact the blood after it has been contaminated, careless use of language, if allowed to persist, can influence the mind, leading to a state of permanent and growing carelessness, illogic, and inaccuracy in thinking.
The ordinary person will probably not believe this, because he conceives of good use of language as an accomplishment to be learned from books, a prim system of genteel manners to be put on when occasion demands, a sort of superficial education in the correct thing, or, as the boys would say, “the proper caper.” In this, however, he is mistaken. Language which expresses the thought with strict logical accuracy is correct language, and language which is sufficiently rich in its resources to express thought fully, in all its lights and bearings, is effective language. If the writer or speaker has a sufficient stock of words and forms at his disposal, he has only to use them in a strictly logical way and with sufficient fulness to be both correct and effective. If his mind can always be trusted to work accurately, he need not know a word of grammar except what he has imbibed unconsciously in getting his stock of words and expressions. Formal grammar is purely for critical purposes. It is no more than a standard measuring stick by which to try the work that has been done and find out if it is imperfect at any point. Of course constant correction of inaccuracies schools the mind and puts it on its guard so that it will be more careful the next time it attempts expression; but we cannot avoid the conclusion that if the mind lacks material, lacks knowledge of the essential elements of the language, it should go to the original source from which it got its first supply, namely to reading and hearing that which is acknowledged to be correct and sufficient―as the child learns from its mother. All the scholastic and analytic grammar in the world will not enrich the mind in language to any appreciable extent.
The average person probably won't believe this because they think that using language well is something learned from books, a fancy system of polite behavior used when needed, or a kind of shallow education in what’s considered correct, or as kids would put it, “the right move.” However, they are mistaken. Language that conveys thoughts with clear logical accuracy is correct language, and language that has enough richness to express thoughts fully, in all their aspects and nuances, is effective language. If a writer or speaker has a good range of words and structures at their disposal, they just need to use them logically and thoroughly to be both correct and effective. If their mind is consistently accurate, they don't need to know grammar rules beyond what they've picked up naturally while building their vocabulary. Formal grammar is mainly for critical evaluation. It serves as a standard measuring tool to check the work done and see if it's flawed in any way. Constantly correcting mistakes trains the mind and keeps it alert, making it more careful the next time it tries to express itself; but we can't ignore the fact that if someone’s mind lacks material and understanding of the basics of language, they should go back to the original source of their initial knowledge—reading and listening to what is recognized as correct and adequate—just like a child learns from their mother. All the academic and analytical grammar in the world won’t significantly enhance one’s command of language.
And now we may consider another objector, who says, “I have studied grammar for years and it has done me no good.” In view of what has just been said, we may easily concede that such is very likely to have been the case. A measuring stick is of little value unless you have something to measure. Language cannot be acquired, only tested, by analysis, and grammar is an analytic, not a constructive science.
And now we can look at another critic, who says, “I’ve studied grammar for years and it hasn’t helped me at all.” Given what we’ve just discussed, we can easily agree that this is probably true. A measuring stick isn’t very useful unless you have something to measure. Language can't be learned, only assessed, through analysis, and grammar is an analytical, not a constructive, discipline.
We have compared bad use of language to a scurvy condition of the skin. To cure the skin we must doctor the blood; and to improve the language we should begin by teaching the mind to think. But that, you will say, is a large undertaking. Yes, but after all it is the most direct and effective way. All education should be in the nature of teaching the mind to think, and the teaching of language consists in teaching thinking in connection with word forms and expression through language. The unfortunate thing is that teachers of language have failed to go to the root of the trouble, and enormous effort has counted for nothing, and besides has led to discouragement.
We’ve compared poor language use to a bad skin condition. To fix the skin, we need to treat the blood; to improve our language, we should start by teaching the mind to think. You might say that’s a big task. Yes, but it’s ultimately the most straightforward and effective approach. All education should focus on teaching the mind to think, and teaching language is about connecting thinking with word forms and expression through language. The unfortunate part is that language teachers haven’t addressed the root of the issue, resulting in significant effort that seems wasted and has caused discouragement.
The American people are noted for being hasty in all they do. Their manufactures are quickly made and cheap. They have not hitherto had time to secure that perfection in minute details which constitutes “quality.” The slow-going Europeans still excel in nearly all fine and high-grade forms of manufacture―fine pottery, fine carpets and rugs, fine cloth, fine bronze and other art wares. In our language, too, we are hasty, and therefore imperfect. Fine logical accuracy requires more time than we have had to give to it, and we read the newspapers, which are very poor models of language, instead of books, which should be far better. Our standard of business letters is very low. It is rare to find a letter of any length without one or more errors of language, to say nothing of frequent errors in spelling made by ignorant stenographers and not corrected by the business men who sign the letters.
The American people are known for being quick in everything they do. Their products are made quickly and cheaply. They haven’t taken the time to achieve the perfection in details that defines “quality.” The more methodical Europeans still excel in almost all fine and high-quality manufacturing—like fine pottery, fine carpets and rugs, high-quality cloth, fine bronze, and other artworks. In our language, we’re also hasty, which makes it imperfect. Achieving fine logical accuracy requires more time than we’ve dedicated to it, and we read newspapers, which are poor examples of language, instead of books, which should be much better. Our standard for business letters is very low. It’s rare to find a letter of any length without one or more language errors, not to mention the frequent spelling mistakes made by untrained typists that aren’t corrected by the business people who sign the letters.
But a change is coming over us. We have suddenly taken to reading books, and while they are not always the best books, they are better than newspapers. And now a young business man feels that it is distinctly to his advantage if he can dictate a thoroughly good letter to his superior or to a well informed customer. Good letters raise the tone of a business house, poor letters give the idea that it is a cheapjack concern. In social life, well written letters, like good conversational powers, bring friends and introduce the writer into higher circles. A command of language is the index of culture, and the uneducated man or woman who has become wealthy or has gained any special success is eager to put on this wedding garment of refinement. If he continues to regard a good command of language as a wedding garment, he will probably fail in his effort; but a few will discover the way to self-education and actively follow it to its conclusion adding to their first success this new achievement.
But a change is happening. We’ve suddenly started reading books, and even if they’re not always the best, they’re better than newspapers. Now, a young businessperson knows that it’s clearly in their favor if they can write a really good email to their boss or an informed client. Well-written emails enhance the reputation of a business, while poorly written ones make it seem cheap. In social situations, well-crafted messages, like good conversation skills, attract friends and help the writer move into more elevated social circles. Having a good grasp of language is a sign of culture, and the uneducated person who becomes wealthy or achieves success eagerly wants to wear this refined "wedding garment." If they continue to see good language skills as merely a status symbol, they’ll likely struggle; but a few will find their way to self-education and actively pursue it, adding this new skill to their initial success.
But we may even go farther. The right kind of language-teaching will also give us power, a kind of eloquence, a skill in the use of words, which will enable us to frame advertisements which will draw business, letters which will win customers, and to speak in that elegant and forceful way so effective in selling goods. When all advertisements are couched in very imperfect language, and all business letters are carelessly written, of course no one has an advantage over another, and a good knowledge and command of language would not be much of a recommendation to a business man who wants a good assistant. But when a few have come in and by their superior command of language gained a distinct advantage over rivals, then the power inherent in language comes into universal demand——the business standard is raised. There are many signs now that the business standard in the use of language is being distinctly raised. Already a stenographer who does not make errors commands a salary from 25 per cent. to 50 per cent. higher than the average, and is always in demand. Advertisement writers must have not only business instinct but language instinct, and knowledge of correct, as well as forceful, expression{.}
But we can even go further. The right kind of language teaching will also give us power, a kind of eloquence, a skill in using words that will enable us to create advertisements that attract customers, letters that win clients, and to speak in that elegant and impactful way that's effective in selling products. When all advertisements are written in poor language and all business letters are careless, no one has an edge over the others, and a strong grasp of language wouldn’t be much of an asset for a businessperson looking for a good assistant. But when a few individuals enter the scene and, through their superior command of language, gain a clear advantage over their competitors, then the power inherent in language becomes highly sought after—the business standard is raised. There are many signs now that the business standard in language use is being raised significantly. Already, a stenographer who doesn’t make mistakes earns a salary that’s 25 to 50 percent higher than average and is always in demand. Advertisement writers must possess not only business savvy but also a knack for language and knowledge of both correct and impactful expression.
Granted, then, that we are all eager to better our knowledge of the
English language, how shall we go about it?
Granted, then, that we all want to improve our understanding of the
English language, how should we go about it?
There are literally thousands of published books devoted to the study and teaching of our language. In such a flood it would seem that we should have no difficulty in obtaining good guides for our study.
There are literally thousands of published books focused on studying and teaching our language. With such an abundance, it seems like we should have no trouble finding effective resources for our learning.
But what do we find? We find spelling-books filled with lists of words to be memorized; we find grammars filled with names and definitions of all the different forms which the language assumes; we find rhetorics filled with the names of every device ever employed to give effectiveness to language; we find books on literature filled with the names, dates of birth and death, and lists of works, of every writer any one ever heard of: and when we have learned all these names we are no better off than when we started. It is true that in many of these books we may find prefaces which say, “All other books err in clinging too closely to mere system, to names; but we will break away and give you the real thing.” But they don't do it; they can't afford to be too radical, and so they merely modify in a few details the same old system, the system of names. Yet it is a great point gained when the necessity for a change is realized.
But what do we find? We find spelling books filled with lists of words to memorize; we find grammar books packed with names and definitions of all the different forms the language takes; we find rhetoric books that list every technique ever used to make language impactful; we find literature books filled with names, birth and death dates, and lists of works by every writer anyone has ever heard of. And when we’ve learned all these names, we’re not any better off than when we started. It’s true that many of these books have introductions that say, “All other books make mistakes by sticking too closely to just systems and names; but we will break away and give you the real deal.” But they don’t; they can’t afford to be too radical, so they only tweak a few details of the same old system, the system of names. Still, recognizing the need for change is a significant step forward.
How, then, shall we go about our mastery of the English language?
How should we go about mastering the English language?
Modern science has provided us a universal method by which we may study and master any subject. As applied to an art, this method has proved highly successful in the case of music. It has not been applied to language because there was a well fixed method of language study in existence long before modern science was even dreamed of, and that ancient method has held on with wonderful tenacity. The great fault with it is that it was invented to apply to languages entirely different from our own. Latin grammar and Greek grammar were mechanical systems of endings by which the relationships of words were indicated. Of course the relationship of words was at bottom logical, but the mechanical form was the chief thing to be learned. Our language depends wholly (or very nearly so) on arrangement of words, and the key is the logical relationship. A man who knows all the forms of the Latin or Greek language can write it with substantial accuracy; but the man who would master the English language must go deeper, he must master the logic of sentence structure or word relations. We must begin our study at just the opposite end from the Latin or Greek; but our teachers of language have balked at a complete reversal of method, the power of custom and time has been too strong, and in the matter of grammar we are still the slaves of the ancient world. As for spelling, the irregularities of our language seem to have driven us to one sole method, memorizing: and to memorize every word in a language is an appalling task. Our rhetoric we have inherited from the middle ages, from scholiasts, refiners, and theological logicians, a race of men who got their living by inventing distinctions and splitting hairs. The fact is, prose has had a very low place in the literature of the world until within a century; all that was worth saying was said in poetry, which the rhetoricians were forced to leave severely alone, or in oratory, from which all their rules were derived; and since written prose language became a universal possession through the printing press and the newspaper we have been too busy to invent a new rhetoric.
Modern science has given us a universal method to study and master any subject. This method has worked particularly well in music. However, it hasn't been applied to language because a solid method for studying languages existed long before modern science was even imagined, and that ancient method has endured remarkably. The major flaw is that it was designed for languages that are very different from ours. Latin and Greek grammar were mechanical systems of endings that indicated the relationships of words. While the relationships were fundamentally logical, the mechanical form was what needed to be learned primarily. Our language relies almost entirely on word arrangement, with the logical relationship being the key. A person who knows all the forms of Latin or Greek can write it quite accurately; however, to master the English language, one must dig deeper and understand the logic of sentence structure and word relations. We need to start our study from the opposite perspective of Latin or Greek, but our language teachers have resisted a complete method reversal; the influence of tradition and time has been too strong, and in terms of grammar, we are still bound by ancient practices. Regarding spelling, the irregularities of our language seem to have pushed us toward one main method: memorization. Memorizing every word in a language is a daunting task. Our rhetoric has come from the Middle Ages, influenced by scholars, refiners, and theological logicians—people who made a living by inventing distinctions and nitpicking. The truth is, prose has held a low status in literature until the last century; everything worth saying was expressed in poetry, which the rhetoricians had to avoid, or in oratory, which was the foundation of their rules. Since written prose became widely available through the printing press and newspapers, we have been too busy to create a new rhetoric.
Now, language is just as much a natural growth as trees or rocks or human bodies, and it can have no more irregularities, even in the matter of spelling, than these have. Science would laugh at the notion of memorizing every individual form of rock. It seeks the fundamental laws, it classifies and groups, and even if the number of classes or groups is large, still they have a limit and can be mastered. Here we have a solution of the spelling problem. In grammar we find seven fundamental logical relationships, and when we have mastered these and their chief modifications and combinations, we have the essence of grammar as truly as if we knew the name for every possible combination which our seven fundamental relationships might have. Since rhetoric is the art of appealing to the emotions and intelligence of our hearers, we need to know, not the names of all the different artifices which may be employed, but the nature and laws of emotion and intelligence as they may be reached through language; for if we know what we are hitting at, a little practice will enable us to hit accurately; whereas if we knew the name of every kind of blow, and yet were ignorant of the thing we were hitting at, namely the intelligence and emotion of our fellow man, we would be forever striking into the air,―striking cleverly perhaps, but ineffectively.
Now, language grows naturally just like trees, rocks, or human bodies, and it shouldn't have more irregularities, even in spelling, than they do. Science would find it ridiculous to memorize every single type of rock. It looks for fundamental laws, classifies and groups things, and even if there are many classes or groups, they are limited and can be mastered. This gives us a solution to the spelling issue. In grammar, we identify seven basic logical relationships, and once we grasp these and their main variations and combinations, we truly understand grammar as if we knew the name for every possible combination of our seven fundamental relationships. Since rhetoric is about appealing to the emotions and intellect of our audience, we should focus not on the names of all the different techniques we could use, but on understanding the nature and laws of emotion and intelligence that can be accessed through language. If we know what we’re aiming for, a bit of practice will help us aim accurately; however, if we know every type of strike but fail to understand what we're actually targeting—namely, the intelligence and emotions of others—we'll just be swinging at nothing, perhaps skillfully, but ineffectively.
Having got our bearings, we find before us a purely practical problem, that of leading the student through the maze of a new science and teaching him the skill of an old art, exemplified in a long line of masters.
Having oriented ourselves, we encounter a straightforward challenge: guiding the student through the complexities of a new science and teaching him the craft of an ancient art, demonstrated by a long line of masters.
By way of preface we may say that the mastery of the English language (or any language) is almost the task of a lifetime. A few easy lessons will have no effect. We must form a habit of language study that will grow upon us as we grow older, and little by little, but never by leaps, shall we mount up to the full expression of all that is in us.
By way of preface, we can say that mastering the English language (or any language) is nearly a lifelong task. A few simple lessons won't make a difference. We need to develop a habit of language study that will evolve with us as we get older, and gradually, but never in huge strides, we'll reach the full expression of everything within us.
WORD-STUDY
INTRODUCTION
THE STUDY OF SPELLING.
The mastery of English spelling is a serious under-taking. In the first place, we must actually memorize from one to three thousand words which are spelled in more or less irregular ways. The best that can be done with these words is to classify them as much as possible and suggest methods of association which will aid the memory. But after all, the drudgery of memorizing must be gone through with.
Mastering English spelling is a significant challenge. First of all, we need to memorize anywhere from one to three thousand words that have irregular spellings. The best we can do with these words is to categorize them as much as we can and suggest memory aids to help us remember. But ultimately, we still have to put in the hard work of memorizing them.
Again, those words called homonyms, which are pronounced alike but spelled differently, can be studied only in connection with their meaning, since the meaning and grammatical use in the sentence is our only key to their form. So we have to go considerably beyond the mere mechanical association of letters.
Again, those words known as homonyms, which sound the same but are spelled differently, can only be studied in relation to their meaning, since understanding their meaning and grammatical use in a sentence is our only clue to their form. So, we need to go well beyond just the mechanical arrangement of letters.
Besides the two or three thousand common irregular words, the dictionary contains something over two hundred thousand other words. Of course no one of us can possibly have occasion to use all of those words; but at the same time, every one of us may sooner or later have occasion to use any one of them. As we cannot tell before hand what ones we shall need, we should be prepared to write any or all of them upon occasion. Of course we may refer to the dictionary; but this is not always, or indeed very often, possible. It would obviously be of immense advantage to us if we could find a key to the spelling of these numerous but infrequently used words.
Besides the two or three thousand common irregular words, the dictionary has over two hundred thousand other words. Of course, none of us can possibly use all of those words, but at some point, each of us may need to use any one of them. Since we can’t predict in advance which ones we will need, we should be ready to write any or all of them when necessary. We can refer to the dictionary, but that isn't always, or even often, feasible. It would obviously be a huge benefit if we could find a key to the spelling of these many but rarely used words.
The first duty of the instructor in spelling should be to provide such a key. We would suppose, off-hand, that the three hundred thousand school-teachers in the United States would do this immediately and without suggestion——certainly that the writers of school-books would. But many things have stood in the way. It is only within a few years, comparatively speaking, that our language has become at all fixed in its spelling. Noah Webster did a great deal to establish principles, and bring the spelling of as many words as possible to conform with these principles and with such analogies as seemed fairly well established. But other dictionary-makers have set up their ideas against his, and we have a conflict of authorities. If for any reason one finds himself spelling a word differently from the world about him, he begins to say, “Well, that is the spelling given in Worcester, or the Century, or the Standard, or the new Oxford.” So the word “authority” looms big on the horizon; and we think so much about authority, and about different authorities, that we forget to look for principles, as Mr. Webster would have us do.
The first responsibility of spelling instructors should be to provide a clear guide. We would assume right away that the three hundred thousand teachers in the United States would do this right away and without needing to be told—certainly, the authors of textbooks would. But many obstacles have gotten in the way. It’s only in the last few years, relatively speaking, that our language has settled into a consistent spelling. Noah Webster contributed significantly to setting rules and aligning the spelling of as many words as possible with these rules and the well-established patterns. However, other dictionary creators have introduced their own ideas, leading to a conflict of authorities. If someone finds themselves spelling a word differently from those around them for any reason, they might say, “Well, that’s how it’s spelled in Worcester, or the Century, or the Standard, or the new Oxford.” As a result, the concept of “authority” becomes very prominent; we focus so much on authority and the different sources of it that we forget to seek out the principles, as Mr. Webster would have urged us to do.
Another reason for neglecting rules and principles is that the lists of exceptions are often so formidable that we get discouraged and exclaim, “If nine tenths of the words I use every day are exceptions to the rules, what is the use of the rules anyway!” Well, the words which constitute that other tenth will aggregate in actual numbers far more than the common words which form the chief part of everyday speech, and as they are selected at random from a vastly larger number, the only possible way to master them is by acquiring principles, consciously or unconsciously, which will serve as a key to them. Some people have the faculty of unconsciously formulating principles from their everyday observations, but it is a slow process, and many never acquire it unless it is taught them.
Another reason people ignore rules and principles is that the lists of exceptions can be so overwhelming that we get discouraged and say, “If nine out of ten words I use every day are exceptions to the rules, what’s the point of the rules at all?” Well, the words that make up that other tenth actually outnumber the common words that are the foundation of everyday speech, and since they are chosen from a much larger pool, the only way to really learn them is by picking up principles, either consciously or unconsciously, that will help unlock them. Some people are good at naturally creating principles from their daily experiences, but it’s a slow process, and many never figure it out unless someone teaches them.
The spelling problem is not to learn how to spell nine tenths of our words correctly. Nearly all of us can and do accomplish that. The good speller must spell nine hundred and ninety-nine one thousandths of his word correctly, which is quite another matter. Some of us go even one figure higher.
The spelling issue isn't just about being able to spell 90% of our words correctly. Most of us can and do manage that. A good speller needs to spell 99.9% of their words right, which is a whole different challenge. Some of us aim to achieve even more than that.
Our first task is clearly to commit the common irregular words to memory. How may we do that most easily? It is a huge task at best, but every pound of life energy which we can save in doing it is so much gained for higher efforts. We should strive to economize effort in this just as the manufacturer tries to economize in the cost of making his goods.
Our first task is clearly to memorize the common irregular words. How can we do that most easily? It’s a big challenge, but every bit of energy we can save while doing it gives us more for bigger efforts. We should aim to conserve our effort here just like a manufacturer tries to cut costs when producing their goods.
In this particular matter, it seems to the present writer that makers of modern spelling-books have committed a great blunder in mixing indiscriminately regular words with irregular, and common words with uncommon. Clearly we should memorize first the words we use most often, and then take up those which we use less frequently. But the superintendent of the Evanston schools has reported that out of one hundred first-reader words which he gave to his grammar classes as a spelling test, some were misspelled by all but sixteen per cent{.} of the pupils. And yet these same pupils were studying busily away on categories, concatenation, and amphibious. The spelling-book makers feel that they must put hard words into their spellers. Their books are little more than lists of words, and any one can make lists of common, easy words. A spelling-book filled with common easy words would not seem to be worth the price paid for it. Pupils and teachers must get their money's worth, even if they never learn to spell. Of course the teachers are expected to furnish drills themselves on the common, easy words; but unfortunately they take their cue from the spelling-book, each day merely assigning to the class the next page. They haven't time to select, and no one could consistently expect them to do otherwise than as they do do.
In this situation, it seems to me that the creators of modern spelling books have made a big mistake by mixing regular words with irregular ones and common words with uncommon ones. Clearly, we should first memorize the words we use most often, and then tackle the less frequently used ones. However, the superintendent of the Evanston schools reported that out of one hundred first-reader words given to his grammar classes as a spelling test, almost all the students, except for sixteen percent, spelled them incorrectly. Yet these same students were busy studying words like categories, concatenation, and amphibious. The spelling book creators feel the need to include difficult words in their books. Their books end up being little more than lists of words, and anyone can create lists of common, easy words. A spelling book filled with common, easy words wouldn’t seem worth the price. Students and teachers want to get their money's worth, even if they never learn to spell. Of course, teachers are expected to provide practice on the common, easy words themselves, but unfortunately, they follow the spelling book's lead, simply assigning the next page each day. They don’t have the time to select words, and no one can reasonably expect them to act differently.
To meet this difficulty, the author of this book has prepared a version of the story of Robinson Crusoe which contains a large proportion of the common words which offer difficulty in spelling. Unluckily it is not easy to produce classic English when one is writing under the necessity of using a vocabulary previously selected. However, if we concentrate our attention on the word-forms, we are not likely to be much injured by the ungraceful sentence-forms. This story is not long, but it should be dictated to every school class, beginning in the fourth grade, until every pupil can spell every word correctly. A high percentage is not enough, as in the case of some other studies. Any pupil who misses a single word in any exercise should be marked zero.
To tackle this challenge, the author of this book has created a version of the story of Robinson Crusoe that includes many common words that are difficult to spell. Unfortunately, it’s not easy to write classic English while sticking to a pre-selected vocabulary. However, if we focus on the forms of the words, we are unlikely to be too affected by the awkward sentence structures. This story isn’t long, but it should be read to every school class starting in the fourth grade until every student can spell every word correctly. Just achieving a high percentage isn’t sufficient, as is the case with some other subjects. Any student who misses even one word in any exercise should receive a zero.
But even if one can spell correctly every word in this story, he may still not be a good speller, for there are thousands of other words to be spelled, many of which are not and never will be found in any spelling-book. The chief object of a course of study in spelling is to acquire two habits, the habit of observing articulate sounds, and the habit of observing word-forms in reading.
But even if someone can spell every word in this story correctly, they might still not be a good speller, since there are thousands of other words to spell, many of which won’t be found in any spelling book. The main goal of a spelling curriculum is to develop two habits: the habit of listening to the sounds of words and the habit of noticing word shapes while reading.
1. Train the Ear. Until the habit of observing articulate sounds carefully has been acquired, the niceties of pronunciation are beyond the student's reach, and equally the niceties of spelling are beyond his reach, too. In ordinary speaking, many vowels and even some consonants are slurred and obscured. If the ear is not trained to exactness, this habit of slurring introduces many inaccuracies. Even in careful speaking, many obscure sounds are so nearly alike that only a finely trained ear can detect any difference. Who of us notices any difference between er in pardoner and or in honor? Careful speakers do not pass over the latter syllable quite so hastily as over the former, but only the most finely trained ear will detect any difference even in the pronunciation of the most finely trained voice.
1. Train the Ear. Until you develop the habit of carefully noticing articulated sounds, you'll struggle with the subtleties of pronunciation and spelling. In everyday speech, many vowels and even some consonants get slurried and blurred. If your ear isn’t trained for precision, this habit of slurring can lead to mistakes. Even when speaking carefully, many muted sounds are so similar that only a well-trained ear can pick up on the differences. Who among us can tell the difference between er in pardoner and or in honor? Careful speakers don’t rush through the latter syllable as quickly as the former, but only the most finely tuned ear will notice any variation, even in the pronunciation of the most skilled voice.
In the lower grades in the schools the ear may be trained by giving separate utterance to each sound in a given word, as f-r-e-n-d, friend, allowing each letter only its true value in the word. Still it may also be obtained by requiring careful and distinct pronunciation in reading, not, however, to the extent of exaggerating the value of obscure syllables, or painfully accentuating syllables naturally obscure.
In the early grades of school, students can train their ears by pronouncing each sound in a word separately, like f-r-e-n-d, friend, giving each letter its true value. Additionally, this can also be developed by emphasizing careful and clear pronunciation while reading, but without overemphasizing the value of less obvious syllables or awkwardly stressing syllables that are naturally subtle.
Adults (but seldom children) may train the ear by reading poetry aloud, always guarding against the sing-song style, but trying to harmonize nicely the sense and the rhythm. A trained ear is absolutely necessary to reading poetry well, and the constant reading aloud of poetry cannot but afford an admirable exercise.
Adults (but rarely children) can develop their listening skills by reading poetry out loud, always avoiding a sing-song tone and instead aiming to balance the meaning and the rhythm. A trained ear is essential for reading poetry effectively, and regularly reading poetry aloud provides excellent practice.
For children, the use of diacritical marks has little or no value, until the necessity arises for consulting the dictionary for pronunciation. They are but a mechanical system, and the system we commonly use is so devoid of permanence in its character that every dictionary has a different system. The one most common in the schools is that introduced by Webster; but if we would consult the Standard or the Century or the Oxford, we must learn our system all over again. To the child, any system is a clog and a hindrance, and quite useless in teaching him phonetic values, wherein the voice of the teacher is the true medium.
For kids, diacritical marks don't really matter until they need to use a dictionary for pronunciation. They're just a mechanical system, and the one we often use lacks consistency, so every dictionary has its own way of doing things. The system most common in schools was introduced by Webster, but if we look at the Standard, the Century, or the Oxford dictionaries, we have to learn a whole new system. For a child, any system feels like a burden and a barrier, and it doesn't help in teaching them phonetic sounds, where the teacher's voice is the real guide.
For older students, however, especially students at home, where no teacher is available, phonetic writing by means of diacritical marks has great value.* It is the only practicable way of representing the sounds of the voice on paper. When the student writes phonetically he is obliged to observe closely his own voice and the voices of others in ordinary speech, and so his ear is trained. It also takes the place of the voice for dictation in spelling tests by mail or through the medium of books.
For older students, especially those studying at home without a teacher, using phonetic writing with diacritical marks is very helpful.* It’s the only practical way to capture the sounds of speech in written form. When students write phonetically, they have to pay close attention to their own voices and those of others in everyday conversation, which helps train their listening skills. It also serves as a substitute for spoken dictation in spelling tests conducted by mail or through books.
*There should be no more marks than there are sounds. When two vowels have the same sound one should be written as a substitute for the other, as we have done in this book.
*There shouldn't be more marks than sounds. When two vowels sound the same, one should be written as a substitute for the other, just like we've done in this book.
2. Train the Eye. No doubt the most effective way of learning spelling is to train the eye carefully to observe the forms of the words we read in newspapers and in books. If this habit is formed, and the habit of general reading accompanies it, it is sufficient to make a nearly perfect speller. The great question is, how to acquire it.
2. Train the Eye. The best way to learn spelling is to train your eye to notice the shapes of the words we see in newspapers and books. If you develop this habit, along with regular reading, you'll become a nearly perfect speller. The big question is how to achieve it.
Of course in order to read we are obliged to observe the forms of words in a general way, and if this were all that is needed, we should all be good spellers if we were able to read fluently. But it is not all. The observation of the general form of a word is not the observation that teaches spelling. We must have the habit of observing every letter in every word, and this we are not likely to have unless we give special attention to acquiring it.
Of course, to read, we need to pay attention to the general structure of words. If that were all that mattered, we’d all be great spellers just because we can read fluently. But that’s not the case. Noticing the overall shape of a word doesn’t teach us how to spell. We need to develop the habit of focusing on every letter in each word, and that’s not something we’re likely to do unless we intentionally work on it.
The “visualization” method of teaching spelling now in use in the schools is along the line of training the eye to observe every letter in a word. It is good so far as it goes; but it does not go very far. The reason is that there is a limit to the powers of the memory, especially in the observation of arbitrary combinations of letters. What habits of visualization would enable the ordinary person to glance at such a combination as the following and write it ten minutes afterward with no aid but the single glance: hwgufhtbizwskoplmne? It would require some minutes' study to memorize such a combination, because there is nothing to aid us but the sheer succession of forms. The memory works by association. We build up a vast structure of knowledge, and each new fact or form must be as securely attached to this as the new wing of a building; and the more points at which attachment can be formed the more easily is the addition made.
The “visualization” method of teaching spelling used in schools today focuses on training the eye to notice every letter in a word. It’s useful to an extent, but it doesn’t go very deep. The issue is that there's a limit to how much we can remember, especially with random combinations of letters. What kind of visualization skills would allow the average person to look at a combination like this and then write it down ten minutes later with just that single glance: hwgufhtbizwskoplmne? It would take some time to memorize such a combination because there’s nothing to help us other than the direct sequence of shapes. Memory works through associations. We create a vast network of knowledge, and each new fact or form needs to be linked as firmly as a new wing of a building; the more connections we can form, the easier it is to make that addition.
The Mastery of Irregular Words.
Mastering Irregular Words.
Here, then, we have the real reason for a long study of principles, analogies, and classifications. They help us to remember. If I come to the word colonnade in reading, I observe at once that the double n is an irregularity. It catches my eye immediately. “Ah!” I reflect almost in the fraction of a second as I read in continuous flow, “here is another of those exceptions.” Building on what I already know perfectly well, I master this word with the very slightest effort. If we can build up a system which will serve the memory by way of association, so that the slight effort that can be given in ordinary reading will serve to fix a word more or less fully, we can soon acquire a marvellous power in the accurate spelling of words.
Here, then, we see the real reason for studying principles, analogies, and classifications at length. They help us remember. When I come across the word colonnade while reading, I immediately notice that the double n is an irregularity. It catches my eye right away. “Ah!” I think almost in an instant as I read smoothly, “here’s another one of those exceptions.” Building on what I already know well, I learn this word with very little effort. If we can create a system that aids memory through association, so that the slight effort we put into regular reading helps us remember a word more completely, we can quickly gain an amazing skill in accurately spelling words.
Again: In a spelling-book before me I see lists of words ending in ise, ize, and yse, all mixed together with no distinction. The arrangement suggests memorizing every word in the language ending with either of these terminations, and until we have memorized any particular word we have no means of knowing what the termination is. If, however, we are taught that ize is the common ending, that ise is the ending of only thirty-one words, and yse of only three or four, we reduce our task enormously and aid the memory in acquiring the few exceptions. When we come to franchise in reading we reflect rapidly, “Another of those verbs in ise!” or to paralyse, “One of those very few verbs in yse!” We give no thought whatever to all the verbs ending in ize, and so save so much energy for other acquirements.
Again: In a spelling book in front of me, I see lists of words ending in ise, ize, and yse, all mixed together without any distinction. The setup makes it seem like we need to memorize every word in the language that ends with any of these endings, and until we memorize a specific word, we have no way of knowing which ending it has. However, if we’re taught that ize is the most common ending, that ise is the ending for only thirty-one words, and yse is for just three or four, we make our task much easier and help our memory by focusing on the few exceptions. When we encounter franchise while reading, we quickly think, “Another one of those verbs ending in ise!” or for paralyse, “One of those very few verbs ending in yse!” We don’t think at all about all the verbs ending in ize, which saves us a lot of energy for other learning.
If we can say, “This is a violation of such and such a rule,” or “This is a strange irregularity,” or “This belongs to the class of words which substitutes ea for the long sound of e, or for the short sound of e.”
If we can say, “This breaks a certain rule,” or “This is an unusual irregularity,” or “This falls into the category of words that replace ea with the long sound of e, or the short sound of e.”
We have an association of the unknown with the known that is the most powerful possible aid to the memory. The system may fail in and of itself, but it more than serves its purpose thus indirectly in aiding the memory.
We connect the unknown with the known, which is the strongest possible support for our memory. The system may fail on its own, but it effectively serves its purpose by indirectly helping us remember.
We have not spoken of the association of word forms with sounds, the grouping of the letters of words into syllables, and the aid that a careful pronunciation gives the memory by way of association; for while this is the most powerful aid of all, it does not need explanation.
We haven't talked about how word forms connect with sounds, how letters in words group into syllables, and how clear pronunciation helps memory through association; since this is the strongest aid of all, it doesn't require explanation.
The Mastery of Regular Words.
Mastering Common Words.
We have spoken of the mastery of irregular words, and in the last paragraph but one we have referred to the aid which general principles give the memory by way of association in acquiring the exceptions to the rules. We will now consider the great class of words formed according to fixed principles.
We’ve talked about mastering irregular words, and in the previous paragraph, we mentioned how general principles help memory through association in learning the exceptions to the rules. Now, we’ll look at the major group of words that are created based on fixed principles.
Of course these laws and rules are little more than a string of analogies which we observe in our study of the language. The language was not and never will be built to fit these rules. The usage of the people is the only authority. Even clear logic goes down before usage. Languages grow like mushrooms, or lilies, or bears, or human bodies. Like these they have occult and profound laws which we can never hope to penetrate,―which are known only to the creator of all things existent. But as in botany and zoölogy and physiology we may observe and classify our observations, so we may observe a language, classify our observations, and create an empirical science of word-formation. Possibly in time it will become a science something more than empirical.
Of course, these laws and rules are just a series of comparisons that we see in our study of language. Language wasn't created to fit these rules and never will be. The way people use it is the only real authority. Even clear logic can be overshadowed by usage. Languages develop like mushrooms, lilies, bears, or human bodies. Like these, they have hidden and deep laws that we can never fully understand—laws known only to the creator of all things. But just as in botany, zoology, and physiology, we can observe and classify what we see, so we can observe a language, categorize our observations, and build an empirical science of word formation. Eventually, it might become a science that goes beyond just being empirical.
The laws we are able at this time to state with much definiteness are few (doubling consonants, dropping silent e's, changing y's to i's, accenting the penultimate and antepenultimate syllables, lengthening and shortening vowels). In addition we may classify exceptions, for the sole purpose of aiding the memory.
The rules we can clearly state right now are few (doubling consonants, dropping silent e's, changing y's to i's, stressing the second-to-last and third-to-last syllables, lengthening and shortening vowels). Additionally, we can categorize exceptions just to help with memorization.
Ignorance of these principles and classifications, and knowledge of the causes and sources of the irregularities, should be pronounced criminal in a teacher; and failure to teach them, more than criminal in a spelling-book. It is true that most spelling-books do give them in one form or another, but invariably without due emphasis or special drill, a lack which renders them worthless. Pupils and students should be drilled upon them till they are as familiar as the multiplication table.
Ignoring these principles and classifications, along with not understanding the causes and sources of irregularities, should be considered a serious fault in a teacher; and failing to teach them is even worse than a mistake in a spelling book. While most spelling books do include these principles in some way, they usually don't emphasize them or provide enough practice, making them ineffective. Students should be practiced on these concepts until they know them as well as the multiplication table.
We know how most persons stumble over the pronunciation of names in the Bible and in classic authors. They are equally nonplussed when called upon to write words with which they are no more familiar. They cannot even pronounce simple English names like Cody, which they call “Coddy,” in analogy with body, because they do not know that in a word of two syllables a single vowel followed by a single consonant is regularly long when accented. At the same time they will spell the word in all kinds of queer ways, which are in analogy only with exceptions, not with regular formations. Unless a person knows what the regular principles are, he cannot know how a word should regularly be spelled. A strange word is spelled quite regularly nine times out of ten, and if one does not know exactly how to spell a word, it is much more to his credit to spell it in a regular way than in an irregular way.
We know that a lot of people struggle with pronouncing names in the Bible and from classic authors. They’re equally thrown off when asked to write words they aren’t familiar with. They can’t even pronounce simple English names like Cody, which they say “Coddy,” based on body, because they don’t realize that in a two-syllable word, a single vowel followed by a single consonant is usually long when it’s stressed. At the same time, they will spell the word in all sorts of strange ways, which are only similar to exceptions, not regular patterns. Unless someone understands what the regular principles are, they won’t know how a word should typically be spelled. A weird word is spelled quite regularly nine times out of ten, and if someone doesn’t know exactly how to spell a word, it’s way better to spell it in a regular way than an irregular way.
The truth is, the only possible key we can have to those thousands of strange words and proper names which we meet only once or twice in a lifetime, is the system of principles formulated by philologists, if for no other reason, we should master it that we may come as near as possible to spelling proper names correctly.
The truth is, the only real way we can understand all those strange words and names that we encounter only once or twice in our lives is through the system of principles created by language scholars. If for no other reason, we should learn it so we can get as close as possible to spelling names correctly.
CHAPTER I.
LETTERS AND SOUNDS.
We must begin our study of the English language with the elementary sounds and the letters which represent them.
We should start our study of the English language with the basic sounds and the letters that represent them.
Name the first letter of the alphabet——a. The mouth is open and the sound may be prolonged indefinitely. It is a full, clear sound, an unobstructed vibration of the vocal chords.
Name the first letter of the alphabet——a. The mouth is open and the sound can be stretched out forever. It’s a rich, clear sound, a free vibration of the vocal cords.
Now name the second letter of the alphabet——b. You say bee or buh. You cannot prolong the sound. In order to give the real sound of b you have to associate it with some other sound, as that of e or u. In other words, b is in the nature of an obstruction of sound, or a modification of sound, rather than a simple elementary sound in itself. There is indeed a slight sound in the throat, but it is a closed sound and cannot be prolonged. In the case of p, which is similar to b, there is no sound from the throat.
Now name the second letter of the alphabet—b. You say bee or buh. You can't stretch the sound. To get the true sound of b, you need to connect it with another sound, like e or u. In other words, b acts like a blockage of sound, or a change in sound, rather than a simple basic sound by itself. There is a slight sound in the throat, but it's a closed sound and can’t be extended. With p, which is similar to b, there’s no sound from the throat.
So we see that there are two classes of sounds (represented by two classes of letters), those which are full and open tones from the vocal chords, pronounced with the mouth open, and capable of being prolonged indefinitely; and those which are in the nature of modifications of these open sounds, pronounced with or without the help of the voice, and incapable of being prolonged. The first class of sounds is called vowel sounds, the second, consonant sounds. Of the twenty-six letters of the alphabet, a, e, i, o, and u (sometimes y and w) represent vowel sounds and are called vowels; and the remainder represent consonant sounds, and are called consonants.
So we can see that there are two types of sounds (represented by two types of letters): those that are full, open tones made by the vocal cords, pronounced with the mouth open, and can be held out indefinitely; and those that modify these open sounds, pronounced with or without using the voice, and cannot be held out. The first type of sounds is called vowel sounds, and the second type is called consonant sounds. Of the twenty-six letters in the alphabet, a, e, i, o, and u (sometimes y and w) represent vowel sounds and are called vowels; the rest represent consonant sounds and are called consonants.
A syllable is an elementary sound, or a combination of elementary sounds, which can be given easy and distinct utterance at one effort. Any vowel may form a syllable by itself, but as we have seen that a consonant must be united with a vowel for its perfect utterance, it follows that every syllable must contain a vowel sound, even if it also contains consonant sounds. With that vowel sound one or more consonants may be united; but the ways in which consonants may combine with a vowel to form a syllable are limited. In general we may place any consonant before and any consonant after the vowel in the same syllable: but y for instance, can be given a consonant sound only at the beginning of a syllable, as in yet; at the end of a syllable y becomes a vowel sound, as in they or only. In the syllable twelfths we find seven consonant sounds; but if these same letters were arranged in almost any other way they could not be pronounced as one syllable―as for instance wtelthfs.
A syllable is a basic sound, or a combination of basic sounds, that can be easily and clearly spoken in one go. Any vowel can stand alone as a syllable, but as we've seen, a consonant needs to be paired with a vowel for it to be pronounced correctly. This means that every syllable must have a vowel sound, even if it also includes consonant sounds. One or more consonants can be combined with that vowel sound, but the ways consonants can come together with a vowel to make a syllable are limited. Generally, you can place any consonant before and any consonant after the vowel in the same syllable; however, y only makes a consonant sound at the start of a syllable, as in yet; at the end of a syllable, y turns into a vowel sound, like in they or only. In the syllable twelfths, there are seven consonant sounds; but if you rearranged those same letters in almost any other way, they couldn’t be pronounced as one syllable—like wtelthfs.
A word consists of one or more syllables to which some definite meaning is attached.
A word is made up of one or more syllables that have a specific meaning.
The difficulties of spelling and pronunciation arise largely from the fact that in English twenty-six letters must do duty for some forty-two sounds, and even then several of the letters are unnecessary, as for instance c, which has either the sound of s or of k; x, which has the sound either of ks, gs, or z; q, which in the combination qu has the sound of kw. All the vowels represent from two to seven sounds each, and some of the consonants interchange with each other.
The challenges of spelling and pronunciation mostly come from the fact that in English, twenty-six letters have to represent about forty-two sounds. Many of these letters are redundant, like c, which can sound like either s or k; x, which can sound like ks, gs, or z; and q, which in the combination qu sounds like kw. Each vowel can represent between two and seven different sounds, and some consonants can swap sounds with each other.
The Sounds of the Vowels.―(1) Each of the vowels has what is called a long sound and a short sound. It is important that these two sets of sounds be fixed clearly in the mind, as several necessary rules of spelling depend upon them. In studying the following table, note that the long sound is marked by a straight line over the letter, and the short sound by a curve.
The Sounds of the Vowels.―(1) Each vowel has what's known as a long sound and a short sound. It's essential to clearly distinguish between these two sets of sounds, as several important spelling rules rely on them. When studying the table below, remember that the long sound is indicated by a straight line over the letter, while the short sound is shown with a curve.
Long Short āte ăt gāve măn nāme băg
Long Short ate at gave man name bag
thēse pĕt mē tĕn (com)plēte brĕd
thēse pĕt mē tĕn (com)plēte brĕd
kīte sĭt
rīce mĭll
līme rĭp
kite sit
rice mill
lime rip
nōte nŏt
rōde rŏd
sōle Tŏm
nōte nŏt
rōde rŏd
sōle Tom
cūre bŭt cūte rŭn (a)būse crŭst
cure but cute run (a)buse crust
scұthe (like)lў
scuthe (like)l
If we observe the foregoing list of words we shall see that each of the words containing a long vowel followed by a single consonant sound ends in silent e. After the short vowels there is no silent e. In each case in which we have the silent e there is a single long vowel followed by a single consonant, or two consonants combining to form a single sound, as th in scythe. Such words as roll, toll, etc., ending in double l have no silent e though the vowel is long; and such words as great, meet, pail, etc., in which two vowels combine with the sound of one, take no silent e at the end. We shall consider these exceptions more fully later; but a single long vowel followed by a single consonant always takes silent e at the end. As carefully stated in this way, the rule has no exceptions. The reverse, however, is not always true, for a few words containing a short vowel followed by a single consonant do take silent e; but there are very few of them. The principal are have, give, {(I)} live, love, shove, dove, above; also none, some, come, and some words in three or more syllables, such as domicile.
If we look at the list of words above, we’ll notice that every word with a long vowel followed by a single consonant sound ends with a silent e. After short vowels, there’s no silent e. Whenever we have a silent e, there’s a single long vowel followed by a single consonant or two consonants that make a single sound, like th in scythe. Words like roll and toll that end in double l don’t have a silent e, even though the vowel is long; and words like great, meet, pail, etc., that combine two vowels to create one sound, also don’t take a silent e at the end. We’ll look at these exceptions in more detail later, but a single long vowel followed by a single consonant always takes a silent e at the end. When stated this way, the rule has no exceptions. However, the opposite isn’t always true, as a few words with a short vowel followed by a single consonant do have a silent e; but there are very few of them. The main ones are have, give, {(I)} live, love, shove, dove, above; as well as none, some, come, and some words with three or more syllables, like domicile.
2. Beside the long and short sounds of the vowels there are several other vowel sounds.
2. In addition to the long and short sounds of the vowels, there are several other vowel sounds.
A has two other distinct sounds:
A has two other unique sounds:
̣ạ broad, like aw, as in all, talk, etc.
broad, like aw, as in all, talk, etc.
ä Italian, like ah, as in far, father, etc.
ä Italian, like ah, as in far, father, etc.
Double o has two sounds different from long or short o alone:
Double o has two sounds that are different from a long or short o on its own:
long ōō as in room, soon, mood, etc.
long ōō as in room, soon, mood, etc.
short ŏŏ, as in good, took, wood, etc.
short ŏŏ, as in good, took, wood, etc.
Ow has a sound of its own, as in how, crowd, allow, etc.; and ou sometimes has the same sound, as in loud, rout, bough, etc.
Ow has its own sound, like in how, crowd, allow, etc.; and ou sometimes has the same sound, like in loud, rout, bough, etc.
(Ow and ou are also sometimes sounded like long o, as in own, crow, pour, etc., and sometimes have still other sounds, as ou in bought).
(Ow and ou are also sometimes pronounced like a long o, as in own, crow, pour, etc., and sometimes have additional sounds, like ou in bought).
Oi and oy have a distinct sound of their own, as in oil, toil, oyster, void, boy, employ, etc.
Oi and oy have their own unique sound, as in oil, toil, oyster, void, boy, employ, etc.
Ow and oi are called proper diphthongs, as the two vowels combine to produce a sound different from either, while such combinations as ei, ea, ai, etc., are called improper diphthongs (or digraphs), because they have the sound of one or other of the simple vowels.
Ow and oi are known as proper diphthongs because the two vowels work together to create a sound that's different from either one, while combinations like ei, ea, ai, etc., are considered improper diphthongs (or digraphs), since they sound like one of the simple vowels.
3. In the preceding paragraphs we have given all the distinct vowel sounds of the language, though many of them are slightly modified in certain combinations. But in many cases one vowel will be given the sound of another vowel, and two or more vowels will combine with a variety of sounds. These irregularities occur chiefly in a few hundred common words, and cause the main difficulties of spelling the English language. The following are the leading substitutes:
3. In the previous paragraphs, we've listed all the different vowel sounds in the language, although many are slightly changed in certain combinations. However, in many instances, one vowel will take on the sound of another, and two or more vowels can combine to create various sounds. These irregularities mostly happen in a few hundred common words and are the primary challenges of spelling in English. The following are the main substitutes:
ew with the sound of u long, as in few, chew, etc. (perhaps this may be considered a proper diphthong);
ew with the sound of u long, as in few, chew, etc. (this may be seen as a proper diphthong);
e (ê, é) with the sound of a long, as in fête, abbé, and all foreign words written with an accent, especially French words;
e (ê, é) pronounced like the long a sound, as in fête, abbé, and all foreign words spelled with an accent, particularly French words;
i with the sound of e long, as in machine, and nearly all French and other foreign words;
i with the long sound of e, like in machine, and almost all French and other foreign words;
o has the sound of double o long in tomb, womb, prove, move, etc., and of double o short in wolf, women, etc.;
o has the sound of long double o in tomb, womb, prove, move, etc., and of short double o in wolf, women, etc.;
o also has the sound of u short in above, love, some, done, etc.;
o also has the sound of u short in above, love, some, done, etc.;
u has the sound of double o long after r, as in rude, rule;
u has the sound of double o long after r, as in rude, rule;
it also has the sound of double o short in put, pull, bull, sure, etc.;
it also has the sound of double o short in put, pull, bull, sure, etc.;
ea has the sound of a long, as in great; of e long, as in heat; of e short, as in head; of a Italian (ah), as in heart, hearth, etc.;
ea has the sound of a long, as in great; of e long, as in heat; of e short, as in head; of a Italian (ah), as in heart, hearth, etc.;
ei has the sound of e long, as in receive; of a long, as in freight, weight; sometimes of i long, as in either and neither, pronounced with either the sound of e long or i long, the latter being the English usage;
ei sounds like the long e in receive; the long a in freight and weight; and sometimes like the long i in either and neither, pronounced with either the long e or long i sound, with the latter being the English usage;
ie has the sound of i long, as in lie, and of e long, as in belief, and of i short, as in sieve;
ie has the sound of i long, as in lie, and of e long, as in belief, and of i short, as in sieve;
ai has the sound of a long, as in laid, bail, train, etc., and of a short, as in plaid;
ai sounds like a long, as in laid, bail, train, etc., and like a short, as in plaid;
ay has the sound of a long, as in play, betray, say, etc.;
ay has the sound of a long, as in play, betray, say, etc.;
oa has the sound of o long, as in moan, foam, coarse, etc.
oa has the sound of o long, as in moan, foam, coarse, etc.
There are also many peculiar and occasional substitutions of sounds as in any and many (a as ĕ), women (o as ĭ), busy (u as ĭ), said (ai as ĕ), people (eo as ē), build (u as ĭ), gauge (au as ā), what (a as ŏ), etc.
There are also many strange and occasional sound substitutions, like in any and many (a as ĕ), women (o as ĭ), busy (u as ĭ), said (ai as ĕ), people (eo as ē), build (u as ĭ), gauge (au as ā), what (a as ŏ), and so on.
When any of these combinations are to be pronounced as separate vowels, in two syllables, two dots should be placed over the second, as in naïve.
When any of these combinations are pronounced as separate vowels, in two syllables, two dots should be placed over the second, as in naïve.
4. The chief modifications of the elementary sounds are the following:
4. The main changes to the basic sounds are as follows:
before r each of the vowels e, i, o, u, and y has almost the same sound (marked like the Spanish ñ) as in her, birth, honor, burr, and myrtle; o before r sometimes has the sound of aw, as in or, for, etc.;
before r each of the vowels e, i, o, u, and y has almost the same sound (marked like the Spanish ñ) as in her, birth, honor, burr, and myrtle; o before r sometimes sounds like aw, as in or, for, etc.;
in unaccented syllables, each of the long vowels has a slightly shortened sound, as in f_a_tality, n_e_gotiate, int_o_nation, ref_u_tation, indicated by a dot above the sign for the long sound; (in a few words, such as d_i_gress, the sound is not shortened, however);
in unstressed syllables, each of the long vowels has a slightly shortened sound, like in f_a_tality, n_e_gotiate, int_o_nation, ref_u_tation, marked by a dot above the symbol for the long sound; (in a few words, like d_i_gress, the sound isn't shortened, though);
long a (â) is slightly modified in such words as care, fare, bare, etc., while e has the same sound in words like there, their, and where; (New Englan{d}פּ people give a the short sound in such words as care, etc., and pronounce there and where with the short sound of a, while their is pronounced with the short sound of e: this is not the best usage, however);
long a (â) is slightly changed in words like care, fare, bare, etc., while e has the same sound in words like there, their, and where; (New England people give a the short sound in words like care, etc., and pronounce there and where with the short sound of a, while their is pronounced with the short sound of e: this is not the best usage, however);
in pass, class, command, laugh, etc., we have a sound of a between Italian a and short a (indicated by a single dot over the a), though most Americans pronounce it as short, and most English give the Italian sound: the correct pronunciation is between these two.
in pass, class, command, laugh, etc., we have a sound of a that falls between Italian a and short a (indicated by a single dot over the a), though most Americans pronounce it as short, and most English speakers use the Italian sound: the correct pronunciation is somewhere in between these two.
The Sounds of the Consonants. We have already seen that there are two
classes of consonant sounds, those which have a voice sound, as b,
called sonant, and those which are mere breath sounds, like p,
called surds or aspirates. The chief difference between b and p
is that one has the voice sound and the other has not. Most of the
other consonants also stand in pairs. We may say that the sonant
consonant and its corresponding surd are the hard and soft forms of
the same sound. The following table contains also simple consonant
sounds represented by two letters:
Sonant Surd
b p
d t
v f
g (hard) k
j ch
z s
th (in thine) th (in thin)
zh (or z as in azure) sh
w
y
l
m
n
r h
The Sounds of the Consonants. We've already seen that there are two
types of consonant sounds: those that have a voice sound, like b,
called sonant, and those that are just breath sounds, like p,
called surds or aspirates. The main difference between b and p
is that one has a voice sound and the other doesn’t. Most of the
other consonants also come in pairs. We can say that the sonant
consonant and its corresponding surd are the hard and soft forms of
the same sound. The following table also includes simple consonant
sounds represented by two letters:
Sonant Surd
b p
d t
v f
g (hard) k
j ch
z s
th (in thine) th (in thin)
zh (or z as in azure) sh
w
y
l
m
n
r h
If we go down this list from the top to the bottom, we see that b is the most closed sound, while h is the most slight and open, and the others are graded in between (though not precisely as arranged above). These distinctions are important, because in making combinations of consonants in the same syllable or in successive syllables we cannot pass abruptly from a closed sound to an open sound, or the reverse, nor from a surd sound to a sonant, or the reverse. L, m, n, and r are called liquids, and easily combine with other consonants; and so do the sibilants (s, z, etc.). In the growth of the language, many changes have been made in letters to secure harmony of sound (as changing b to p in sub-port——support, and s, to f in differ―from dis and fero). Some combinations are not possible of pronunciation, others are not natural or easy; and hence the alterations. The student of the language must know how words are built; and then when he comes to a strange word he can reconstruct it for himself. While the short, common words may be irregular, the long, strange words are almost always formed quite regularly.
If we go down this list from top to bottom, we see that b is the most closed sound, while h is the most light and open, with the others falling somewhere in between (although not exactly as listed above). These distinctions matter because when creating combinations of consonants within the same syllable or in adjacent syllables, we can't suddenly switch from a closed sound to an open sound, or the other way around, nor from a voiceless sound to a voiced sound or vice versa. L, m, n, and r are known as liquids and easily combine with other consonants; the sibilants (s, z, etc.) do too. As the language has developed, many changes have been made to letters to ensure harmony of sound (for example, changing b to p in sub-port——support, and s to f in differ—from dis and fero). Some combinations are impossible to pronounce, while others are not natural or easy, which leads to these changes. A language student needs to understand how words are constructed; then, when they encounter an unfamiliar word, they can figure it out for themselves. While short, common words may be irregular, long, unfamiliar words are almost always formed in a regular way.
Most of the sonants have but one sound, and none of them has more than three sounds. The most important variations are as follows:
Most of the consonants have just one sound, and none of them has more than three sounds. The main variations are as follows:
C and G have each a soft sound and a hard sound. The soft sound of c is the same as s, and the hard sound the same as k. The soft sound of g is the same as j, and the hard sound is the true sound of g as heard in gone, bug, struggle.
C and G each have a soft sound and a hard sound. The soft sound of c is like s, and the hard sound is like k. The soft sound of g is like j, and the hard sound is the regular sound of g as heard in gone, bug, struggle.
Important Rule. C and G are soft before e, i, and y, and hard before all the other vowels, before all the other consonants, and at the end of words.
Important Rule. C and G are pronounced softly before e, i, and y, and hard before all the other vowels, before all the other consonants, and at the end of words.
The chief exceptions to this rule are a few common words in which g is hard before e or i. They include―give, get, gill, gimlet, girl, gibberish, gelding, gerrymander, gewgaw, geyser, giddy, gibbon, gift, gig, giggle, gild, gimp, gingham, gird, girt, girth, eager, and begin. G is soft before a consonant in judgment{,} lodgment, acknowledgment, etc. Also in a few words from foreign languages c is soft before other vowels, though in such cases it should always be written with a cedilla (ç).
The main exceptions to this rule are a few common words where g is hard before e or i. They include—give, get, gill, gimlet, girl, gibberish, gelding, gerrymander, gewgaw, geyser, giddy, gibbon, gift, gig, giggle, gild, gimp, gingham, gird, girt, girth, eager, and begin. G is soft before a consonant in judgment{,} lodgment, acknowledgment, etc. Also, in a few words from foreign languages, c is soft before other vowels, but in these cases, it should always be written with a cedilla (ç).
N when marked ñ in words from the Spanish language is pronounced n-y (cañon like canyon).
N when marked ñ in words from the Spanish language is pronounced n-y (cañon like canyon).
Ng has a peculiar nasal sound of its own, as heard in the syllable ing.
Ng has its own unique nasal sound, as heard in the syllable ing.
N alone also has the sound of ng sometimes before g and k, as in angle, ankle, single, etc. (pronounced ang-gle, ang-kle, sing-gle).
N also sometimes sounds like ng before g and k, as in angle, ankle, single, etc. (pronounced ang-gle, ang-kle, sing-gle).
Ph has the sound of f, as in prophet.
Ph makes the sound of f, like in prophet.
Th has two sounds, a hard sound as in the, than, bathe, scythe, etc., and a soft sound as in thin, kith, bath, Smith, etc. Contrast breathe and breath, lath and lathe; and bath and baths, lath and laths, etc.
Th has two sounds: a hard sound as in the, than, bathe, scythe, etc., and a soft sound as in thin, kith, bath, Smith, etc. Contrast breathe and breath, lath and lathe; and bath and baths, lath and laths, etc.
S has two sounds, one its own sound, as in sin, kiss, fist (the same as c in lace, rice, etc.), and the sound of z, as in rise (contrast with rice), is, baths, men's, etc.
S has two sounds: one is its own sound, like in sin, kiss, fist (the same as c in lace, rice, etc.), and the other is the sound of z, as in rise (contrasted with rice), is, baths, men's, etc.
X has two common sounds, one that of ks as in box, six, etc., and the other the sound of gs, as in exact, exaggerate (by the way, the first g in this word is silent). At the beginning of a word x has the sound of z as in Xerxes.
X has two common sounds: one like ks as in box, six, and the other like gs as in exact, exaggerate (by the way, the first g in this word is silent). At the start of a word, x sounds like z, as in Xerxes.
Ch has three sounds, as heard first in child, second in machine, and third in character. The first is peculiar to itself, the second is that of sh, and the third that of k.
Ch has three sounds: the first is in child, the second is in machine, and the third is in character. The first sound is unique to it, the second is like sh, and the third is like k.
The sound of sh is variously represented:
The sound of sh is represented in different ways:
by sh{,} as in share, shift, shirt, etc.
by sh as in share, shift, shirt, etc.
by ti, as in condition, mention, sanction, etc.
by ti, as in condition, mention, sanction, etc.
by si, as in tension, suspension, extension, etc.
by si, like in tension, suspension, extension, etc.
by ci, as in suspicion. (Also, crucifixion.)
by ci, as in suspicion. (Also, crucifixion.)
The kindred sound of zh is represented by z as in azure, and s as in pleasure, and by some combinations.
The similar sound of zh is shown by z as in azure, and s as in pleasure, along with some combinations.
Y is always a consonant at the beginning of a word when followed by a vowel, as in yet, year, yell, etc.; but if followed by a consonant it is a vowel, as in Ypsilanti. At the end of a word it is {al}ways a vowel, as in all words ending in the syllable ly.
Y is always a consonant at the start of a word when followed by a vowel, like in yet, year, yell, etc.; but if it’s followed by a consonant, it acts as a vowel, like in Ypsilanti. At the end of a word, it’s {al}ways a vowel, as seen in all words that end with the syllable ly.
Exercises. It is very important that the student should master the sounds of the language and the symbols for them, or the diacritical marks, for several reasons:
Exercises. It is very important for students to master the sounds of the language and the symbols for them, or the diacritical marks, for several reasons:
First, because it is impossible to find out the true pronunciation of a word from the dictionary unless one clearly understands the meaning of the principal marks;
First, because you can't determine the true pronunciation of a word from the dictionary unless you clearly understand the meaning of the main symbols;
Second, because one of the essentials in accurate pronunciation and good spelling is the habit of analyzing the sounds which compose words, and training the ear to detect slight variations;
Second, because one of the key elements in accurate pronunciation and good spelling is the habit of breaking down the sounds that make up words and training the ear to notice subtle differences;
Third, because a thorough knowledge of the sounds and their natural symbols is the first step toward a study of the principles governing word formation, or spelling and pronunciation.
Third, having a solid understanding of the sounds and their natural symbols is the first step in studying the principles that govern how words are formed, including spelling and pronunciation.
For purposes of instruction through correspondence or by means of a textbook, the diacritical marks representing distinct sounds of the language afford a substitute for the voice in dictation and similar exercises, and hence such work requires a mastery of what might at first sight seem a purely mechanical and useless system.
For teaching through correspondence or using a textbook, the diacritical marks that indicate different sounds in the language serve as a replacement for the voice in dictation and similar exercises. Therefore, this work demands a mastery of what may initially appear to be a purely mechanical and pointless system.
One of the best exercises for the mastery of this system is to open the unabridged dictionary at any point and copy out lists of words, writing the words as they ordinarily appear in one column, and in an adjoining column the phonetic form of the word. When the list is complete, cover one column and reproduce the other from an application of the principles that have been learned. After a few days, reproduce the phonetic forms from the words as ordinarily written, and again the ordinary word from the phonetic form. Avoid memorizing as much as possible, but work solely by the application of principles. Never write down a phonetic form without fully understanding its meaning in every detail. A key to the various marks will be found at the bottom of every page of the dictionary, and the student should refer to this frequently. In the front part of the dictionary there will also be found an explanation of all possible sounds that any letter may have; and every sound that any letter may have may be indicated by a peculiar mark, so that since several letters may represent the same sound there are a variety of symbols for the same sound. For the purposes of this book it has seemed best to offer only one symbol for each sound, and that symbol the one most frequently used. For that reason the following example will not correspond precisely with the forms given in the dictionary, but a study of the differences will afford a valuable exercise.
One of the best exercises for mastering this system is to open the unabridged dictionary to any page and copy out lists of words. Write the words as they normally appear in one column, and in the next column, write their phonetic form. Once the list is complete, cover one column and reproduce the other based on the principles you’ve learned. After a few days, try to reproduce the phonetic forms from the words as they’re typically written, and again try to get the ordinary word from the phonetic form. Avoid memorizing as much as possible; focus solely on applying the principles. Never write down a phonetic form without fully understanding its meaning in every detail. A key to the various marks will be found at the bottom of every page in the dictionary, and you should refer to this frequently. In the front of the dictionary, there’s also an explanation of all possible sounds that any letter can have, and each sound a letter can make is marked with a unique symbol. Since several letters can represent the same sound, there are various symbols for the same sound. For the purposes of this book, it’s best to provide only one symbol for each sound, specifically the one most commonly used. Because of this, the following example may not match exactly with the forms given in the dictionary, but studying the differences will provide a valuable exercise.
Illustration.*
Illustration.
*In this exercise, vowels before r marked in webster with the double curve used over the Spanish n, are left unmarked. Double o with the short sound is also left unmarked.
*In this exercise, vowels before r marked in Webster with the double curve used over the Spanish n are left unmarked. Double o with the short sound is also left unmarked.*
The first place that I can well remember was a large,
Thĕ first plās thăt I kan wĕl rēmĕmber woz ā lärj,
The first place that I can well remember was a large,
pleasant meadow with a pond of clear water in it. Some plĕs′nt mĕdō with ā pŏnd ŏv klēr wŏter in it. Sŭm
pleasant meadow with a pond of clear water in it. Some
shady trees leaned over it, and rushes and water-lilies shādĭ trēz lēnd ōver it, ănd rŭshēz ănd wŏter-lĭliz
shady trees leaned over it, and rushes and water-lilies
grew at the deep end. Over the hedge on one side we looked grū ăt thē dēp ĕnd. Ōver thē hĕj ŏn wŭn sīd wē lookt
grew at the deep end. Over the hedge on one side we looked
into a plowed field, and on the other we looked over a intōō ā plowd fēld{,} ănd ŏn thē ŏther wē lookt ŏver ā
into a plowed field, and on the other we looked over a
gate at our master's house, which stood by the roadside. gāt ăt owr măster'z hows, hwich stood bī thē rōdsīd.
gate at our master's house, which stood by the roadside.
At the top of the meadow was a grove of fir-trees, and at
At thē top ŏv the mēdō wŏz ā grōv ŏv fir-trēz, ănd ăt
At the top of the meadow was a grove of fir trees, and at
the bottom a running brook overhung by a steep bank. thē bŏt′m a rŭning brook ōverhŭng bī a stēp bănk.
the bottom a running brook overhung by a steep bank. thē bŏt′m a rŭning brook ōverhŭng bī a stēp bănk.
Whilst I was young I lived upon my mother's milk, as I could
Hwilst I wŏz yŭng I livd ŭpŏn mī mŭther'z milk, ăz I kood
While I was young I lived on my mother's milk, as I could
not eat grass. In the daytime I ran by her side, and at night nŏt ēt grăs. In thē dātīm I răn bī her sīd, ănd ăt nīt
not eat grass. In the daytime I ran by her side, and at night
I lay down close by her. When it was hot we used to stand
I lā down klōs bī her. Hwĕn it wŏz hŏt wē ūzd tōō stănd
I lay down close by her. When it was hot we used to stand
by the pond in the shade of the trees, and when it was cold bī thē pŏnd in thē shād ŏv thē trēz, ănd hwēn it wŏz kōld
by the pond in the shade of the trees, and when it was cold
we had a nice, warm shed near the grove. wē hăd ā nīs, wawrm shĕd nēr thē grōv.
we had a nice, warm shed near the grove. wē hăd ā nīs, wawrm shĕd nēr thē grōv.
Note. In Webster's dictionary letters which are unmarked have an obscure sound often not unlike uh, or are silent, and letters printed in italics are nearly elided, so very slight is the sound they have if it can be said to exist at all. In the illustration above, all very obscure sounds have been replaced by the apostrophe, while no distinction has been made between short vowels in accented and unaccented syllables.
Note. In Webster's dictionary, unmarked letters have a vague sound, often resembling "uh," or are silent, while letters printed in italics are almost silent, having such a subtle sound that it may hardly be said to exist at all. In the illustration above, all very faint sounds have been replaced by an apostrophe, and no distinction has been made between short vowels in stressed and unstressed syllables.
Studies from the Dictionary.
Dictionary studies.
The following are taken from Webster's Dictionary:
The following are from Webster's Dictionary:
Ab-dŏm′-i-noŭs: The a in ab is only a little shorter than a in at, and the i is short being unaccented, while the o is silent, the syllable having the sound nŭs as indicated by the mark over the u.
Ab-dŏm′-i-noŭs: The a in ab is just a bit shorter than a in at, and the i is short because it's unaccented, while the o is silent, with the syllable sounding like nŭs as shown by the mark over the u.
Lĕss′en, (lĕs′n), lĕs′son, (lĕs′sn), lĕss′er, lĕs′sor: Each of these words has two distinct syllables, though there is no recognizable vowel sound in the last syllables of the first two. This eliding of the vowel is shown by printing the e and the o of the final syllables in italics. In the last two words the vowels of the final syllables are not marked, but have nearly the sound they would have if marked in the usual way for e and o before r. As the syllables are not accented the vowel sound is slightly obscured. Or in lessor has the sound of the word or (nearly), not the sound of or in honor, which will be found re-spelled (ŏn′ur). It will be noted that the double s is divided in two of the words and not in the other two. In lesser and lessen all possible stress is placed on the first syllables, since the terminations have the least possible value in speaking; but in lesson and lessor we put a little more stress on the final syllables, due to the greater dignity of the letter o, and this draws over a part of the s sound.
Lessen, (les'n), lesson, (les'n), lesser, lessor: Each of these words has two distinct syllables, although there’s no clear vowel sound in the last syllables of the first two. This skipping of the vowel is indicated by printing the e and the o of the final syllables in italics. In the last two words, the vowels in the final syllables aren’t marked, but they sound almost how they would if they were marked in the usual way for e and o before r. Since the syllables aren’t stressed, the vowel sound is slightly blurred. In lessor, it sounds a lot like the word or (almost), not the sound of or in honor, which will be re-spelled (ŏn′ur). It should be noted that the double s is separated in two of the words and not in the other two. In lesser and lessen, all possible emphasis is placed on the first syllables since the endings have the least value in spoken language; but in lesson and lessor, we place a bit more emphasis on the final syllables because of the greater importance of the letter o, which pulls over some of the s sound.
Hon′-ey▬cōmb (hŭn′y–kōm): The heavy hyphen indicates that this is a compound word and the hyphen must always be written. The hyphens printed lightly in the dictionary merely serve to separate the syllables and show how a word may be divided at the end of a line. The student will also note that the o in -comb has its full long value instead of being slighted. This slight added stress on the o is the way we have in speaking of indicating that -comb was once a word by itself, with an accent of its own.
Hon′-ey▬cōmb (hŭn′y–kōm): The heavy hyphen shows that this is a compound word and it should always be written that way. The lighter hyphens in the dictionary just separate the syllables and indicate how a word can be split at the end of a line. Students will also notice that the o in -comb is pronounced with its full long value instead of being shortened. This extra emphasis on the o suggests that -comb was once a standalone word, with its own accent.
Exercise. Select other words from the dictionary, and analyse as we have done above, giving some explanation for every peculiarity found in the printing and marks. Continue this until there is no doubt or hesitation in regard to the meaning of any mark that may be found.
Exercise. Choose different words from the dictionary and analyze them as we did above, providing explanations for every unique aspect found in the printing and markings. Keep this up until there is no uncertainty or hesitation about the meaning of any mark that may be present.
CHAPTER II.
WORD-BUILDING.
English speaking peoples have been inclined to exaggerate the irregularities of the English word-formation. The fact is, only a small number of common words and roots are irregular in formation, while fully nine tenths of all the words in the language are formed according to regular principles, or are regularly derived from the small number of irregular words. We use the irregular words so much more frequently that they do indeed constitute the greater part of our speech, but it is very necessary that we should master the regular principles of word-building, since they give us a key to the less frequently used, but far more numerous, class which fills the dictionary, teaching us both the spelling of words of which we know the sound, and the pronunciation of words which we meet for the first time in reading.
English speakers tend to exaggerate the irregularities in English word formation. In reality, only a small number of common words and roots have irregular formations, while about ninety percent of all words in the language are created using regular principles or are regularly derived from that small group of irregular words. We use the irregular words so much more often that they make up a significant part of our speech, but it’s essential to understand the regular principles of word formation, as they provide us with a key to the much larger group that fills the dictionary, helping us with both the spelling of words we recognize by sound and the pronunciation of words we encounter for the first time while reading.
Accent. In English, accent is an essential part of every word. It is something of an art to learn to throw it on to any syllable we choose, for unless we are able to do this we cannot get the true pronunciation of a word from the dictionary and we are helpless when we are called on to pronounce a word we have never heard.
Accent. In English, accent is a crucial part of every word. It takes some skill to apply it to any syllable we choose, because if we can't do this, we won't get the correct pronunciation of a word from the dictionary, and we'll struggle when we're asked to pronounce a word we've never encountered before.
Perhaps the best way to learn the art of throwing accent is by comparing words in which we are in the habit of shifting the accent to one syllable or another according to the meaning, as for instance the following:
Perhaps the best way to learn the skill of shifting accent is by comparing words where we usually move the accent to different syllables depending on the meaning, as in the following examples:
1. Accent.
Accent.
a. What ac′cent has this word?
What accent does this word have?
b. With what accent′uation do you accent′ this word?
b. With what accent do you stress this word?
2. Concert.
2. Live show.
a. Did you go to the con′cert last night?
a. Did you go to the concert last night?
b. By concert′ed action we can do anything.
b. By coordinated action we can do anything.
3. Contrast.
Contrast.
{a}Ъ. What a con′trast between the rich man and the poor man!
{a}Ъ. What a contrast between the rich man and the poor man!
b. Contrast′ good with bad, black with white, greatness with littleness.
b. Contrast good with bad, black with white, greatness with smallness.
4. Permit.
Permit.
a. I have a building_-per′mit_.
I have a building permit.
b. My mother will not permit′ me to go.
b. My mom won't let me go.
5. Present.
5. Gift.
a. He received a beautiful Christmas pres′ent.
a. He received a beautiful Christmas present.
b. She was present′ed at court.
b. She was presented at court.
6. Prefix.
6. Prefix.
a. Sub is a common pre′fix.
Sub is a common prefix.
b. Prefix′ sub to port and you get support.
b. Prefix′ sub to port and you get support.
7. Compound.
Compound.
a. He can compound′ medicine like a druggist.
a. He can compound medicine like a pharmacist.
b. Nitroglycerine is a dangerous com′pound.
b. Nitroglycerin is a dangerous compound.
As a further illustration, read the following stanza of poetry, especially accenting the syllables as marked:
As another example, read the following stanza of poetry, especially emphasizing the syllables as indicated:
Tell′ me not′ in mourn′ful num′bers,
“Life′ is but′ an emp′ty dream′!”
For′ the soul′ is dead′ that slum′bers,
And′ things are′ not what′ they seem′.
Tell me not in sorrowful numbers,
“Life is just an empty dream!”
For the soul is dead that sleeps,
And things aren’t what they seem.
This is called scanning, and all verse may be scanned in the same way. It is an excellent drill in learning the art of throwing the stress of the voice on any syllable that may be desired.
This is called scanning, and all verse can be scanned the same way. It's a great practice for learning how to place the stress of the voice on any syllable you want.
Two Laws of Word-Formation.
Two Rules of Word-Making.
We are now prepared to consider the two great laws governing word-formation. These are:
We are now ready to look at the two major laws that control how words are formed. These are:
1. Law: All vowels in combination with consonants are naturally short unless the long sound is given by combination with other vowels, by accent, or by position in the syllable with reference to consonants.
1. Law: All vowels combined with consonants are naturally short unless a long sound is produced by combining with other vowels, by accent, or by their position in the syllable in relation to consonants.
2. Law: Words derived from other words by the addition of prefixes or suffixes always retain the original form as far as possible.
2. Law: Words that come from other words by adding prefixes or suffixes always keep the original form as much as possible.
1. We are likely to suppose that the natural or original sound of a vowel is the long sound, because that is the sound we give it when naming it in the alphabet. If we will examine a number of words, however, we shall soon see that in combination with consonants all vowels have a tendency to a short or obscure pronunciation. The sounds of the consonants are naturally obscure, and they draw the vowels to a similar obscurity.
1. We tend to think that the natural or original sound of a vowel is the long sound since that's how we pronounce it when naming it in the alphabet. However, if we look at several words, we'll quickly notice that when vowels combine with consonants, they often sound short or unclear. The sounds of the consonants are usually unclear, and that tends to make the vowels sound similarly unclear.
Since such is the case, when a vowel is given its long sound there is always a special reason for it. In the simple words not, pin, her, rip, rid, cut, met, we have the short sounds of the vowels; but if we desire the long sounds we must add a silent e, which is not pronounced as e, but has its sound value in the greater stress put upon the vowel with which it is connected. By adding silent e to the above words we have note, pine, here, ripe, ride, mete. In each of these cases the e follows the consonant, though really combining with the vowel before the consonant; but if we place the additional e just after the first e in met we have meet, which is a word even more common than mete. E is the only vowel that may be placed after the consonant and still combine with the vowel before it {while being silent}; but nearly all the other vowels may be placed beside the vowel that would otherwise be short in order to make it long, and sometimes this added vowel is placed before as well as after the vowel to be lengthened. Thus we have boat, bait, beat, field, chief, etc. There are a very, very few irregular words in which the vowel sound has been kept short in spite of the added vowel, as for instance, head, sieve, etc. It appears that with certain consonants the long sound is especially difficult, and so in the case of very common words the wear of common speech has shortened the vowels in spite of original efforts to strengthen them. This is peculiarly true of the consonant v, and the combination th, and less so of s and z. So in {(I) }live, have, give, love, shove, move, etc., the vowel sound is more or less obscured even in spite of the silent e, though in the less common words alive, behave, etc., the long sound strengthened by accent has not been lost. So as a rule two silent vowels are now used to make the vowel before the v long, as in leave, believe, receive, beeves, weave, etc. In the single word sieve the vowel remains short in spite of two silent vowels added to strengthen it. Two vowels are also sometimes required to strengthen a long vowel before th, as in breathe, though when the vowel itself is a strong one, as a in bathe, the second vowel is not required, and o in both is so easily increased in sound that the two consonants alone are sufficient. It will be seen, therefore, that much depends on the quality of the vowel. A and o are the strongest vowels, i the weakest (which accounts for sieve). After s and z we must also have a silent e in addition to the silent vowel with which the sounded vowel is combined, as we may see in cheese, increase, freeze, etc. The added vowel in combination with the long vowel is not always needed, however, as we may see in contrasting raise and rise.
Since this is the case, when a vowel is pronounced with its long sound, there is always a specific reason for it. In the simple words not, pin, her, rip, rid, cut, met, we have the short sounds of the vowels; but if we want the long sounds, we need to add a silent e, which isn't pronounced as e, but affects the stress on the vowel it connects with. By adding a silent e to the words above, we get note, pine, here, ripe, ride, mete. In each of these cases, the e comes after the consonant, but it actually combines with the vowel before the consonant; however, if we add an additional e right after the first e in met, we get meet, which is an even more common word than mete. The vowel e is the only vowel that can follow a consonant and still combine with the vowel before it {while being silent}; but nearly all other vowels can be placed next to the vowel that would otherwise be short to make it long, and sometimes this extra vowel is placed both before and after the vowel to be lengthened. So we have boat, bait, beat, field, chief, etc. There are very few irregular words where the vowel sound remains short despite the added vowel, such as head, sieve, etc. It seems that with certain consonants, the long sound is particularly challenging, so in the case of very common words, the wear of everyday speech has shortened the vowels despite original attempts to strengthen them. This is especially true for the consonant v and the combination th, and less so for s and z. For instance, in {(I)} live, have, give, love, shove, move, etc., the vowel sound is somewhat obscured even with the silent e, though in less common words like alive, behave, etc., the long sound maintained by stress has not been lost. Generally, two silent vowels are now used to make the vowel before v long, as in leave, believe, receive, beeves, weave, etc. In the single word sieve, the vowel stays short despite two silent vowels added to strengthen it. Sometimes, two vowels are also needed to support a long vowel before th, as in breathe, although when the vowel itself is strong, like a in bathe, the second vowel isn’t necessary, and o in both easily increases in sound, making the two consonants sufficient. Therefore, a lot depends on the quality of the vowel. A and o are the strongest vowels, while i is the weakest (which explains sieve). After s and z, we also need a silent e in addition to the silent vowel that combines with the sounded vowel, as shown in cheese, increase, freeze, etc. However, the added vowel with the long vowel isn’t always necessary, as we can see in contrasting raise and rise.
Not only vowels but consonants may serve to lengthen vowel sounds, as we see in right, night, bright, and in scold, roll, etc. Only o is capable of being lengthened by two simple consonants such as we have in scold and roll. In calm and ball, for instance, the a has one of its extra values rather than its long sound. The gh is of course a powerful combination. Once it was pronounced; but it became so difficult that we have learned to give its value by dwelling a little on the vowel sound.
Not only vowels but consonants can also extend vowel sounds, as we see in right, night, bright, and in scold, roll, etc. Only o can be lengthened by two simple consonants like in scold and roll. In calm and ball, for example, the a has one of its extra sounds instead of its long sound. The gh is definitely a strong combination. It was once pronounced; however, it became so tricky that we've learned to emphasize the vowel sound instead.
Another powerful means of lengthening a vowel is accent. When a vowel receives the full force of the accent by coming at the end of an accented syllable it is almost invariably made long. We see this in monosyllables such as he, no, etc. It is often necessary to strengthen by an additional silent vowel, however, as in tie, sue, view, etc., and a has a peculiarity in that when it comes at the end of a syllable alone it has the sound of ah, or a Italian, rather than that of a long, and we have pa, ma, etc., and for the long sound y is added, as in say, day, ray. I has a great disinclination to appear at the end of a word, and so i{s}һ usually changed to y when such a position is necessary, or it takes silent e as indicated above; while this service on the part of y is reciprocated by i's taking the place of y inside a word, as may be illustrated by city and cities.
Another effective way to lengthen a vowel is through accent. When a vowel is fully accented by being at the end of an accented syllable, it typically becomes long. We see this in one-syllable words like he, no, and so on. Sometimes, it's necessary to add an additional silent vowel for this purpose, as in tie, sue, view, etc. Additionally, the vowel a has a unique characteristic: when it stands alone at the end of a syllable, it sounds like ah or the Italian a instead of a long a. This gives us words like pa, ma, etc. To create the long sound, y is added, as in say, day, ray. The vowel I is rarely found at the end of a word, so it often changes to y when needed or takes a silent e, as mentioned earlier. Conversely, y is replaced by I within a word, as illustrated by city and cities.
When a vowel gets the full force of the accent in a word of two or more syllables it is bound to be long, as for instance the first a in ma′di a. Even the stress necessary to keep the vowel from running into the next syllable will make it long, though the sound is somewhat obscured, some other syllable receiving the chief accent, as the first a in ma gi′cian. In this last word i seems to have the full force of the accent, yet it is not long; and we note the same in such words as condi′tion, etc. The fact is, however, that i being a weak vowel easily runs into the consonant sound of the next syllable, and if we note the sounds as we pronounce condition we shall see that the sh sound represented by ti blends with the i and takes the force of the accent. We cannot separate the ti or ci from the following portion of the syllable, since if so separated they could not have their sh value; but in pronunciation this separation is made in part and the sh sound serves both for the syllable that precedes and the syllable that follows. In a word like di men′sion we find the i of the first syllable long even without the accent, since the accent on men attaches the m so closely to it that it cannot in any way relieve the i. So we see that in an accented syllable the consonant before a short vowel, as well as the consonant following it, receives part of the stress. This is especially noticeable in the word ma gi′cian as compared with mag′ic. In magic the syllable ic is in itself so complete that the g is kept with the a and takes the force of the accent, leaving the a short. In magician the g is drawn away from the a to help out the short i followed by an sh sound, and the a is lengthened even to altering the form of the simple word. In the word ma′gi an, again, we find a long, the g being needed to help out the i.
When a vowel receives the full force of the accent in a word with two or more syllables, it will definitely be long, like the first a in ma′di a. Even the stress needed to keep the vowel from blending into the next syllable will make it long, even if the sound is a bit obscured, with another syllable taking the main accent, as in the first a of ma gi′cian. In that word, the i appears to carry the main accent, yet it's not long; we see the same in words like condi′tion, etc. The truth is, i is a weak vowel that easily merges with the consonant sound of the next syllable, and if we listen to how we pronounce condition, we'll notice that the sh sound represented by ti blends with the i and takes on the accent's force. We can't separate ti or ci from the next part of the syllable because if we did, they would lose their sh sound; however, in pronunciation, this separation is partially made, and the sh sound serves both the preceding and following syllables. In a word like di men′sion, the i in the first syllable is long even without the accent, since the accent on men connects it so closely that it offers no relief for the i. Thus, we see that in an accented syllable, the consonant before a short vowel, as well as the consonant after it, shares some of the stress. This is particularly clear when comparing the word ma gi′cian with mag′ic. In magic, the ic syllable is so complete on its own that the g stays with the a and carries the main accent, leaving the a short. In magician, the g is pulled away from the a to support the short i followed by an sh sound, and the a gets lengthened enough to change the form of the simple word. In the word ma′gi an, again, we find the a long, with the g needed to assist the i.
Since accent makes a vowel long if no consonant intervenes at the end of a syllable, and as a single consonant following such a vowel in a word of two syllables (though not in words of three or more) is likely to be drawn into the syllable following, a single consonant following a single short vowel must be doubled. If two or more consonants follow the vowel, as in masking, standing, wilting, the vowel even in an accented syllable remains short. But in pining with one n following the i in the accented syllable, we know that the vowel must be long, for if it were short the word would be written pinning.
Since an accent makes a vowel long if there's no consonant at the end of a syllable, and since a single consonant after such a vowel in a two-syllable word (but not in words with three or more syllables) often moves to the next syllable, a single consonant that follows a single short vowel must be doubled. If two or more consonants follow the vowel, as in masking, standing, wilting, the vowel, even in an accented syllable, stays short. However, in pining with one n after the i in the accented syllable, we know that the vowel has to be long, because if it were short, the word would be spelled pinning.
Universal Rule: Monosyllables in which, a single vowel is followed by a single consonant (except v and h never doubled) double the final consonant when a single syllable beginning with a vowel is added, and all words so ending double the final consonant on the addition of a syllable beginning with a vowel if the syllable containing the single vowel followed by a single consonant is to be accented.
Universal Rule: Monosyllables where one vowel is followed by one consonant (except v and h, which are never doubled) double the final consonant when adding a single syllable that starts with a vowel, and all words that end this way double the final consonant when a syllable beginning with a vowel is added if the syllable with the single vowel followed by a single consonant is to be stressed.
Thus we have can——canning, run——running, fun——funny, flat——flattish; and also sin——sinned (for the ed is counted a syllable though not pronounced as such nowadays); preferred, but preference, since the accent is thrown back from the syllable containing the single vowel followed by a single consonant in the word preference, though not in preferred; and of course the vowel is not doubled in murmured, wondered, covered, etc.
Thus we have can——canning, run——running, fun——funny, flat——flattish; and also sin——sinned (since the ed is considered a syllable even though it's not pronounced that way today); preferred, but preference, because the stress shifts back from the syllable with the single vowel followed by a single consonant in the word preference, but not in preferred; and of course the vowel isn’t doubled in murmured, wondered, covered, etc.
If, however, the accented syllable is followed by two or more syllables, the tendency of accent is to shorten the vowel. Thus we have grammat′ical, etc., in which the short vowel in the accented syllable is followed by a single consonant not doubled. The word na′tion (with a long a) becomes na′tional (short a) when the addition of a syllable throws the accent on to the antepenult. The vowel u is never shortened in this way, however, and we have lu′bricate, not lub′ricate. We also find such words as no′tional (long o). While accented syllables which are followed by two or more syllables seldom if ever double the single consonant, in pronunciation we often find the vowel long if the two syllables following contain short and weak vowels. Thus we have pe′riod (long e), ma′niac (long a), and o′rient′al (long o).
If the accented syllable is followed by two or more syllables, the accent tends to shorten the vowel. For example, we have grammat′ical, where the short vowel in the accented syllable is followed by a single consonant that isn't doubled. The word na′tion (with a long a) becomes na′tional (short a) when an additional syllable shifts the accent to the antepenult. However, the vowel u is never shortened this way, as in lu′bricate, not lub′ricate. We also come across words like no′tional (long o). While accented syllables followed by two or more syllables rarely double the single consonant, in pronunciation, we often find the vowel long if the following two syllables have short and weak vowels. Thus, we see pe′riod (long e), ma′niac (long a), and o′rient′al (long o).
In words of two syllables and other words in which the accent comes on the next to the last syllable, a short vowel in an accented syllable should logically always be followed by more than one consonant or a double consonant. We find the double consonant in such words as summer, pretty, mammal, etc. Unfortunately, our second law, which requires all derived words to preserve the form of the original root, interferes with this principle very seriously in a large number of English words. The roots are often derived from languages in which this principle did not apply, or else these roots originally had very different sound values from those they have with us. So we have body, with one d, though we have shoddy and toddy regularly formed with two d's, and we have finish, exhibit, etc.; in col′onnade the n is doubled in a syllable that is not accented.
In two-syllable words and others where the accent falls on the second to last syllable, a short vowel in an accented syllable should always be followed by more than one consonant or a double consonant. We see this double consonant in words like summer, pretty, mammal, etc. Unfortunately, our second rule, which says all derived words must keep the original root's form, conflicts with this principle in many English words. The roots often come from languages where this rule didn’t apply, or these roots originally had different sound values than they do now. So we have body, with just one d, while we have shoddy and toddy formed with two d's, and we have finish, exhibit, etc.; in col′onnade, the n is doubled in a syllable that’s not stressed.
The chief exception to the general principle is the entire class of words ending in ic, such as colic, cynic, civic, antithetic, peripatetic, etc. If the root is long, however, it will remain long after the addition of the termination ic, as music (from muse), basic (from base), etc.
The main exception to the general rule is the whole group of words that end in ic, like colic, cynic, civic, antithetic, peripatetic, and so on. However, if the root is long, it will still be long after adding the ending ic, as in music (from muse), basic (from base), and so forth.
But in the case of words which we form ourselves, we will find practically no exceptions to the rule that a short vowel in a syllable next to the last must be followed by a double consonant when accented, while a short vowel in a syllable before the next to the last is not followed by a double consonant when the syllable is accented.
But when it comes to words we create ourselves, we’ll see almost no exceptions to the rule that a short vowel in a syllable next to the last must be followed by a double consonant when it’s stressed, while a short vowel in a syllable before the one next to the last isn’t followed by a double consonant when that syllable is stressed.
2. Our second law tells us that the original form of a word or of its root must be preserved as far as possible. Most of the words referred to above in which single consonants are doubled or not doubled in violation of the general rule are derived from the Latin, usually through the French, and if we were familiar with those languages we should have a key to their correct spelling. But even without such thorough knowledge, we may learn a few of the methods of derivation in those languages, especially the Latin, as well as the simpler methods in use in the English.
2. Our second law states that we should keep the original form of a word or its root intact as much as we can. Most of the words mentioned earlier, where single consonants are either doubled or not doubled against the usual rules, come from Latin, often via French. If we understood those languages better, we would have a better grasp of their correct spelling. However, even without extensive knowledge, we can still pick up some of the ways words are derived in those languages, especially Latin, along with the simpler methods used in English.
Certain changes in the derived words are always made, as, for instance, the dropping of the silent e when a syllable beginning with a vowel is added.
Certain changes in derived words are always made, like dropping the silent e when a syllable that starts with a vowel is added.
Rule. Silent e at the end of a word is dropped whenever a syllable beginning with a vowel is added.
Rule. Silent e at the end of a word is removed whenever a syllable starting with a vowel is added.
This rule is not quite universal, though nearly so. The silent e is always retained when the vowel at the beginning of the added syllable would make a soft c or g hard, as in serviceable, changeable, etc. In changing, chancing, etc., the i of the added syllable is sufficient to make the c or g retain its soft sound. In such words as cringe and singe the silent e is retained even before i in order to avoid confusing the words so formed with other words in which the ng has a nasal sound; thus we have singeing to avoid confusion with singing, though we have singed in which the e is dropped before ed because the dropping of it causes no confusion. Formerly the silent e was retained in moveable; but now we write movable, according to the rule.
This rule isn't entirely universal, but it comes close. The silent e is always kept when the vowel at the start of the added syllable would make a soft c or g hard, as in serviceable, changeable, etc. In forms like changing, chancing, etc., the i in the added syllable is enough to keep the c or g soft. In words like cringe and singe, the silent e is kept even before i to prevent confusion with other words where ng has a nasal sound; for example, we use singeing to distinguish it from singing, but we have singed where the e is dropped before ed without causing any confusion. Previously, the silent e was kept in moveable; now we write it as movable, following the rule.
Of course when the added syllable begins with a consonant, the silent e is not dropped, since dropping it would have the effect of shortening the preceding vowel by making it stand before two consonants.
Of course, when the added syllable starts with a consonant, the silent e isn't dropped, since removing it would shorten the preceding vowel by placing it before two consonants.
A few monosyllables ending in two vowels, one of which is silent e, are exceptions: duly, truly; also wholly.
A few one-syllable words that end with two vowels, where one is a silent e, are exceptions: duly, truly; also wholly.
Also final y is changed to i when a syllable is added, unless that added syllable begins with i and two i's would thus come together. I is a vowel never doubled. Th{u}זs we have citified, but citifying.
Also, the final y changes to i when a syllable is added, unless that added syllable starts with i, which would put two i's together. I is a vowel that’s never doubled. So we have citified, but citifying.
We have already seen that final consonants may be doubled under certain circumstances when a syllable is added.
We’ve already seen that final consonants can be doubled in certain situations when a syllable is added.
These are nearly all the changes in spelling that are possible when words are formed by adding syllables; but changes in pronunciation and vowel values are often affected, as we have seen in nation (a long) and national (a short).
These are almost all the possible spelling changes that happen when words are made by adding syllables; however, changes in pronunciation and vowel sounds are often impacted, as we have seen in nation (a long) and national (a short).
Prefixes. But words may be formed by prefixing syllables, or by combining two or more words into one. Many of these formations were effected in the Latin before the words were introduced into English; but we can study the principles governing them and gain a key to the spelling of many English words.
Prefixes. But you can create words by adding syllables at the beginning or by combining two or more words into one. Many of these formations occurred in Latin before the words were brought into English; however, we can examine the principles behind them and learn how to spell many English words.
In English we unite a preposition with a verb by placing it after the verb and treating it as an adverb. Thus we have “breaking in,” “running over,” etc. In Latin the preposition in such cases was prefixed to the word; and there were particles used as prefixes which were never used as prepositions. We should become familiar with the principal Latin prefixes and always take them into account in the spelling of English words. The principal Latin prefixes are:
In English, we combine a preposition with a verb by placing it after the verb and treating it like an adverb. So we get phrases like “breaking in,” “running over,” and so on. In Latin, the preposition was put at the beginning of the word, and there were particles used as prefixes that were never used as prepositions. We should get to know the main Latin prefixes and always consider them when spelling English words. The main Latin prefixes are:
ab (abs)——from ad——to ante——before bi (bis)——twice circum (circu)——around con——with contra (counter)——against de——down, from dis——apart, not ex——out of, away from extra——beyond in——in, into, on; also not (another word) inter——between non——not ob——in front of, in the way of per——through post——after pre——before pro——for, forth re——back or again retro——backward se——aside semi——half sub——under super——above, over trans——over, beyond ultra——beyond vice——instead of.
ab (abs)——from ad——to ante——before bi (bis)——twice circum (circu)——around con——with contra (counter)——against de——down, from dis——apart, not ex——out of, away from extra——beyond in——in, into, on; also not (another word) inter——between non——not ob——in front of, in the way of per——through post——after pre——before pro——for, forth re——back or again retro——backward se——aside semi——half sub——under super——above, over trans——over, beyond ultra——beyond vice——instead of.
Of these prefixes, those ending in a single consonant are likely to change that consonant for euphony to the consonant beginning the word to which the prefix is attached. Thus ad drops the d in ascend, becomes ac in accord, af in affiliate, an in annex, ap in appropriate, at in attend; con becomes com in commotion, also in compunction and compress, cor in correspond, col in collect, co in co-equal; dis becomes dif in differ; ex becomes e in eject, ec in eccentric, ef in effect; in becomes il in illuminate, im in import, ir in irreconcilable; ob becomes op in oppress, oc in occasion, of in offend; and sub becomes suc in succeed, sup in support, suf in suffix, sug in suggest, sus in sustain. The final consonant is changed to a consonant that can be easily pronounced before the consonant with which the following syllable begins. Following the rule that the root must be changed as little as possible, it is always the prefix, not the root, which is compelled to yield to the demands of euphony.
Of these prefixes, those that end in a single consonant tend to change that consonant for better sound when they attach to a word. For example, ad drops the d in ascend, becomes ac in accord, af in affiliate, an in annex, ap in appropriate, at in attend; con turns into com in commotion, as well as in compunction and compress, cor in correspond, col in collect, co in co-equal; dis becomes dif in differ; ex becomes e in eject, ec in eccentric, ef in effect; in becomes il in illuminate, im in import, ir in irreconcilable; ob changes to op in oppress, oc in occasion, of in offend; and sub turns into suc in succeed, sup in support, suf in suffix, sug in suggest, sus in sustain. The final consonant changes to one that is easier to pronounce before the consonant that starts the next syllable. Following the rule that the root should change as little as possible, it’s always the prefix, not the root, that has to adjust for better sound.
A little reflection upon the derivation of words will thus often give us a key to the spelling. For instance, suppose we are in doubt whether irredeemable has two r's or only one: we now that redeem is a root, and therefore the ir must be a prefix, and the two r's are accounted for,―indeed are necessary in order to prevent our losing sight of the derivation and meaning of the word. In the same way, we can never be in doubt as to the two m's in commotion, commencement, etc.
A little thinking about where words come from can often help us figure out their spelling. For example, if we're unsure whether irredeemable has two r's or just one: we know that redeem is the root, so ir must be a prefix, and the two r's make sense—they're essential to keep us connected to the origin and meaning of the word. Similarly, we won’t doubt the two m's in commotion, commencement, and so on.
We have already noted the tendency of y to become i in the middle of a word. The exceptional cases are chiefly derivatives from the Greek, and a study of the Greek prefixes will often give us a hint in regard to the spelling of words containing y. These prefixes, given here in full for convenience, are:
We’ve already mentioned that y often changes to i in the middle of a word. The few exceptions mainly come from Greek, and looking at Greek prefixes can usually help us understand how to spell words that include y. Here are those prefixes, listed completely for your convenience:
a (an)——without, not amphi——both, around ana——up, back, through anti——against, opposite apo (ap)——from cata——down
a (an)——without, not amphi——both, around ana——up, back, through anti——against, opposite apo (ap)——from cata——down
dia——through en (em)——in epi (ep)——upon hyper——over, excessive hypo——under meta (met)——beyond, change syn (sy, syl, sym)——with, together
dia——through en (em)——in epi (ep)——upon hyper——over, excessive hypo——under meta (met)——beyond, change syn (sy, syl, sym)——with, together
In Greek words also we will find ph with the sound of f. We know that symmetrical, hypophosphite, metaphysics, emphasis, etc., are Greek because of the key we find in the prefix, and we are thus prepared for the y's and ph's. F does not exist in the Greek alphabet (except as ph) and so we shall never find it in words derived from the Greek.
In Greek, we also find ph sounding like f. We know that symmetrical, hypophosphite, metaphysics, emphasis, and so on are Greek because of the key we identify in the prefix, making us ready for the y's and ph's. The letter F doesn't exist in the Greek alphabet (except as ph), so we will never come across it in words that come from Greek.
The English prefixes are not so often useful in determining peculiar spelling, but for completeness we give them here:
The English prefixes aren’t always helpful in figuring out unusual spelling, but for the sake of thoroughness, we include them here:
a——at, in, on (ahead) be——to make, by (benumb) en (em)——in, on, to make (encircle, empower) for——not, from (forbear) fore——before (forewarn) mis——wrong, wrongly (misstate) out——beyond (outbreak) over——above (overruling) to——the, this (to-night) un——not, opposite act (unable, undeceive) under——beneath (undermine) with——against, from (withstand)
a——at, in, on (ahead) be——to make, by (benumb) en (em)——in, on, to make (encircle, empower) for——not, from (forbear) fore——before (forewarn) mis——wrong, wrongly (misstate) out——beyond (outbreak) over——above (overruling) to——the, this (to-night) un——not, opposite act (unable, undeceive) under——beneath (undermine) with——against, from (withstand)
CHAPTER III.
WORD-BUILDING——RULES AND APPLICATIONS.
There are a few rules and applications of the principles of word-formation which may be found fully treated in the chapter on “Orthography” at the beginning of the dictionary, but which we present here very briefly, together with a summary of principles already discussed.
There are some rules and applications of the principles of word-formation that are covered in detail in the chapter on “Orthography” at the start of the dictionary, but we’ll briefly summarize them here along with the main principles we've already talked about.
Rule 1. F, l, and s at the end of a monosyllable after a single vowel are commonly doubled. The exceptions are the cases in which s forms the plural or possessive case of a noun, or third person singular of the verb, and the following words: clef, if, of, pal, sol, as, gas, has, was, yes, gris, his, is, thus, us. L is not doubled at the end of words of more than one syllable, as parallel, willful, etc.
Rule 1. F, l, and s at the end of a one-syllable word after a single vowel are usually doubled. The exceptions are when s creates the plural or possessive form of a noun, or the third person singular of a verb, and the following words: clef, if, of, pal, sol, as, gas, has, was, yes, gris, his, is, thus, us. L is not doubled at the end of words with more than one syllable, like parallel, willful, etc.
Rule 2. No other consonants thus situated are doubled. Exceptions: ebb, add, odd, egg, inn, bunn, err, burr, purr, butt, fizz, fuzz, buzz, and a few very uncommon words, for which see the chapter in the dictionary above referred to.
Rule 2. No other consonants in this position are doubled. Exceptions: ebb, add, odd, egg, inn, bunn, err, burr, purr, butt, fizz, fuzz, buzz, and a few very uncommon words, which can be found in the chapter in the dictionary mentioned above.
Rule 3. A consonant standing at the end of a word immediately after a diphthong or double vowel is never doubled. The word guess is only an apparent exception, since u does not form a combination with e but merely makes the g hard.
Rule 3. A consonant at the end of a word that comes right after a diphthong or double vowel is never doubled. The word guess seems like an exception, but actually, u doesn’t combine with e; it just makes the g sound hard.
Rule 4. Monosyllables ending in the sound of ic represented by c usually take k after the c, as in back, knock, etc. Exceptions: talc, zinc, roc, arc, and a few very uncommon words. Words of more than one syllable ending in ic or iac do not take k after the c (except derrick), as for example elegiac, cubic, music, etc. If the c is preceded by any other vowel than i or ia, k is added to the c, as in barrack, hammock, wedlock. Exceptions: almanac, havoc, and a very few uncommon words.
Rule 4. Monosyllables that end with the sound of ic spelled with c usually add a k after the c, like in back, knock, etc. Exceptions include: talc, zinc, roc, arc, and a few very rare words. Words with more than one syllable that end in ic or iac do not add k after the c (except for derrick), for example, elegiac, cubic, music, etc. If the c is preceded by any vowel other than i or ia, a k is added to the c, as seen in barrack, hammock, wedlock. Exceptions include: almanac, havoc, and a few very rare words.
Rule 5. To preserve the hard sound of c when a syllable is added which begins with e, i, or y, k is placed after final c, as in trafficking, zincky, colicky.
Rule 5. To keep the hard sound of c when you add a syllable starting with e, i, or y, you put k after the final c, like in trafficking, zincky, colicky.
Rule 6. X and h are never doubled, v and j seldom. G with the soft sound cannot be doubled, because then the first g would be made hard. Example: mag′ic. Q always appears with u following it, and here u has the value of the consonant w and in no way combines or is counted with the vowel which may follow it. For instance squatting is written as if squat contained but one vowel.
Rule 6. X and h are never doubled, v and j are rarely doubled. G with the soft sound can't be doubled because then the first g would turn hard. Example: mag′ic. Q always has u after it, and here u acts like the consonant w and doesn’t combine or count with the vowel that may follow it. For example, squatting is written as if squat has only one vowel.
Rule 7. In simple derivatives a single final consonant following a single vowel in a syllable that receives an accent is doubled when another syllable beginning with a vowel is added.
Rule 7. In simple derivatives, a single final consonant that follows a single vowel in a syllable receiving an accent is doubled when another syllable starting with a vowel is added.
Rule 8. When accent comes on a syllable standing next to the last, it has a tendency to lengthen the vowel; but on syllables farther from the end, the tendency is to shorten the vowel without doubling the consonant. For example, na′tion (a long), but na′tional (a short); gram′mar, but grammat′ical.
Rule 8. When the accent falls on a syllable next to the last one, it usually makes the vowel longer; however, on syllables that are further from the end, it tends to shorten the vowel without doubling the consonant. For example, na′tion (a long), but na′tional (a short); gram′mar, but grammat′ical.
Rule 9. Silent e at the end of a word is usually dropped when a syllable beginning with a vowel is added. The chief exceptions are words in which the silent e is retained to preserve the soft sound of c or g.
Rule 9. Silent e at the end of a word is typically removed when a syllable starting with a vowel is added. The main exceptions are words where the silent e is kept to maintain the soft sound of c or g.
Rule 10. Plurals are regularly formed by adding s; but if the word end in a sibilant sound (sh, zh, z, s, j, ch, x), the plural is formed by adding es, which is pronounced as a separate syllable. If the word end{s} in a sibilant sound followed by silent e, that e unites with the s to form a separate syllable. Examples: seas, cans; boxes, churches, brushes; changes, services.
Rule 10. Plurals are usually formed by adding s; but if the word ends in a sibilant sound (sh, zh, z, s, j, ch, x), the plural is formed by adding es, which is pronounced as a separate syllable. If the word ends in a sibilant sound followed by a silent e, that e combines with the s to form a separate syllable. Examples: seas, cans; boxes, churches, brushes; changes, services.
Rule 11. Final y is regularly changed to i when a syllable is added. In plurals it is changed to ies, except when preceded by a vowel, when a simple s is added without change of the y. Examples: clumsy, clumsily; city, cities; chimney, chimneys. We have colloquies because u after q has the value of the consonant w. There are a few exceptions to the above rule. When two i's would come together, the y is not changed, as in carrying.
Rule 11. The final y is usually changed to i when a syllable is added. For plurals, it changes to ies, unless it's preceded by a vowel, in which case a simple s is added without changing the y. Examples: clumsy, clumsily; city, cities; chimney, chimneys. We have colloquies because u after q has the value of the consonant w. There are a few exceptions to this rule. When two i's would appear together, the y is not changed, as in carrying.
Rule 12. Words ending, in a double consonant commonly retain the double consonant in derivatives. The chief exception is all, which drops one l, as in almighty, already, although, etc. According to English usage other words ending in double l drop one l in derivatives, and we have skilful (for skillful), wilful (for willful), etc., but Webster does not approve this custom. Ful is an affix, not the word full in a compound.
Rule 12. Words that end in a double consonant usually keep the double consonant in their derivatives. The main exception is all, which drops one l, as in almighty, already, although, etc. In English usage, other words that end in double l drop one l in derivatives, so we have skilful (instead of skillful), wilful (instead of willful), etc., but Webster does not support this practice. Ful is an affix, not the word full in a compound.
EXCEPTIONS AND IRREGULARITIES.
1. Though in the case of simple words ending in a double consonant the derivatives usually retain the double consonant, pontific and pontifical (from pontiff) are exceptions, and when three letters of the same kind would come together, one is usually dropped, as in agreed (agree plus ed), illy (ill plus ly), belless, etc. We may write bell-less, etc., however, in the case of words in which three l's come together, separating the syllables by a hyphen.
1. Although in the case of simple words ending in a double consonant the derivatives usually keep the double consonant, pontific and pontifical (from pontiff) are exceptions. When three of the same letters come together, one is usually dropped, as in agreed (agree plus ed), illy (ill plus ly), belless, etc. We can spell bell-less etc., in the case of words where three l's come together, separating the syllables with a hyphen.
2. To prevent two i's coming together, we change i to y in dying, tying, vying, etc., from die, tie, and vie.
2. To stop two i's from appearing together, we change i to y in dying, tying, vying, etc., from die, tie, and vie.
3. Derivatives from adjectives ending in y do not change y to i, and we have shyly, shyness, slyly, etc., though drier and driest from dry are used. The y is not changed before ship, as in secretaryship, ladyship, etc., nor in babyhood and ladykin.
3. Derivatives from adjectives ending in y don’t change y to i, so we have shyly, shyness, slyly, etc., although drier and driest from dry are used. The y is not changed before ship, as in secretaryship, ladyship, etc., nor in babyhood and ladykin.
4. We have already seen that y is not changed in derivatives when it is preceded by another vowel, as in the case of joyful, etc.; but we find exceptions to this principle in daily, laid, paid, said, saith, slain, and staid; and many write gaily and gaiety, though Webster prefers gayly and gayety.
4. We’ve already seen that y doesn’t change in derivatives when it’s preceded by another vowel, like in joyful, etc.; however, there are exceptions to this rule in daily, laid, paid, said, saith, slain, and staid; and many people write gaily and gaiety, although Webster prefers gayly and gayety.
5. Nouns of one syllable ending in o usually take a silent e also, as toe, doe, shoe, etc, but other parts of speech do not take the e, as do, to, so, no, and the like, and nouns of more than one syllable, as potato, tomato, etc., omit the e. Monosyllables ending in oe usually retain the silent e in derivatives, and we have shoeing, toeing, etc. The commoner English nouns ending in o also have the peculiarity of forming the plural by adding es instead of s, and we have potatoes, tomatoes, heroes, echoes, cargoes, embargoes, mottoes; but nouns a trifle more foreign form their plurals regularly, as solos, zeros, pianos, etc. When a vowel precedes the o, the plural is always formed regularly. The third person singular of the verb woo is wooes, of do does, of go goes, etc., in analogy with the plurals of the nouns ending in o.
5. Nouns with one syllable that end in o usually take a silent e, like toe, doe, shoe, etc. However, other parts of speech don’t take the e, such as do, to, so, no, and the like. Nouns with more than one syllable, like potato, tomato, etc., omit the e. One-syllable words ending in oe typically keep the silent e in derivatives, such as shoeing, toeing, etc. Common English nouns ending in o are unique in that they form the plural by adding es instead of s, such as potatoes, tomatoes, heroes, echoes, cargoes, embargoes, mottoes; while nouns that are a bit more foreign form their plurals regularly, like solos, zeros, pianos, etc. When a vowel comes before the o, the plural is always formed regularly. The third person singular of the verb woo is wooes, for do it’s does, for go it’s goes, etc., following the pattern of the plurals of nouns ending in o.
6. The following are exceptions to the rule that silent e is retained in derivatives when the added syllable begins with a consonant: judgment, acknowledgment, lodgment, wholly, abridgment, wisdom, etc.
6. The following are exceptions to the rule that silent e is kept in derivatives when the added syllable starts with a consonant: judgment, acknowledgment, lodgment, wholly, abridgment, wisdom, etc.
7. Some nouns ending in f or fe change those terminations to ve in the plural, as beef——beeves, leaf——leaves, knife——knives, loaf——loaves, life——lives, wife——wives, thief——thieves, wolf——wolves, self——selves, shelf——shelves, calf——calves, half——halves, elf——elves, sheaf——sheaves. We have chief——chiefs and handkerchief——handkerchiefs, however, and the same is true of all nouns ending in f or fe except those given above.
7. Some nouns ending in f or fe change those endings to ve in the plural, like beef——beeves, leaf——leaves, knife——knives, loaf——loaves, life——lives, wife——wives, thief——thieves, wolf——wolves, self——selves, shelf——shelves, calf——calves, half——halves, elf——elves, sheaf——sheaves. We have chief——chiefs and handkerchief——handkerchiefs, though, and the same applies to all nouns ending in f or fe except for those listed above.
8. A few nouns form their plurals by changing a single vowel, as man——men, woman——women, goose——geese, foot——feet, tooth——teeth, etc. Compounds follow the rule of the simple form, but the plural of talisman is talismans, of German is Germans, of musselman is musselmans, because these are not compounds of men.
8. A few nouns make their plurals by changing just one vowel, like man——men, woman——women, goose——geese, foot——feet, tooth——teeth, etc. Compound words follow the same pattern as the simple form, but the plural of talisman is talismans, the plural of German is Germans, and the plural of musselman is musselmans, because these aren’t compounds of men.
9. A few plurals are formed by adding en, as brother——brethren, child——children, ox——oxen.
9. A few plurals are formed by adding en, like brother——brethren, child——children, ox——oxen.
10. Brother, pea, die, and penny have each two plurals, which differ in meaning. Brothers refers to male children of the same parents, brethren to members of a religious body or the like; peas is used when a definite number is mentioned, pease when bulk is referred to; dies are instruments used for stamping, etc., dice cubical blocks used in games of chance; pennies refer to a given number of coins, pence to an amount reckoned by the coins. Acquaintance is sometimes used in the plural for acquaintances with no difference of meaning.
10. Brother, pea, die, and penny each have two plural forms that differ in meaning. Brothers refers to male siblings from the same parents, while brethren refers to members of a religious group or similar organization; peas is used when a specific number is mentioned, and pease is used when talking about bulk; dies are tools used for stamping, while dice are the cube-shaped objects used in games of chance; pennies refer to a specific number of coins, whereas pence refers to an amount determined by those coins. Acquaintance is sometimes used in the plural as acquaintances with no change in meaning.
11. A few words are the same in the plural as in the singular, as sheep, deer, trout, etc.
11. A few words are the same in the plural as in the singular, like sheep, deer, trout, etc.
12. Some words derived from foreign languages retain the plurals of those languages. For example: datum——data criterion——criteria genus——genera larva——larvæ crisis——crises matrix——matrices focus——foci monsieur——messieurs
12. Some words borrowed from other languages keep their original plural forms. For example: datum——data criterion——criteria genus——genera larva——larvae crisis——crises matrix——matrices focus——foci monsieur——messieurs
13. A few allow either a regular plural or the plural retained from the foreign language: formula——formulæ or formulas beau——beaux or beaus index——indices or indexes stratum——strata or stratums bandit——banditti or bandits cherub——cherubim or cherubs seraph——seraphim or seraphs
13. A few allow either a regular plural or the plural kept from the foreign language: formula—formulæ or formulas beau—beaux or beaus index—indices or indexes stratum—strata or stratums bandit—banditti or bandits cherub—cherubim or cherubs seraph—seraphim or seraphs
14. In very loose compounds in which a noun is followed by an adjective or the like, the noun commonly takes the plural ending, as in courts-martial, sons-in-law, cousins-german. When the adjective is more closely joined, the plural ending must be placed at the end of the entire word. Thus we have cupfuls, handfuls, etc.
14. In very loose compounds where a noun is followed by an adjective or similar word, the noun usually takes the plural ending, like in courts-martial, sons-in-law, cousins-german. When the adjective is more closely connected, the plural ending must be added to the end of the whole word. So we have cupfuls, handfuls, etc.
Different Spellings for the same Sound.
Different Spellings for the Same Sound.
Perhaps the greatest difficulty in spelling English words arises from the fact that words and syllables pronounced alike are often spelled differently, and there is no rule to guide us in distinguishing. In order to fix their spelling, in mind we should know what classes of words are doubtful, and when we come to them constantly refer to the dictionary. To try to master these except in the connections in which we wish to use them the writer believes to be worse than folly. By studying such words in pairs, confusion is very likely to be fixed forever in the mind. Most spelling-books commit this error, and so are responsible for a considerable amount of bad spelling, which their method has actually introduced and instilled into the child's mind.
Perhaps the biggest challenge in spelling English words comes from the fact that words and syllables that sound the same are often spelled differently, and there are no rules to help us tell them apart. To remember their spelling, we should know which words are tricky and constantly refer to the dictionary when we encounter them. The writer believes that trying to master these words outside the contexts in which we intend to use them is foolish. Studying such words in pairs can lead to long-term confusion in our minds. Most spelling books make this mistake, contributing to a significant amount of poor spelling that their methods have actually introduced and instilled in children.
Persons who read much are not likely to make these errors, since they remember words by the form as it appeals to the eye, not by the sound in which there is no distinction. The study of such words should therefore be conducted chiefly while writing or reading, not orally.
People who read a lot are unlikely to make these mistakes because they remember words by how they look, not by how they sound, where there is no differentiation. Therefore, the study of these words should mainly take place while writing or reading, not verbally.
While we must memorize, one at a time as we come to them in reading or writing, the words or syllables in which the same sound is represented by different spellings, still we should know clearly what classes of words to be on the lookout for. We will now consider some of the classes of words in which a single syllable may be spelled in various ways.
While we need to memorize, one at a time as we encounter them in reading or writing, the words or syllables that have the same sound but different spellings, we should also clearly understand what categories of words to watch for. We will now look at some categories of words where a single syllable can be spelled in different ways.
Vowel Substitutions in Simple Words.
Vowel Replacements in Simple Words.
ea for ĕ short or e obscure before r.
ea for ĕ short or e obscure before r.
already bread breakfast breast breadth death earth dead deaf dread early earn earnest earth feather head health heaven heavy heard lead learn leather meadow measure pearl pleasant read search sergeant spread steady thread threaten tread wealth weather
already bread breakfast breast breadth death earth dead deaf dread early earn earnest earth feather head health heaven heavy heard lead learn leather meadow measure pearl pleasant read search sergeant spread steady thread threaten tread wealth weather
ee for ē long.
see for a long time.
agree beef breed cheek cheese creek creep cheer deer deed deep feed feel feet fleece green heel heed indeed keep keel keen kneel meek need needle peel peep queer screen seed seen sheet sheep sleep sleeve sneeze squeeze street speech steeple steet sweep sleet teeth weep weed week
agree beef breed cheek cheese creek creep cheer deer deed deep feed feel feet fleece green heel heed indeed keep keel keen kneel meek need needle peel peep queer screen seed seen sheet sheep sleep sleeve sneeze squeeze street speech steeple steet sweep sleet teeth weep weed week
ea for ē long.
ea for ē long.
appear bead beach bean beast beat beneath breathe cease cheap cheat clean clear congeal cream crease creature dear deal dream defeat each ear eager easy east eaves feast fear feat grease heap hear heat increase knead lead leaf leak lean least leave meat meal mean neat near peas (pease) peal peace peach please preach reach read reap rear reason repeat scream seam seat season seal speak steam streak stream tea team tear tease teach veal weave weak wheat wreath (wreathe) year yeast
appear bead beach bean beast beat beneath breathe cease cheap cheat clean clear congeal cream crease creature dear deal dream defeat each ear eager easy east eaves feast fear feat grease heap hear heat increase knead lead leaf leak lean least leave meat meal mean neat near peas (pease) peal peace peach please preach reach read reap rear reason repeat scream seam seat season seal speak steam streak stream tea team tear tease teach veal weave weak wheat wreath (wreathe) year yeast
ai for ā long.
ai for a long time.
afraid aid braid brain complain daily dairy daisy drain dainty explain fail fain gain gait gaiter grain hail jail laid maid mail maim nail paid pail paint plain prairie praise quail rail rain raise raisin remain sail saint snail sprain stain straight strain tail train vain waist wait waive
afraid aid braid brain complain daily dairy daisy drain dainty explain fail gladly gain walk gaiter grain hail jail laid maid mail injure nail paid bucket paint simple prairie praise quail rail rain raise raisin remain sail saint snail sprain stain straight strain tail train vain waist wait waive
ai for i or e obscure.
ai for i or e obscure.
bargain captain certain curtain mountain
bargain captain certain curtain mountain
oa for ō long.
oa for ō long.
board boat cloak coax coal coast coarse float foam goat gloam groan hoarse load loan loaf oak oar oats roast road roam shoal soap soar throat toad toast
board boat cloak coax coal coast coarse float foam goat gloam groan hoarse load loan loaf oak oar oats roast road roam shoal soap soar throat toad toast
ie for ē long.
ie for ē long.
believe chief fierce grief niece priest piece thief
believe chief fierce grief niece priest piece thief
ei for ē long.
ei for ē long.
neither receipt receive
neither receipt nor receive
In sieve, ie has the sound of i short.
In sieve, ie sounds like short i.
In eight, skein, neighbor, rein, reign, sleigh, vein, veil, weigh, and weight, ei has the sound of a long.
In eight, skein, neighbor, rein, reign, sleigh, vein, veil, weigh, and weight, ei sounds like a long.
In height, sleight, and a few other words ei has the sound of i long.
In height, sleight, and a few other words ei sounds like i in long.
In great, break, and steak ea has the sound of a long; in heart and hearth it has the sound of a Italian, and in tear and bear it has the sound of a as in care.
In great, break, and steak, the sound of a is long; in heart and hearth, it sounds like a in Italian, and in tear and bear, it sounds like a as in care.
Silent Consonants etc.
Silent Consonants, etc.
although answer bouquet bridge calf calm catch castle caught chalk climb ditch dumb edge folks comb daughter debt depot forehead gnaw hatchet hedge hiccough hitch honest honor hustle island itch judge judgment knack knead kneel knew knife knit knuckle knock knot know knowledge lamb latch laugh limb listen match might muscle naughty night notch numb often palm pitcher pitch pledge ridge right rough scene scratch should sigh sketch snatch soften stitch switch sword talk though through thought thumb tough twitch thigh walk watch whole witch would write written wrapper wring wrong wrung wrote wrestle yacht
although answer bouquet bridge calf calm catch castle caught chalk climb ditch dumb edge folks comb daughter debt depot forehead gnaw hatchet hedge hiccough hitch honest honor hustle island itch judge judgment knack knead kneel knew knife knit knuckle knock knot know knowledge lamb latch laugh limb listen match might muscle naughty night notch numb often palm pitcher pitch pledge ridge right rough scene scratch should sigh sketch snatch soften stitch switch sword talk though through thought thumb tough twitch thigh walk watch whole witch would write written wrapper wring wrong wrung wrote wrestle yacht
Unusual Spellings.
Uncommon Spellings.
The following words have irregularities peculiar to themselves.
The following words have unique irregularities.
ache any air apron among again aunt against biscuit build busy business bureau because carriage coffee collar color country couple cousin cover does dose done double diamond every especially February flourish flown fourteen forty fruit gauge glue gluey guide goes handkerchief honey heifer impatient iron juice liar lion liquor marriage mayor many melon minute money necessary ninety ninth nothing nuisance obey ocean once onion only other owe owner patient people pigeon prayer pray prepare rogue scheme scholar screw shoe shoulder soldier stomach sugar succeed precede proceed procedure suspicion they tongue touch trouble wagon were where wholly
ache any air apron among again aunt against biscuit build busy business bureau because carriage coffee collar color country couple cousin cover does dose done double diamond every especially February flourish flown fourteen forty fruit gauge glue gluey guide goes handkerchief honey heifer impatient iron juice liar lion liquor marriage mayor many melon minute money necessary ninety ninth nothing nuisance obey ocean once onion only other owe owner patient people pigeon prayer pray prepare rogue scheme scholar screw shoe shoulder soldier stomach sugar succeed precede proceed procedure suspicion they tongue touch trouble wagon were where wholly
C with the sound of s.
C with the sound of s.
In the following words the sound of s is represented by c followed by a vowel that makes this letter soft:
In the following words, the sound of s is represented by c followed by a vowel that makes this letter soft:
city face ice juice lace necessary nuisance once pencil police policy pace race rice space trace twice trice thrice nice price slice lice spice circus citron circumstance centre cent cellar certain circle concert concern cell dunce decide December dance disgrace exercise excellent except force fleece fierce furnace fence grocer grace icicle instance innocent indecent decent introduce juice justice lettuce medicine mercy niece ounce officer patience peace piece place principal principle parcel produce prejudice trace voice receipt recite cite sauce saucer sentence scarcely since silence service crevice novice
city face ice juice lace necessary nuisance once pencil police policy pace race rice space trace twice trice thrice nice price slice lice spice circus citron circumstance centre cent cellar certain circle concert concern cell dunce decide December dance disgrace exercise excellent except force fleece fierce furnace fence grocer grace icicle instance innocent indecent decent introduce juice justice lettuce medicine mercy niece ounce officer patience peace piece place principal principle parcel produce prejudice trace voice receipt recite cite sauce saucer sentence scarcely since silence service crevice novice
Words ending in cal and cle.
Words ending in cal and cle.
Words in cal are nearly all derived from other words ending in ic, as classical, cubical, clerical, etc. Words ending in cle are (as far as English is concerned) original words, as cuticle, miracle, manacle, etc. When in doubt, ask the question if, on dropping the al or le, a complete word ending in ic would be left. If such a word is left, the ending is al, if not, it is probably le.
Words in cal mostly come from other words that end in ic, like classical, cubical, clerical, etc. Words that end in cle are (at least in English) original words, such as cuticle, miracle, manacle, etc. If you're unsure, check whether dropping the al or le leaves you with a complete word that ends in ic. If it does, then the ending is al, and if it doesn’t, it's probably le.
Er and re.
Er and re.
Webster spells theater, center, meter, etc., with the termination er, but most English writers prefer re. Meter is more used to denote a device for measuring (as a “gas meter”), meter as the French unit of length (in the “Metric system”). In words like acre even Webster retains re because er would make the c (or g) soft.
Webster spells theater, center, meter, etc., with the ending er, but most English writers prefer re. Meter is more commonly used to refer to a device for measuring (like a “gas meter”), while meter refers to the French unit of length (in the “Metric system”). In words like acre, even Webster keeps re because er would make the c (or g) soft.
Words ending in er, ar, or.
Words ending in -er, -ar, or.
First, let it be said that in most words these three syllables (er, ar, or), are pronounced very nearly if not exactly alike (except a few legal terms in or, like mort′gageor), and we should not try to give an essentially different sound to ar or or* from that we give to er. The ending er is the regular one, and those words ending in ar or or are very few in number. They constitute the exceptions.
First, it should be noted that in most cases, these three syllables (er, ar, or) are pronounced almost the same, if not exactly alike (with a few exceptions in legal terms for or, like mortgageor). We shouldn't try to make ar or or sound significantly different from er. The ending er is the standard one, and the words that end in ar or or are very few. They are the exceptions.
*While making no especial difference in the vocalization of these syllables, careful speakers dwell on them a trifle longer than they do on er.
*While not significantly changing the way these syllables are voiced, attentive speakers hold on to them a little longer than they do on er.
Common words ending in ar with the sound of er:
Common words ending in ar with the sound of er:
liar collar beggar burglar solar cedar jugular scholar calendar secular dollar grammar tabular poplar pillar sugar jocular globular mortar lunar vulgar popular insular Templar ocular muscular nectar similar tubular altar (for worship) singular
liar collar beggar burglar solar cedar jugular scholar calendar secular dollar grammar tabular poplar pillar sugar jocular globular mortar lunar vulgar popular insular Templar ocular muscular nectar similar tubular altar (for worship) singular
In some words we have the same syllable with the same sound in the next to the last syllable, as in solitary, preliminary, ordinary, temporary etc. The syllable ard with the sound of erd is also found, as in standard, wizard, mustard, mallard, etc.
In some words, we have the same syllable with the same sound in the second to last syllable, like in solitary, preliminary, ordinary, temporary, etc. The syllable ard with the sound of erd is also present, as in standard, wizard, mustard, mallard, etc.
Common words ending in or with the sound of er:
Common words ending in or that sound like er:
honor valor mayor sculptor prior ardor clamor labor tutor warrior razor flavor auditor juror favor tumor editor vigor actor author conductor savior visitor elevator parlor ancestor captor creditor victor error proprietor arbor chancellor debtor doctor instructor successor rigor senator suitor traitor donor inventor odor conqueror senior tenor tremor bachelor junior oppressor possessor liquor surveyor vapor governor languor professor spectator competitor candor harbor meteor orator rumor splendor elector executor factor generator impostor innovator investor legislator narrator navigator numerator operator originator perpetrator personator predecessor protector prosecutor projector reflector regulator sailor senator separator solicitor supervisor survivor tormentor testator transgressor translator divisor director dictator denominator creator counsellor councillor administrator aggressor agitator arbitrator assessor benefactor collector compositor conspirator constructor contributor tailor
honor valor mayor sculptor prior ardor clamor labor tutor warrior razor flavor auditor juror favor tumor editor vigor actor author conductor savior visitor elevator parlor ancestor captor creditor victor error proprietor arbor chancellor debtor doctor instructor successor rigor senator suitor traitor donor inventor odor conqueror senior tenor tremor bachelor junior oppressor possessor liquor surveyor vapor governor languor professor spectator competitor candor harbor meteor orator rumor splendor elector executor factor generator impostor innovator investor legislator narrator navigator numerator operator originator perpetrator personator predecessor protector prosecutor projector reflector regulator sailor senator separator solicitor supervisor survivor tormentor testator transgressor translator divisor director dictator denominator creator counsellor councillor administrator aggressor agitator arbitrator assessor benefactor collector compositor conspirator constructor contributor tailor
The o and a in such words as the above are retained in the English spelling because they were found in the Latin roots from which the words were derived. Some, though not all, of the above words in or are usually spelled in England with our, as splendour, saviour, etc., and many books printed in this country for circulation in England retain this spelling. See {the end of the a}p{pendix}ִ.
The o and a in words like the ones above are kept in English spelling because they come from the Latin roots of the words. Some of the words listed above are often spelled in England with our, like splendour, saviour, etc., and many books printed here for distribution in England keep this spelling. See {the end of the a}p{pendix}ִ.
Words ending in able and ible.
Words ending in able and ible.
Another class of words in which we are often confused is those which end in able or ible. The great majority end in able, but a few derived from Latin words in ibilis retain the i. A brief list of common words ending in ible is subjoined:
Another group of words that often confuses us are those that end in able or ible. Most of them end in able, but a few that come from Latin words ending in ibilis keep the i. Here's a short list of common words that end in ible:
compatible compressible convertible forcible enforcible gullible horrible sensible terrible possible visible perceptible susceptible audible credible combustible eligible intelligible irascible inexhaustible reversible plausible permissible accessible digestible responsible admissible fallible flexible incorrigible irresistible ostensible tangible contemptible divisible discernible corruptible edible legible indelible indigestible
compatible compressible convertible forcible enforceable gullible horrible sensible terrible possible visible perceptible susceptible audible credible combustible eligible intelligible irritable inexhaustible reversible plausible permissible accessible digestible responsible admissible fallible flexible incorrigible irresistible ostensible tangible contemptible divisible discernible corruptible edible legible indelible indigestible
Of course when a soft g precedes the doubtful letter, as in legible, we are always certain that we should write i, not a. All words formed from plain English words add able. Those familiar with Latin will have little difficulty in recognizing the i as an essential part of the root.
Of course, when a soft g comes before the uncertain letter, like in legible, we always know to use i, not a. All words created from standard English words add able. Those who are familiar with Latin will find it easy to see that the i is a crucial part of the root.
Words ending in ent and ant, and ence and ance.
Words that end with "ent" and "ant," as well as "ence" and "ance."
Another class of words concerning which we must also feel doubt is that terminating in ence and ance, or ant and ent. All these words are from the Latin, and the difference in termination is usually due to whether they come from verbs of the first conjugation or of other conjugations. As there is no means of distinguishing, we must continually refer to the dictionary till we have learned each one. We present a brief list:
Another group of words that we should also be unsure about are those ending in ence and ance, or ant and ent. All these words come from Latin, and the difference in their endings typically depends on whether they come from first conjugation verbs or from other conjugations. Since there's no way to tell them apart easily, we have to keep checking the dictionary until we've learned each one. Here’s a short list:
ent confident belligerent independent transcendent competent insistent consistent convalescent correspondent corpulent dependent despondent expedient impertinent inclement insolvent intermittent prevalent superintendent recipient proficient efficient eminent excellent fraudulent latent opulent convenient corpulent descendent different ant abundant accountant arrogant assailant assistant attendant clairvoyant combatant recreant consonant conversant defendant descendent discordant elegant exorbitant important incessant irrelevant luxuriant malignant petulant pleasant poignant reluctant stagnant triumphant vagrant warrant attendant repentant
ent confident belligerent independent transcendent competent insistent consistent convalescent correspondent corpulent dependent despondent expedient impertinent inclement insolvent intermittent prevalent superintendent recipient proficient efficient eminent excellent fraudulent latent opulent convenient corpulent descendent different ant abundant accountant arrogant assailant assistant attendant clairvoyant combatant recreant consonant conversant defendant descendent discordant elegant exorbitant important incessant irrelevant luxuriant malignant petulant pleasant poignant reluctant stagnant triumphant vagrant warrant attendant repentant
A few of these words may have either termination according to the meaning, as confident (adj.) and confidant (noun). Usually the noun ends in ant, the adjective in ent. Some words ending in ant are used both as noun and as adjective, as attendant. The abstract nouns in ence or ance correspond to the adjectives. But there are several of which the adjective form does not appear in the above list:
A few of these words may have different endings based on their meaning, like confident (adj.) and confidant (noun). Typically, the noun ends in ant, while the adjective ends in ent. Some words that end in ant can be used as both a noun and an adjective, such as attendant. The abstract nouns in ence or ance correspond to the adjectives. However, there are several for which the adjective form does not appear in the list above:
ence abstinence existence innocence diffidence diligence essence indigence negligence obedience occurrence reverence vehemence residence violence reminiscence intelligence presence prominence prudence reference reverence transference turbulence consequence indolence patience beneficence preference ance annoyance cognizance vengeance compliance conveyance ignorance grievance fragrance pittance alliance defiance acquaintance deliverance appearance accordance countenance sustenance remittance connivance resistance nuisance utterance variance vigilance maintenance forbearance temperance repentance
ence abstinence existence innocence diffidence diligence essence indigence negligence obedience occurrence reverence vehemence residence violence reminiscence intelligence presence prominence prudence reference reverence transference turbulence consequence indolence patience beneficence preference ance annoyance cognizance vengeance compliance conveyance ignorance grievance fragrance pittance alliance defiance acquaintance deliverance appearance accordance countenance sustenance remittance connivance resistance nuisance utterance variance vigilance maintenance forbearance temperance repentance
Vowels e and i before ous.
Vowels e and i before ous.
The vowels e and i sometimes have the value of the consonant y, as e in righteous. There is also no clear distinction in sound between eous and ions. The following lists are composed chiefly of words in which the e or the i has its usual value.* In which words does e or i have the consonant value of y?
The vowels e and i can sometimes sound like the consonant y, as in righteous. There’s also no clear sound difference between eous and ions. The following lists mainly include words where e or i has its typical sound.* In which words does e or i sound like the consonant y?
eons aqueous gaseous hideous courteous instantaneous miscellaneous simultaneous spontaneous righteous gorgeous nauseous outrageous ious. copious dubious impious delirious impervious amphibious ceremonious deleterious supercilious punctilious religious sacrilegious
eons watery gassy ugly polite instant various simultaneous spontaneous just beautiful sickening outrageous ious. abundant questionable unholy delirious unaffected amphibious formal harmful condescending meticulous spiritual blasphemous
Notice that all the accented vowels except i in antepenultimate syllables are long before this termination.
Notice that all the accented vowels except i in the antepenultimate syllables are long before this ending.
Words ending in ize, ise, and yse.
Words ending in ize, ise, and yse.
In English we have a few verbs ending in ise, though ize is the regular ending of most verbs of this class, at least according to the American usage. In England ise is often substituted for ize. The following words derived through the French must always be written with the termination ise:
In English, we have a few verbs that end in ise, but ize is the standard ending for most verbs in this category, at least in American English. In England, ise is often used instead of ize. The following words derived from French must always be spelled with the ending ise:
advertise catechise compromise devise divertise exercise misprise supervise advise chastise criticise disfranchise emprise exorcise premise surmise affranchise circumcise demise disguise enfranchise franchise reprise surprise apprise comprise despise disenfranchise enterprise manumise
advertise catechize compromise devise divert exercise misunderstand supervise advise punish criticize disenfranchise influence exorcize premise guess liberate circumcise death disguise grant rights franchise repeat surprise inform include despise disenfranchise business manumit
A few words end in yse (yze): analyse, paralyse. They are all words from the Greek.
A few words end in yse (yze): analyze, paralyze. They all come from Greek.
Words ending in cious, sion, tion, etc.
Words that end with cious, sion, tion, etc.
The common termination is tious, but there are a few words ending in cious, among them the following:
The usual ending is tious, but there are a few words that end in cious, including the following:
avaricious pernicious tenacious capricious suspicious precocious judicious vicious sagacious malicious conscious
avaricious pernicious tenacious capricious suspicious precocious judicious vicious sagacious malicious conscious
The endings tion and sion are both common; sion usually being the termination of words originally ending in d, de, ge, mit, rt, se, and so, as extend——extension.
The endings tion and sion are both common; sion usually comes at the end of words that originally ended in d, de, ge, mit, rt, se, and so, like extend——extension.
Cion and cian are found only in a few words, such as suspicion, physician. Also, while tial is most common by far, we have cial, as in special, official, etc.
Cion and cian appear only in a few words, like suspicion, physician. Additionally, while tial is the most common by far, we also use cial, as in special, official, etc.
Special words with c sounded like s.
Special words with c sounded like s.
We have already given a list of simple words in which c is used for s, but the following may be singled out because they are troublesome:
We have already provided a list of basic words where c is used instead of s, but the following can be highlighted because they can be confusing:
acquiesce paucity reticence vacillate coincidence publicity license tenacity crescent prejudice scenery condescend effervesce proboscis scintillate oscillate rescind transcend
acquiesce paucity reticence vacillate coincidence publicity license tenacity crescent prejudice scenery condescend effervesce proboscis scintillate oscillate rescind transcend
Words with obscure Vowels.
Words with tricky vowels.
The following words are troublesome because some vowel, usually in the next to the last syllable unaccented, is so obscured that the pronunciation does not give us a key to it:
The following words are tricky because some vowels, typically in the second-to-last unaccented syllable, are so unclear that the pronunciation doesn’t provide a clue to their sound:
a almanac apathy avarice cataract citadel dilatory malady ornament palatable propagate salary separate extravagant e celebrate desecrate supplement liquefy petroleum rarefy skeleton telescope tragedy gayety lineal renegade secretary deprecate execrate implement maleable promenade recreate stupefy tenement vegetate academy remedy revenue serenade i expiate privilege rarity stupidity verify epitaph retinue nutriment vestige medicine impediment prodigy serenity terrify edifice orifice sacrilege specimen
a almanac apathy greed cataract fortress slow illness decoration tasty spread salary separate lavish e celebrate desecrate add to melt oil thin out skeleton telescope tragedy cheerfulness direct lineage turncoat secretary disapprove curse carry out malleable walkway refresh stun apartment exist school cure income serenade i atone right rarity ignorance confirm tombstone entourage food trace medicine obstacle wonder calm scare building opening violation sample
Words ending in cy and sy.
Words ending in cy and sy.
Cy is the common termination, but some words are troublesome because they terminate in sy. Prophecy is the noun, prophesy the verb, distinguished in pronunciation by the fact that the final y in the verb is long, in the noun it is short. The following are a few words in sy which deserve notice:
Cy is the usual ending, but some words can be tricky because they end in sy. Prophecy is the noun, while prophesy is the verb, and you can tell them apart by the pronunciation—the final y in the verb is long, and in the noun, it’s short. Here are a few words ending in sy that are worth mentioning:
controversy embassy hypocrisy fantasy ecstasy heresy courtesy
controversy embassy hypocrisy fantasy ecstasy heresy courtesy
________
________
The above lists are for reference and for review. No one, in school or out, should attempt to memorize these words offhand. The only rational way to learn them is by reference to the dictionary when one has occasion to write them, and to observe them in reading. These two habits, the use of the dictionary and observing the formation of words in reading, will prove more effective in the mastery of words of this character than three times the work applied in any other way. The usual result of the effort to memorize in lists is confusion so instilled that it can never be eradicated.
The lists above are for reference and review. No one, whether in school or out, should try to memorize these words right away. The best way to learn them is by referring to the dictionary when you need to use them in writing and by noticing them while reading. These two habits—using the dictionary and paying attention to how words are formed in reading—will be much more effective for mastering these kinds of words than trying to cram them in any other way. Trying to memorize them in lists usually leads to confusion that can be hard to shake off.
By way of review it is often well to look over such lists as those above, and common words which one is likely to use and which one feels one ought to have mastered, may be checked with a pencil, and the attention concentrated upon them for a few minutes. It will be well also to compare such words as stupefy and stupidity, rarity and rarefy.
To review, it's often helpful to go over lists like the ones above. You can mark common words you’re likely to use and feel you should have mastered with a pencil, then focus on them for a few minutes. It’s also useful to compare words like stupefy and stupidity, as well as rarity and rarefy.
Homonyms.
Homophones.
The infatuation of modern spelling-book makers has introduced the present generation to a serious difficulty in spelling which was not accounted great in olden times. The pupil now has forced upon him a large number of groups of words pronounced alike but spelled differently.
The obsession of today's spelling book creators has presented the current generation with a significant challenge in spelling that wasn't considered a big deal in the past. Students now encounter a large number of word groups that sound the same but are spelled differently.
The peculiar trouble with these words is due to the confusion between the two forms, and to increase this the writers of spelling-books have insisted on placing the two forms side by side in black type or italic so that the pupil may forever see those two forms dancing together before his eyes whenever he has occasion to use one of them. The attempt is made to distinguish them by definitions or use in sentences; but as the mind is not governed by logical distinctions so much as by association, the pupil is taught to associate each word with the word which may cause him trouble, not especially with the meaning to which the word ought to be so wedded that there can be no doubt or separation.
The strange issue with these words comes from the confusion between the two forms. To make this worse, the authors of spelling books have chosen to put the two forms side by side in bold or italics, so the student constantly sees them together whenever they need to use one of them. They try to clarify the difference with definitions or example sentences; however, since the mind works more through associations than through logical distinctions, the student ends up linking each word with the one that might confuse them, rather than with the meaning that the word should be clearly connected to.
These words should no doubt receive careful attention; but the association of one with the other should never be suggested to the pupil: it is time enough to distinguish the two when the pupil has actually confused them. The effort should always be made to fix in the pupil's mind from the beginning an association of each word with that which will be a safe key at all times. Thus hear may be associated (should always be associated) with ear, their (theyr) with they, here and there with each other and with where, etc. It will also be found that in most cases one word is more familiar than the other, as for instances been and bin. We learn been and never would think of confusing it with bin were we not actually taught to do so. In such cases it is best to see that the common word is quite familiar; then the less common word may be introduced, and nine chances out of ten the pupil will not dream of confusion. In a few cases in which both words are not very often used, and are equally common or uncommon, as for instance mantle and mantel, distinction may prove useful as a method of teaching, but generally it will be found best to drill upon one of the words, finding some helpful association for it, until it is thoroughly mastered; then the pupil will know that the other word is spelled in the other way, and think no more about it.
These words definitely deserve careful attention; however, the connection between the two should never be suggested to the student. It's enough to differentiate them when the student has actually mixed them up. The focus should always be on establishing a solid association for each word with a reference point that will be reliable at all times. For example, hear should always be linked with ear, their (theyr) with they, and here and there should be connected with each other and with where, etc. It will also be observed that, in most instances, one word is more familiar than the other, such as been and bin. We learn been and would never think of mixing it up with bin unless we were explicitly taught to do so. In such situations, it's best to ensure that the more common word is well-known; then the less common word can be introduced, and nine times out of ten, the student won’t even consider confusion. In a few cases where both words are not frequently used and are equally common or uncommon, like mantle and mantel, making a distinction may be useful as a teaching method. However, in general, it’s most effective to practice one of the words, finding some helpful association for it, until it’s completely mastered; then the student will understand that the other word is spelled differently and won’t think about it anymore.
The following quotations contain words which need special drill. This is best secured by writing ten or twenty sentences containing each word, an effort being made to use the word in as many different ways and connections as possible. Thus we may make sentences containing there, as follows:
The following quotations include words that require extra practice. The best way to achieve this is by writing ten or twenty sentences for each word, trying to use the word in as many different ways and contexts as possible. For example, we could create sentences using there, like this:
There, where his kind and gentle face looks down upon me,
I used to stand and gaze upon the marble form of Lincoln.
There, where his kind and gentle face looks down on me,
I used to stand and stare at the marble figure of Lincoln.
Here and there we found a good picture.
Here and there, we came across a good picture.
There was an awful crowd.
There was a terrible crowd.
I stopped there a few moments.
I paused there for a few moments.
Etc., etc.
Etc., etc.
Quotations.
Quotes.
Heaven's gate is shut to him who comes alone. ——Whittier.
Heaven's gate is closed to those who arrive alone. ——Whittier.
Many a tale of former day
Shall wing the laughing hours away. ——Byron.
Many stories from the past
Will help the laughter fly by. ——Byron.
Fair hands the broken grain shall sift,
And knead its meal of gold. ——Whittier.
Fair hands will sift the broken grain,
And knead its golden meal. ——Whittier.
They are slaves who fear to speak
For the fallen and the weak. ——Lowell.
They are slaves who are afraid to speak
For the fallen and the weak. ——Lowell.
If any man hath ears to hear, let him hear.
And he saith unto them, Take heed what ye hear. ——Bible.
If anyone has ears to hear, let them listen.
And he says to them, Pay attention to what you hear. ——Bible.
Hark! I hear music on the zephyr's wing. ——Shelley.
I hear music in the breeze. ——Shelley.
Row, brothers, row, the stream runs fast, The rapids are near, and the daylight's past! ——Moore.
Row, brothers, row, the stream moves quickly, The rapids are close, and the daylight is gone! ——Moore.
Each boatman bending to his oar,
With measured sweep the burden bore. ——Scott.
Each boatman leaning on his oar,
With a steady stroke carried the load. ——Scott.
The visions of my youth are past, Too bright, too beautiful to last. ——Bryant.
The dreams of my youth are gone, Too bright, too beautiful to last. ——Bryant.
(We seldom err in the use of to and two; but in how many different ways may too properly be used?)
(We rarely make mistakes with to and two; but in how many different ways can too be used correctly?)
With kind words and kinder looks he bade me go my way. ——Whittier. (The a in bade is short.)
With kind words and kinder looks he told me to go my way. ——Whittier. (The a in bade is short.)
Then, as to greet the sunbeam's birth,
Rises the choral hymn of earth. ——Mrs. Hemans.
Then, to welcome the sunrise,
Rises the choral hymn of the earth. ——Mrs. Hemans.
Come thou with me to the vineyards nigh,
And we'll pluck the grapes of the richest dye. ——Mrs. Hemans.
Come with me to the nearby vineyards,
And we'll pick the grapes of the finest color. ——Mrs. Hemans.
If any one attempts to haul down the American flag, shoot him on the spot. ——John A. Dix.
If anyone tries to take down the American flag, shoot him on the spot. ——John A. Dix.
In all the trade of war, no feat
Is nobler than a brave retreat. ——Samuel Butler.
In all the business of war, no achievement
Is greater than a courageous retreat. ——Samuel Butler.
His form was bent, and his gait was slow,
His long thin hair was white as snow. ——George Arnold.
His posture was hunched, and he walked slowly,
His long, thin hair was as white as snow. ——George Arnold.
Green pastures she views in the midst of the dale,
Down which she so often has tripped with her pail.
——Wordsworth.
Green pastures she sees in the middle of the valley,
Down which she has often walked with her pail.
——Wordsworth.
Like Aesop's fox when he had lost his tail, would have all his fellow-foxes cut off theirs. ——Robert Burton.
Like Aesop's fox when he lost his tail, he wanted all his fellow foxes to cut off theirs too. ——Robert Burton.
He that is thy friend indeed,
He will help thee in thy need. ——Shakspere.
A true friend will help you when you need it.
——Shakespeare
Flowery May, who from her green lap throws
The yellow cowslip, and the pale primrose. ——Milton.
Flowery May, who from her green lap throws
The yellow cowslip and the pale primrose. ——Milton.
What, keep a week away? Seven days and seven nights?
Eight score and eight hours? ——Shakspere.
What, keep a week away? Seven days and seven nights?
Eight score and eight hours? ——Shakspere.
Spring and Autumn here
Danc'd hand in hand. ——Milton.
Spring and Autumn here
Danced hand in hand. ——Milton.
Chasing the wild deer, and following the roe,
My heart's in the Highlands wherever I go. ——Burns.
Chasing the wild deer, and following the roe,
My heart's in the Highlands no matter where I go. ——Burns.
Th' allotted hour of daily sport is o'er,
And Learning beckons from her temple's door? ——Byron.
The designated hour for daily fun is over,
And learning is calling from the entrance of her temple? ——Byron.
To know, to esteem, to love, and then to part, Makes up life's tale to many a feeling heart. ——Coleridge.
To know, to value, to love, and then to say goodbye, Makes up life's story for many a sensitive heart. ——Coleridge.
Bad men excuse their faults, good men will leave them.
——Ben Jonson.
He was a man, take him for all in all,
I shall not look upon his like again. ——Shakspere.
Bad people make excuses for their flaws; good people move on from them.
——Ben Jonson.
He was a complete man; I'll never see his kind again. ——Shakspere.
There will little learning die then, that day thou art hanged. ——Shakspere.
There will be little learning die then, that day you're hanged. ——Shakspere.
Be merry all, be merry all,
With holly dress the festive hall. ——W. R. Spencer.
Be happy everyone, be happy everyone,
With holly, decorate the festive hall. ——W. R. Spencer.
When youth and pleasure meet,
To chase the glowing hours with flying feet. ——Byron.
When young people and enjoyment come together,
To pursue the bright moments with swift steps. ——Byron.
Quotations containing words in the following list may be found in “Wheeler's Graded Studies in Great Authors: A Complete Speller,” from which the preceding quotations were taken. Use these words in sentences, and if you are not sure of them, look them up in the dictionary, giving especial attention to quotations containing them.
Quotations that include words from the following list can be found in “Wheeler's Graded Studies in Great Authors: A Complete Speller,” from which the earlier quotes were taken. Use these words in sentences, and if you’re unsure about any of them, check them in the dictionary, paying special attention to quotes that include them.
ale dear rode ore blew awl thyme new ate lief cell dew sell won praise high prays hie be inn ail road rowed by great aught foul mean seam moan knot rap bee wrap not loan told cite hair seed night knit made peace in waist bread climb rice male none plane pore fete poll sweet throe borne root been load feign forte vein kill rime shown wrung hew ode ere wrote isle throne vane seize sore slight freeze knave fane reek Rome rye style flea faint peak throw bourn route soar sleight frieze nave reck our stair capitol alter pearl might kiln rhyme shone rung hue pier strait wreck sear Hugh lyre whorl surge purl altar cannon ascent principle
ale dear rode ore blew awl thyme new ate lief cell dew sell won praise high prays hie be inn ail road rowed by great aught foul mean seam moan knot rap bee wrap not loan told cite hair seed night knit made peace in waist bread climb rice male none plane pore fete poll sweet throe borne root been load feign forte vein kill rime shown wrung hew ode ere wrote isle throne vane seize sore slight freeze knave fane reek Rome rye style flea faint peak throw bourn route soar sleight frieze nave reck our stair capitol alter pearl might kiln rhyme shone rung hue pier strait wreck sear Hugh lyre whorl surge purl altar cannon ascent principle
blue tier so all two time knew ate leaf one due sew tear buy lone hare night clime sight tolled site knights maid cede beech waste bred piece sum plum e'er cent son weight tier rein weigh heart wood paws heard sent sun some air tares rain way wait threw fir hart pause would pear fair mane lead meat rest scent bough reign scene sail bier pray right toe yew sale prey rite rough tow steal done bare their creek wares urn plait arc bury peal doe grown flue know sea lie mete lynx bow stare belle read grate ark ought slay thrown vain bin lode fain fort fowl mien write mown sole drafts fore bass beat seem steel dun sere wreak roam wry flee feint pique mite seer idle pistol flower holy serf borough capital canvas indict martial kernel carat bridle lesson council collar levy accept affect deference emigrant prophesy sculptor plaintive populous ingenious lineament desert extent pillow stile mantle weather barren current miner cellar mettle pendent advice illusion assay felicity genius profit statute poplar precede lightning patience devise disease insight dissent decease extant dessert ingenuous liniment stature sculpture fissure facility essay allusion advise pendant metal seller minor complement
blue tier so all two time knew ate leaf one due sew tear buy lone hare night clime sight tolled site knights maid cede beech waste bred piece sum plum e'er cent son weight tier rein weigh heart wood paws heard sent sun some air tares rain way wait threw fir hart pause would pear fair mane lead meat rest scent bough reign scene sail bier pray right toe yew sale prey rite rough tow steal done bare their creek wares urn plait arc bury peal doe grown flue know sea lie mete lynx bow stare belle read grate ark ought slay thrown vain bin lode fain fort fowl mien write mown sole drafts fore bass beat seem steel dun sere wreak roam wry flee feint pique mite seer idle pistol flower holy serf borough capital canvas indict martial kernel carat bridle lesson council collar levy accept affect deference emigrant prophesy sculptor plaintive populous ingenious lineament desert extent pillow stile mantle weather barren current miner cellar mettle pendent advice illusion assay felicity genius profit statute poplar precede lightning patience devise disease insight dissent decease extant dessert ingenuous liniment stature sculpture fissure facility essay allusion advise pendant metal seller minor complement
through fur fare main pare beech meet wrest led bow seen earn plate wear rote peel you berry flew know dough groan links see lye bell soul draught four base beet heel but steaks coarse choir cord chaste boar butt stake waive choose stayed cast maze ween hour birth horde aisle core bear there creak bore ball wave chews staid caste maize heel bawl course quire chord chased tide sword mail nun plain pour fate wean hoard berth descent incite pillar device patients lightening proceed plaintiff prophet immigrant fisher difference presents effect except levee choler counsel lessen bridal carrot colonel marshal indite assent sleigh currant baron wether mantel principal burrow canon surf wholly serge whirl liar idyl flour pistil idol rise rude team corps peer straight teem reed beau compliment
through fur fare main pare beech meet wrest led bow seen earn plate wear rote peel you berry flew know dough groan links see lye bell soul draught four base beet heel but steaks coarse choir cord chaste boar butt stake waive choose stayed cast maze ween hour birth horde aisle core bear there creak bore ball wave chews staid caste maize heel bawl course quire chord chased tide sword mail nun plain pour fate wean hoard berth descent incite pillar device patients lightening proceed plaintiff prophet immigrant fisher difference presents effect except levee choler counsel lessen bridal carrot colonel marshal indite assent sleigh currant baron wether mantel principal burrow canon surf wholly serge whirl liar idyl flour pistil idol rise rude team corps peer straight teem reed beau compliment
The preceding list contains several pairs of words often confused with each other though they are not pronounced exactly alike.
The previous list includes several pairs of words that people often mix up, even though they aren't pronounced exactly the same.
Of course when confusion actually exists in a person's mind, a drill on distinctions is valuable. But in very many cases no confusion exists, and in such cases it is worse than unfortunate to introduce it to the mind. In any case it is by far the better way to drill upon each word separately, using it in sentences in as many different ways as possible; and the more familiar of two words pronounced alike or nearly alike should be taken up first. When that is fixed, passing attention may be given to the less familiar; but it is a great error to give as much attention to the word that will be little used as to the word which will be used often. In the case of a few words such as principle and principal, counsel and council, confusion is inevitable, and the method of distinction and contrast must be used; but even in cases like this, the method of studying each word exhaustively by itself will undoubtedly yield good results.
Of course, when there's actual confusion in someone's mind, practicing distinctions is helpful. But in many cases, there isn't any confusion, and introducing it can be more harmful than not. In any case, it's much better to practice each word separately, using it in as many different sentences as possible; and the more familiar of two similar-sounding words should be tackled first. Once that's established, some attention can be given to the less familiar word; however, it’s a big mistake to give the same amount of focus to a word that will be used infrequently as to one that will be used often. For a few words like principle and principal, or counsel and council, confusion is unavoidable, and the method of distinction and contrast should be applied; but even in these cases, studying each word thoroughly on its own will definitely produce good results.
Division of Words into Syllables.
Breaking Words into Syllables.
In writing it is often necessary to break words at the ends of lines. This can properly be done only between syllables, and this is the usage in the United States for the most part, though in Great Britain words are usually divided so as to show their etymological derivation.
In writing, it’s often necessary to break words at the ends of lines. This should only be done between syllables, which is the common practice in the United States. However, in Great Britain, words are usually divided to reflect their etymological origin.
The following rules will show the general usage in this country:
The following rules will show how things are generally used in this country:
1. All common English prefixes and suffixes are kept undivided, even if the pronunciation would seem to require division. Thus, tion, and similar endings, ble, cions, etc., are never divided. The termination ed may be carried over to the next line even when it is not pronounced, as in scorn-ed, but this is objectionable and should be avoided when possible. When a Latin or other foreign prefix appears in English as an essential part of the root of the word, and the pronunciation requires a different division from that which would separate the original parts, the word is divided as pronounced, as pref′ace (because we pronounce the e short), prog′-ress, etc. (The English divide thus: pre-face, pro-gress.)
1. All common English prefixes and suffixes are kept together, even if the pronunciation suggests they should be separated. So, tion, and similar endings like ble, cions, etc., are never split. The ending ed can be carried over to the next line even when it’s not pronounced, like in scorn-ed, but this is not ideal and should be avoided if possible. When a Latin or other foreign prefix is a key part of the root of the word and the pronunciation requires a different split than what would separate the original parts, the word is divided as pronounced, like pref′ace (since we pronounce the e short), prog′-ress, etc. (The English divide like this: pre-face, pro-gress.)
2. Otherwise, words are divided as pronounced, and the exact division may be found in the dictionary. When a vowel is followed by a single consonant and is short, the consonant stands with the syllable which precedes it, especially if accented. Examples: gram-mat′-ic-al, math-e-mat′-ics. (The people of Great Britain write these words gram-ma-ti-cal, ma-the-ma-ti¬c{s}ªł, etc.)
2. Otherwise, words are divided as pronounced, and you can find the exact division in the dictionary. When a vowel is followed by a single consonant and is short, the consonant goes with the syllable before it, especially if it’s accented. Examples: gram-mat′-ic-al, math-e-mat′-ics. (People in Great Britain write these words as gram-ma-ti-cal, ma-the-ma-ti¬c{s}ªł, etc.)
3. Combinations of consonants forming digraphs are never divided. Examples: ng, th, ph.
3. Combinations of consonants that form digraphs are never split. Examples: ng, th, ph.
4. Double consonants are divided. Examples: Run-ning, drop-ped (if absolutely necessary to divide this word), sum-mer.
4. Double consonants are split. Examples: Run-ning, drop-ped (if it's absolutely necessary to split this word), sum-mer.
5. Two or more consonants, unless they are so united as to form digraphs or fixed groups, are usually divided according to pronunciation. Examples: pen-sive, sin-gle (here the n has the ng nasal sound, and the g is connected with the l), doc-tor, con-ster-nation, ex-am-ple, sub-stan-tive.
5. Two or more consonants, unless they come together to form digraphs or fixed groups, are usually separated based on how they are pronounced. Examples: pen-sive, sin-gle (here the n has the ng nasal sound, and the g is linked with the l), doc-tor, con-ster-nation, ex-am-ple, sub-stan-tive.
6. A vowel sounded long should as a rule close the syllable, except at the end of a word. Examples: na′-tion (we must also write na′-tion-al, because tion cannot be divided), di-men′-sion, deter′min-ate, con-no-ta′-tion.
6. A long vowel sound should usually close the syllable, except at the end of a word. Examples: na′-tion (we must also write na′-tion-al, because tion can’t be divided), di-men′-sion, deter′min-ate, con-no-ta′-tion.
Miscellaneous examples: ex-haust′-ive, pre-par′a-tive, sen-si-bil′-i-ty, joc′-u-lar-y, pol-y-phon′-ic, op-po′-nent.
Miscellaneous examples: ex-haust′-ive, pre-par′a-tive, sen-si-bil′-i-ty, joc′-u-lar-y, pol-y-phon′-ic, op-po′-nent.
CHAPTER IV.
PRONUNCIATION.
This chapter is designed to serve two practical objects: First, to aid in the correction and improvement of the pronunciation of everyday English; second, to give hints that will guide a reader to a ready and substantially correct pronunciation of strange words and names that may occasionally be met with.
This chapter is meant to achieve two practical goals: First, to help correct and improve the pronunciation of everyday English; second, to offer tips that will help a reader achieve a quick and fairly accurate pronunciation of unfamiliar words and names they might come across.
Accent.
Accent.
Let us first consider accent. We have already tried to indicate what it is. We will now attempt to find out what principles govern it.
Let’s first think about accent. We’ve already tried to explain what it is. Now, we’ll try to discover what principles control it.
Accent is very closely associated with rhythm. It has already been stated that a reading of poetry will cultivate an ear for accent. If every syllable or articulation of language received exactly the same stress, or occupied exactly the same time in pronunciation, speech would have an intolerable monotony, and it would be impossible to give it what is called “expression.” Expression is so important a part of language that the arts of the orator, the actor, and the preacher depend directly upon it. It doubles the value of words.
Accent is closely linked to rhythm. It’s already been mentioned that reading poetry helps develop an ear for accent. If every syllable or spoken part of language got the same stress or took the same time to pronounce, speech would be unbearably monotonous, and it would be impossible to convey what we call “expression.” Expression is such a crucial part of language that the skills of orators, actors, and preachers rely heavily on it. It doubles the power of words.
The foundation of expression is rhythm, or regular succession of stress and easy gliding over syllables. In Latin it was a matter of “quantity,” or long and short vowels. In English it is a mixture of “quantity” (or length and shortness of vowels) and special stress given by the speaker to bring out the meaning as well as to please the ear. Hence English has a range and power that Latin could never have had.
The basis of expression is rhythm, which is the consistent pattern of stress and smooth flow over syllables. In Latin, it was about "quantity," referring to long and short vowels. In English, it's a blend of "quantity" (the length of vowels) and specific stress applied by the speaker to enhance meaning and sound appealing. This gives English a range and depth that Latin could never achieve.
In poetry, accent, quantity, and rhythm are exaggerated according to an artificial plan; but the same principles govern all speech in a greater or less degree, and even the pronunciation of every word of two syllables or more. The fundamental element is “time” as we know it in music. In music every bar has just so much time allotted to it, but that time may be variously divided up between different notes. Thus, suppose the bar is based on the time required for one full note. We may have in place of one full note two half notes or four quarter notes, or a half note lengthened by half and followed by two eight notes, or two quarter notes followed by a half note, and so on. The total time remains the same, but it may be variously divided, though not without reference to the way in which other bars in the same piece of music are divided.
In poetry, stress, length, and rhythm are amplified according to a set plan; however, the same principles apply to all speech to varying degrees, including how we pronounce every word of two syllables or more. The key element is "time," just like in music. In music, each measure has a specific amount of time assigned to it, but that time can be split in different ways among various notes. For example, if the measure is based on the duration of one whole note, we could replace that one whole note with two half notes or four quarter notes, or a half note extended by half and followed by two eighth notes, or two quarter notes followed by a half note, and so on. The total time stays the same, but it can be divided in different ways, while still considering how other measures in the same piece of music are divided.
We will drop music and continue our illustration by reference to English poetry. In trochaic metre we have an accented syllable followed by an unaccented, and in dactylic we have an accented syllable followed by two unaccented syllables, as for instance in the following:
We will skip music and keep illustrating with English poetry. In trochaic meter, an accented syllable is followed by an unaccented one, and in dactylic, an accented syllable is followed by two unaccented syllables, like in the following:
Trochaic——
“In′ his cham′ber, weak′ and dy′ing,
Was′ the Nor′man bar′on ly′ing.”
Trochaic——
“In his room, weak and dying,
Was the Norman baron lying.”
Dactylic——
“This′ is the for′est prime′val.
The mur′muring pines′ and the hem′locks…
Stand′ like Dru′ids of eld′.”
Dactylic——
“This is the primeval forest.
The murmuring pines and the hemlocks…
Stand like ancient Druids.”
Or in the iambic we have an unaccented syllable followed by an accented,
as in——
“It was′ the schoo'ner Hes′perus′
That sai′led the win′try sea′.”
Or in the iambic we have an unstressed syllable followed by a stressed one,
as in——
“It was the schooner Hesperus
That sailed the wintry sea.”
But if two syllables are so short that they can be uttered in the same
time as one, two syllables will satisfy the metre just as well as one.
Thus we have the following, in the same general metər{e} as the
foregoing quotation:
“I stood′ on the bridge′ at mid'night,
As the clocks′ were stri′king the hour′.”
But if two syllables are so brief that they can be said at the same
time as one, two syllables will fit the meter just as well as one.
So we have the following, in the same general meter as the
previous quote:
“I stood on the bridge at midnight,
As the clocks were striking the hour.”
It is all a matter of time. If we were to place a syllable that required a long time for utterance in a place where only a short time could be given to it, we should seriously break the rhythmic flow; and all the pauses indicated by punctuation marks are taken into account, in the same way that rests are counted in music. The natural pause at the end of a line of poetry often occupies the time of an entire syllable, and we have a rational explanation of what has been called without explanation “catalectic” and “acatalectic” lines.
It's all about timing. If we put a syllable that needs more time to say in a spot where only a little time is allowed, we'd really disrupt the rhythm. Every pause marked by punctuation is important, just like rests in music. The natural pause at the end of a line of poetry can take as long as a whole syllable, and this helps us understand what people have referred to as “catalectic” and “acatalectic” lines without much explanation.
The same principles govern the accenting of single words in a very large degree, and must be taken into account in reading prose aloud.
The same principles apply to stressing individual words to a great extent and should be considered when reading prose out loud.
The general tendency of the English language is to throw the accent toward the beginning of a word, just as in French the tendency is to throw it toward the end. Words of two and three syllables are regularly accented on the first syllable; but if the second syllable is stronger than the first, it will get the accent. Thus we have sum′mer, ar′gue, pres′ent, etc.; but agree′, resolve′, retain′, etc.* We have indicated above a natural reason why it cannot fail in the cases mentioned. The voice would be incapable of accenting easily the unimportant prefix in such a word as ac-cuse′, for instance.
The general trend in English is to place the accent at the beginning of a word, while in French, the accent tends to be at the end. Words with two or three syllables are usually accented on the first syllable; however, if the second syllable is stronger than the first, it gets the accent. So we have sum′mer, ar′gue, pres′ent, etc.; but agree′, resolve′, retain′, etc.* We have pointed out a natural reason why this happens in the cases mentioned. The voice would struggle to easily accent the less important prefix in a word like ac-cuse′, for example.
Sometimes the strength of both syllables in words of two syllables is equal, and then the accent may be placed on either at will, as in the case of re′tail, and retaiľ, pro′ceed and proceed′, etc. There are about sixty of these words capable of being differently accented according to meaning. The verb usually takes the accent on the last syllable. In words in which it seems desirable on account of the meaning to accent the first syllable when the second syllable is naturally stronger, that second syllable is deliberately shortened in the pronunciation, as in moun′tain, cur′tain, etc., in which the last syllable has the value of tin.
Sometimes the strength of both syllables in two-syllable words is equal, so you can put the accent on either one as you like, like in the cases of re′tail and retaiľ, or pro′ceed and proceed′, etc. There are about sixty of these words that can have different accents depending on their meaning. The verb usually has the accent on the last syllable. When it makes sense to put the accent on the first syllable even if the second syllable is naturally stronger, that second syllable is intentionally shortened in pronunciation, like in moun′tain and cur′tain, where the last syllable sounds like tin.
*In the chapter at the beginning of Webster's dictionary devoted to accent it is stated that these words are accented on the last syllable because by derivation the root rather than the prefix receives the accent. This “great principle of derivation” often fails, it is admitted. We have indicated above a natural reason why it cannot fail in the cases mentioned. The voice would be incapable of accenting easily the unimportant prefix in such a word as ac-cuse′, for instance.
*In the chapter at the beginning of Webster's dictionary dedicated to accents, it states that these words are accented on the last syllable because the root, rather than the prefix, gets the accent by nature. This “great principle of derivation” often fails, as they admit. We’ve pointed out a natural reason why it can’t fail in the cases mentioned. The voice would struggle to easily accent the less important prefix in a word like ac-cuse′, for example.*
In words of three syllables, the accent is usually on the first syllable, especially if the second syllable is weak and the last syllable no weaker if not indeed stronger. Thus we have pe′-ri-od, per′-son-ate, It′-aly, etc.
In three-syllable words, the emphasis is usually on the first syllable, especially if the second syllable is weak and the last syllable is not weaker, if not actually stronger. So we have pe′-ri-od, per′-son-ate, It′-aly, etc.
If for any reason the second syllable becomes stronger than either the first or the last, then the second syllable must receive the accent and the syllable before it is usually strengthened. Thus we have i-tal′-ic, and there is a natural tendency to make the i long, though in Italy it is short. This is because tal is stronger than ic, though not stronger than y. The syllable ic is very weak, but the obscure er, or, ur is still weaker, and so we have rhet′-or-ic. In his-tor′-ic the first syllable is too weak to take an accent, and we strengthen its second syllable, giving o the aw sound.
If the second syllable becomes stronger than the first or last syllable, then the second syllable gets the accent, and the syllable before it usually becomes stronger too. So we have i-tal′-ic, and there's a natural tendency to make the i long, although in Italy it is short. This happens because tal is stronger than ic, but not stronger than y. The syllable ic is quite weak, but the less distinct er, or ur is even weaker, which is why we say rhet′-or-ic. In his-tor′-ic, the first syllable is too weak to take the accent, so we emphasize the second syllable, making o sound like aw.
It will be seen that in words of two or more syllables there may be a second, and even a third accent, the voice dwelling on every other syllable. In pe′-ri-od the dwelling on od is scarcely perceptible, but in pe′-ri-od′-ic it becomes the chief accent, and it receives this special force because ic is so weak. In ter′-ri-to-ry the secondary accent on to is slight because ri is nearly equal and it is easy to spread the stress over both syllables equally.
It can be observed that in words with two or more syllables, there can be a second and even a third accent, with the emphasis falling on every other syllable. In pe′-ri-od, the emphasis on od is barely noticeable, but in pe′-ri-od′-ic, it becomes the main accent, gaining this special emphasis because ic is very weak. In ter′-ri-to-ry, the secondary accent on to is light because ri is almost equal, making it easy to distribute the stress evenly between both syllables.
The principles above illustrated have a decided limitation in the fact that the value of vowels in English is more or less variable, and the great “principle of derivation,” as Webster calls it, exercises a still potent influence, though one becoming every year less binding. The following words taken bodily from the Greek or Latin are accented on the penult rather than the antepenult (as analogy would lead us to accent them) because in the original language the penultimate vowel was long: abdo′men, hori′zon, deco′rum, diplo′ma, muse′um, sono′rous, acu′men, bitu′men; and similarly such words as farra′go, etc. We may never be sure just how to accent a large class of names taken from the Latin and Greek without knowing the length of the vowel in the original,——such words, for example, as Mede′a, Posi′don (more properly written Posei′don), Came′nia, Iphigeni′a, Casto′lus, Cas′tores, etc.
The principles mentioned above have a clear limitation in that the value of vowels in English is somewhat variable, and the major "principle of derivation," as Webster refers to it, still has a strong influence, although it's becoming less strict every year. The following words taken directly from Greek or Latin are stressed on the penultimate syllable rather than the antepenultimate (as one might expect) because in the original language, the penultimate vowel was long: abdo′men, hori′zon, deco′rum, diplo′ma, muse′um, sono′rous, acu′men, bitu′men; and similarly for words like farra′go, etc. We can never be completely sure how to stress a large group of names from Latin and Greek without knowing the length of the vowel in the original, such as Mede′a, Posi′don (more accurately written Posei′don), Came′nia, Iphigeni′a, Casto′lus, Cas′tores, etc.
In a general way we may assume that the chief accent lies on either the penult or antepenult, the second syllable from the end, or the third, and we will naturally place it upon the one that appears to us most likely to be strong, while a slight secondary accent goes on every second syllable before or after. If the next to the last syllable is followed by a double consonant, we are sure it must be accented, and if the combination of consonants is such that we cannot easily accent the preceding syllable we need entertain no reasonable doubt. By constant observation we will soon learn the usual value of vowels and syllables as we pronounce them in ordinary speaking, and will follow the analogy. If we have difficulty in determining the chief accent, we will naturally look to see where secondary accents may come, and thus get the key to the accent.
In general, we can assume that the main stress is on either the penultimate or antepenultimate syllable, the second syllable from the end or the third, and we will naturally place it on the one that seems the strongest to us, while a slight secondary stress falls on every second syllable before or after. If the next to last syllable is followed by a double consonant, we know it must be stressed, and if the combination of consonants makes it difficult to stress the preceding syllable, we can be pretty sure where the accent lies. With regular practice, we will quickly learn the usual values of vowels and syllables as we pronounce them in everyday speech and will follow that pattern. If we struggle to determine the main stress, we will naturally check where secondary stresses might occur, and that will help us figure out the accent.
It will be seen that rules are of little value, in this as in other departments of the study of language. The main thing is to form the habit of observing words as we read and pronounce them, and thus develop a habit and a sense that will guide us. The important thing to start with is that we should know the general principle on which accent is based.
It will be clear that rules aren't very useful, just like in other areas of language study. The key thing is to build the habit of observing words as we read and say them, which will help us develop an instinct that will guide us. What's crucial to begin with is understanding the general principle behind accent.
Special Rules for Accent.
Accent Special Rules.
Words having the following terminations are usually accented on the antepenult, or third syllable from the end: cracy, ferous, fluent, flous, honal, gony, grapher, graphy, loger, logist, logy, loquy, machy, mathy, meter, metry, nomy, nomy, parous, pathy, phony, scopy, strophe, tomy, trophy, vomous, vorous.
Words that end with the following suffixes are typically stressed on the antepenult, or the third syllable from the end: cracy, ferous, fluent, flous, honal, gony, grapher, graphy, loger, logist, logy, loquy, machy, mathy, meter, metry, nomy, nomy, parous, pathy, phony, scopy, strophe, tomy, trophy, vomous, vorous.
Words of more than two syllables ending in cate, date, gate, fy, tude, and ty preceded by a vowel usually accent the antepenult, as dep′recate, etc.
Words with more than two syllables that end in cate, date, gate, fy, tude, and ty, when preceded by a vowel, typically have the stress on the third-to-last syllable, like in dep′recate, etc.
All words ending in a syllable beginning with an sh or zh sound, or y consonant sound, except those words ending in ch sounded like sh as capu-chin′, accent the penult or next to the last syllable, as dona′tion, condi′tion, etc.
All words that end with a syllable starting with an sh or zh sound, or a y consonant sound, except for those ending in ch that sound like sh such as capu-chin′, stress the penultimate or second-to-last syllable, as in dona′tion, condi′tion, etc.
Words ending in ic usually accent the penult, scientif′ic, histor′ic, etc. The chief exceptions are Ar′abic, arith′metic, ar′senic, cath′olic, chol′eric, her′etic, lu′natic, pleth′oric, pol′itic, rhet′oric, tur′meric. Climacteric is accented by some speakers on one syllable and by some on the other; so are splenetic and schismatic.
Words that end in ic usually have the stress on the second to last syllable, like scientif′ic, histor′ic, etc. The main exceptions are Ar′abic, arith′metic, ar′senic, cath′olic, chol′eric, her′etic, lu′natic, pleth′oric, pol′itic, rhet′oric, tur′meric. Some speakers stress Climacteric on one syllable while others stress it on the other; the same goes for splenetic and schismatic.
Most words ending in eal accent the antepenult, but ide′al and hymene′al are exceptions. Words in ean and eum are divided, some one way and some the other.
Most words ending in eal emphasize the third-to-last syllable, but ide′al and hymene′al are exceptions. Words that end in ean and eum are split, with some pronounced one way and others another.
Words of two syllable ending in ose usually accent the last syllable, as verbose′, but words of three or more syllables with this ending accent the antepenult, with a secondary accent on the last syllable, as com′-a-tose.
Words with two syllables ending in ose usually emphasize the last syllable, like verbose′, but words with three or more syllables that end with this also emphasize the third-to-last syllable, with a secondary emphasis on the last syllable, like com′-a-tose.
When it is desired to distinguish words differing but by a syllable, the syllable in which the difference lies is given a special accent, as in bi′en′nial and tri′en′nial, em′inent and im′minent, op′pose′ and sup′pose′, etc.
When you want to differentiate words that only vary by a syllable, you give the syllable where the difference occurs a special accent, like in bi′en′nial and tri′en′nial, em′inent and im′minent, op′pose′ and sup′pose′, etc.
Sounds of Vowels in Different Positions.
Sounds of Vowels in Different Positions.
Let us now consider the value of vowels.
Let’s now think about the importance of vowels.
We note first that position at the end of a word naturally makes every vowel long except y; (e. g., Levi, Jehu, potato); but a has the Italian sound at the end of a word, or the sound usually given to ah.
We first point out that a vowel at the end of a word is usually pronounced long, except for y; (e.g., Levi, Jehu, potato); however, a has the Italian sound when it's at the end of a word, or the sound that is typically associated with ah.
A vowel followed by two or more consonants is almost invariably short. If a vowel is followed by one consonant in an accented syllable it will probably receive the accent and be long. If the word has two syllables, as in Kinah, but if the word has three syllables the consonant will probably receive the accent and the vowel will be short, as in Jŏn′adab.
A vowel followed by two or more consonants is usually short. If a vowel is followed by one consonant in an accented syllable, it will likely get the accent and be long. If the word has two syllables, like in Kinah, but if the word has three syllables, the consonant will probably get the accent and the vowel will be short, like in Jŏn′adab.
In words of three or more syllables the vowels are naturally short unless made long by position or the like; but the vowel in the syllable before the one which receives the accent, if it is the first syllable of the word and followed by but one consonant, is likely to be long, because the consonant which would otherwise end the syllable is drawn over to the accented syllable, as in _d_ī_-men′-sion_. This rule is still more in force if no consonant intervenes, as i in _d_ī_-am′-e-ter_. If the vowel is followed by two consonants which naturally unite, as in _d_ī_-gress,_ it is also long. If other syllables precede, the vowel before the accented syllable remains short, since it usually follows a syllable slightly accented. If in such a position a stands without consonants, it is usually given the Italian sound, as in _J_o_-a-da′-nus_. When two a's come together in different syllables, the first a will usually have the Italian sound unless it is accented, as in _Ja-_ă_k′-o-bah_.
In words with three or more syllables, the vowels are generally short unless they're made long by their position or similar factors. However, if a vowel is in the syllable just before the accented syllable and it's the first syllable of the word followed by only one consonant, it’s likely to be long. This happens because the consonant that would typically end that syllable shifts over to the accented syllable, as in _dī-men′-sion_. This rule applies even more strongly if there’s no intervening consonant, like the i in _dī-am′-e-ter_. If the vowel is followed by two consonants that naturally combine, such as in _dī-gress_, it is also long. If there are other syllables before it, the vowel before the accented syllable stays short because it usually follows a slightly accented syllable. If an a stands alone without consonants in that position, it typically takes on the Italian sound, like in _J_o_-a-da′-nus_. When two a's appear together in different syllables, the first a usually has the Italian sound unless it is accented, as in _Ja-_ă_k′-o-bah_.
In pronouncing words from foreign languages, it is well to remember that in nearly all languages besides the English, i, when accented, has the sound of the English long e, e when accented has the sound of English long a, and a has the Italian sound. The English long sounds are seldom or never represented in foreign words by the corresponding letters. The sound of English long i is represented by a combination of letters, usually, such as ei.
In pronouncing words from foreign languages, it's important to remember that in almost all languages besides English, i, when stressed, sounds like the English long e; e when stressed sounds like the English long a; and a has the Italian sound. The English long sounds are rarely or never shown in foreign words by the corresponding letters. The sound of the English long i is usually represented by a combination of letters, like ei.
We may also remember that in Teutonic languages g is usually hard even before e, i, and y, but in Romance languages, or languages derived from the Latin, these vowels make the g and c soft.
We should also keep in mind that in Teutonic languages, g is typically pronounced hard even before e, i, and y, whereas in Romance languages, or languages that come from Latin, these vowels soften the sounds of g and c.
Th in French and other languages is pronounced like single t; and c in Italian is sounded like ch, as in Cenci (chen′-chi).
Th in French and other languages is pronounced like a single t; and c in Italian is pronounced like ch, as in Cenci (chen′-chi).
Cultured Pronunciation.
Refined Pronunciation.
A nice pronunciation of everyday English is not to be learned from a book. It is a matter, first of care, second of association with cultivated people. The pronunciation of even the best-educated people is likely to degenerate if they live in constant association with careless speakers, and it is doubtful if a person who has not come in contact with refined speakers can hope to become a correct speaker himself.
A good pronunciation of everyday English isn't something you can learn from a book. It's mainly about being careful and surrounding yourself with educated people. Even well-educated individuals may lose their pronunciation skills if they hang out with careless speakers. Plus, it's hard to expect someone who hasn't interacted with refined speakers to become a good speaker themselves.
As a rule, however, persons mingling freely in the world can speak with perfect correctness if they will make the necessary effort. Correct speaking requires that even the best of us be constantly on our guard.
As a general rule, though, people interacting openly in society can speak perfectly well if they put in the effort. Speaking correctly demands that even the best among us stay vigilant at all times.
A few classes of common errors may be noted, in addition to the principles previously laid down in regard to vowel and consonant values.
A few types of common errors can be identified, in addition to the principles mentioned earlier about vowel and consonant values.
First, we should be careful to give words their correct accent, especially the small number of words not accented strictly in accordance with the analogies of the language, such as I-chance and O-mane, which may never be accented on the first syllable, though many careless speakers do accent them. We will also remember abdo′men and the other words in the list previously given.
First, we should be careful to give words the right accent, especially the few words that aren’t accented according to the normal rules of the language, like I-chance and O-mane, which should never be accented on the first syllable, even though many careless speakers do. We will also keep in mind abdo′men and the other words in the list we mentioned earlier.
Second, we should beware of a habit only too prevalent in the United States of giving syllables not properly accented some share of the regular accent. Dickens ridicules this habit unmercifully in “Martin Chuckle.” Words so mispronounced are ter′-ri-to′-ry, ex′-act′-ly, isn′t-best, big-cle, etc. In the latter word this secondary accent is made to lengthen the y, and so causes a double error. The habit interferes materially with the musical character of easy speech and destroys the desirable musical rhythm which prose as well as poetry should have.
Second, we should be cautious of a common habit in the United States where unaccented syllables receive some of the regular stress. Dickens harshly mocks this tendency in “Martin Chuckle.” Words that are mispronounced include ter′-ri-to′-ry, ex′-act′-ly, isn′t-best, big-cle, etc. In the case of the last word, this extra stress ends up lengthening the y, which creates a double mistake. This habit significantly disrupts the musical quality of natural speech and ruins the desirable rhythmic flow that both prose and poetry should have.
Third, the vowel a in such syllables as those found in command, chant, chance, graft, staff, pass, clasp, etc., should not have the flat sound heard in as, gas, etc., nor should it have the broad Italian sound heard in father, but rather a sound between. Americans should avoid making their a's too flat in words ending in ff, ft, ss, st, sk, and sp preceded by a, and in some words in which a is followed by nce and nt, and even nd, and Englishmen should avoid making them too broad.
Third, the vowel a in syllables found in command, chant, chance, graft, staff, pass, clasp, etc., shouldn’t have the flat sound heard in as, gas, etc., nor should it have the broad Italian sound found in father, but instead a sound in between. Americans should avoid making their a's too flat in words ending in ff, ft, ss, st, sk, and sp when preceded by a, and in some words where an a is followed by nce and nt, and even nd, while English speakers should avoid making them too broad.
Fourth, avoid giving u the sound of oo on all occasions. After r and in a few other positions we cannot easily give it any other sound, but we need not say soot′-a-ble, soo-per-noo-mer-a-ry; nor noos, stoo, etc.
Fourth, avoid pronouncing u with the oo sound all the time. After r and in a few other positions, we can't easily give it another sound, but we don't need to say soot′-a-ble, soo-per-noo-mer-a-ry; nor noos, stoo, etc.
Fifth, the long o sound in words like both, boat, coat, etc., should be given its full value, with out being obscured. New England people often mispronounce these words by shortening the o. Likewise they do not give the a in care, bear, fair, etc., and the e in where, there, and their, the correct sound, a modification of the long a. These words are often pronounced with the short or flat sound of a or e (căr, thěr, etc.).
Fifth, the long o sound in words like both, boat, coat, etc., should be pronounced distinctly, without being muted. New Englanders often mispronounce these words by shortening the o. Similarly, they don't provide the correct sound for the a in care, bear, fair, etc., or the e in where, there, and their, which is a variation of the long a. These words are often said with a short or flat sound of a or e (căr, thěr, etc.).
Sixth, the obscured sound of a in wander, what, etc., should be between broad a as in all and Italian a as in far. It is about equivalent to o in not.
Sixth, the muffled sound of a in wander, what, etc., should be somewhere between the broad a in all and the Italian a in far. It's roughly similar to the o in not.
Seventh, a, e, i, o (except in accented syllables), and u are nearly alike in sound when followed by r, and no special effort should be made to distinguish a, o, or a, though the syllables containing them have in fact the slightest possible more volume than those containing e or i followed by r. Careless speakers, or careful speakers who are not informed, are liable to try to make more of a distinction than really exists.
Seventh, a, e, i, o (except in accented syllables) and u sound very similar when followed by r, and no special effort should be made to differentiate between a, o, or a, even though the syllables with them are slightly louder than those with e or i followed by r. Careless speakers, or even careful speakers who aren't informed, tend to overemphasize the distinction that actually doesn't exist.
In addition to these hints, the student will of course make rigorous application of principles before stated. G and c will be soft before e, i, and y, hard before other vowels and all consonants; vowels receiving the accent on the second syllable from the end (except i) will be pronounced long (and we shall not hear au-dă′-cious for audā′-cious); and all vowels but a in the third syllable or farther from the end will remain short if followed by a consonant, though we should be on the lookout for such exceptions as ab-stē′-mious, etc. (As the u is kept long we will say _tr_ŭ′-cu-lency [troo], not _tr_ŭ_c′-u-lency,_ and _s_ū′-pernu-merary, not _s_ŭ_p′-ernumerary,_ etc.).
In addition to these tips, the student will, of course, rigorously apply the principles mentioned earlier. G and c will be soft before e, i, and y, and hard before other vowels and all consonants; vowels that have the accent on the second syllable from the end (except i) will be pronounced long (and we won’t say au-dă′-cious instead of audā′-cious); and all vowels except a in the third syllable or further from the end will stay short if followed by a consonant, although we should be aware of exceptions like ab-stē′-mious, etc. (Since the u is pronounced long we will say _tr_ŭ′-cu-lency [troo], not _tr_ŭ_c′-u-lency,_ and _s_ū′-pernu-merary, not _s_ŭ_p′-ernumerary,_ etc.).
These hints should be supplemented by reference to a good dictionary or list of words commonly mispronounced.
These hints should be backed up by checking a good dictionary or a list of words that are often mispronounced.
CHAPTER V.
A SPELLING DRILL.
The method of using the following story of Robinson Crusoe, specially arranged as a spelling drill, should include these steps:
The method of using the following story of Robinson Crusoe, specially arranged as a spelling drill, should include these steps:
1. Copy the story paragraph by paragraph, with great accuracy, noting every punctuation mark, paragraph indentations, numbers, and headings. Words that should appear in italics should be underlined once, in small capitals twice, in capitals three times. After the copy has been completed, compare it word by word with the original, and if errors are found, copy the entire story again from beginning to end, and continue to copy it till the copy is perfect in every way.
1. Copy the story paragraph by paragraph, with great accuracy, noting every punctuation mark, paragraph indentation, numbers, and headings. Words that should appear in italics should be underlined once, capitalized twice, and in all caps three times. After the copy is done, compare it word for word with the original, and if errors are found, rewrite the entire story from start to finish, and keep copying it until it’s perfect in every way.
2. When the story has been accurately copied with the original before the eyes, let some one dictate it, and copy from the dictation, afterward comparing with the original, and continuing this process till perfection is attained.
2. When the story has been accurately copied with the original in sight, have someone dictate it, and copy it down as they dictate, then compare it with the original, and keep doing this until it's perfect.
3. After the ability to copy accurately from dictation has been secured, write out the story phonetically. Lay aside the phonetic version for a week and then write the story out from this version with the ordinary spelling, subsequently comparing with the original until the final version prepared from the phonetic version is accurate in every point.
3. After you've mastered the ability to copy accurately from dictation, write out the story using phonetic spelling. Put the phonetic version aside for a week, then rewrite the story from this version using regular spelling. Finally, compare it with the original until the final version, prepared from the phonetic version, is accurate in every detail.
The questions may be indefinitely extended. After this story has been fully mastered, a simple book like “Black Beauty” will furnish additional material for drill. Mental observations, such as those indicated in the notes and questions, should become habitual.
The questions can go on endlessly. Once this story is completely understood, a straightforward book like “Black Beauty” will provide extra practice. Mental observations, like those suggested in the notes and questions, should become a regular part of the routine.
THE STORY OF ROBINSON CRUSOE.
(For Dictation.)
THE STORY OF ROBINSON CRUSOE.
(For Dictation.)
I.
(Once writers of novels were called liars by some people, because they made up out of their heads the stories they told. In our day we know that there is more truth in many a novel than in most histories. The story of Robinson Crusoe was indeed founded upon the experience of a real man, named Alexander Selkirk, who lived seven years upon a deserted island. Besides that, it tells more truly than has been told in any other writing what a sensible man would do if left to care for himself, as Crusoe was.)
(Once, some people referred to novelists as liars because they created stories from their imagination. Today, we understand that many novels contain more truth than most histories. The story of Robinson Crusoe was actually based on the real-life experience of a man named Alexander Selkirk, who spent seven years on a deserted island. Moreover, it accurately portrays how a sensible person would manage if left to fend for himself, just like Crusoe was.)
1. A second storm came upon us (says Crusoe in telling his own story), which carried us straight away westward. Early in the morning, while the wind was still blowing very hard, one of the men cried out, “Land!” We had no sooner run out of the cabin than the ship struck upon a sandbar, and the sea broke over her in such a manner that we were driven to shelter from the foam and spray.
1. A second storm hit us (Crusoe recounts in his story), pushing us directly west. Early in the morning, while the wind was still howling, one of the crew shouted, “Land!” As soon as we rushed out of the cabin, the ship hit a sandbar, and the waves crashed over her so violently that we had to take cover from the foam and spray.
Questions and Notes. What is peculiar about writers, liars, know, island, straight, foam, spray? (Answer. In liars we have ar, not er. In the others, what silent letters?) Make sentences containing right, there, hour, no, strait, see, correctly used. Point out three words in which y has been changed to i when other letters were added to the word. Indicate two words in which ea has different sounds. Find the words in which silent e was dropped when a syllable was added. What is peculiar about sensible? cabin? driven? truly? Crusoe?
Questions and Notes. What’s interesting about writers, liars, know, island, straight, foam, spray? (Answer: In liars, we have ar, not er. In the others, which letters are silent?) Make sentences using right, there, hour, no, strait, see, correctly. Identify three words where y changed to i when other letters were added. Point out two words where ea has different sounds. Find the words where silent e was removed when a syllable was added. What’s interesting about sensible? cabin? driven? truly? Crusoe?
To remember the spelling of their, whether it is ei or ie, note that it refers to what they possess, theyr things―the y changed to i when r is added.
To remember how to spell their, whether it's ei or ie, keep in mind that it relates to what they own, their things—the y turns into i when you add r.
II.
2. We were in a dreadful condition, and the storm having ceased a little, we thought of nothing but saving our lives. In this distress the mate of our vessel laid ho a boat we had on board, and with the help of the other men got her flung over the ship's side. Getting all into her, we let her go and committed ourselves, eleven in number, to God's mercy and the wild sea.
2. We were in terrible shape, and with the storm calming down a bit, we could think of nothing but saving our lives. In this crisis, the mate of our ship launched a lifeboat we had onboard, and with the help of the other crew members, they got it over the side of the ship. Once we were all in it, we set it free and put ourselves, eleven in total, in God's hands and into the wild sea.
(While such a wind blew, you may be sure they little knew where the waves were driving them, or if they might not be beaten to pieces on the rocks. No doubt the waves mounted to such a height and the spray caused such a mist that they could see only the blue sky above them.)
(While that wind was blowing, you can be sure they had no idea where the waves were pushing them, or if they might be smashed against the rocks. No doubt the waves rose so high and the spray created such a fog that all they could see was the blue sky above them.)
3. After we had driven about a league and a half, a raging wave, mountain high, took us with such fury that it overset the boat, and, separating us, gave us hardly time to cry, “Oh, God!”
3. After we had driven about a mile and a half, a towering wave crashed into us with such force that it overturned the boat, separating us and barely giving us time to shout, “Oh, God!”
Questions and Notes. What words in the above paragraphs contain the digraph ea? What sound does it represent in each word? What other digraphs are found in words in the above paragraphs? What silent letters? What principle or rule applies to condition? having? distress? getting? committed? eleven? What is peculiar about thought? lives? laid? mercy? blew? pieces? mountain? league? half? could? Compare ei in height and i alone in high. Think of nothing as no thing. To remember the ie in piece, remember that pie and piece are spelled in the same way. Separate has an a in the second syllable—— like part, since separate means to “part in two.” You easily the word PART in SEPARATE, Observe that ful in dreadful has but one l.
Questions and Notes. What words in the above paragraphs contain the digraph ea? What sound does it represent in each word? What other digraphs are found in words in the above paragraphs? What silent letters? What principle or rule applies to condition? having? distress? getting? committed? eleven? What is peculiar about thought? lives? laid? mercy? blew? pieces? mountain? league? half? could? Compare ei in height and i alone in high. Think of nothing as no thing. To remember the ie in piece, remember that pie and piece are spelled the same way. Separate has an a in the second syllable—like part, since separate means to “part in two.” You easily spot the word PART in SEPARATE. Observe that ful in dreadful has just one l.
III.
4. That wave carried me a vast way on toward shore, and having spent itself went back, leaving me upon the land almost dry, but half dead with the water I had taken into my lungs and stomach. Seeing myself nearer the mainland than I had expected, with what breath I had left I got upon my feet and endeavored with all my strength to make toward land as fast as I could.
4. That wave pushed me a long way toward the shore, and after it lost energy, it pulled back, leaving me on the land almost dry, but feeling half dead from the water I had inhaled and swallowed. Realizing I was closer to the mainland than I had thought, I used the last bit of breath I had to get up and tried with all my strength to move toward the land as quickly as I could.
5. I was wholly buried by the next wave that came upon me, but again I was carried a great way toward shore. I was ready to burst with holding my breath, when to my relief I found my head and hands shoot above the surface of the water. I was covered again with water, and dashed against a rock. The blow, taking my breast and side, beat the breath quite out of my body. I held fast by the piece of rock, however, and then, although very weak, I fetched another run, so that I succeeded in getting to the mainland, where I sat me down, quite out of reach of the water.
5. I was completely overwhelmed by the next wave that hit me, but once again I was pushed a significant distance toward the shore. I was about to burst from holding my breath when, to my relief, my head and hands shot above the surface of the water. I was quickly submerged again and slammed against a rock. The impact knocked the breath right out of me. However, I held on to the rock, and even though I was very weak, I made another attempt and managed to reach the mainland, where I sat down, completely out of the water’s reach.
Questions and Notes. In what words in the preceding paragraphs has silent a been dropped on adding a syllable? In what words do you find the digraph ea, and what sound does it have in each? How many different sounds of ea do you find? What is the difference between breath and breathe―all the differences? How many l's in almost?
Questions and Notes. In what words in the previous paragraphs has silent a been removed when adding a syllable? In what words do you find the digraph ea, and what sound does it produce in each? How many different sounds of ea can you identify? What is the difference between breath and breathe―what are all the differences? How many l's are in almost?
In what other compounds does all drop one l? Why do we not have two r's in covered? (Answer. The syllable containing er is not accented. Only accented syllables double a final single consonant on adding a syllable.) What rule applies in the formation of carried? having? endeavored? buried? taking? although? getting? What is peculiar in toward? half? water? stomach? wholly? again? body? succeeded? of?
In what other words does all drop one l? Why don’t we have two r's in covered? (Answer: The syllable with er isn’t stressed. Only stressed syllables double a final single consonant when adding another syllable.) What rule applies in forming carried? having? endeavored? buried? taking? although? getting? What is strange about toward? half? water? stomach? wholly? again? body? succeeded? of?
To remember whether relief, belief, etc., have the digraph ie or ei, notice that e just precedes f in the alphabet and in the word, while the i is nearer the l; besides, the words contain the word lie. In receive, receipt, the e is placed nearest the c, which it is nearest in the alphabet. Or, think of lice: i follows l and e follows a, as in the words believe and receive.
To remember whether relief, belief, etc. have the digraph ie or ei, keep in mind that e comes before f in the alphabet and in the word, while i is closer to l; plus, the words contain the word lie. In receive and receipt, the e is placed nearest the c, which it also is in the alphabet. Or, think of lice: i comes after l and e comes after a, just like in believe and receive.
Observe the two l's in wholly,― one in whole; we do not have wholely, as we might expect. Also observe that in again and against ai has the sound of e short, as a has that sound in any and many.
Observe the two l's in wholly,― one in whole; we do not have wholely, as we might expect. Also notice that in again and against, ai sounds like the short e, just as a has that sound in any and many.
IV.
6. I believe it is impossible truly to express what the ecstasies of the soul are when it is so saved, as I may say, out of the grave. “For sudden joys, like sudden griefs, confound at first.”
6. I think it’s impossible to really express what the joys of the soul are when it has been saved, as you might say, from the grave. “For sudden joys, like sudden griefs, confuse at first.”
7. I walked about on the shore, my whole being wrapped up in thinking of what I had been through, and thanking God for my deliverance. Not one soul had been saved but myself. Nor did I afterward see any sign of them, except three of their hats, one cap, and two shoes.
7. I walked along the shore, completely absorbed in my thoughts about what I had been through, and grateful to God for my rescue. I was the only one who had survived. I didn't see any sign of the others afterward, except for three of their hats, a cap, and two shoes.
8. I soon began to look about me. I had no change of clothes, nor anything either to eat or drink; nor did I see anything before me but dying of hunger or being eaten by wild beasts.
8. I quickly started to look around. I had no spare clothes, and nothing to eat or drink; all I could see ahead of me was either starving or being devoured by wild animals.
(Crusoe afterward cast up a sort of ledger account of the good and evil in his lot. On the side of evil he placed, first, the fact that he had been thrown upon a bare and barren island, with no hope of escape. Against this he set the item that he alone had been saved. On the side of evil he noted that he had no clothes; but on the other hand, this was a warm climate, where he could hardly wear clothes if he had them. Twenty-five years later he thought he would be perfectly happy if he were not in terror of men coming to his island——who, he feared, might eat him.)
(Crusoe later made a kind of ledger to tally the good and bad in his situation. On the negative side, he noted that he had been stranded on a desolate island with no hope of getting away. In contrast, he recorded that he was the only one who had survived. He mentioned that he had no clothes, but then again, it was a warm climate where he could barely wear anything even if he had clothes. Twenty-five years later, he believed he would be completely happy if he weren't constantly afraid of men coming to his island—who he feared might eat him.)
Questions and Notes. How do you remember the ie in believe, grief, etc.? Give several illustrations from the above paragraphs of the principle that we have a double consonant (in an accented penultimate syllable) after a short vowel. Give illustrations of the single consonant after a long vowel. Make a list of the words containing silent letters, including all digraphs. What letter does true have which truly does not? Is whole pronounced like hole? wholly like holy? What is the difference between clothes and cloths? What sound has a in any? How do you remember that i follows e in their? What rule applies in the formation of dying? Point out two words or more in the above in which we have a silent a following two consonants to indicate a preceding long vowel. Give cases of a digraph followed by a silent e. (Note. Add silent e to past and make paste―long a.) Is the i in evil sounded? There were no bears upon this island. Mention another kind of bear. Observe the difference between hardware—— iron goods——and hard wear, meaning tough usage. What is peculiar about soul? impossible? ecstasies? wrapped? deliverance? sign? except? shoes? hunger? thrown? terror? island?
Questions and Notes. How do you remember the ie in believe, grief, etc.? Provide several examples from the previous paragraphs that illustrate the principle we have a double consonant (in an accented second-to-last syllable) after a short vowel. Give examples of a single consonant after a long vowel. Create a list of words that have silent letters, including all digraphs. What letter does true have that truly does not? Is whole pronounced like hole? Is wholly pronounced like holy? What is the difference between clothes and cloths? What sound does a make in any? How do you remember that i follows e in their? What rule applies in forming dying? Point out two or more words above that have a silent a following two consonants to indicate a preceding long vowel. Provide examples of a digraph followed by a silent e. (Note. Add silent e to past and create paste—long a.) Is the i in evil pronounced? There were no bears on this island. Mention another type of bear. Note the difference between hardware—iron products—and hard wear, meaning tough usage. What is unique about soul? impossible? ecstasies? wrapped? deliverance? sign? except? shoes? hunger? thrown? terror? island?
V.
9. I decided to climb into a tree and sit there until the next day, to think what death I should die. As night came on my heart was heavy, since at night beasts come abroad for their prey. Having cut a short stick for my defense, I took up my lodging on a bough, and fell fast asleep. I afterward found I had no reason to fear wild beasts, for never did I meet any harmful animal.
9. I decided to climb a tree and stay there until the next day to figure out how I would face death. As night fell, I felt heavy-hearted since nighttime brings out predators. After cutting a short stick for protection, I settled on a branch and quickly fell asleep. I later realized I had no reason to fear wild animals because I never encountered any dangerous creatures.
10. When I awoke it was broad day, the weather was clear and I saw the ship driven almost to the rock where I had been so bruised. The ship seeming to stand upright still, I wished myself aboard, that I might save some necessary things for my use.
10. When I woke up, it was daylight, the weather was nice, and I saw the ship almost against the rock where I had been hurt. The ship looked like it was still upright, and I wished I was on board so I could grab some things I needed.
(Crusoe shows his good judgment in thinking at once of saving something from the ship for his after use. While others would have been bemoaning their fate, he took from the vessel what he knew would prove useful, and in his very labors he at last found happiness. Not only while his home-building was new, but even years after, we find him still hard at work and still inventing new things.)
(Crusoe demonstrates his good judgment by immediately thinking to save something from the ship for later use. While others would have been lamenting their situation, he took from the vessel what he knew would be useful, and in his efforts, he ultimately found happiness. Not only when he was first building his home, but even years later, we see him still working hard and continuing to invent new things.)
Questions and Notes. There are two l's in till; why not in until?
Questions and Notes. There are two l's in till; why not in until?
What other words ending in two l's drop one l in compounds? What two sounds do you find given to oa in the preceding paragraphs? What is peculiar about climb? death? dies? night? heart? heavy? since? beasts? prey? defense? lodging? bough? never? harmful? weather? driven? bruised? necessary? judgment? others? happiness? build?
What other words that end with two l's drop one l in compound forms? What two sounds are assigned to oa in the previous paragraphs? What is unique about climb? death? dies? night? heart? heavy? since? beasts? prey? defense? lodging? bough? never? harmful? weather? driven? bruised? necessary? judgment? others? happiness? build?
Use the following words in appropriate sentences: clime, dye, pray, bow, write, would. What two pronunciations may bow have, and what is the difference in meaning? What two sounds may s have in use, and what difference do they mark?
Use the following words in suitable sentences: clime, dye, pray, bow, write, would. What are the two pronunciations of bow, and how do they differ in meaning? What are the two sounds that s can have in use, and what difference do they indicate?
What two rules are violated in judgment? What other words are similar exceptions?
What two rules are broken in judgment? What other words have similar exceptions?
VI.
11. As I found the water very calm and the ship but a quarter of a mile out, I made up my mind to swim out and get on board her. I at once proceeded to the task. My first work was to search out the provisions, since I was very well disposed to eat. I went to the bread-room and filled my pockets with biscuit. I saw that I wanted nothing but a boat to supply myself with many things which would be necessary to me, and I glanced about me to see how I might meet this need.
11. As I noticed the water was really calm and the ship was only a quarter of a mile away, I decided to swim out and get on board. I immediately got to work. My first priority was to look for food since I was eager to eat. I went to the bread room and stuffed my pockets with biscuits. I realized that all I needed was a boat to gather a lot of things that would be essential for me, and I looked around to see how I could fulfill that need.
12. I found two or three large spars and a spare mast or two, which I threw overboard, tying every one with a rope that it might not drift away. Climbing down the ship's side, I pulled them toward me and tied four of them fast together in the form of a raft, laying two or three pieces of plank upon them crosswise.
12. I found two or three large beams and a couple of spare masts, which I tossed overboard, tying each one with a rope so they wouldn't drift away. Climbing down the side of the ship, I pulled them toward me and securely tied four of them together to create a raft, laying two or three planks across them.
13. I now had a raft strong enough to bear any reasonable weight. My next care was to load it. I got three of the seamen's chests, which I managed to break open and empty. These I filled with bread, rice, five pieces of dried goat's flesh, and a little remainder of European grain. There had been some barley and wheat together; but the rats had eaten or spoiled it.
13. I now had a raft strong enough to carry any reasonable weight. My next task was to load it. I managed to get three of the sailors' chests, which I broke open and emptied. I filled these with bread, rice, five pieces of dried goat meat, and a little bit of European grain. There had been some barley and wheat mixed together, but the rats had eaten or ruined it.
Questions and Notes. In calm you have a silent l; what other words can you mention with this silent l? Note the double e in proceed and succeed; precede has one e with the silent e at the end. Note that u is inserted into biscuit simply to make the c hard before i; with this allowance, this word is spelled regularly. What is the difference between spar and spare? What other word have we had pronounced like threw? Explain tying and tied. Did any change take place when ed was added to tie? Note that four is spelled with ou for the long o sound; forty with a simple o. How is 14 spelled? How do you remember ie in piece? What sound has ei in weight? Mention another word in which ei has the same sound. What other word is pronounced like bear? How do you spell the word like this which is the name of a kind of animal? In what three ways do you find the long sound of a represented in the above paragraphs? Make a list of the words with silent consonants?
Questions and Notes. In calm you have a silent l; what other words can you think of that have this silent l? Note the double e in proceed and succeed; precede has one e with the silent e at the end. Note that u is added in biscuit just to make the c hard before i; with this in mind, this word is spelled regularly. What is the difference between spar and spare? What other word have we pronounced like threw? Explain tying and tied. Did anything change when ed was added to tie? Note that four is spelled with ou for the long o sound; forty uses a simple o. How is 14 spelled? How do you remember ie in piece? What sound does ei have in weight? Mention another word where ei has the same sound. What other word is pronounced like bear? How do you spell the word like this that is the name of a type of animal? In what three ways can you find the long sound of a represented in the paragraphs above? Make a list of words with silent consonants.
VII.
14. My next care was for arms. There were two very good fowling-pieces in the great cabin, and two pistols. And now I thought myself pretty well freighted, and began to think how I should get to shore, having neither sail, oar, nor rudder; and the least capful of wind would have overset me.
14. My next concern was about weapons. There were two really good shotguns in the main cabin, along with two pistols. I felt pretty well-equipped and started to think about how I would get to shore since I had neither a sail, oar, nor rudder; even the slightest gust of wind could tip me over.
15. I made many other journeys to the ship, and took away among other things two or three bags of nails, two or three iron crows, and a great roll of sheet lead. This last I had to tear apart and carry away in pieces, it was so heavy. I had the good luck to find a box of sugar and a barrel of fine flour. On my twelfth voyage I found two or three razors with perfect edges, one pair of large scissors, with some ten or a dozen good knives and forks. In a drawer I found some money. “Oh, drug!” I exclaimed. “What art thou good for?”
15. I made several trips to the ship and brought back a few bags of nails, a couple of iron bars, and a large roll of sheet lead. It was so heavy that I had to tear it apart and carry it in pieces. I got lucky and found a box of sugar and a barrel of fine flour. On my twelfth trip, I discovered two or three razors with perfect blades, a large pair of scissors, and about ten or twelve good knives and forks. In a drawer, I found some money. “Oh, what a waste!” I exclaimed. “What good are you?”
(To a man alone on a desert island, money certainly has no value. He can buy nothing, sell nothing; he has no debts to be paid; he earns his bread by the sweat of his brow, his business is all with himself and nature, and nature expects no profit, but allows no credit, for a man must pay in work as he goes along. Crusoe had many schemes; but it took a great deal of work to carry them out; and the sum of all was steady work for twenty-five years. In the end we conclude that whatever he got was dearly bought. We come to know what a thing is worth only by measuring its value in the work which it takes to get that thing or to make it, as Crusoe did his chairs, tables, earthenware, etc.)
(To a man alone on a desert island, money has no value at all. He can’t buy anything, sell anything; he has no debts to settle; he earns his living through hard work, his only dealings are with himself and nature, and nature doesn’t expect a profit but doesn’t offer credit either, because a person has to pay in labor as they go. Crusoe had many plans, but it required a lot of effort to bring them to life; ultimately, it meant consistent work for twenty-five years. In the end, we realize that everything he achieved was hard-earned. We really understand the value of something only by measuring it against the work it takes to obtain or create that thing, just as Crusoe did with his chairs, tables, pottery, and so on.)
Questions and Notes. What is peculiar in these words: cabin, pistols, razors, money, value, measuring, bought, barley, capful, roll, successors, desert, certainly? What sound has ou in journeys? Is this sound for ou common? What rule applies to the plural of journey? How else may we pronounce lead? What part of speech is it there? What is the past participle of lead? Is that pronounced like lead, the metal? How else may tear be pronounced? What does that other word mean? Find a word in the above paragraphs pronounced like flower. What other word pronounced like buy? profit? sum? dear? know? ware? What sound has s in sugar? Make a list of the different ways in which long e is represented. What is peculiar about goes? Make a list of the different ways in which long a is represented in the above paragraphs. What sound has o in iron? Is d silent in edges? What sound has ai in pairs? What other word pronounced like this? How do you spell the fruit pronounced like pair? How do you spell the word for the act of taking the skin off any fruit? What sound has u in business? In what other word has it the same sound? Mention another word in which ch has the same sound that it has in schemes. What other word in the above has ai with the same sound that it has in chairs?
Questions and Notes. What’s interesting about these words: cabin, pistols, razors, money, value, measuring, bought, barley, capful, roll, successors, desert, certainly? What sound does ou make in journeys? Is this sound for ou common? What rule applies to the plural of journey? How else can we pronounce lead? What part of speech is it there? What is the past participle of lead? Is that pronounced like lead, the metal? How else can tear be pronounced? What does that other word mean? Find a word in the above paragraphs pronounced like flower. What other word is pronounced like buy? profit? sum? dear? know? ware? What sound does s make in sugar? Make a list of the different ways long e is represented. What’s interesting about goes? Make a list of the different ways long a is represented in the above paragraphs. What sound does o make in iron? Is d silent in edges? What sound does ai make in pairs? What other word is pronounced like this? How do you spell the fruit pronounced like pair? How do you spell the word for the act of taking the skin off any fruit? What sound does u make in business? In what other word does it have the same sound? Mention another word in which ch has the same sound as in schemes. What other word in the above has ai with the same sound as in chairs?
VIII.
16. I now proceeded to choose a healthy, convenient, and pleasant spot for my home. I had chiefly to consider three things: First, air; second, shelter from the heat; third, safety from wild creatures, whether men or beasts; fourth, a view of the sea, that if God sent any ship in sight I might not lose any chance of deliverance. In the course of my search I found a little plain on the side of a rising hill, with a hollow like the entrance to a cave. Here I resolved to pitch my tent.
16. I now started looking for a healthy, convenient, and nice place for my home. I mainly had to think about three things: First, air; second, shelter from the heat; third, protection from wild animals, whether they were men or beasts; fourth, a view of the sea, so if God sent any ship my way, I wouldn't miss any chance of rescue. During my search, I discovered a small flat area on the side of a hill, with a dip that resembled the entrance to a cave. Here, I decided to set up my tent.
(He afterward found a broad, grassy prairie on the other side of the island, where he wished he had made his home. On the slope above grew grapes, lemons, citrons, melons, and other kinds of fruit.)
(He later discovered a wide, grassy plain on the other side of the island, where he wished he had settled down. On the slope above, there were grapes, lemons, citrons, melons, and other types of fruit.)
17. Aft er ten or twelve days it came into my thoughts that I should lose my reckoning for want of pen and ink; but to prevent this I cut with my knife upon a large post in capital letters the following words: “I came on shore here on the 30th of September, 1659.” On the sides of this post I cut every day a notch; and thus I kept my calendar, or weekly, monthly, and yearly reckoning of time.
17. After ten or twelve days, I realized that I might lose track of time because I didn’t have pen and ink. To avoid this, I carved a large post with a knife, writing in capital letters: “I came ashore here on the 30th of September, 1659.” On the sides of this post, I notched it every day, and that's how I kept my calendar, tracking the weeks, months, and years.
(He afterward found pen, ink, and paper in the ship; but the record on the post was more lasting than anything he could have written on paper. However, when he got his pen and ink he wrote out a daily journal, giving the history of his life almost to the hour and minute. Thus he tells us that the shocks of earthquake were eight minutes apart, and that he spent eighteen days widening his cave.)
(He later found a pen, ink, and paper on the ship; but the record on the post was more permanent than anything he could have written down. Still, when he got his pen and ink, he started a daily journal, documenting the details of his life almost to the hour and minute. He noted that the earthquakes were eight minutes apart and that he spent eighteen days expanding his cave.)
18. I made a strong fence of stakes about my tent that no animal could tear down, and dug a cave in the side of the hill, where I stored my powder and other valuables. Every day I went out with my gun on this scene of silent life. I could only listen to the birds, and hear the wind among the trees. I came out, however, to shoot goats for food. I found that as I came down from the hills into the valleys, the wild goats did not see me; but if they caught sight of me, as they did if I went toward them from below, they would turn tail and run so fast I could capture nothing.
18. I built a strong fence of stakes around my tent that no animal could break, and I dug a cave into the side of the hill where I stored my gunpowder and other valuables. Every day, I ventured out with my gun into this quiet landscape. I could only listen to the birds and hear the wind rustling through the trees. However, I went out to hunt goats for food. I discovered that when I came down from the hills into the valleys, the wild goats wouldn’t notice me; but if they spotted me while I was approaching from below, they would take off running so quickly that I couldn’t catch any.
Questions and Notes. Are all words in -ceed spelled with a double e? What two other common words besides proceed have we already studied? What sound has ea in healthy? in pleasant? in please? How do you remember that i comes before e in chief? What sound has ai in air? Do you spell 14 and 40 with ou as you do fourth? What other word pronounced like sea? Note the three words, lose, loose, and loss; what is the difference in meaning? Why does chance end with a silent e? change? What other classes of words take a silent e where we should not expect it? What other word pronounced like course? What does it mean? How do you spell the word for the tool with which a carpenter smooths boards? Mention five other words with a silent t before ch, as in pitch. To remember the order of letters in prairie, notice that there is an i next to the r on either side. What other letters represent the vowel sound heard in grew? What two peculiarities in the spelling of thoughts? Mention another word in which ou has the same sound as in thought. How is this sound regularly represented? What other word pronounced like capital? (Answer. Capitol. The chief government building is called the capitol; the city in which the seat of government is located is called the capital, just as the large letters are called capitals.) What sound has ui in fruit? What other two sounds have we had for ui? Would you expect a double consonant in melons and lemons, or are these words spelled regularly? What is peculiar about the spelling of calendar? What other word like it, and what does it mean? What other word spelled like minute, but pronounced differently? What sound has u in this word? What other word pronounced like scene? Is t silent in listen? in often? Why is y not changed to i or ie in valleys? What other plural is made in the same way? Write sentences in which the following words shall be correctly used: are, forth, see (two meanings), cent, cite, coarse, rate, ate, tare, seen, here, site, tale. In what two ways may wind be pronounced, and what is the difference in meaning?
Questions and Notes. Are all words in -ceed spelled with a double e? What two other common words besides proceed have we already studied? What sound does ea make in healthy? in pleasant?? in please?? How do you remember that i comes before e in chief?? What sound does ai make in air?? Do you spell 14 and 40 with ou like you do fourth?? What other word is pronounced like sea?? Note the three words, lose, loose, and loss; what is the difference in meaning? Why does chance end with a silent e? What other classes of words have a silent e where we wouldn't expect it? What other word is pronounced like course?? What does it mean? How do you spell the tool that a carpenter uses to smooth boards? Mention five other words with a silent t before ch, as in pitch. To remember the letter order in prairie, notice that there's an i next to the r on both sides. What other letters represent the vowel sound in grew?? What are the two oddities in the spelling of thoughts?? Mention another word where ou has the same sound as in thought. How is this sound usually represented? What other word is pronounced like capital?? (Answer: Capitol. The main government building is called the capitol; the city where the government is located is called the capital, just like the large letters are called capitals.) What sound does ui make in fruit?? What two other sounds have we seen for ui? Would you expect a double consonant in melons and lemons, or are those words spelled normally? What’s unusual about the spelling of calendar?? What other word is like it, and what does it mean? What other word is spelled like minute, but pronounced differently? What sound does u make in this word? What other word is pronounced like scene?? Is t silent in listen?? in often?? Why is y not changed to i or ie in valleys?? What other plural is made in the same way? Write sentences using the following words correctly: are, forth, see (two meanings), cent, cite, coarse, rate, ate, tare, seen, here, site, tale. In what two ways can wind be pronounced, and what is the difference in meaning?
IX.
19. I soon found that I lacked needles, pins, and thread, and especially linen. Yet I made clothes and sewed up the seams with tough stripe of goatskin. I afterward got handkerchiefs and shirts from another wreck. However, for want of tools my work went on heavily; yet I managed to make a chair, a table, and several large shelves. For a long time I was in want of a wagon or carriage of some kind. At last I hewed out a wheel of wood and made a wheelbarrow.
19. I quickly realized that I didn't have any needles, pins, or thread, especially linen. Still, I made clothes and stitched up the seams with tough strips of goatskin. I later found handkerchiefs and shirts from another wreck. However, without proper tools, my work proceeded slowly; nevertheless, I managed to create a chair, a table, and several large shelves. For a long time, I needed some kind of wagon or cart. Finally, I carved out a wooden wheel and made a wheelbarrow.
20. I worked as steadily as I could for the rain, for this was the rainy season. I may say I was always busy. I raised a turf wall close outside my double fence, and felt sure if any people came on shore they would not see anything like a dwelling. I also made my rounds in the woods every day. As I have already said, I found plenty of wild goats. I also found a kind of wild pigeon, which builds, not as wood pigeons do, in trees, but in holes of the rocks. The young ones were very good meat.
20. I worked as hard as I could during the rainy season. I was pretty much always busy. I built a turf wall just outside my double fence, and I was confident that if anyone came ashore, they wouldn’t see anything that looked like a house. I also made daily rounds in the woods. As I mentioned before, I found plenty of wild goats. I also discovered a type of wild pigeon, which nests not in trees like wood pigeons, but in rock crevices. The young ones made for good eating.
Questions and Notes. What sound has ea in thread? What is peculiar in the spelling of liven? What is peculiar in the spelling of handkerchiefs? wrecks? What rule applied to the formation of the word heavily? What sound has ai in chair? Is the i or the a silent in carriage? (Look this up in the dictionary.) What sound has u in busy? What other word with the same sound for u? Is there any word besides people in which eo has the sound of e long? In what other compounds besides also does all drop one l? What sound has ai in said? Does it have this sound in any other word? What sound has eo in pigeon? ui in builds? What other word pronounced like hole? How do you remember ei in their?
Questions and Notes. What sound does ea make in thread? What’s unusual about the spelling of liven? What’s odd about the spelling of handkerchiefs? wrecks? What rule applies to the formation of the word heavily? What sound does ai make in chair? Is the i or the a silent in carriage? (Look this up in the dictionary.) What sound does u make in busy? What other word has the same sound for u? Is there any other word besides people where eo has the long e sound? In what other compounds besides also does all drop one l? What sound does ai make in said? Does it have this sound in any other word? What sound does eo make in pigeon? What about ui in builds? What other word sounds like hole? How do you remember ei in their?
Use the following words in appropriate sentences: so, seem, hew, rein, meet. What differences do you find in the principles of formation of second, wreck, lock, reckon? In what different ways is the sound of long a represented in paragraphs 19 and 20? What is peculiar in tough? especially? handkerchiefs? season? raised? double? fence? already? pigeon? ones? very? were?
Use the following words in appropriate sentences: so, seem, hew, rein, meet. What differences do you find in the principles of formation of second, wreck, lock, reckon? In what different ways is the sound of long a represented in paragraphs 19 and 20? What is unique in tough? especially? handkerchiefs? season? raised? double? fence? already? pigeon? ones? very? were?
X.
21. I found that the seasons of the year might generally be divided, not into summer and winter, as in Europe, but into the rainy seasons and the dry seasons, which were generally thus: From the middle of February to the middle of April (including March), rainy; the sun being then on or near the equinox. From the middle of April to the middle of August (including May, June, and July), dry; the sun being then north of the equator. From the middle of August till the middle of October (including September), rainy; the sun being then come back to the equator. From the middle of October till the middle of February (including November, December, and January), dry; the sun being then to the south of the equator.
21. I discovered that the seasons can usually be divided, not into summer and winter like in Europe, but into rainy and dry seasons, which typically go like this: From mid-February to mid-April (including March), it's rainy; the sun is around the equinox then. From mid-April to mid-August (including May, June, and July), it's dry; the sun is north of the equator during this time. From mid-August to mid-October (including September), it’s rainy again; the sun has returned to the equator. From mid-October to mid-February (including November, December, and January), it's dry; the sun is to the south of the equator.
22. I have already made mention of some grain that had been spoiled by the rats. Seeing nothing but husks and dust in the bag which had contained this, I shook it out one day under the rock on one side of my cave. It was just before the rainy season began. About a month later I was surprised to see ten or twelve ears of English barley that had sprung up and several stalks of rice. You may be sure I saved the seed, hoping that in time I might have enough grain to supply me with bread. It was not until the fourth season that I could allow myself the least particle to eat, and none of it was ever wasted. From this handful, I had in time all the rice and barley I needed for food,―above forty bushels of each in a year, as I might guess, for I had no measure.
22. I've already mentioned some grain that got ruined by the rats. One day, I noticed there was nothing but husks and dust in the bag that held it, so I shook it out under the rock beside my cave. This was right before the rainy season started. About a month later, I was surprised to see ten or twelve ears of English barley sprouting up and several stalks of rice. You can bet I saved the seeds, hoping that eventually I could grow enough grain to make bread. It wasn't until the fourth season that I could allow myself to eat even a little of it, and I never wasted any. From that handful, I eventually had all the rice and barley I needed for food—more than forty bushels of each in a year, I’d guess, since I didn't have a measuring tool.
23. I may mention that I took from the ship two cats; and the ship's dog which I found there was so overjoyed to see me that he swam ashore with me. These were much comfort to me. But one of the cats disappeared and I thought she was dead. I heard no more of her till she came home with three kittens. In the end I was so overrun with cats that I had to shoot some, when most of the remainder disappeared in the woods and did not trouble me any more.
23. I should mention that I brought two cats from the ship, and the dog from the ship was so happy to see me that he swam ashore with me. These animals brought me a lot of comfort. But one of the cats went missing, and I thought she was dead. I didn’t hear anything more about her until she returned home with three kittens. Eventually, I had so many cats that I had to shoot some of them, while most of the others disappeared into the woods and stopped bothering me.
Questions and Notes. Why is g soft in generally? How do you pronounce February? What sound ha{ve the }s{'}s in surprised? Mention three or four other words ending in the sound of ize which are spelled with an s. What sound has ou in enough? What other words have gh with the sound of f? We have here the spelling of waste——meaning carelessly to destroy or allow to be destroyed; what is the spelling of the word which means the middle of the body? Is ful always written with one l in derivatives, as in handful above? Mention some other words in which ce has the sound of c as in rice. How do you spell 14? like forty? Why is u placed before e in guess? Is it part of a digraph with e? What sound has ea in measure? What sound has it in this word? What other word pronounced like heard? Which is spelled regularly? How many l's has till in compounds? Mention an example.
Questions and Notes. Why is g soft in generally? How do you pronounce February? What sound do the s's in surprised? make? Name three or four other words ending with the sound of ize that are spelled with an s. What sound does ou make in enough? What other words have gh that sounds like f? We have here the spelling of waste——meaning to destroy carelessly or allow to be destroyed; what is the spelling of the word that means the middle of the body? Is ful always spelled with one l in derivatives, like handful above? Name some other words where ce sounds like c as in rice. How do you spell 14? Like forty? Why is u placed before e in guess? Is it part of a digraph with e? What sound does ea make in measure? What sound does it have in this word? What other word sounds like heard? Which is spelled correctly? How many l's does till have in compounds? Give an example.
Use the following words in sentences: herd, write, butt, reign, won, bred, waist, kneaded, sum. What is peculiar about year? divided? equator? December? grain? nothing? contain? barley? until? each? there? thought? some? disappeared? trouble?
Use the following words in sentences: herd, write, butt, reign, won, bred, waist, kneaded, sum. What is strange about year? divided? equator? December? grain? nothing? contain? barley? until? each? there? thought? some? disappeared? trouble?
XI.
24. One day in June I found myself very ill. I had a cold fit and then a hot one, with faint sweats after it. My body ached all over, and I had violent pains in my head. The next day I felt much better, but had dreadful fears of sickness, since I remembered that I was alone, and had no medicines, and not even any food or drink in the house. The following day I had a terrible headache with my chills and fever; but the day after that I was better again, and went out with my gun and shot a she-goat; yet I found myself very weak. After some days, in which I learned to pray to God for the first time after eight years of wicked seafaring life, I made a sort of medicine by steeping tobacco leaf in rum. I took a large dose of this several times a day. In the course of a week or two I got well; but for some time after I was very pale, and my muscles were weak and flabby.
24. One day in June, I found myself really sick. I had chills followed by fever, with debilitating sweats after that. My whole body ached, and I had intense pain in my head. The next day, I felt a bit better, but was overwhelmed by fear of being sick since I realized I was alone, had no medicine, and didn’t even have any food or drink in the house. The day after, I had an awful headache along with chills and fever; yet the day after that, I was feeling better again and went out with my gun and shot a female goat; however, I still felt very weak. After a few days, during which I learned to pray to God for the first time after eight years of a sinful life at sea, I made a kind of medicine by steeping tobacco leaves in rum. I took a large dose of this several times a day. Over the span of a week or two, I recovered; but for some time after, I looked very pale, and my muscles felt weak and flabby.
25. After I had discovered the various kinds of fruit which grew on the other side of the island, especially the grapes which I dried for raisins, my meals were as follows: I ate a bunch of raisins for my breakfast; for dinner a piece of goat's flesh or of turtle broiled; and two or three turtle's eggs for supper. As yet I had nothing in which I could boil or stew anything. When my grain was grown I had nothing with which to mow or reap it, nothing with which to thresh it or separate it from the chaff, no mill to grind it, no sieve to clean it, no yeast or salt to make it into bread, and no oven in which to bake it. I did not even have a water-pail. Yet all these things I did without. In time I contrived earthen vessels which were very useful, though rather rough and coarse; and I built a hearth which I made to answer for an oven.
25. After I found the different kinds of fruit that grew on the other side of the island, especially the grapes that I dried into raisins, my meals looked like this: I had a bunch of raisins for breakfast; for lunch, I ate a piece of goat meat or some turtle that I grilled; and for dinner, I had two or three turtle eggs. I still didn’t have anything to boil or stew food with. Once my grain was ready, I didn’t have tools to cut or harvest it, nothing to thresh it or separate it from the chaff, no mill to grind it, no sieve to clean it, no yeast or salt to make bread, and no oven to bake in. I didn’t even have a water bucket. But I managed without all these things. Over time, I made clay pots that were pretty useful, even if they were a bit rough, and I built a fire pit that I used as an oven.
Questions and Notes. What is peculiar about body? What sound has ch in ached? Note that there are t{w}o i's in medicine. What is peculiar about house? What other word pronounced like weak? Use it in a sentence. What is the plural of leaf? What are all the differences between does and dose? Why is week in the phrase “In the course of a week or two” spelled with double e instead of ea? What is irregular about the word muscles? Is c soft before l? Is it silent in muscles? What three different sounds may ui have? Besides fruit, what other words with ui? What sound has ea in breakfast? What two pronunciations has the word mow? What difference in meaning? What sound has e in thresh? How do you remember the a in separate? What sound has ie in sieve? Do you know any other word in which ie has this sound? What other sound does it often have? Does ea have the same sound in earthen and hearth? Is w sounded in answer? What sound has o in oven? Use the following words in sentences: week, pole, fruit, pane, weak, course, bred, pail, ruff.
Questions and Notes. What is strange about body? What sound does ch make in ached? Note that there are two i's in medicine. What is odd about house? What other word sounds like weak? Use it in a sentence. What is the plural of leaf? What are the differences between does and dose? Why is week in the phrase “In the course of a week or two” spelled with double e instead of ea? What is unconventional about the word muscles? Is c soft before l? Is it silent in muscles? What three different sounds can ui make? Besides fruit, what other words contain ui? What sound does ea make in breakfast? What two pronunciations does the word mow? have? What is the difference in meaning? What sound does e make in thresh? How do you remember the a in separate? What sound does ie make in sieve? Do you know any other words where ie has this sound? What other sound does it often have? Does ea have the same sound in earthen and hearth? Is w pronounced in answer? What sound does o have in oven? Use the following words in sentences: week, pole, fruit, pane, weak, course, bred, pail, ruff.
XII.
26. You would have smiled to see me sit down to dinner with my family. There was my parrot, which I had taught to speak. My dog was grown very old and crazy; but he sat at my right hand. Then there were my two cats, one on one side of the table and one on the other. Besides these, I had a tame kid or two always about the house, and several sea-fowls whose wings I had clipped. These were my subjects. In their society I felt myself a king. I was lord of all the land about, as far as my eye could reach. I had a broad and wealthy domain. Here I reigned sole master for twenty-five years. Only once did I try to leave my island in a boat; and then I came near being carried out into the ocean forever by an ocean current I had not noticed before.
26. You would have smiled to see me sit down for dinner with my family. There was my parrot, which I had taught to talk. My dog was very old and a bit crazy, but he sat at my right side. Then there were my two cats, one on each side of the table. Besides them, I had a couple of tame kids always around the house, and several seabirds whose wings I had clipped. These were my companions. In their company, I felt like a king. I was the lord of all the land I could see, with a wide and prosperous domain. Here, I reigned as the sole master for twenty-five years. I only tried to leave my island in a boat once, and I almost got swept away into the ocean forever by a current I hadn’t noticed before.
27. When I had been on the island twenty-three years I was greatly frightened to see a footprint in the sand. For two years after I saw no human being; but then a large company of savages appeared in canoes. When they had landed they built a fire and danced about it. Presently they seemed about to make a feast on two captives they had brought with them. By chance, however, one of them escaped. Two of the band followed him; but he was a swifter runner than they. Now, I thought, is my chance to get a servant. So I ran down the hill, and with the butt of my musket knocked down one of the two pursuers. When I saw the other about to draw his bow. I was obliged to shoot him. The man I had saved seemed at first as frightened at me as were his pursuers. But I beckoned him to come to me and gave him all the signs of encouragement I could think of.
27. When I had been on the island for twenty-three years, I was really scared to see a footprint in the sand. For two years, I hadn’t seen another person; then a large group of natives showed up in canoes. After they landed, they made a fire and started dancing around it. It looked like they were getting ready to have a feast with two captives they had brought along. By chance, one of them managed to escape. Two of the group chased after him, but he was a faster runner than they were. I thought, now's my chance to get a servant. So I ran down the hill and knocked one of the pursuers down with the butt of my musket. When I saw the other one about to draw his bow, I had to shoot him. The man I had saved seemed just as scared of me as his pursuers were. But I waved him over and tried to show him all the encouragement I could think of.
28. He was a handsome fellow, with straight, strong limbs. He had a very good countenance, not a fierce and surly appearance. His hair was long and black, not curled like wool; his forehead was very high and large; and the color of his skin was not quite black, but tawny. His face was round and plump; his nose small, not flat like that of negroes; and he had fine teeth, well set, and as white as ivory.
28. He was a good-looking guy, with straight, strong limbs. He had a nice face, not fierce or grumpy. His hair was long and black, not curly like wool; his forehead was quite high and large; and his skin wasn’t fully black, but more of a brownish tone. His face was round and plump; his nose was small, not flat like those of some Black people; and he had nice teeth, well-aligned, and as white as ivory.
29. Never man had a more faithful, loving, sincere servant than Friday was to me (for so I called him from the day on which I had saved his life). I was greatly delighted with him and made it my business to teach him everything that was proper to make him useful, handy, and helpful. He was the aptest scholar that ever was, and so merry, and so pleased when he could but understand me, that it was very pleasant to me to talk to him. Now my life began to be so easy, that I said to myself, that could I but feel safe from more savages, I cared not if I were never to remove from the place where I lived.
29. No man ever had a more loyal, loving, and genuine servant than Friday was to me (that's what I called him from the day I saved his life). I was really happy with him and made it my mission to teach him everything he needed to be useful, capable, and helpful. He was the best learner I could have asked for, so cheerful and so thrilled when he could simply understand me, which made it a pleasure to talk to him. My life started to become so easy that I thought to myself, if I could just feel safe from any more savages, I wouldn't mind staying in the place where I lived forever.
(Friday was more like a son than a servant to Crusoe. Here was one being who could under-stand human speech, who could learn the difference between right and wrong, who could be neighbor, friend, and companion. Crusoe had often read from his Bible; but now he might teach this heathen also to read from it the truth of life. Friday proved a good boy, and never got into mischief.)
(Friday was more like a son than a servant to Crusoe. Here was someone who could understand human speech, who could learn the difference between right and wrong, who could be a neighbor, friend, and companion. Crusoe had often read from his Bible; now he could also teach this outsider to read from it the truth of life. Friday turned out to be a good boy and never got into trouble.)
Questions and Notes. What is the singular of canoes? What is the meaning of butt? How do you spell the word pronounced like this which means a hogshead? In what two ways is bow pronounced? What is the difference in meaning? What other word pronounced like bow when it means the front end of a boat? Encouragement has an e after the g; do you know two words ending in ment preceəded by the soft g sound which omit the silent e? Make a list of all the words you know which, like fierce, have ie with the sound of a long. How do you pronounce forehead? Mention two peculiarities in the spelling of color. Compare it with collar. What is the singular of negroes? What other words take es in the plural? What is the plural of tobacco? Compare speak, with its ea for the sound of e long, and speech, with its double e. What two peculiarities in neighbor? What sound has ie in friend? In the last paragraph above, how do you pronounce the first word read? How the second? What other word pronounced like read with ea like short a? Compare to lead, led, and the metal lead. How do you pronounce mischief? Use the following words in sentences: foul, reign, sole, strait, currant. What is peculiar in these words: parrot? taught? always? reach? only? leave? island? carried? ocean? notice? built? dance? brought? get? runner? butt? knock?
Questions and Notes. What is the singular of canoes? What does butt mean? How do you spell the word pronounced like this that means a hogshead? In what two ways is bow pronounced? What’s the difference in meaning? What’s another word pronounced like bow when it refers to the front end of a boat? Encouragement has an e after the g; can you think of two words ending in ment preceded by the soft g sound that drop the silent e? List all the words you know that, like fierce, have ie pronounced like long a. How do you pronounce forehead? Mention two peculiarities in the spelling of color. Compare it with collar. What is the singular of negroes? What other words take es in the plural? What is the plural of tobacco? Compare speak, with its ea making the sound of long e, and speech, with its double e. What two peculiarities are in neighbor? What sound does ie make in friend? In the last paragraph above, how do you pronounce the first word read? How about the second? What other word is pronounced like read with ea sounding like short a? Compare to lead, led, and the metal lead. How do you pronounce mischief? Use the following words in sentences: foul, reign, sole, strait, currant. What is unusual about these words: parrot? taught? always? reach? only? leave? island? carried? ocean? notice? built? dance? brought? get? runner? butt? knock?
Derivation of words.
Word origins.
It is always difficult to do two things at the same time, and for that reason no reference has been made in the preceding exercises to the rules for prefixes and suffixes, and in general to the derivation of words. This should be taken up as a separate study, until the meaning of every prefix and suffix is clear in the mind in connection with each word. This study, however, may very well be postponed till the study of grammar has been taken up.
It’s always challenging to do two things at once, which is why the previous exercises didn’t mention the rules for prefixes and suffixes, or the derivation of words in general. This should be explored as a separate topic until the meaning of each prefix and suffix is clear in relation to each word. However, this study can definitely wait until grammar has been covered.
APPENDIX
VARIOUS SPELLINGS
Authorized by Different Dictionaries.
Approved by Various Dictionaries.
There are not many words which are differently spelled by the various standard dictionaries. The following is a list of the more common ones.
There aren't many words that are spelled differently by the different standard dictionaries. Here’s a list of the more common ones.
The form preferred by each dictionary is indicated by letters in parantheses as follows: C., Century; S., Standard; I., Webster's International; W., Worcester; E., English usage as represented by the Imperial. When the new Oxford differs from the Imperial, it is indicated by O. Stormonth's English dictionary in many instances prefers Webster's spellings to those of the Imperial.
The form preferred by each dictionary is shown by letters in parentheses as follows: C. for Century; S. for Standard; I. for Webster's International; W. for Worcester; E. for English usage as represented by the Imperial. When the new Oxford differs from the Imperial, it is marked as O. Stormonth's English dictionary often prefers Webster's spellings over those of the Imperial.
accoutre (C., W., E.) accouter (S., I.) aluminium (C., I., W., E.) aluminum (S.) analyze (C., S., I., W.) analyse (E.) anesthetic (C., S.) anæsthetic (I., W., E.) appal (C., S., E.) appall (I., W.) asbestos (C., S., W., E.) asbetus (I.) ascendancy (C., W.) ascendancy (S., I., E.) ax (C., S., I.) axe (W., E.) ay [forever] (C., S., O.) aye ¨ (I., W., E.) aye [yes] (C., S., I., O.) ay ¨ (W., E.) bandana (C., E.) bandanna (S.,{ }I.,{ }W.,{ }O.) biased (C., S., I., O.) biassed (W., E.) boulder (C., S., W., E.) bowlder (I.) Brahman (C., S., I., E.) Brahmin (W., O.) braize (C., S.) braise (I., W., E.) calif (C., S., E.) caliph (I., W., O.) callisthenics (C., S., E.) calisthenics (I., W.) cancelation (C., S.) cancellation (I., W., E.) clue (C., S., E.) clew (I., W.) coolie (C., S., E.) cooly (I., W.) courtezan (C., I., E.) courtesan (I., W., O.) cozy (C., S., I.) cosey (W., E.) cosy (O.) crozier (C., I., E.) crosier (I., W., O.) defense (C., S., I.) defence (W., E.)
accoutre (C., W., E.) accouter (S., I.) aluminium (C., I., W., E.) aluminum (S.) analyze (C., S., I., W.) analyse (E.) anesthetic (C., S.) anæsthetic (I., W., E.) appal (C., S., E.) appall (I., W.) asbestos (C., S., W., E.) asbetus (I.) ascendancy (C., W.) ascendancy (S., I., E.) ax (C., S., I.) axe (W., E.) ay [forever] (C., S., O.) aye ¨ (I., W., E.) aye [yes] (C., S., I., O.) ay ¨ (W., E.) bandana (C., E.) bandanna (S.,{ }I.,{ }W.,{ }O.) biased (C., S., I., O.) biassed (W., E.) boulder (C., S., W., E.) bowlder (I.) Brahman (C., S., I., E.) Brahmin (W., O.) braize (C., S.) braise (I., W., E.) calif (C., S., E.) caliph (I., W., O.) callisthenics (C., S., E.) calisthenics (I., W.) cancelation (C., S.) cancellation (I., W., E.) clue (C., S., E.) clew (I., W.) coolie (C., S., E.) cooly (I., W.) courtezan (C., I., E.) courtesan (I., W., O.) cozy (C., S., I.) cosey (W., E.) cosy (O.) crozier (C., I., E.) crosier (I., W., O.) defense (C., S., I.) defence (W., E.)
despatch (C., S., W., E.) dispatch (I., O.) diarrhea (C., S., I.) diarrhœoa (W., E.) dicky (C., W., O.) dickey (S., I., E.) disk (C., S., I., W., O.) disc (E.) distil (C., S., W., E.) distill (I.) dullness (C., I., O.) dulness (S., W., E.) employee (C., S., E.) employé {[male]}(I., W., O.) encumbrance (C., S., W., I.) incumbrance (I.) enforce——see reinforce engulf (C., S., W., E.) ingulf (I.) enrolment (C., S., W., E.) enrollment (I.) enthrall (C., S., E.) inthrall (I., W.) equivoke (C., S., W.) equivoque (I., E.) escalloped (C., S., O.) escaloped (I., W., E.) esthetic (C., S.) æsthetic (I., W., E.) feces (C., S.) fæces (I., W., E.) fetish (C., S., O.) fetich (I., W., E.) fetus (C., S., I., E.) fœtus (W., O.) flunky (C., S., I., W.) flunkey (E.) fulfil (C., S., W., E.) fulfill (I.) fullness (C., I., O.) fulness (S., W., E.) gage [measure] (C., S.) gauge ¨ (I., W., E{.)} gaiety (C., S., E.) gayety (I., W.) gazel (C., S.) gazelle (I., W., E.) guild (I., W., E.) gild (C., S.) gipsy (C., S., O.) gypsy (I., W., E.) gram (C., S., I.) gramme (W., E.) gruesome (C., S., O.) grewsome (I., W., E.) harken (C., S.) hearken (I., W., E.) hindrance (C., S., I., O.) hinderance (W., E.) Hindu (C., S., E.) Hindoo (I., W.) Hindustani (C., S., E.) Hindoostanee (I.) homeopathic (C., S., I.) homœopathic (W., E.) impale (C., I., E.) empale (S., W.) incase (C., S., I., E.) encase (W., O.) inclose (C., I., E.) enclose (S., W., O.) instil (C., S., W., E.) instill (I.) jewelry (C., S., I., E.) jewellery (W., O.) kumiss (C., S., E.) koumiss (I., W., O.) maugre (C., S., W., E.) mauger (I.) meager (C., S., I.) meagre (W., E.)
despatch (C., S., W., E.) dispatch (I., O.) diarrhea (C., S., I.) diarrhœa (W., E.) dicky (C., W., O.) dickey (S., I., E.) disk (C., S., I., W., O.) disc (E.) distil (C., S., W., E.) distill (I.) dullness (C., I., O.) dulness (S., W., E.) employee (C., S., E.) employé {[male]}(I., W., O.) encumbrance (C., S., W., I.) incumbrance (I.) enforce——see reinforce engulf (C., S., W., E.) ingulf (I.) enrolment (C., S., W., E.) enrollment (I.) enthrall (C., S., E.) inthrall (I., W.) equivoke (C., S., W.) equivoque (I., E.) escalloped (C., S., O.) escaloped (I., W., E.) esthetic (C., S.) æsthetic (I., W., E.) feces (C., S.) fæces (I., W., E.) fetish (C., S., O.) fetich (I., W., E.) fetus (C., S., I., E.) fœtus (W., O.) flunky (C., S., I., W.) flunkey (E.) fulfil (C., S., W., E.) fulfill (I.) fullness (C., I., O.) fulness (S., W., E.) gage [measure] (C., S.) gauge ¨ (I., W., E{.)} gaiety (C., S., E.) gayety (I., W.) gazel (C., S.) gazelle (I., W., E.) guild (I., W., E.) gild (C., S.) gipsy (C., S., O.) gypsy (I., W., E.) gram (C., S., I.) gramme (W., E.) gruesome (C., S., O.) grewsome (I., W., E.) harken (C., S.) hearken (I., W., E.) hindrance (C., S., I., O.) hinderance (W., E.) Hindu (C., S., E.) Hindoo (I., W.) Hindustani (C., S., E.) Hindoostanee (I.) homeopathic (C., S., I.) homœopathic (W., E.) impale (C., I., E.) empale (S., W.) incase (C., S., I., E.) encase (W., O.) inclose (C., I., E.) enclose (S., W., O.) instil (C., S., W., E.) instill (I.) jewelry (C., S., I., E.) jewellery (W., O.) kumiss (C., S., E.) koumiss (I., W., O.) maugre (C., S., W., E.) mauger (I.) meager (C., S., I.) meagre (W., E.)
medieval (C., S.) mediæval (I., W., E.) mold (C., S., I.) mould (W., E.) molt (C., S., I.) moult (W., E) offense (C., S., I.) offence (W., E.) pandoor (C., W., E.) pandour (S., I.) papoose (C., S., W., E.) pappoose (W.) paralyze (C., S., W., I.) paralyse (E.) pasha (C., S., I., E.) pacha (W.) peddler (C., I.) pedler (S., W.) pedlar (E.) phenix (C., S., I.) phœnix (W., E.) plow (C., S., I.) plough (W., E.) pretense (C., S., I.) pretence (W., E.) program (C., S.) programme (I., W., E.) racoon (C.) raccoon (S., I., W., E.) rajah (I., W., E.) raja (C., S.) reconnaissance (C., S., E.) reconnoissance (I., W.) referable (C., S., I.) referrible (W., E.) reinforce (C., E.) reënforce (S., I., W.) reverie (C., S., I., E.) revery (W.) rhyme (I., W., E.) rime (C., S.)
medieval (C., S.) medieval (I., W., E.) mold (C., S., I.) mold (W., E.) molt (C., S., I.) molt (W., E) offense (C., S., I.) offense (W., E.) pandoor (C., W., E.) pandour (S., I.) papoose (C., S., W., E.) papoose (W.) paralyze (C., S., W., I.) paralyze (E.) pasha (C., S., I., E.) pacha (W.) peddler (C., I.) peddler (S., W.) peddler (E.) phenix (C., S., I.) phoenix (W., E.) plow (C., S., I.) plow (W., E.) pretense (C., S., I.) pretense (W., E.) program (C., S.) program (I., W., E.) racoon (C.) raccoon (S., I., W., E.) rajah (I., W., E.) raja (C., S.) reconnaissance (C., S., E.) reconnaissance (I., W.) referable (C., S., I.) referable (W., E.) reinforce (C., E.) reinforce (S., I., W.) reverie (C., S., I., E.) reverie (W.) rhyme (I., W., E.) rhyme (C., S.)
rondeau (W., E.) rondo (C., S., I.) shinny (C., S.) shinty (I., W., E.) skean (C., S., I., E.) skain (W.) skilful (C., S., W., E.) skillful (I.) smolder (C., S., I.) smoulder (W., E.) spoony (C., S., E.) spooney (I., W.) sumac (C., S., I., E.) sumach (W.) swingletree (C., S., W.) singletree (I.) synonym (C., S., I., E.) synonyme (W.) syrup (C., E.) sirup (S., I., W.) Tartar (I., W., E.) Tatar (C., S.) threnody (C., S., W., E.) threnode (I.) tigerish (C., S., I.) tigrish (W., E.) timbal (C., S.) tymbal (I., W., E) titbit (C., S.) tidbit (I., W., E.) vise [tool] (C., S., I.) vice ¨ (W., E.) vizier (S., I., W., E.) vizir (C.) visor (I., W., E.) vizor (C., S.) whippletree (S., I., W., E.) whiffletree (C.) whimsy (C., S.) whimsey (I., W., E.)
rondeau (W., E.) rondo (C., S., I.) shinny (C., S.) shinty (I., W., E.) skean (C., S., I., E.) skain (W.) skillful (C., S., W., E.) skilful (I.) smolder (C., S., I.) smoulder (W., E.) spoony (C., S., E.) spooney (I., W.) sumac (C., S., I., E.) sumach (W.) swingletree (C., S., W.) singletree (I.) synonym (C., S., I., E.) synonyme (W.) syrup (C., E.) sirup (S., I., W.) Tartar (I., W., E.) Tatar (C., S.) threnody (C., S., W., E.) threnode (I.) tigerish (C., S., I.) tigrish (W., E.) timbal (C., S.) tymbal (I., W., E) titbit (C., S.) tidbit (I., W., E.) vise [tool] (C., S., I.) vice ¨ (W., E.) vizier (S., I., W., E.) vizir (C.) visor (I., W., E.) vizor (C., S.) whippletree (S., I., W., E.) whiffletree (C.) whimsy (C., S.) whimsey (I., W., E.)
whisky (C., S., I., E.)
whiskey (W.{, Irish})
wilful (C., S., W., E.)
willful (I.)
woeful (C., I., E.)
woful (S., W.)
worshiped (C., S., I.)
worshipped (W., E.)
whisky (C., S., I., E.)
whiskey (W.{, Irish})
willful (C., S., W., E.)
willful (I.)
woeful (C., I., E.)
woeful (S., W.)
worshiped (C., S., I.)
worshipped (W., E.)
All dictionaries but the Century make envelop the verb, envelope the noun. The Century spells the noun envelop as well as the verb.
All dictionaries except for the Century list envelop as the verb and envelope as the noun. The Century uses envelop for both the noun and the verb.
According to the Century, Worcester, and the English dictionaries, practise (with s) is the verb, practice (with c) is the noun. The Standard spells both practise, and Webster both practice.
According to the Century, Worcester, and the English dictionaries, practise (with s) is the verb, and practice (with c) is the noun. The Standard spells both practise and Webster spells both practice.
Doubling l.
Doubling the L.
Worcester and the English dictionaries double a final l in all cases when a syllable is added, Webster, the Century, and the Standard only when the rule requires it. Thus: wool——woollen, Jewel——jewelled, travel——traveller.
Worcester and the English dictionaries double a final l in all situations when a syllable is added, while Webster, the Century, and the Standard only do so when the rule requires it. So: wool——woollen, jewel——jewelled, travel——traveller.
Re for er.
Re for er.
The following are the words which Worcester and the English dictionaries spell re, while Webster, the Century, and the Standard prefer er: Calibre, centre, litre, lustre, manœuvre (I. maneuver), meagre, metre, mitre, nitre, ochre, ombre, piastre, sabre, sceptre, sepulchre, sombre, spectre, theatre, zaffre,{.}
The following are the words that Worcester and the English dictionaries spell re, while Webster, the Century, and the Standard prefer er: Caliber, center, liter, luster, maneuver, meager, meter, mitre, nitre, ochre, ombre, piastre, saber, scepter, sepulcher, somber, specter, theater, zaffre.
English words with our.
English words with "our."
The following are the words in which the English retain the u in endings spelled or by American dictionaries. All other words, such as author, emperor, etc., though formerly spelled with u, no longer retain it even in England:
The following are the words in which the English keep the u in endings spelled or by American dictionaries. All other words, like author, emperor, etc., even though they were once spelled with u, no longer retain it, even in England:
Arbour, ardour, armour, behaviour, candour, clamour, colour, contour, demeanour, dolour, enamour, endeavour, favour, fervour, flavour, glamour, harbour, honour, humour, labour, neighbour, odour, parlour, rancour, rigour, rumour, saviour, splendour, succour, tabour, tambour, tremour, valour, vapour, vigour,.
Arbor, passion, armor, behavior, honesty, uproar, color, shape, demeanor, sorrow, love, effort, support, enthusiasm, taste, attractiveness, shelter, respect, humor, work, neighbor, scent, living room, bitterness, strictness, gossip, rescuer, brilliance, assistance, drum, drum, tremor, courage, vapor, energy.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
THE ART σƒ WRITING & SPEAKING ךђℓ ENGLISH LANGUAGE
THE ART OF WRITING & SPEAKING IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
SHERWIN CODY
Special S Y S T E M Edition
Special S Y S T E M Edition
COMPOSITION & Rhetoric
Writing & Rhetoric
The Old Greek Press Chicago New{ }York Boston
The Old Greek Press Chicago New{ }York Boston
Revised Edition.
Updated Edition.
Copyright,1903, BY SHERWIN CODY.
Copyright, 1903, BY SHERWIN CODY.
Note. The thanks of the author are due to Dr. Edwin H. Lewis, of the Lewis Institute, Chicago, and to Prof. John F. Genung, Ph. D., of Amherst College, for suggestions made after reading the proof of this series.
Note. The author would like to thank Dr. Edwin H. Lewis from the Lewis Institute in Chicago, and Prof. John F. Genung, Ph.D., from Amherst College, for their suggestions after reviewing the proof of this series.
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION.——THE METHOD OF THE MASTERS… 7
СНАРТΕR I. DICTION.
CHAPTER II. FIGURES OF SPEECH.
CHAPTER III. STYLE.
CHAPTER IV. HUMOR.———Addison, Stevenson, Lamb.
CHAPTER V. RIDICULE.———Poe.
CHAPTER VI. THE RHETORICAL, IMPASSIONED AND LOFTY STYLES.
———Macaulay and De Quincey.
CHAPTER VII. RESERVE.———Thackeray.
CHAPTER VIII. CRITICISM.———Matthew Arnold and Ruskin.
CHAPTER IX. THE STYLE OF FICTION:
NARRATIVE, DESCRIPTION, AND DIALOGUE.————Dickens.
CHAPTER X. THE EPIGRAMMATIC STYLE.————Stephen Crane.
CHAPTER XI. THE POWER OF SIMPLICITY.————The Bible, Franklin, Lincoln.
CHAPTER XII. HARMONY OF STYLE.————Irving and Hawthorne.
CHAPTER XIII. IMAGINATION AND REALITY.————THE AUDIENCE.
CHAPTER XIV. THE USE OF MODELS IN WRITING FICTION.
CHAPTER XV. CONTRAST.
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION.——THE METHOD OF THE MASTERS… 7
CHAPTER I. DICTION.
CHAPTER II. FIGURES OF SPEECH.
CHAPTER III. STYLE.
CHAPTER IV. HUMOR.———Addison, Stevenson, Lamb.
CHAPTER V. RIDICULE.———Poe.
CHAPTER VI. THE RHETORICAL, IMPASSIONED AND LOFTY STYLES.
———Macaulay and De Quincey.
CHAPTER VII. RESERVE.———Thackeray.
CHAPTER VIII. CRITICISM.———Matthew Arnold and Ruskin.
CHAPTER IX. THE STYLE OF FICTION:
NARRATIVE, DESCRIPTION, AND DIALOGUE.————Dickens.
CHAPTER X. THE EPIGRAMMATIC STYLE.————Stephen Crane.
CHAPTER XI. THE POWER OF SIMPLICITY.————The Bible, Franklin, Lincoln.
CHAPTER XII. HARMONY OF STYLE.————Irving and Hawthorne.
CHAPTER XIII. IMAGINATION AND REALITY.————THE AUDIENCE.
CHAPTER XIV. THE USE OF MODELS IN WRITING FICTION.
CHAPTER XV. CONTRAST.
APPENDIX
COMPOSITION
INTRODUCTION.
THE METHOD OF THE MASTERS
For Learning to Write and Speak Masterly English.
For Learning to Write and Speak Excellent English.
The first textbook on rhetoric which still remains to us was written by Aristotle. He defines rhetoric as the art of writing effectively, viewing it primarily as the art of persuasion in public speaking, but making it include all the devices for convincing or moving the mind of the hearer or reader.
The first textbook on rhetoric that we still have today was written by Aristotle. He defines rhetoric as the art of effective writing, seeing it mainly as the art of persuasion in public speaking, but also including all the techniques for convincing or influencing the thoughts of the listener or reader.
Aristotle's treatise is profound and scholarly, and every textbook of rhetoric since written is little more than a restatement of some part of his comprehensive work. It is a scientific analysis of the subject, prepared for critics and men of a highly cultured and investigating turn of mind, and was not originally intended to instruct ordinary persons in the management of words and sentences for practical purposes.
Aristotle's treatise is deep and academic, and every rhetoric textbook written since is basically just a rephrasing of some part of his extensive work. It’s a scientific analysis of the topic, made for critics and people with a sophisticated and inquisitive mindset, and wasn’t originally meant to teach everyday people how to handle words and sentences for practical use.
While no one doubts that an ordinary command of words may be learned, there is an almost universal impression in the public mind, and has been even from the time of Aristotle himself, that writing well or ill is almost purely a matter of talent, genius, or, let us say, instinct. It has been truly observed that the formal study of rhetoric never has made a single successful writer, and a great many writers have succeeded preëminently without ever having opened a rhetorical textbook. It has not been difficult, therefore, to come to the conclusion that writing well or ill comes by nature alone, and that all we can do is to pray for luck,―or, at the most, to practise incessantly. Write, write, write; and keep on writing; and destroy what you write and write again; cover a ton of paper with ink; some day perhaps you will succeed―says the literary adviser to the young author. And to the business man who has letters to write and wishes to write them well, no one ever says anything. The business man himself has begun to have a vague impression that he would like to improve his command of language; but who is there who even pretends to have any power to help him? There is the school grind of “grammar and composition,” and if it is kept up for enough years, and the student happens to find any point of interest in it, some good may result from it. That is the best that anyone has to offer.
While everyone agrees that you can learn to use words, there’s a widespread belief, going back to Aristotle, that writing well or poorly is mostly about talent, genius, or instinct. It has been pointed out that studying rhetoric formally has never produced a single successful writer, and many have found great success without ever touching a rhetoric textbook. So, it’s easy to conclude that writing well or poorly is based on natural ability alone, and all we can do is hope for luck—or, at best, practice constantly. Write, write, write; keep writing; throw away what you write and write again; cover tons of paper with ink; maybe someday you’ll succeed, says the literary advisor to the aspiring author. Yet, when it comes to the business person who needs to write letters well, no one offers any advice. The business person has started to feel that they’d like to improve their language skills, but who claims they can help? There’s the tedious “grammar and composition” class, and if it goes on long enough and the student finds some interest, it might yield some benefits. That’s the best anyone can suggest.
Some thoughtful people are convinced that writing, even business letters, is as much a matter for professional training as music or painting or carpentry or plumbing. That view certainly seems reasonable. And against that is the conviction of the general public that use of language is an art essentially different from any of the other arts, that all people possess it more or less, and that the degree to which they possess it depends on their general education and environment; while the few who possess it in a preëminent degree, do so by reason of peculiar endowments and talent, not to say genius. This latter view, too, is full of truth. We have only to reflect a moment to see that rhetoric as it is commonly taught can by no possibility give actual skill. Rhetoric is a system of scientific analysis. Aristotle was a scientist, not an artist. Analysis tears to pieces, divides into parts, and so destroys. The practical art of writing is wholly synthesis,―building up, putting together, creating, ―and so, of course, a matter of instinct. All the dissection, or vivisection, in the world, would never teach a man how to bring a human being into the world, or any other living thing; yet the untaught instinct of all animals solves the problem of creation every minute of the world's history. In fact, it is a favorite comparison to speak of poems, stories, and other works of literary art as being the children of the writer's brain; as if works of literary art came about in precisely the same simple, yet mysterious, way that children are conceived and brought into the world.
Some thoughtful individuals believe that writing, even business letters, requires the same level of professional training as music, painting, carpentry, or plumbing. That viewpoint seems reasonable. In contrast, many people think that using language is an art that is fundamentally different from those other arts, that everyone has some ability in it, and that how well they can use it depends on their overall education and surroundings. They believe that only a few people have exceptional skill due to unique talents or, you could say, genius. This perspective also holds a lot of truth. If we think about it for a moment, we can see that the way rhetoric is generally taught cannot actually provide real skills. Rhetoric is a system for scientific analysis. Aristotle was a scientist, not an artist. Analysis breaks things down, separates them into parts, and thus destroys them. The practical skill of writing is all about synthesis—building, putting together, creating—which is inherently a matter of instinct. No amount of dissection or analysis would ever teach someone how to bring a human being or any other living thing into the world; yet, the natural instinct of all animals solves the creation problem every minute of history. In fact, people often liken poems, stories, and other works of literary art to being the children of a writer's imagination, suggesting that literary creations come into being in the same simple yet mysterious way that children are conceived and born.
Yet the comparison must not be pushed too far, and we must not lose sight of the facts in the case. You and I were not especially endowed with literary talent. Perhaps we are business men and are glad we are not so endowed. But we want to write and speak better than we do, ―if possible, better than those with whom we have to compete. Now, is there not a practical way in which we can help ourselves? There is no thought that we shall become geniuses, or anything of the kind. For us, why should there be any difference between plumbing and writing? If all men were born plumbers, still some would be much better than others, and no doubt the poor ones could improve their work in a great measure, simply by getting hints and trying. However, we all know that the trying will not do very much good without the hints. Now, where are the master-plumber's hints―or rather, the master-writer's hints, for the apprentice writer?
Yet we shouldn't take the comparison too far, and we need to keep the facts in mind. You and I aren't particularly gifted in writing. Maybe we're business people and we're actually relieved that we're not. But we want to write and speak better than we currently do—if possible, even better than those we're competing against. So, isn't there a practical way for us to improve? It's not like we think we'll become geniuses or anything like that. For us, why should there be a difference between plumbing and writing? If everyone were born plumbers, some would definitely be better than others, and the less skilled could still significantly improve their work just by getting tips and putting in the effort. However, we all know that trying won't do much without those tips. So, where are the master plumber's insights—or rather, the master writer's tips for the aspiring writer?
No doubt some half million unsuccessful authors will jump to their feet on the instant and offer their services. But the business man is not convinced of their ability to help him. Nor does he expect very much real help from the hundred thousand school teachers who teach “grammar and composition” in the schools. The fact is, the rank and file of teachers in the common schools have learned just enough to know that they want help themselves. Probably there is not a more eager class in existence than they.
No doubt, around half a million unsuccessful authors will instantly stand up and offer their services. But the businessman isn’t convinced they can really help him. He also doesn’t expect much actual support from the hundred thousand school teachers who instruct “grammar and composition” in schools. The truth is, most teachers in public schools have learned just enough to realize that they need help themselves. There’s probably no more eager group than they are.
The stock advice of successful authors is, Practise. But unluckily I have practised, and it does not seem, to do any good. “I write one hundred long letters (or rather dictate them to my stenographer) every day,” says the business man. “My newspaper reports would fill a hundred splendid folios,” says the newspaper man, “and yet―and yet―I can't seem to hit it when I write a novel.” No, practice without guidance will not do very much, especially if we happen to be of the huge class of the uninspired. Our lack of genius, however, does not seem to be a reason why we should continue utterly ignorant of the art of making ourselves felt as well as heard when we use words. Here again use of language differs somewhat from painting or music, for unless we had some talent there would be no reason for attempting those arts.
The common advice from successful authors is to practice. But unfortunately, I have practiced, and it doesn’t seem to help. “I write a hundred long letters (or I have my assistant dictate them for me) every day,” says the business person. “My newspaper articles could fill a hundred amazing volumes,” says the journalist, “and yet—yet—I can’t seem to get it right when I write a novel.” No, practice without direction doesn’t achieve much, especially if we happen to be part of the vast group of the uninspired. Our lack of talent, however, doesn’t mean we should stay completely clueless about the art of making our words impactful as well as audible. Here, the use of language differs a bit from painting or music, because if we didn’t have any skill, there would be no reason to try those forms of art.
Let us attack our problem from a common-sense point of view. How have greater writers learned to write? How do plumbers learn plumbing?
Let’s tackle our problem from a common-sense perspective. How have great writers learned to write? How do plumbers learn their craft?
The process by which plumbers learn is simple. They watch the master-plumber, and then try to do likewise, and they keep at this for two or three years. At the end they are themselves master-plumbers, or at least masters of plumbing.
The way plumbers learn is straightforward. They observe the master plumber, then attempt to do the same, and they continue this for two or three years. In the end, they become master plumbers themselves, or at the very least, experts in plumbing.
The method by which great writers, especially great writers who didn't start with a peculiar genius, have learned to write is much the same. Take Stevenson, for instance: he says he “played the sedulous ape.” He studied the masterpieces of literature, and tried to imitate them. He kept at this for several years. At the end he was a master himself. We have reason to believe that the same was true of Thackeray, of Dumas, of Cooper, of Balzac, of Lowell. All these men owe their skill very largely to practice in imitation of other great writers, and often of writers not as great as they themselves. Moreover, no one will accuse any of these writers of not being original in the highest degree. To imitate a dozen or fifty great writers never makes imitators; the imitator, so called, is the person who imitates one. To imitate even two destroys all the bad effects of imitation.
The way great writers, especially those who didn’t start with a unique genius, have learned to write is pretty similar. Take Stevenson, for example: he said he “played the diligent ape.” He studied the masterpieces of literature and tried to mimic them. He kept at it for several years. By the end, he was a master himself. We have good reason to believe the same was true for Thackeray, Dumas, Cooper, Balzac, and Lowell. All these men owe a lot of their skill to practicing by imitating other great writers, and often writers who weren’t as great as they were. Plus, no one would say that any of these writers lacked originality in the highest sense. Imitating a dozen or fifty great writers doesn’t turn you into an imitator; the so-called imitator is someone who copies just one. Imitating even two completely cancels out the negative effects of imitation.
Franklin, himself a great writer, well describes the method in his autobiography:
Franklin, who was a great writer, clearly explains the method in his autobiography:
How Franklin Learned to Write.
How Franklin Learned to Write.
“A question was once, somehow or other, started between Collins and me, of the propriety of educating the female sex in learning, and their abilities for study. He was of the opinion that it was improper, and that they were naturally unequal to it. I took the contrary side, perhaps a little for dispute's sake. He was naturally more eloquent, having a ready plenty of words, and sometimes, as I thought, I was vanquished more by his fluency than by the strength of his reasons. As we parted without settling the point, and were not to see one another again for some time, I sat down to put my arguments in writing, which I copied fair and sent to him. He answered, and I replied. Three or four letters on a side had passed, when my father happened to find my papers and read them. Without entering into the subject in dispute, he took occasion to talk to me about the manner of my writing; observed that, though I had the advantage of my antagonist in correct spelling and pointing (which I owed to the printing-house), I fell far short in elegance of expression, in method, and in perspicuity, of which he convinced me by several instances. I saw the justice of his remarks, and thence grew more attentive to the manner in writing, and determined to endeavor an improvement.
“A question was raised at some point between Collins and me about whether it's appropriate to educate women and their capacity for learning. He believed it was inappropriate and that women were naturally not suited for it. I took the opposite view, maybe partly just to spark a debate. He was definitely more articulate, having a lot of words at his disposal, and sometimes I felt I lost more because of his fluency than the strength of his arguments. Since we left without settling the matter and wouldn’t see each other for a while, I decided to write down my thoughts, neatly copying them out to send to him. He replied, and I answered back. We exchanged three or four letters each when my father stumbled upon my writings and read them. Without getting into the debate itself, he took the opportunity to discuss my writing style; he pointed out that while I had the advantage of correct spelling and punctuation (thanks to the printing house), I was lacking in expressiveness, organization, and clarity, which he demonstrated with several examples. I recognized the validity of his comments, which made me more mindful of my writing style, and I resolved to work on improving it.”
“About this time I met with an odd volume of the Spectator. It was the third. I had never before seen any of them. I bought it, read it over and over, and was much delighted with it. I thought the writing excellent, and wished it possible to imitate it. With this view I took some of the papers, and making short hints of the sentiments in each sentence, laid them by a few days, and then, without looking at the book, tried to complete the papers again, by expressing each hinted sentiment at length, and as fully as it had been expressed before, in any suitable words that should come to hand. Then I compared my Spectator with the original, discovered some of my faults, and corrected them. But I found I wanted a stock of words, or a readiness in recollecting and using them, which I thought I should have acquired before that time if I had gone on making verses, since the continued search for words of the same import, but of different length to suit the measure, or of different sound for the rhyme, would have laid me under a constant necessity of searching for variety, and also have tended to fix that variety in mind, and make me master of it. Therefore I took some of the tales and turned them into verse; and, after a time, when I had pretty well forgotten the prose, turned them back again.
“During this time, I came across a strange volume of the Spectator. It was the third one. I had never seen any of them before. I bought it, read it repeatedly, and really enjoyed it. I thought the writing was excellent and wished I could imitate it. With this in mind, I took some of the articles, made brief notes on the sentiments in each sentence, set them aside for a few days, and then, without looking back at the book, tried to rewrite the articles by expressing each noted sentiment in detail and as thoroughly as it had been conveyed before, using any appropriate words that came to mind. Then, I compared my version of the Spectator with the original, identified some of my mistakes, and corrected them. However, I realized I needed a better vocabulary or quicker recall of words, which I thought I would have developed by that point if I had kept writing verses, as continuously searching for words with the same meaning but different lengths to fit the meter, or different sounds for the rhyme, would have forced me to look for variety and helped me master it. So, I took some of the stories and turned them into verse; later on, when I had mostly forgotten the prose, I converted them back.”
“I also sometimes jumbled my collection of hints into confusion, and after some weeks endeavored to reduce them into the best order before I began to form the full sentences and complete the subject. This was to teach me method in the arrangement of the thoughts. By comparing my work with the original, I discovered my faults and amended them; but I sometimes had the pleasure of fancying, that, in certain particulars of small import, I had been fortunate enough to improve the method or the language, and this encouraged me to think that I might possibly in time come to be a tolerable English writer; of which I was extremely ambitious. My time for these exercises and for reading was at night, after work, or before it began in the morning, or on Sundays, when I contrived to be in the printing-house alone, evading as much as I could the common attendance on public worship which my father used to exact of me when I was under his care, and which indeed I still continued to consider a duty, though I could not, as it seemed to me, afford time to practise it.”
“I also sometimes mixed up my collection of hints, and after a few weeks, I tried to organize them in the best way before I started forming full sentences and completing the subject. This was meant to teach me how to arrange my thoughts systematically. By comparing my work with the original, I found my mistakes and fixed them; but I sometimes enjoyed thinking that, in some minor details, I had even been lucky enough to improve the method or the language, and this encouraged me to believe that I might eventually become a decent English writer, which I was very ambitious about. I dedicated my time for these exercises and reading to the night, after work, or before it started in the morning, or on Sundays, when I managed to be alone in the printing house, avoiding as much as possible the regular attendance at public worship that my father insisted on when I was living under his care, and which I still considered a duty, even though I felt I didn’t have time to practice it.”
A Practical Method.
A Practical Approach.
Aristotle's method, though perfect in theory, has failed in practice. Franklin's method is too elementary and undeveloped to be of general use. Taking Aristotle's method (represented by our standard textbooks on rhetoric) as our guide, let us develop Franklin's method into a system as varied and complete as Aristotle's. We shall then have a method at the same time practical and scholarly.
Aristotle's method, while ideal in theory, hasn't worked well in practice. Franklin's method is too basic and underdeveloped to be widely useful. Using Aristotle's method (reflected in our standard rhetoric textbooks) as our guide, let's enhance Franklin's method into a system that is as diverse and comprehensive as Aristotle's. This way, we'll achieve a method that is both practical and academic.
We have studied the art of writing words correctly (spelling) and writing sentences correctly (grammar).* Now we wish to learn to write sentences, paragraphs, and entire compositions effectively.
We have learned how to spell words correctly and write sentences properly. Now we want to learn how to write sentences, paragraphs, and complete compositions effectively.
*See the earlier volume$ in this series.
*See the earlier volume in this series.
First, we must form the habit of observing the meanings and values of words, the structure of sentences, of paragraphs, and of entire compositions as we read standard literature―just as we have been trying to form the habit of observing the spelling of words, and the logical relationships of words in sentences. In order that we may know what to look for in our observation we must analyse a little, but we will not imagine that we shall learn to do a thing by endless talk about doing it.
First, we need to get into the habit of noticing the meanings and values of words, the structure of sentences, paragraphs, and whole pieces of writing as we read standard literature—similar to how we've been working on noticing the spelling of words and the logical connections between words in sentences. To know what to focus on in our observations, we need to analyze a little, but we won't think that talking endlessly about doing something will actually teach us how to do it.
Second, we will practise in the imitation of selections from master writers, in every case fixing our attention on the rhetorical element each particular writer best illustrates. This imitation will be continued until we have mastered the subject toward which we are especially directing our attention, and all the subjects which go to the making of an accomplished writer.
Second, we'll practice by imitating excerpts from great writers, focusing on the rhetorical aspect each writer highlights. We'll keep this practice going until we've mastered the specific subject we're concentrating on, as well as all the areas that help create a skilled writer.
Third, we will finally make independent compositions for ourselves with a view to studying and expressing the stock of ideas which we have to express. This will involve a study of the people on whom we wish to impress our ideas, and require that we constantly test the results of our work to see what the actual effect on the mind of our audience is.
Third, we will ultimately create our own independent pieces aimed at exploring and sharing the ideas we want to express. This will involve studying the people we want to influence with our ideas and constantly checking the outcomes of our work to understand its real impact on our audience's minds.
Let us now begin our work.
Let’s get started on our work.
CHAPTER I.
DICTION.
“Diction” is derived from the Latin dictio, a word, and in rhetoric it denotes choice of words. In the study of grammar we have learned that all words have logical relationships in sentences, and in some cases certain forms to agree with particular relationships. We have also taken note of “idioms,” in which words are used with peculiar values.
“Diction” comes from the Latin dictio, meaning word, and in rhetoric, it refers to the choice of words. In studying grammar, we’ve learned that all words have logical relationships in sentences, and sometimes certain forms need to match specific relationships. We’ve also noticed “idioms,” where words are used in unique ways.
On the subject of Idiom Arlo Bates in his book “On Writing English” has some very forcible remarks. Says he, “An idiom is the personal―if the word may be allowed―the personal idiosyncrasy of a language. It is a method of speech wherein the genius of the race making the language shows itself as differing from that of all other peoples. What style is to the man, that is idiom to the race. It is the crystalization in verbal forms of peculiarities of race temperament― perhaps even of race eccentricities …… English which is not idiomatic becomes at once formal and lifeless, as if the tongue were already dead and its remains embalmed in those honorable sepulchres, the philological dictionaries. On the other hand, English which goes too far, and fails of a delicate distinction between what is really and essentially idiomatic and what is colloquial, becomes at once vulgar and utterly wanting in that subtle quality of dignity for which there is no better term than distinction.”*
On the topic of idioms, Arlo Bates in his book “On Writing English” makes some powerful points. He says, “An idiom is the personal—if I may use the word—the personal quirk of a language. It’s a way of speaking where the character of the people who created the language is evident, distinguishing it from all other nations. What style is to a person, idiom is to a culture. It captures in words the unique traits of a people’s temperament—perhaps even their eccentricities. English that isn’t idiomatic becomes stiff and lifeless, as if the language were already dead, its remains preserved in those honorable tombs, the philological dictionaries. Conversely, English that goes too far and can’t distinguish between what is truly idiomatic and what is just colloquial becomes crude and completely lacks that subtle quality of dignity for which there’s no better term than distinction.”*
*As examples of idioms Mr. Bates gives the following: A ten-foot (instead of ten-feet) pole; the use of the “flat adverb” or adjective form in such expressions as “speak loud.” “walk fast,” “the sun shines hot,” “drink deep;” and the use of prepositions adverbially at the end of a sentence, as in “Where are you going to?” “The subject which I spoke to you about,” etc.
*Mr. Bates gives the following examples of idioms: a ten-foot (instead of ten-feet) pole; the use of the “flat adverb” or adjective form in expressions like “speak loud,” “walk fast,” “the sun shines hot,” “drink deep;” and the use of prepositions as adverbs at the end of a sentence, as in “Where are you going to?” “The subject I spoke to you about,” etc.*
We therefore see that idiom is not only a thing to justify, but something to strive for with all our might. The use of it gives character to our selection of words, and better than anything else illustrates what we should be looking for in forming our habit of observing the meanings and uses of words as we read.
We can see that idiom isn’t just something to justify, but something to pursue with all our energy. Its use adds character to our choice of words and shows better than anything else what we should aim for in developing the habit of noticing the meanings and uses of words as we read.
Another thing we ought to note in our study of words is the suggestion which many words carry with them in addition to their obvious meaning. For instance, consider what a world of ideas the mere name of Lincoln or Washington or Franklin or Napoleon or Christ calls up. On their face they are but names of men, or possibly sometimes of places; but we cannot utter the name of Lincoln without thinking of the whole terrible struggle of our Civil War; the name of Washington, without thinking of nobility, patriotism, and self-sacrifice in a pure and great man; Napoleon, without thinking of ambition and blood; of Christ, without lifting our eyes to the sky in an attitude of worship and thanksgiving to God. So common words carry with them a world of suggested thought. The word drunk calls up a picture horrid and disgusting; violet suggests blueness, sweetness, and innocence; oak suggests sturdy courage and strength; love suggests all that is dear in the histories of our own lives. Just what will be suggested depends largely on the person who hears the word, and in thinking of suggestion we must reflect also on the minds of the persons to whom we speak.
Another thing we should consider in our study of words is the suggestion that many words carry beyond their obvious meaning. For example, think about the range of ideas that comes to mind with just the names Lincoln, Washington, Franklin, Napoleon, or Christ. On the surface, they’re just names of people, or sometimes places; but when we say Lincoln, we can't help but think of the entire horrific struggle of our Civil War. The name Washington brings to mind nobility, patriotism, and self-sacrifice in a pure and great man. Napoleon evokes thoughts of ambition and blood, and Christ prompts us to look up in worship and gratitude to God. Thus, even common words carry a wealth of suggested thoughts. The word drunk conjures a horrific and disgusting image; violet suggests blueness, sweetness, and innocence; oak evokes strong courage and resilience; love brings to mind everything precious in the stories of our own lives. What is suggested depends heavily on the person hearing the word, and when we think about suggestion, we must also consider the minds of the people we are talking to.
The best practical exercise for the enlargement of one's vocabulary is translating, or writing verses. Franklin commends verse-writing, but it is hardly mechanical enough to be of value in all cases. At the same time, many people are not in a position to translate from a foreign language; and even if they were, the danger of acquiring foreign idioms and strange uses of words is so great as to offset the positive gain. But we can easily exercise ourselves in translating one kind of English into another, as poetry into prose, or an antique style into modern. To do this the constant use of the English dictionary will be necessary, and incidentally we shall learn a great deal about words.
The best way to expand your vocabulary is through translating or writing poetry. Franklin recommends writing poetry, but it's not always structured enough to be beneficial in every situation. Many people also can't translate from a foreign language; even if they could, there's a significant risk of picking up foreign idioms and unusual word usages, which could outweigh any benefits. However, we can practice translating different forms of English into each other, like turning poetry into prose or updating old-fashioned language to modern usage. To do this effectively, regular use of an English dictionary will be essential, and in the process, we’ll learn a lot about words.
As an example of this method of study, we subjoin a series of notes on the passage quoted from Franklin in the last chapter. In our study we constantly ask ourselves, “Does this use of the word sound perfectly natural?” At every point we appeal to our instinct, and in time come to trust it to a very great extent. We even train it. To train our instinct for words is the first great object of our study.
As an example of this study method, we include a series of notes on the passage quoted from Franklin in the last chapter. In our analysis, we constantly ask ourselves, “Does this use of the word sound completely natural?” At every point, we rely on our instinct, and over time, we come to trust it to a large extent. We even develop it. Training our instinct for words is the primary goal of our study.
Notes on Franklin.
(See “How Franklin Learned to Write” in preceding chapter.)
Notes on Franklin.
(See “How Franklin Learned to Write” in the previous chapter.)
1. “The female sex” includes animals as well as human beings, and in modern times we say simply “women,” though when Franklin wrote “the female sex” was considered an elegant phrase.
1. “The female sex” includes animals as well as humans, and nowadays we just say “women,” although when Franklin wrote, “the female sex” was seen as an elegant term.
2. Note that “their” refers to the collective noun “sex.”
2. Note that “their” refers to the collective noun “sex.”
3. If we confine the possessive case to persons we would not say “for dispute's sake,” and indeed “for the sake of dispute” is just as good, if not better, in other respects.
3. If we limit the possessive case to people, we wouldn't say "for dispute's sake," and actually "for the sake of dispute" is just as acceptable, if not better, in other ways.
4. “Ready plenty” is antique usage for “ready abundance.” Which is the stronger?
4. “Ready plenty” is an old-fashioned way to say “ready abundance.” Which one is stronger?
5. “Reasons” in the phrase “strength of his reasons” is a simple and forcible substitute for “arguments.”
5. “Reasons” in the phrase “strength of his reasons” is a straightforward and powerful alternative to “arguments.”
6. “Copied fair” shows an idiomatic use of an adjective form which perhaps can be justified, but the combination has given way in these days to “made a fair copy of.”
6. “Copied fair” shows a typical use of an adjective form that might be justified, but nowadays the phrase has been replaced with “made a fair copy of.”
7. Observe that Franklin uses “pointing” for punctuation, and “printing-house” for printing-office.
7. Notice that Franklin uses “pointing” for punctuation, and “printing-house” for printing-office.
8. The old idiom “endeavor at improvement” has been changed to endeavor to improve, or endeavor to make improvement.
8. The old idiom “endeavor at improvement” has been changed to endeavor to improve, or endeavor to make improvement.
9. Note how the use of the word sentiment has changed. We would be more likely to say ideas in a connection like this.
9. Note how the use of the word sentiment has changed. We would be more likely to say ideas in a connection like this.
10. For “laid them by,” say laid them away.
10. For “laid them by,” say laid them away.
11. For “laid me under …… necessity” we might say compelled me, or made it necessary that I should.
11. For “laid me under …… necessity” we might say compelled me, or made it necessary that I should.
12. “Amended” is not so common now as corrected.
12. "Amended" isn’t used as often now as corrected.
13. For “evading” (attendance at public worship) we should now say avoiding. We “evade” more subtle things than attendance at church.
13. For “evading” (attendance at public worship) we should now say avoiding. We “evade” more subtle things than attending church.
There are many other slight differences in the use of words which the student will observe. It would be an excellent exercise to write out, not only this passage, but a number of others from the Autobiography, in the most perfect of simple modern English.
There are many other minor differences in word usage that the student will notice. It would be a great exercise to rewrite not only this passage but also several others from the Autobiography in the clearest simple modern English.
We may also take a modern writer like Kipling and translate his style into simple, yet attractive and good prose; and the same process may be applied to any of the selections in this book, simply trying to find equivalent and if possible equally good words to express the same ideas, or slight variations of the same ideas. Robinson Crusoe, Bacon's Essays, and Pilgrim's Progress are excellent books to translate into modern prose. The chief thing is to do the work slowly and thoughtfully.
We can also take a modern writer like Kipling and translate his style into straightforward, yet appealing and quality prose; and the same approach can be used for any of the selections in this book, simply aiming to find equivalent and, if possible, equally effective words to convey the same ideas or slight variations of those ideas. Robinson Crusoe, Bacon's Essays, and Pilgrim's Progress are great books to translate into modern prose. The most important thing is to do the work carefully and thoughtfully.
CHAPTER II.
FIGURES OF SPEECH.
It is not an easy thing to pass from the logical precision of grammar to the vague suggestiveness of words that call up whole troops of ideas not contained in the simple idea for which a word stands. Specific idioms are themselves at variance with grammar and logic, and the grammarians are forever fighting them; but when we go into the vague realm of poetic style, the logical mind is lost at once. And yet it is more important to use words pregnant with meaning than to be strictly grammatical. We must reduce grammar to an instinct that will guard us against being contradictory or crude in our construction of sentences, and then we shall make that instinct harmonize with all the other instincts which a successful writer must have. When grammar is treated (as we have tried to treat it) as “logical instinct,” then there can be no conflict with other instincts.
It's not easy to move from the clear rules of grammar to the ambiguous suggestions of words that evoke a whole host of ideas beyond the simple concept each word represents. Specific idioms often clash with grammar and logic, and grammarians continuously struggle against them; but once we enter the ambiguous area of poetic style, the logical mind quickly gets lost. Still, it's more important to use words rich in meaning than to be completely grammatically correct. We should make grammar an instinct that helps us avoid contradictions or awkwardness in our sentence construction, and then we can align that instinct with all the other instincts needed for a successful writer. When grammar is treated (as we've tried to treat it) as a “logical instinct,” there won’t be any conflict with other instincts.
The suggestiveness of words finds its specific embodiment in the so called “figures of speech.” We must examine them a little, because when we come to such an expression as “The kettle boils” after a few lessons in tracing logical connections, we are likely to say without hesitation that we have found an error, an absurdity. On its face it is an absurdity to say “The kettle boils” when we mean “The water in the kettle boils.” But reflection will show us that we have merely condensed our words a little. Many idioms are curious condensations, and many figures of speech may be explained as natural and easy condensations. We have already seen such a condensation in “more complete” for “more nearly complete.”
The suggestiveness of words is specifically represented in what's known as “figures of speech.” We need to look at them a bit, because when we encounter an expression like “The kettle boils” after a few lessons on understanding logical connections, we might quickly think we’ve identified a mistake or something nonsensical. At first glance, it seems silly to say “The kettle boils” when we really mean “The water in the kettle boils.” But if we think about it, we realize that we’ve just shortened our words a bit. Many idioms are interesting forms of shortening, and many figures of speech can be understood as natural and simple ways of condensing language. We’ve already seen such a condensation in “more complete” for “more nearly complete.”
The following definitions and illustrations are for reference. We do not need to know the names of any of these figures in order to use them, and it is altogether probable that learning to name and analyse them will to some extent make us too self-conscious to use them at all. At the same time, they will help us to explain things that otherwise might puzzle us in our study.
The following definitions and illustrations are for reference. We don’t need to know the names of any of these figures to use them, and it’s likely that learning to name and analyze them will make us a bit too self-conscious to use them at all. At the same time, they will help us explain things that might otherwise confuse us in our study.
1. Simile. The simplest figure of speech is the simile. It is nothing more or less than a direct comparison by the use of such words as like and as.
1. Simile. The simplest figure of speech is the simile. It is just a direct comparison using words like like and as.
Examples: Unstable as water, thou shalt not excel. How often would I have gathered my children together, as a hen doth gather her broodunder her wings! The Kingdom of God is like a grain of mustard seed, is like leaven hidden in three measures of meal. Their lives glide on like rivers that water the woodland. Mercy droppeth as the gentle rain from heaven upon the place beneath.
Examples: Unstable as water, you won’t succeed. How often I wanted to gather my children together, like a hen gathers her chicks under her wings! The Kingdom of God is like a grain of mustard seed, like yeast hidden in three measures of flour. Their lives flow like rivers that water the forest. Mercy falls like gentle rain from heaven onto the ground below.
2. Metaphor. A metaphor is an implied or assumed comparison. The words like and as are no longer used, but the construction of the sentence is such that the comparison is taken for granted and the thing to which comparison is made is treated as if it were the thing itself.
2. Metaphor. A metaphor is a comparison that is suggested rather than directly stated. The words like and as aren’t used anymore, but the way the sentence is formed makes the comparison obvious and the subject of the comparison is treated as if it were actually that thing.
Examples: The valiant taste of death but once. Stop my house's ears. His strong mind reeled under the blow. The compressed passions of a century exploded in the French Revolution. It was written at a white heat. He can scarcely keep the wolf from the door. Strike while the iron is hot. Murray's eloquence never blazed into sudden flashes, but its clear, placid, and mellow splendor was never overclouded.
Examples: The brave only face death once. Stop my family's ears. His strong mind reeled from the impact. The pent-up emotions of a century erupted in the French Revolution. It was written in a surge of passion. He can hardly keep the wolf from the door. Strike while the iron's hot. Murray's eloquence never sparked into sudden bursts, but its clear, calm, and rich brilliance was never overshadowed.
The metaphor is the commonest figure of speech. Our language is a sort of burying-ground of faded metaphors. Look up in the dictionary the etymology of such words as obvious, ruminating, insuperable, dainty, ponder, etc., and you will see that they got their present meanings through metaphors which have now so faded that we no longer recognize them.
The metaphor is the most common figure of speech. Our language is like a graveyard of outdated metaphors. Look up in the dictionary the origins of words like obvious, ruminating, insuperable, dainty, ponder, etc., and you'll see that they got their current meanings from metaphors that have faded so much that we no longer recognize them.
Sometimes we get into trouble by introducing two comparisons in the same sentence or paragraph, one of which contradicts the other. Thus should we say “Pilot us through the wilderness of life” we would introduce two figures of speech, that of a ship being piloted and that of a caravan in a wilderness being guided, which would contradict each other. This is called a “mixed metaphor.”
Sometimes we run into issues by mixing two comparisons in the same sentence or paragraph, where one contradicts the other. For example, if we say “Pilot us through the wilderness of life,” we mix two metaphors: a ship being steered and a caravan being guided through a wilderness, which contradict each other. This is known as a “mixed metaphor.”
3. Allusion. Sometimes a metaphor consists in a reference or allusion to a well known passage in literature or a fact of history. Examples: Daily, with souls that cringe and plot, we Sinais climb and know it not. (Reference to Moses on Mt. Sinai). He received the lion's share of the profits. (Reference to the fable of the lion's share). Suffer not yourselves to be betrayed by a kiss. (Reference to the betrayal of Christ by Judas).
3. Allusion. Sometimes a metaphor includes a reference or allusion to a well-known passage in literature or a historical fact. Examples: Daily, with souls that shrink and scheme, we Sinais climb and don't even realize it. (Reference to Moses on Mt. Sinai). He got the lion's share of the profits. (Reference to the fable of the lion's share). Don’t let yourselves be fooled by a kiss. (Reference to the betrayal of Christ by Judas).
4. Personification. Sometimes the metaphor consists in speaking of inanimate things or animals as if they were human. This is called the figure of personification. It raises the lower to the dignity of the higher, and so gives it more importance.
4. Personification. Sometimes, a metaphor involves talking about inanimate objects or animals as if they were human. This is known as the figure of personification. It elevates the lower to the status of the higher, thus giving it more significance.
Examples: Earth felt the wound. Next Anger rushed, his eyes on fire. The moping Owl doth to the Moon complain. True Hope is swift and flies with swallow's wings. Vice is a monster of so frightful mien, as to be hated needs but to be seen. Speckled Vanity will sicken soon and die.
Examples: Earth felt the pain. Next, Anger rushed in, his eyes blazing. The gloomy Owl complains to the Moon. True Hope is quick and flies with the wings of a swallow. Vice is such a terrifying monster that just seeing it is enough to hate it. Spotted Vanity will soon get sick and fade away.
(Note in the next to the last example that the purely impersonal is raised, not to human level, but to that of the brute creation. Still the figure is called personification).
(Note in the second to last example that the purely impersonal is elevated, not to a human level, but to that of the animal kingdom. Still, the term used is personification).
5. Apostrophe. When inanimate things, or the absent, whether living or dead, are addressed as if they were living and present, we have a figure of speech called apostrophe. This figure of speech gives animation to the style. Examples: O Rome, Rome, thou hast been a tender nurse to me. Blow, winds, and crack your cheeks. Take her, O Bridegroom, old and gray!
5. Apostrophe. When inanimate objects or those who are absent, whether alive or dead, are spoken to as if they were alive and present, we have a figure of speech called apostrophe. This figure of speech adds liveliness to the style. Examples: O Rome, Rome, you have been a caring mother to me. Blow, winds, and break your cheeks. Take her, O Bridegroom, old and gray!
6. Antithesis. The preceding figures have been based on likeness. Antithesis is a figure of speech in which opposites are contrasted, or one thing is set against another. Contrast is almost as powerful as comparison in making our ideas clear and vivid.
6. Antithesis. The previous figures have been based on similarity. Antithesis is a figure of speech where opposites are contrasted, or one thing is placed against another. Contrast is nearly as effective as comparison in making our ideas clear and vivid.
Examples: (Macaulay, more than any other writer, habitually uses antitheses). Saul, seeking his father's asses, found himself turned into a king. Fit the same intellect to a man and it is a bowstring; to a woman and it is a harp-string. I thought that this man had been a lord among wits, but I find that he is only a wit among lords. Better to reign in hell than to serve in heaven. For fools rush in where angels fear to tread.
Examples: (Macaulay, more than any other writer, regularly uses contrasts). Saul, looking for his father's donkeys, unexpectedly became a king. Use the same intelligence on a man and it’s a bowstring; on a woman and it’s a harp string. I assumed this man was a leader among thinkers, but I see he’s just a thinker among leaders. It's better to rule in hell than to serve in heaven. Because fools rush in where angels fear to go.
7. Metonymy. Besides the figures of likeness and unlikeness, there are others of quite a different kind. Metonymy consists in the substitution for the thing itself of something closely associated with it, as the sign or symbol for the thing symbolized, the cause for the effect, the instrument for the user of it, the container for the thing contained, the material for the thing made of it, etc.
7. Metonymy. Besides the figures of similarity and difference, there are others that are quite different. Metonymy involves replacing the thing itself with something closely related to it, like a sign or symbol for what it represents, the cause for the effect, the tool for the person using it, the container for what it holds, the material for the object made from it, and so on.
Examples: He is a slave to the cup. Strike for your altars and your fires. The kettle boils, He rose and addressed the chair. The palace should not scorn the cottage. The watched pot never boils. The red coats turned and fled. Iron bailed and lead rained upon the enemy. The pen is mightier than the sword.
Examples: He is addicted to the cup. Fight for your altars and your fires. The kettle is boiling. He stood up and spoke to the chair. The palace shouldn’t look down on the cottage. A watched pot never boils. The red coats turned and ran. Iron poured out and lead rained down on the enemy. The pen is more powerful than the sword.
8. Synecdoche. There is a special kind of metonymy which is given the dignity of a separate name. It is the substitution of the part for the whole or the whole for the part. The value of it consists in putting forward the thing best known, the thing that will appeal most powerfully to the thought and feeling.
8. Synecdoche. There’s a specific type of metonymy that has earned its own name. It involves using a part to represent the whole or the whole to represent a part. Its value lies in highlighting what’s most familiar, the element that resonates most strongly with our thoughts and emotions.
Examples: Come and trip it as you go, on the light fantastic toe. American commerce is carried in British bottoms. He bought a hundred head of cattle. It is a village of five hundred chimneys. He cried, “A sail, a sail!” The busy fingers toll on.
Examples: Come and dance as you go, on the light fantastic toe. American trade is transported on British ships. He bought a hundred cattle. It is a village of five hundred houses. He shouted, “A sail, a sail!” The busy hands keep working.
Exercise.
Working out.
Indicate the figure of speech used in each of the following sentences:
Indicate the figure of speech used in each of the following sentences:
1. Come, seeling Night, scarf up the tender eye of pitiful Day.
1. Come, dark Night, cover up the gentle gaze of sad Day.
2. The coat does not make the man.
2. The clothes don't make the man.
3. From two hundred observatories in Europe and America, the glorious artillery of science nightly assaults the skies.
3. From two hundred observatories in Europe and America, the incredible tools of science attack the skies every night.
4. The lamp is burning.
The lamp is lit.
5. Blow, blow, thou winter wind, thou art not so unkind as man's ingratitude.
5. Blow, blow, winter wind, you're not as harsh as human ingratitude.
6. His reasons are as two grains of wheat hid in two bushels of chaff.
6. His reasons are like two grains of wheat hidden in two bushels of chaff.
7. Laughter and tears are meant to turn the wheels of the machinery of sensibility; one is wind power, the other water power.
7. Laughter and tears are meant to drive the machinery of emotions; one is like wind power, and the other is like water power.
8. When you are an anvil, hold you still; when you are a hammer, strike your fill.
8. When you're an anvil, stay steady; when you're a hammer, hit as much as you want.
9. Save the ermine from pollution.
9. Protect the ermine from pollution.
10. There is a tide in the affairs of men, which, taken at the flood, leads on to fortune; omitted, all the voyage of their lives is bound in shallows and in miseries.
10. There’s a moment in people’s lives when taking action can lead to success; if missed, their entire journey is stuck in difficulties and unhappiness.
Turn each of the above sentences into plain language. Key: (the numbers in parantheses indicate the figure of speech in the sentences as numbered above). 1. (4); 2. (7); 3. (2); 4. (7); 5. (5); 6. (1); 7. (2 and 6); 8. (2 and 6); 9. (7); 10. (2).
Turn each of the above sentences into simple language. Key: (the numbers in parentheses indicate the figure of speech in the sentences as numbered above). 1. (4); 2. (7); 3. (2); 4. (7); 5. (5); 6. (1); 7. (2 and 6); 8. (2 and 6); 9. (7); 10. (2).
CHAPTER III.
STYLE.
There have been many definitions of style; but the disputes of the rhetoricians do not concern us. Style, as the word is commonly understood, is the choice and arrangement of words in sentences and of sentences in paragraphs as that arrangement is effective in expressing our meaning and convincing our readers or hearers. A good style is one that is effective, and a bad style is one which fails of doing what the writer wishes to do. There are as many ways of expressing ideas as there are ways of combining words (that is, an infinite number), and as many styles as there are writers. None of us wishes precisely to get the style of any one else; but we want to form a good one of our own.
There have been many definitions of style, but the arguments among rhetoricians don't concern us. Style, as it's commonly understood, is about choosing and arranging words in sentences and sentences in paragraphs in a way that effectively conveys our meaning and persuades our readers or listeners. A good style is one that works well, while a bad style is one that doesn't achieve what the writer intends. There are as many ways to express ideas as there are ways to combine words (essentially, an infinite number), and as many styles as there are writers. None of us wants to exactly replicate someone else's style; instead, we aim to create a good one of our own.
We will briefly note the elements mentioned by those who analyse style, and then pass on to concrete examples.
We will quickly highlight the elements discussed by those who analyze style, and then move on to specific examples.
Arrangement of words in a sentence. The first requirement is that the arrangement of words should be logical, that is grammatical. The rhetorical requirements are that―
Arrangement of words in a sentence. The first requirement is that the arrangement of words should be logical, meaning it must be grammatical. The rhetorical requirements are that―
1. One sentence, with one principal subject and one principal predicate, should try to express one thought and no more. If we try to mix two thoughts in the same sentence, we shall come to grief. Likewise, we shall fail if we attempt to mix two subjects in the same paragraph or composition.
1. One sentence, with one main subject and one main predicate, should aim to express one idea and nothing more. If we try to combine two ideas in the same sentence, we'll run into trouble. Similarly, we will struggle if we try to mix two subjects in the same paragraph or piece of writing.
2. The words in the sentence should be arranged that those which are emphatic will come in the emphatic places. The beginning and the end of a sentence are emphatic positions, the place before any mark of punctuation is usually emphatic, and any word not in its usual place with relation to the word it modifies grammatically is especially emphatic. We must learn the emphatic positions by experience, and then our instinct will guide us. The whole subject is one of the relative values of words.
2. The words in the sentence should be arranged so that the ones that need emphasis are in the emphatic spots. The beginning and the end of a sentence are strong positions, the spot right before any punctuation is usually strong, and any word that's not in its usual place in relation to the word it modifies grammatically is especially strong. We have to learn these emphatic positions by experience, and then our instinct will lead us. The whole topic is about the relative importance of words.
3. The words in a sentence should follow each other in such a simple, logical order that one leads on to another, and the whole meaning flows like a stream of water. The reader should never be compelled to stop and look back to see how the various ideas “hang together.” This is the rhetorical side of the logical relationship which grammar requires. Not only must grammatical rules be obeyed, but logical instinct must be satisfied with the linking of idea to idea to make a complete thought. And the same law holds good in linking sentences into paragraphs and paragraphs into whole compositions.
3. The words in a sentence should follow each other in such a clear, logical order that one leads to the next, and the overall meaning flows like a stream of water. The reader shouldn't have to stop and look back to figure out how the different ideas connect. This is the rhetorical aspect of the logical relationship that grammar demands. Not only must we follow grammatical rules, but our logical sense should also be satisfied with how ideas connect to form a complete thought. The same principle applies when linking sentences into paragraphs and paragraphs into entire compositions.
These three requirements have been named Unity, Mass, and Coherence.
These three requirements are called Unity, Mass, and Coherence.
The variations in sentences due to emphasis have given rise to a rhetorical division of sentences into two classes, called loose and periodic.
The different ways sentences can be structured for emphasis have led to a rhetorical classification of sentences into two types: loose and periodic.
A loose sentence is one in which words follow each other in their natural order, the modifiers of the verb of course following the verb. Often many of these modifiers are not strictly necessary to complete the sense and a period may be inserted at some point before the close of the sentence without destroying its grammatical completeness. The addition of phrases and clauses not strictly required constitutes looseness of sentence structure.
A loose sentence is one where the words follow each other in their natural order, with the modifiers of the verb following the verb, of course. Often, many of these modifiers aren't strictly necessary to complete the meaning, and you can insert a period at some point before the end of the sentence without ruining its grammatical completeness. Adding phrases and clauses that aren't strictly needed makes the sentence structure loose.
A periodic sentence is one which is not grammatically or logically complete till the end. If the sentence is somewhat long, the mind is held in suspense until the last word is uttered.
A periodic sentence is one that isn’t grammatically or logically complete until the very end. If the sentence is a bit lengthy, the reader’s mind is kept in suspense until the final word is spoken.
Example. The following is a loose sentence: “I stood on the bridge at midnight, as the clocks were striking the hour.” The same sentence becomes periodic by transposition of the less important predicate modifiers, thus―“At midnight, as the clocks were striking the hour, I stood on the bridge.”
Example. The following is a loose sentence: “I stood on the bridge at midnight, as the clocks were striking the hour.” The same sentence becomes periodic by rearranging the less important predicate modifiers, thus―“At midnight, as the clocks were striking the hour, I stood on the bridge.”
It will be observed that the periodic form is adapted to oratory and similar forms of eloquent writing in which the mind of the reader or hearer is keyed up to a high pitch of expectancy; while the loose sentence is the one common in all simple narrative and unexcited statement.
It’s noticeable that the periodic form works well for speeches and other types of expressive writing where the audience is highly engaged and anticipating what's next; in contrast, the loose sentence is typical in straightforward storytelling and calm statements.
Qualities of Style. Writers on rhetoric note three essential qualities of style, namely clearness, force, and elegance.
Qualities of Style. Writers on rhetoric point out three key qualities of style: clarity, strength, and elegance.
Clearness of style is the direct result of clearness and simplicity of thought. Unless we have mastered our thought in every particular before trying to express it, confusion is inevitable. At the same time, if we have mastered our thought perfectly, and yet express it in language not understood by the persons to whom and for whom we write or speak, our style will not be clear to them, and we shall have failed in conveying our thoughts as much as if we had never mastered them.
Clearness of style comes directly from having clear and simple thoughts. If we haven’t fully grasped our ideas before trying to communicate them, confusion is bound to happen. On the other hand, even if we completely understand our thoughts, if we express them in a way that the audience doesn’t understand, our style will still be unclear to them, and we will have failed to convey our ideas just as much as if we had never understood them at all.
Force is required to produce an effect on the mind of the hearer. He must not only understand what we say, but have some emotion in regard to it; else he will have forgotten our words before we have fairly uttered them. Force is the appeal which words make to the feeling, as clearness is the appeal they make to the understanding.
Force is needed to create an impact on the listener's mind. They must not only grasp what we say but also feel something about it; otherwise, they'll forget our words before we've even finished speaking. Force is the way words engage the emotions, just as clarity is how they engage the understanding.
Elegance is required only in writing which purports to be good literature. It is useful but not required in business letters, or in newspaper writing; but it is absolutely essential to higher literary art. It is the appeal which the words chosen and the arrangement selected make to our sense of beauty. That which is not beautiful has no right to be called “literature,” and a style which does not possess the subtle elements of beauty is not a strictly “literary” style.
Elegance is necessary only in writing that intends to be considered good literature. It’s helpful but not essential in business letters or journalism; however, it is crucial for higher literary art. It’s the way the chosen words and their arrangement appeal to our sense of beauty. Anything that isn’t beautiful doesn’t deserve to be called “literature,” and a style lacking the subtle elements of beauty isn’t genuinely “literary.”
Most of us by persistent effort can conquer the subject of clearness. Even the humblest person should not open his mouth or take up his pen voluntarily unless he can express himself clearly; and if he has any thought to express that is worth expressing, and wants to express it, he will sooner or later find a satisfactory way of expressing it.
Most of us can achieve clarity through consistent effort. Even the most modest individual shouldn't speak up or write down their thoughts unless they can communicate them clearly; and if they have something valuable to say and truly want to share it, they'll eventually find a good way to express it.
The thing that most of us wish to find out is, how to write with force.
Force is attained in various ways, summarized as follows:
The thing that most of us want to know is how to write with impact.
Impact is achieved in different ways, summarized as follows:
1. By using words which are in themselves expressive.
1. By using words that are inherently expressive.
2. By placing those words in emphatic positions in the sentence.
2. By putting those words in strong positions in the sentence.
3. By varying the length and form of successive sentences so that the reader or hearer shall never be wearied by monotony.
3. By changing the length and structure of consecutive sentences, the reader or listener will never get bored by monotony.
4. By figures of speech, or constant comparison and illustration, and making words suggest ten times as much as they say.
4. By using figures of speech, or consistently comparing and illustrating, and making words imply ten times more than their literal meaning.
5. By keeping persistently at one idea, though from every possible point of view and without repetition of any kind, till that idea has sunk into the mind of the hearer and has been fully comprehended.
5. By continuously focusing on one idea, exploring it from every possible angle without any repetition, until that idea is fully understood and ingrained in the listener's mind.
Force is destroyed by the―Vice of repetition with slight change or addition; Vice of monotony in the words, sentences or paragraphs; Vice of over-literalness and exactness; Vice of trying to emphasize more than one thing at a time; Vice of using many words with little meaning; or words barren of suggestiveness and destitute of figures of speech; and its opposite, the Vice of overloading the style with so many figures of speech and so much suggestion and variety as to disgust or confuse. These vices have been named tautology, dryness, and “fine writing.” Without doubt the simplest narration is the hardest kind of composition to write, chiefly because we do not realize how hard it is. The first necessity for a student is to realize the enormous requirements for a perfect mastery of style. The difficulties will not appear to the one who tries original composition by way of practice, since there is no way of “checking up” his work. He may (or may not) be aware that what he is doing does not produce the effect that the writing of a master produces; but if he does realize it, he will certainly fail to discover wherein his own weakness consists.
Force is weakened by the vice of repeating with slight changes or additions; the vice of monotony in words, sentences, or paragraphs; the vice of being overly literal and precise; the vice of trying to emphasize more than one thing at a time; the vice of using many words that mean little; or words that lack suggestiveness and are devoid of figures of speech; and its opposite, the vice of overloading the style with too many figures of speech and excessive suggestion and variety that lead to disgust or confusion. These vices are called tautology, dryness, and "fine writing." Without a doubt, the simplest storytelling is the hardest type of writing to achieve, mostly because we don’t realize how difficult it is. The first thing a student needs to understand is the huge demands for perfect mastery of style. The challenges may not be evident to someone who practices original writing since there’s no way to "check" their work. They might (or might not) know that what they’re doing doesn’t create the same effect as a master’s writing; but if they do recognize it, they’ll surely struggle to identify where their weaknesses lie.
The only effective way of making the discovery is that described by Franklin, and there is no masterpiece of literature better to practise upon than Ruskin's “The King of the Golden River.” Unlike much beautiful and powerful writing, it is so simple that a child can understand it. Complete comprehension of the meaning is absolutely necessary before any skill in expressing that meaning can be looked for, and an attempt to imitate that which is not perfectly clear will not give skill. And with this simplicity there is consummate art. Ruskin uses nearly all the devices described in the preceding pages. Let us look at some of these in the first three paragraphs of Ruskin's story:
The only effective way to make the discovery is the one described by Franklin, and there’s no better piece of literature to practice on than Ruskin's “The King of the Golden River.” Unlike much beautiful and powerful writing, it’s so simple that a child can understand it. Fully grasping the meaning is absolutely necessary before any ability to express that meaning can be expected, and trying to mimic something that isn’t perfectly clear won’t lead to skill. Along with this simplicity, there’s incredible art. Ruskin uses almost all the techniques mentioned in the previous pages. Let’s take a look at some of these in the first three paragraphs of Ruskin's story:
In a secluded and mountainous part of Styria, there was, in old time, a valley of most surprising and luxuriant fertility. It was surrounded on all sides by steep and rocky mountains rising into peaks which were always covered with snow and from which a number of torrents descended in constant cataracts. One of these fell westward, over the face of a crag so high that, when the sun had set to everything else, and all below was darkness, his beams still shone full upon this waterfall, so that it looked like a shower of gold. It was, therefore, called by the people of the neighborhood the Golden River{.} It was strange that none of these streams fell into the valley itself. They all descended on the other side of the mountains, and wound through broad plains and by populous cities. But the clouds were drawn so constantly to the snowy hills, and rested so softly in the circular hollow, that, in time of drought and heat, when all the country round was burnt up, there was still rain in the little valley; and its crops were so heavy, and its hay so high, and its apples so red, and its grapes so blue, and its wine so rich, and its honey so sweet, that it was a marvel to every one who beheld it, and was commonly called the Treasure Valley.
In a remote mountainous area of Styria, there was once a valley that was surprisingly lush and fertile. It was surrounded on all sides by steep, rocky mountains with peaks that were perpetually covered in snow, from which numerous torrents cascaded in constant waterfalls. One of these waterfalls tumbled down a cliff so high that, even after the sun had set everywhere else and darkness enveloped the land below, its rays still illuminated this waterfall, making it appear like a golden shower. Because of this, the locals called it the Golden River. It was unusual that none of these streams flowed into the valley itself; instead, they all descended on the opposite side of the mountains and meandered through wide plains and bustling cities. However, the clouds were consistently drawn to the snowy peaks and rested gently in the valley's circular basin, so that during times of drought and heat, when the surrounding countryside was parched, the little valley still received rain. Its crops were abundant, its hay was tall, its apples were vibrant red, its grapes were deep blue, its wine was rich, and its honey was incredibly sweet, making it a wonder to everyone who saw it, and it was often referred to as the Treasure Valley.
The whole of this little valley belonged to three brothers, called Schwartz, Hans, and Gluck. Schwartz and Hans, the two elder brothers, were very ugly men, with overwhelming eyebrows and small, dull eyes, which were always half shut, so that you couldn't see into them, and always fancied they saw very far into you. They lived by farming the Treasure Valley, and very good farmers they were. They killed everything that did not pay for its eating. They shot the blackbirds, because they pecked the fruit; and killed the hedge-hogs, lest they should suck the cows; they poisoned the crickets for eating the crumbs in the kitchen; and smothered the cicadas, which used to sing all summer in the lime-trees. They worked their servants without any wages, till they could not work any more, and then quarrelled with them and turned them out of doors without paying them. It would have been very odd, if, with such a farm, and such a system of farming, they hadn't got very rich; and very rich they did get.
The entire little valley belonged to three brothers named Schwartz, Hans, and Gluck. Schwartz and Hans, the two older brothers, were quite unattractive, with bushy eyebrows and small, dull eyes that were always half-closed, so you could never really see into them, but it felt like they could see deep into you. They made a living by farming the Treasure Valley, and they were very skillful farmers. They got rid of anything that didn't contribute to their livelihood. They shot blackbirds for pecking at the fruit, killed hedgehogs to prevent them from sucking the cows, poisoned crickets for eating crumbs in the kitchen, and smothered cicadas that sang all summer in the lime trees. They worked their servants without paying them until they could no longer work, then they argued with them and kicked them out without settling their wages. It would have been strange if, with such a farm and farming practices, they hadn't become very wealthy; and indeed, they became very rich.
They generally contrived to keep their corn by them till it was very dear, and then sell it for twice its value; they had heaps of gold lying about on their floors, yet it was never known that they had given so much as a penny or a crust in charity; they never went to mass; grumbled perpetually at paying tithes; and were, in a word, of so cruel and grinding a temper, as to receive from all those with whom they had any dealings, the nickname of the “Black Brothers.”
They usually figured out how to hold onto their grain until prices went way up, then sold it for double what it was worth; they had piles of gold lying around on their floors, but it was never known that they gave even a penny or a crust to charity; they never attended mass; constantly complained about paying tithes; and were, in short, so harsh and greedy that everyone they dealt with called them the “Black Brothers.”
The youngest brother, Gluck, was as completely opposed, in both appearance and character, to his seniors as could possibly be imagined or desired. He was not above twelve years old, fair, blue-eyed, and kind in temper to every living thing. He did not, of course, agree particularly well with his brothers, or rather they did not agree with him. He was usually appointed to the honorable office of turnspit, when there was anything to roast, which was not often; for, to do the brothers justice, they were hardly less sparing upon themselves than upon other people. At other times he used to clean the shoes, the floors, and sometimes the plates, occasionally getting what was left on them, by way of encouragement, and a wholesome quantity of dry blows, by way of education.
The youngest brother, Gluck, was completely different in both looks and personality from his older siblings. He was no more than twelve years old, with fair hair, blue eyes, and a kind heart toward all living creatures. Naturally, he didn't get along particularly well with his brothers; more accurately, they didn’t get along with him. He was often given the important job of turnspit whenever there was something to roast, which wasn't very often. To be fair to his brothers, they were just as stingy with themselves as they were with others. At other times, he would clean shoes, floors, and sometimes plates, occasionally receiving the leftovers on the plates as a reward and a good amount of dry slaps as his "education."
The author starts out with a periodic sentence, beginning with a predicate modifier and placing the subject last. This serves to fix our attention from the first. The arrangement also throws the emphasis on “surprising and luxuriant fertility.” The last word is the essential one in conveying the meaning, though a modifier of the simple subject noun “valley.” The next sentence is a loose one. After catching the attention of the reader, we must not burden his mind too much till he gets interested. We must move along naturally and easily, and this Ruskin does. The third sentence is periodic again. We are now awake and able to bear transposition for the sake of emphasis. Ruskin first emphasizes “so high,” the adjective being placed after its noun, and then leads the way to the chief emphasis, which comes on the word “gold,” the last in the sentence. There is also an antithesis between the darkness below and the light on the peak which is bright enough to turn the water into gold. This also helps to emphasize “gold.” We have now had three long sentences and the fourth sentence, which concludes this portion of the subject, is a short one. “Golden River” is emphasized by being thrown quite to the end, a little out of its natural order, which would have been immediately after the verb. The emphasis on “gold” in the preceding sentence prepared the way for the emphasis on “Golden River;” and by looking back we see how every word has been easily, gracefully leading up to this conclusion.
The author starts with a periodic sentence, beginning with a modifying phrase and placing the subject last. This grabs our attention from the start. The structure emphasizes “surprising and luxuriant fertility.” The last word is key to conveying the meaning, even though it's just a modifier of the simple noun “valley.” The next sentence is loose. After capturing the reader’s attention, we shouldn’t overload their mind too much until they’re interested. We should flow naturally and easily, and Ruskin does just that. The third sentence is periodic again. We are now alert and can handle a rearrangement for emphasis. Ruskin first highlights “so high,” with the adjective following its noun, and then leads to the main emphasis on the word “gold,” which is the last word in the sentence. There’s also a contrast between the darkness below and the light at the peak bright enough to turn the water into gold. This also emphasizes “gold.” We’ve had three longer sentences, and the fourth sentence, which wraps up this part of the subject, is a short one. “Golden River” is emphasized by being placed at the end, slightly out of its natural order, which would have been right after the verb. The emphasis on “gold” in the previous sentence paves the way for the emphasis on “Golden River,” and looking back, we see how every word has gracefully and smoothly led up to this conclusion.
Ordinarily this would be the end of a paragraph. We may call the first four sentences a “sub-paragraph.” The capital letters in “Golden River” mark the division to the eye, and the emphasis marks the division to the mind. We do not begin with a new paragraph, simply because the subject that follows is more closely connected with the first four sentences than with the paragraph which follows.
Ordinarily, this would be the end of a paragraph. We can refer to the first four sentences as a “sub-paragraph.” The capital letters in “Golden River” provide a visual break, and the emphasis creates a mental distinction. We don’t start a new paragraph because the topic that comes next is more closely related to the first four sentences than to the paragraph that follows.
Beginning with “It was strange that none of these streams” etc., we have two rather short, simple, loose sentences, which introduce us in a most natural manner to the subject to be presented, and prepare the way for a very long, somewhat complicated sentence, full of antitheses, ending with the emphatic words “Treasure Valley.” These two words are to this part of the paragraph what the words “Golden River” were to the first part; and besides, we see before us the simple, beautiful picture of the Golden River above the Treasure Valley, presented in words whose power and grace we cannot fail to appreciate.
Beginning with “It was strange that none of these streams” etc., we have two pretty short, simple, loose sentences that naturally introduce us to the topic at hand and set the stage for a long, somewhat complex sentence filled with contrasts, finishing with the impactful words “Treasure Valley.” These two words are to this part of the paragraph what the words “Golden River” were to the first part; and besides, we see before us the simple, beautiful image of the Golden River above the Treasure Valley, expressed in words that we can’t help but appreciate for their power and elegance.
The second paragraph goes forward in the most matter-of-course and easy way. The first sentence is short, but the second is longer, with a pleasing variation of long and short phrases, and it ends with a contrast marked to the eye by the italic words “them” and “you.” The next two sentences are quite short, and variety is given by the simple transposition in “and very good farmers they were.” This is no more than a graceful little twirl to relieve any possible monotony. The fourth sentence in the paragraph is also very short, purposely made so for emphasis. It gives in a word what the following long sentence presents in detail. And observe the constant variation in the form of this long sentence: in the first clause we have “They shot … because,” in the second, “and killed … lest” (the subject of killed being implied, but its place supplied by and), while in the third, the subject of the verb is again expressed, and then we have the prepositional form “for eating” instead of the conjunction and verb in a subordinate sentence. Moreover we have three different verbs meaning the same thing―shot, killed, poisoned. By the variation Ruskin avoids monotony; yet by the similarity he gains emphasis. The likeness of the successive clauses is as important as their difference. There is also in each an implied contrast, between the severe penalty and the slight offense. By implication each word gives an added touch to the picture of hardness and cruelty of the two brothers. Ruskin finds a dozen different ways of illustrating the important statement he made in the second sentence (the first sentence being merely introductory). And at the end of the paragraph we have the whole summed up in a long sentence full of deliberate rather than implied contrasts, which culminate in the two words “Black Brothers.”
The second paragraph flows naturally and effortlessly. The first sentence is brief, but the second is lengthier, showcasing a nice mix of short and long phrases, ending with a notable contrast highlighted by the italicized words “them” and “you.” The next two sentences are quite short, and the variety is introduced through the simple change in “and very good farmers they were.” This is just a charming little twist to break any potential monotony. The fourth sentence is also very short, intentionally so for emphasis. It provides in a single word what the following lengthy sentence elaborates on in detail. Notice the constant variation in the structure of this long sentence: in the first clause, we have “They shot … because,” in the second, “and killed … lest” (the subject of killed is implied, but replaced by and), while in the third, the subject of the verb is mentioned again, followed by the prepositional phrase “for eating” instead of the conjunction and verb in a subordinate clause. Additionally, we see three different verbs conveying the same idea―shot, killed, poisoned. By varying the language, Ruskin avoids monotony; yet by keeping some similarities, he adds emphasis. The similarities between the successive clauses are as crucial as their differences. Each also implies a contrast between the harsh penalty and the minor offense. With each word, the picture of the brothers’ cruelty and hardness is further emphasized. Ruskin finds numerous ways to illustrate the vital point he made in the second sentence (with the first being merely introductory). At the end of the paragraph, everything is wrapped up in a long sentence filled with deliberate rather than implied contrasts, culminating in the phrase “Black Brothers.”
It is easy to see that much of the strength of these two paragraphs lies in the continued and repeated use of contrast. The first paragraph, with its beautiful description of the “Golden River” and the “Treasure Valley,” is itself a perfect contrast to the second, with its “Black Brothers” and all their meanness; and we have already seen that the second paragraph itself is filled with antitheses.
It is easy to see that a lot of the impact of these two paragraphs comes from the ongoing and repeated use of contrast. The first paragraph, with its lovely description of the “Golden River” and the “Treasure Valley,” stands in stark contrast to the second, which features the “Black Brothers” and all their wickedness; and we've already noted that the second paragraph is packed with oppositions.
In these two paragraphs we have but two simple ideas, that of the place with all its beauty, and that of the brothers with all their ugliness. Ruskin might have spoken of them in two sentences, or even in one; but as a matter of fact, in order to make us think long enough about these two things, he takes them one at a time and gives us glints, like the reflections from the different facets of a diamond slowly turned about in the light. Each is almost like the preceding, yet a little different; and when we have seen all in succession, we understand each better, and the whole subject is vividly impressed on our minds.
In these two paragraphs, there are just two simple ideas: the beauty of the place and the ugliness of the brothers. Ruskin could have summed them up in a couple of sentences or even one, but instead, he breaks them down and presents them one at a time, offering us glimpses similar to how light reflects off the various facets of a diamond as it turns. Each glimpse is almost like the one before it, yet slightly different; and after seeing them all in sequence, we gain a deeper understanding of each and the overall subject sticks in our minds.
In the third paragraph we have still another contrast in the description of little Gluck. This paragraph is shorter, but the same devices are used that we found in the preceding.
In the third paragraph, we see yet another contrast in the description of little Gluck. This paragraph is shorter, but the same techniques are used that we found in the previous one.
In these three paragraphs the following points are well illustrated:
In these three paragraphs, the following points are clearly shown:
1. Each paragraph develops one subject, which has a natural relation to what precedes and what follows;
1. Each paragraph focuses on one topic that naturally connects to what comes before and after;
2. Each idea is presented in a succession of small details which follow in easy, logical order one after the other;
2. Each idea is presented in a series of small details that follow in a clear, logical order, one after the other;
3. There is constant variety and contrast, difference with likeness and likeness with difference.
3. There's always a mix of variety and contrast, similarities with differences, and differences with similarities.
CHAPTER IV.
HUMOR:
Addison, Stevenson, Lamb.
Addison, Stevenson, Lamb.
Mere correctness in sentence structure (grammar) may be purely scientific; but the art of rhetoric is so wrapped up with human emotion that the study of human nature counts for infinitely more than the theory of arrangement, figures of speech, etc., Unless the student has some idea how the human mind works (his own mind and the minds of his readers), he will make little or no progress in his study of this subject. Professional teachers ignore this almost completely, and that is one reason why they so often fail; and it is also a reason why persons who do not go to them for training so often succeed: the latter class finds that knowledge of the human heart makes up for many deficiencies.
Just getting the grammar right in a sentence is purely technical; however, the art of rhetoric is deeply connected to human emotions, which means understanding human nature is far more important than knowing just the theory of structure, figures of speech, and so on. If a student doesn’t understand how the human mind works—both their own and their readers’—they won’t make much progress in this field. Professional teachers often completely overlook this, which is one reason they frequently fail; conversely, many who learn outside traditional training often succeed because their understanding of the human heart compensates for various shortcomings.
The first important consideration is good nature. It is not often that we can use words to compel; we must win; and it is an old proverb that “more flies are caught with molasses than with vinegar.” The novice in writing is always too serious, even to morbidness, too “fierce,” too arrogant and domineering in his whole thought and feeling. Sometimes such a person compels attention, but not often. The universal way is to attract, win over, please. Most of the arts of formal rhetoric are arts of making language pleasing; but what is the value of knowing the theory in regard to these devices when the spirit of pleasing is absent?
The first important consideration is good nature. It’s not often that we can use words to force people; we have to win them over. There’s an old saying that “more flies are caught with molasses than with vinegar.” A beginner in writing tends to be too serious, even to the point of being morbid, too “intense,” too arrogant and controlling in their thoughts and feelings. Sometimes this kind of person grabs attention, but not often. The usual approach is to attract, win over, and please. Most of the techniques in formal rhetoric are about making language enjoyable; but what’s the point of understanding the theory behind these techniques if the spirit of pleasing isn’t there?
We must go at our work gently and good-naturedly, and then there will be no straining or morbidness or repulsiveness of manner. But all this finds its consummation in what is called humor.
We should approach our work calmly and kindly, and this way there will be no tension, negativity, or unpleasantness in our behavior. But all of this comes together in what is known as humor.
Humor is a thing that can be cultivated, even learned; and it is one of the most important things in the whole art of writing.
Humor is something that can be developed, even taught; and it’s one of the most essential elements in the entire craft of writing.
We will not attempt to say just what humor is. The effort could bring no results of value. Suffice it to say that there is implanted in most of us a sense of the ridiculous―of the incongruous. If a thing is a little too big or a little too small for the place it is intended to fill, for some occult reason we regard it as funny. The difference of a hair seems to tickle us, whereas a great difference does not produce that kind of effect at all.
We won't try to define exactly what humor is. That attempt wouldn't really yield anything useful. It's enough to say that most of us have a natural sense of the ridiculous - the out-of-place. If something is slightly too big or too small for its intended spot, for some mysterious reason, we find it funny. Even a small difference can make us laugh, while a large difference doesn't have the same effect at all.
We may secure humor by introducing into our writing the slightest possible exaggeration which will result in the slightest possible incongruity. Of course this presupposes that we understand the facts in a most thorough and delicate way. Our language is not precisely representative of things as they are, but it proves better than any other language that we know just what the truth is.
We can create humor by adding just a bit of exaggeration that leads to a small incongruity. This assumes we have a deep and nuanced understanding of the facts. Our language doesn't perfectly represent reality, but it shows better than any other language that we know exactly what the truth is.
Humor is the touchstone by which we ought to try ourselves and our work.
Humor is the standard by which we should evaluate ourselves and our work.
It will prevent our getting very far away from what is normal and natural.
It will keep us from straying too far from what is normal and natural.
So much for its effect on ourselves. To our readers it proves that we are good-natured, honest, and determined to be agreeable. Besides, it makes an appeal to them on their weakest side. Few people can resist a joke. There is never any occasion for them to cultivate resistance. So there is no more certain way by which we can get quickly and inevitably into their confidence and fellowship. When once we are on good terms with them they will listen to us while we say anything we may have to say. Of course we shall often have many serious things to say; but humor will open the way for us to say them better than any other agency.
So much for its effect on us. To our readers, it shows that we are friendly, honest, and eager to be likable. Plus, it appeals to them on their soft spot. Few people can resist a joke. They never really need to fight that urge. So, there's no better way for us to quickly gain their trust and connection. Once we're on good terms, they'll listen to whatever we have to say. Of course, we often have serious things to discuss, but humor will help us express those points better than anything else.
It is to be noted that humor is slighter and more delicate than any other form of wit, and that it is used by serious and accomplished writers. It is the element of success in nearly all essay-writing, especially in letters; and the business man will find it his most powerful weapon in advertising. Its value is to be seen by uses so various.
It’s worth noting that humor is more subtle and delicate than any other kind of wit, and it’s often used by serious and skilled writers. It plays a key role in almost all essay writing, especially in letters; and businesspeople will find it to be their strongest tool in advertising. Its value is evident in its numerous applications.
The student is invited to study three examples of humor. The first is Addison's “Advice in Love.” It is obvious that this subject could not very well be treated in any other way. It is too delicate for anything but delicate humor, for humor can handle subjects which would be impossible for any other kind of language. Besides, the sentiment would be likely to nauseate us by its excess or its morbidity, except for the healthy salt of humor. Humor makes this essay instructive and interesting.
The student is invited to look at three examples of humor. The first is Addison's “Advice in Love.” It's clear that this topic couldn’t be addressed in any other way. It’s too sensitive for anything other than gentle humor, as humor can tackle subjects that would be impossible for any other kind of expression. Moreover, the sentiment might turn us off with its excess or gloominess, if not for the refreshing touch of humor. Humor makes this essay both educational and engaging.
Next we present two letters from Stevenson. Here we see that humor makes commonplace things interesting. How deadly dull would be the details Stevenson gives in these letters but for the enlivenment of humor! By what other method could anything worth reading have been gotten out of the facts?
Next we present two letters from Stevenson. Here we see that humor makes everyday things interesting. How boring would the details Stevenson shares in these letters be without the lift of humor! What other way could anything worth reading have come from the facts?
The selection from Charles Lamb is an illustration of how humor may save the utterly absurd from being unreadable. Lamb had absolutely nothing to say when he sat down to write this letter; and yet he contrived to be amusing, if not actually interesting.
The selection from Charles Lamb shows how humor can make something totally ridiculous enjoyable to read. Lamb had nothing important to say when he wrote this letter, yet he managed to be funny, if not genuinely interesting.
The master of humor can draw upon the riches of his own mind, and thereby embellish and enliven any subject he may desire to write upon.
The master of humor can tap into the wealth of his own thoughts and enhance any topic he chooses to write about.
Of these three selections, the easiest to imitate is Addison. First, we should note the old-fashioned phrasing and choice of words, and perhaps translate Addison into simple, idiomatic, modern English, altering as little as possible. We note that the letter offered by Addison is purposely filled with all the faults of rhetoric which we never find in his own writing. Addison's humorous imitation of these faults gives us twice as good a lesson as any possible example of real faults made by some writer unconsciously.
Of these three selections, the easiest to mimic is Addison. First, we should recognize the outdated phrasing and word choice and maybe convert Addison into straightforward, everyday modern English, changing as little as possible. We see that the letter presented by Addison is intentionally packed with all the rhetorical faults that we never see in his own writing. Addison's humorous take on these faults provides us with a lesson that’s twice as valuable as any example of real mistakes made by a writer unaware of them.
In Stevenson's letters we see the value of what has been called “the magic word.” Nearly the whole of his humor consists in selecting a word which suggests ten times as much as it expresses on its face. There is a whole world of fun in this suggestion. Sometimes it is merely commonplace punning, as when he speaks of the “menial” of “high Dutch extraction” as yet “only partially extracted;” and again it is the delicate insinuation contained in spelling “Parc” with a c, for that one letter gives us an entire foreign atmosphere, and the disproportion between the smallness of the letter and the extent of the suggestiveness touches our sense of the ridiculous.
In Stevenson's letters, we can see the importance of what has been called “the magic word.” Almost all of his humor comes from choosing a word that suggests way more than it literally says. There’s a whole world of fun in that suggestion. Sometimes it’s just simple puns, like when he refers to the “menial” of “high Dutch extraction” as still “only partially extracted;” and other times it’s the subtle implication of spelling “Parc” with a c, because that one letter creates an entire foreign vibe, and the contrast between the smallness of the letter and the broadness of the suggestion tickles our sense of the absurd.
The form of study of these passages may be slightly altered. Instead of making notes and rewriting exactly as the original authors wrote, we should keep the original open before us and try to produce something slightly different in the same vein. We may suppose the letter on love written by a man instead of by a woman. Of course its character will be quite different, though exactly the same characteristics will be illustrated. This change will require an alteration in almost every sentence of the essay. Our effort should be to see how little change in the wording will be required by this one change in subject; though of course we should always modernize the phrasing. In the case of Stevenson, we may suppose that we are writing a similar letter to friends, but from some other city than San Francisco. We may imitate Lamb by describing our feelings when afflicted by some other ailment than a cold.
The way we study these passages might be a bit different. Instead of just taking notes and rewriting exactly what the original authors said, we should keep the original text in front of us and try to create something slightly different but in the same style. For example, we could imagine a letter about love written by a man instead of a woman. Its tone will definitely be different, even though it will illustrate the same qualities. This shift will require changing almost every sentence of the essay. Our goal should be to see how little we can change the wording with this single shift in perspective; of course, we should always update the language. In the case of Stevenson, we can imagine we are writing a similar letter to friends, but from a city other than San Francisco. We might take inspiration from Lamb by sharing our feelings when dealing with some other issue instead of a cold.
ADVICE IN LOVE.
By Joseph Addison.
By Joseph Addison.
It is an old observation, which has been made of politicians who would rather ingratiate, themselves with their sovereign, than promote his real service, that they accommodate their counsels to his inclinations, and advise him to such actions only as his heart is naturally set upon. The privy-counsellor of one in love must observe the same conduct, unless he would forfeit the friendship of the person who desires his advice. I have known several odd cases of this nature. Hipparchus was going to marry a common woman, but being resolved to do nothing without the advice of his friend Philander, he consulted him upon the occasion. Philander told him his mind freely, and represented his mistress to him in such strong colors, that the next morning he received a challenge for his pains, and before twelve o'clock was run through the body by the man who had asked his advice. Celia was more prudent on the like occasion; she desired Leonilla to give her opinion freely upon a young fellow who made his addresses to her. Leonilla, to oblige her, told her with great frankness, that she looked upon him as one of the most worthless― Celia, foreseeing what a character she was to expect, begged her not to go on, for that she had been privately married to him above a fortnight.
It’s a well-known fact about politicians that they often prefer to flatter their ruler instead of genuinely serving him. They shape their advice to fit his desires and only suggest actions that he is already inclined to take. A confidant to someone in love has to follow the same approach if they want to keep that person’s friendship. I’ve seen several strange situations like this. Hipparchus was about to marry a common woman, but determined to take no action without his friend Philander's input, he consulted him about it. Philander shared his honest thoughts and described the woman in such harsh terms that the next morning, he received a challenge and was fatally stabbed by the man who had sought his advice. Celia was wiser in a similar situation; she asked Leonilla for her candid opinion about a young man who was pursuing her. To help her out, Leonilla bluntly told her that she viewed him as one of the most worthless guys around. Celia, realizing the type of opinion she was going to get, quickly asked her to stop, explaining that she had been secretly married to him for over two weeks.
The truth of it is a woman seldom asks advice before she has bought her wedding clothes. When she has made her own choice, for form's sake she sends a congé d'élire to her friends.
The truth is, a woman rarely asks for advice before she buys her wedding clothes. Once she makes her own choice, she sends a congé d'élire to her friends just for show.
If we look into the secret springs and motives that set people at work on these occasions, and put them upon asking advice, which they never intend to take; I look upon it to be none of the least, that they are incapable of keeping a secret which is so very pleasing to them. A girl longs to tell her confidant that she hopes to be married in a little time, and, in order to talk of the pretty fellow that dwells so much in her thoughts, asks her gravely, what she would advise her to in a case of so much difficulty. Why else should Melissa, who had not a thousand pounds in the world, go into every quarter of the town to ask her acquaintance whether they would advise her to take Tom Townly, that made his addresses to her with an estate of five thousand a year? 'Tis very pleasant on this occasion to hear the lady propose her doubts, and to see the pains she is at to get over them.
If we dive into the hidden reasons and motivations that drive people to seek advice in these situations, even when they have no intention of following it, one of the main reasons is that they can’t resist sharing a secret that excites them. A girl wants to tell her close friend that she hopes to get married soon, and to discuss the charming guy who fills her thoughts, she seriously asks for advice on such a challenging situation. Why else would Melissa, who doesn’t have a penny to her name, wander all over town asking her friends if they think she should accept Tom Townly’s proposal, considering he has an estate worth five thousand a year? It’s quite entertaining to hear the lady voice her concerns and see the effort she puts into overcoming them.
I must not here omit a practice that is in use among the vainer part of our own sex, who will often ask a friend's advice, in relation to a fortune whom they are never likely to come at. Will Honeycomb, who is now on the verge of threescore, took me aside not long since, and ask me in his most serious look, whether I would advise him to marry my Lady Betty Single, who, by the way, is one of the greatest fortunes about town. I stared him full in the face upon so strange a question; upon which he immediately gave me an inventory of her jewels and estate, adding, that he was resolved to do nothing in a matter of such consequence without my approbation. Finding he would have an answer, I told him, if he could get the lady's consent, he had mine. This is about the tenth match which, to my knowledge, Will has consulted his friends upon, without ever opening his mind to the party herself.
I shouldn't skip over a habit that’s common among some people of our own gender, who often seek a friend’s opinion about a wealthy prospect they’re unlikely to ever meet. Will Honeycomb, who's now almost sixty, pulled me aside recently and asked, with a serious expression, whether I thought he should marry Lady Betty Single, who, by the way, is one of the wealthiest women in town. I was taken aback by such a strange question, and he promptly provided me with a rundown of her jewelry and property, insisting that he wouldn’t make any decisions on such an important matter without my approval. Realizing he wanted a response, I told him that if he could get the lady's consent, he had mine. This is around the tenth potential match that, to my knowledge, Will has discussed with his friends without ever bringing it up with the woman herself.
I have been engaged in this subject by the following letter, which comes to me from some notable young female scribe, who, by the contents of it, seems to have carried matters so far that she is ripe for asking advice; but as I would not lose her good-will, nor forfeit the reputation which I have with her for wisdom, I shall only communicate the letter to the public, without returning any answer to it.
I’ve been drawn into this topic by a letter I received from a notable young female writer, who, based on what she says, seems ready to seek advice. However, since I don’t want to risk her goodwill or damage the reputation I have with her for being wise, I’ll simply share the letter with the public without replying to it.
“Mr. Spectator, Now, sir, the thing is this: Mr. Shapely is the prettiest gentleman about town. He is very tall, but not too tall neither. He dances like an angel. His mouth is made I do not know how, but it is the prettiest that I ever saw in my life. He is always laughing, for he has an infinite deal of wit. If you did but see how he rolls his stockings! He has a thousand pretty fancies, and I am sure, if you saw him, you would like him, he is a very good scholar, and can talk Latin as fast as English. I wish you could but see him dance. Now you must understand poor Mr. Shapely has no estate; but how can he help that, you know? And yet my friends are so unreasonable as to be always teasing me about him, because he has no estate: but I am sure he has that that is better than an estate; for he is a good-natured, ingenious, modest, civil, tall, well-bred, handsome man, and I am obliged to him for his civilities ever since I saw him. I forgot to tell you that he has black eyes, and looks upon me now and then as if he had tears in them. And yet my friends are so unreasonable, that they would have me be uncivil to him. I have a good portion which they cannot hinder me of, and I shall be fourteen on the 29th day of August next, and am therefore willing to settle in the world as soon as I can, and so is Mr. Shapely. But everybody I advise with here is poor Mr. Shapely's enemy. I desire, therefore, you will give me your advice, for I know you are a wise man: and if you advise me well, I am resolved to follow it. I heartily wish you could see him dance, and am, “Sir, your most humble servant. B. D.” “He loves your Spectator mightily.”
“Mr. Spectator, Now, sir, here's the thing: Mr. Shapely is the most handsome guy in town. He’s very tall, but not too tall. He dances like an angel. His mouth is something else; it's the prettiest I've ever seen. He’s always laughing because he has a lot of wit. If you could just see how he rolls up his stockings! He has a thousand charming quirks, and I’m sure if you met him, you’d like him. He’s a great scholar and can speak Latin as fast as English. I really wish you could see him dance. You should know, though, that poor Mr. Shapely has no fortune, but how can he help that? My friends keep teasing me about him because of his lack of wealth, but I honestly believe he has something better than money; he’s kind-hearted, clever, modest, polite, tall, well-mannered, and handsome. I’m grateful for his kindness ever since I met him. Oh, and I forgot to mention that he has black eyes and looks at me sometimes as if he might cry. Yet, my friends are so unreasonable that they want me to be rude to him. I have a good inheritance that they can’t take away from me, and I’ll be fourteen on August 29th, so I’m ready to settle down as soon as I can, and so is Mr. Shapely. However, everyone I talk to here is against poor Mr. Shapely. Therefore, I’d appreciate your advice because I know you’re a wise man, and if you give me good advice, I'm determined to follow it. I truly wish you could see him dance, and I am, “Sir, your most humble servant. B. D.” “He really likes your Spectator.”
Notes.
Notes.
Addison's object in writing this paper is largely serious: he wishes to criticise and correct manners and morals. He is satirical, but so good-humored in his satire that no one could be offended. He also contrives to give the impression that he refers to “the other fellow,” not to you. This delicacy and tact are as important in the writer as in the diplomat, for the writer quite as much as the diplomat lives by favor.
Addison's goal in writing this paper is mostly serious: he wants to critique and improve behavior and ethics. He uses satire, but it's so friendly that no one could take offense. He also manages to make it seem like he's talking about "someone else," not you. This sensitivity and finesse are just as crucial for a writer as they are for a diplomat, since both rely on goodwill.
Addison is not a very strict writer, and his works have given examples for the critics by the score. One of these is seen in “begged her not to go on, for-that she had been privately married:” “begged” and “for that” do not go well together. To a modern reader such a phrasing as “If we look into …… I look upon it to be” etc., seems a little awkward, if not crude; but we may excuse these seeming discrepancies as “antique usage,” along with such phrases as “advise her to in a case of such difficulty” and “to hear the lady propose her doubts, and to see the pains she is at to get over them.”
Addison isn't a very strict writer, and his works have given plenty of examples for critics. One of these is seen in “begged her not to go on, for that she had been privately married:” “begged” and “for that” don’t really match well together. To a modern reader, a phrasing like “If we look into …… I look upon it to be” etc., seems a bit awkward, if not crude; but we can excuse these seeming discrepancies as “old-fashioned usage,” along with phrases like “advise her to in a case of such difficulty” and “to hear the lady propose her doubts, and to see the pains she is at to get over them.”
“Fortune whom” is evidently a personification. The use of party in “to the party herself” is now reckoned an Americanism (!) “Engaged in this subject” is evidently antiquated.
“Fortune whom” is clearly a personification. The use of party in “to the party herself” is now considered an Americanism (!) “Engaged in this subject” is clearly outdated.
We miss in Addison the variety which we found in Ruskin. He does not seem to understand the art of alternating long and short sentences, and following one sentence form by another in quick succession. The fact is, English prose style has made enormous advances since the time of Addison, and we learn more by comparing him with a writer like Ruskin than by deliberately imitating him. At the same time his method is simpler, and since it is so we may find him a good writer to begin our study with. In spite of any little faults we may find with him, he was and is a great writer, and we should be sure we can write as well as he before we reject him.
We miss the variety in Addison that we find in Ruskin. He doesn’t seem to know how to mix long and short sentences, or to switch from one sentence structure to another quickly. The truth is, English prose has changed a lot since Addison's time, and we learn more by comparing him to a writer like Ruskin than by just trying to copy him. At the same time, his style is simpler, so he can be a good writer to start our studies with. Despite any minor flaws we might see in him, he was and is a great writer, and we should make sure we can write as well as he did before we dismiss him.
LETTERS.
By Robert Louis Stevenson.
By Robert Louis Stevenson.
I.
My Dear Mother,―I am here at last, sitting in my room, without coat or waistcoat, and with both window and door open, and yet perspiring like a terra-cotta jug or a Gruy{è}əre cheese:
My Dear Mother,―I'm finally here, sitting in my room, without my coat or vest, with both the window and door open, and yet I'm sweating like a clay jug or a Gruyère cheese:
We had a very good passage, which we certainly deserved no compensation for having to sleep on the cabin floor and finding absolutely nothing fit for human food in the whole filthy embarkation. We made up for lost time by sleeping on deck a good part of the forenoon. When I awoke, Simpson was still sleeping the sleep of the just, on a coil of ropes and (as appeared afterwards) his own hat; so I got a bottle of Bass and a pipe and laid hold of an old Frenchman of somewhat filthy aspect (fiat experimentum in corpora vii) to try my French upon. I made very heavy weather of it. The Frenchman had a very pretty young wife; but my French always deserted me entirely when I had to answer her, and so she soon drew away and left me to her lord, who talked of French politics, Africa, and domestic economy with great vivacity. From Ostend a smoking hot journey to Brussels! At Brussels we went off after dinner to the Pare. If any person wants to be happy, I should advise the Pare. You sit drinking iced drinks and smoking penny cigars under great old trees.
We had a smooth journey, and we definitely didn’t get any compensation for having to sleep on the cabin floor and finding nothing edible in the entire dirty ship. We made up for lost time by napping on deck for a good part of the morning. When I woke up, Simpson was still sound asleep, curled up on a pile of ropes and (as it turned out) his own hat. So, I grabbed a bottle of Bass and a pipe and approached an old Frenchman with a somewhat unkempt appearance (fiat experimentum in corpora vii) to practice my French on. I struggled quite a bit. The Frenchman had a very attractive young wife, but I completely lost my French when it came to speaking to her, so she quickly drifted away, leaving me with her husband, who spoke lively about French politics, Africa, and household management. After that, it was a scorching hot trip to Brussels! In Brussels, we headed to the park after dinner. If anyone wants to be happy, I recommend the park. You can sit there sipping iced drinks and smoking cheap cigars under the majestic old trees.
The band place, covered walks, etc., are all lit up; and you can't fancy how beautiful was the contrast of the great masses of lamplit foliage and the dark sapphire night sky with just one blue star set overhead in the middle of the largest patch. In the dark walks, too, there are crowds of people whose faces you cannot see, and here and there a colossal white statue at the corner of an alley that gives the place a nice, artificial, eighteenth-century sentiment. There was a good deal of summer lightning blinking overhead, and the black avenues and white statues leapt out every minute into short-lived distinctness.
The band area, covered walkways, and so on are all lit up; you wouldn't believe how beautiful the contrast was between the large areas of illuminated leaves and the dark blue night sky, with just one blue star shining above in the center of the biggest patch. In the shadowy paths, there are crowds of people whose faces you can't make out, and every now and then, a massive white statue at the end of an alley adds a nice, artificial, eighteenth-century vibe to the place. There was quite a bit of summer lightning flashing overhead, and the dark paths and white statues would briefly stand out in sharp detail every minute.
II.
My dear Colvin,―Any time between eight and half-past nine in the morning, a slender gentleman in an ulster, with a volume buttoned into the breast of it, may be observed leaving No. 608 Bush and descending Powell with an active step. The gentleman is R. L. S.; the volume relates to Benjamin Franklin, on whom he meditates one of his charming essays. He descends Powell, crosses Market, and descends in Sixth on a branch of the original Pine Street Coffee House, no less; I believe he would be capable of going to the original itself, if he could only find it. In the branch he seats himself at a table covered with waxcloth, and a pampered menial, of high Dutch extraction and, indeed, as yet only partially extracted, lays before him a cup of coffee, a roll, and a pat of butter, all, to quote the deity, very good. Awhile ago, and H. L. S. used to find the supply of butter insufficient; but he has now learned the art to exactitude, and butter and roll expire at the same moment. For this refection he pays ten cents, or five pence sterling (£0 0s 5d).
My dear Colvin,―Any time between eight and half-past nine in the morning, you can spot a slender man in an overcoat, with a book tucked into its front pocket, leaving No. 608 Bush and walking down Powell with a lively step. This man is R. L. S.; the book is about Benjamin Franklin, and he’s thinking about one of his delightful essays. He heads down Powell, crosses Market, and goes down Sixth to a branch of the original Pine Street Coffee House. I think he would try to get to the original place itself if he could just figure out where it is. At the branch, he sits down at a table covered with wax cloth, and a well-treated waiter, of Dutch descent and still partially in training, brings him a cup of coffee, a roll, and a pat of butter, all, to quote the deity, very good. Not long ago, H. L. S. found the butter supply lacking; but now he has mastered the art of getting it just right, so the butter and roll run out at the same time. For this meal, he pays ten cents, or five pence sterling (£0 0s 5d).
Half an hour later, the inhabitants of Bush Street observe the same slender gentleman armed, like George Washington, with his little hatchet, splitting kindling, and breaking coal for his fire. He does this quasi-publicly upon the window-sill; but this is not to be attributed to any love of notoriety, though he is indeed vain of his prowess with the hatchet (which he persists in calling an axe), and daily surprised at the perpetuation of his fingers. The reason is this: that the sill is a strong, supporting beam, and that blows of the same emphasis in other parts, of his room might knock the entire shanty into hell. Thenceforth, for from three to four hours, he is engaged darkly with an ink-bottle. Yet he is not blacking his boots, for the only pair that he possesses are innocent of lustre and wear the natural hue of the material turned up with caked and venerable slush. The youngest child of his landlady remarks several times a day, as this strange occupant enters or quits the house, “Dere's de author.” Can it be that this bright-haired innocent has found the true clue to the mystery? The being in question is, at least, poor enough to belong to that honorable craft.
Half an hour later, the people on Bush Street notice the same slender man, equipped like George Washington with his little hatchet, chopping kindling and breaking coal for his fire. He does this almost publicly on the window sill, but it's not because he craves attention, even though he does take pride in his hatchet skills (which he insists on calling an axe) and is daily amazed that his fingers are still intact. The reason for this is that the sill is a strong, supportive beam, and hitting it with that much force in other parts of his room could cause the whole place to collapse. For the next three to four hours, he works intensely with an ink bottle. But he isn't polishing his boots, because the only pair he owns is dull and covered with old, caked mud. His landlady’s youngest child points out several times a day, as this unusual tenant comes and goes, “There’s the author.” Could it be that this bright-haired child has discovered the real truth? The man in question is, at least, poor enough to fit the description of that noble profession.
Notes.
Notes.
The first of these two letters by Stevenson was written very early in his literary career, the second when he may be supposed to have been at the height of his powers. It is interesting to see to what extent he had improved his style.
The first of these two letters by Stevenson was written early in his literary career, while the second was likely written when he was at the peak of his abilities. It's interesting to see how much he had improved his writing style.
Note now much suggestiveness (apart from the apparent meaning) is contained in such words and phrases as “the whole filthy embarkation;” “made very heavy weather of it” (speaking French); “Parc”; “artificial” (the peculiar meaning being indicated by italicizing); “pampered menial” (the reference being to just the opposite).
Note how much suggestiveness (beyond the obvious meaning) is contained in phrases like “the whole filthy embarkation;” “made very heavy weather of it” (speaking French); “Parc”; “artificial” (the specific meaning highlighted by italics); “pampered menial” (the reference being to just the opposite).
There is a peculiar mechanical sort of humor in omitting the word street after “Bush,” “Powell,” etc., and in giving the cost of his meal so elaborately―“ten cents, or fivepence sterling (£0 0s 5d).”
There’s a strange mechanical kind of humor in leaving out the word street after “Bush,” “Powell,” etc., and in detailing the cost of his meal so much—“ten cents, or five pence sterling (£0 0s 5d).”
The chief source of fun is in giving small things an importance they do not deserve. The author is making fun at himself. Of course since he makes fun at himself it is good-natured; but it must be just as good-natured if one is to make fun of any one else. Addison was so successful because no suggestion of malice ever crept into his satire.
The main source of fun comes from giving little things an importance they really don’t deserve. The author is poking fun at himself. Naturally, since he’s making fun of himself, it’s all in good humor; but it should be just as lighthearted when poking fun at someone else. Addison was so successful because there was never a hint of malice in his satire.
A LETTER TO BERNARD BARTON.
By Charles Lamb.
By Charles Lamb.
January 9, 1824.
January 9, 1824.
Dear B. B.,―Do you know what it is to succumb under an insurmountable day-mare,―a “whoreson lethargy,” Falstaff calls it,―an indisposition to do anything or to be anything; a total deadness and distaste; a suspension of vitality; an indifference to locality; a numb, soporifical good-for-nothingness; an ossification all over; an oyster-like insensibility to the passing events; a mind-stupor; a brawny de-fiance to the needles of a thrust-in conscience? Did you ever have a very bad cold with a total irresolution to submit to water-gruel processes? This has been for many weeks my lot and my excuse. My fingers drag heavily over this paper, and to my thinking it is three-and-twenty furlongs from here to the end of this demi-sheet. I have not a thing to say, nothing is of more importance than another. I am flatter than a denial or a pancake; emptier than Judge Parke's wig when the head is in it; duller than a country stage when the actors are off it,―a cipher, an o! I acknowledge life at all only by an occasional convulsional cough, and a permanent phlegmatic pain in the chest. I am weary of the world; life is weary of me. My day is gone into twilight, and I don't think it worth the expense of candles. My wick bath a thief in it, but I can't muster courage to snuff it. I inhale suffocation; I can't distinguish veal from mutton; nothing interests me. 'Tis twelve o'clock, and Thurtell* is just now coming out upon the new drop, Jack Ketch alertly tucking up his greasy sleeves to do the last office of mortality; yet cannot I elicit a groan or a moral reflection. If you told me the world will be at an end tomorrow, I should say “Will it?” I have not volition enough left to dot my i's, much less to comb my eyebrows; my eyes are set in my head; my brains are gone out to see a poor relation in Moorfields, and they did not say when they'd come back again; my skull is a Grub-street attic to let,―not so much as a joint-stool left in it; my hand writes, not I, from habit, as chickens run about a little when their heads are cut off. Oh for a vigorous fit of gout, colic, toothache―an earwig{†}¤ in my auditory, a fly in my visual organs; pain is life,―the sharper the more evidence of life; but this apathy, this death! Did you ever have an obstinate cold, a six or seven weeks' unintermitting chill and suspension of hope, fear, conscience, and everything? Yet do I try all I can to cure it. I try wine, and spirits, and smoking, and snuff in unsparing quantities; but they all only seem to make me worse, instead of better. I sleep in a damp room, but it does no good; I come home late o' nights, but do not find any visible amendment! Who shall deliver me from the body of this death?
Dear B. B.,—Do you know what it’s like to be overwhelmed by an unbeatable daymare—what Falstaff calls a “whoreson lethargy”—feeling completely unable to do anything or be anyone; experiencing total numbness and disinterest; a halt to all vitality; indifference to your surroundings; a dull, sleep-inducing uselessness; a complete mental shutdown; a stubborn resistance to the nagging of a guilty conscience? Have you ever had a really bad cold and been completely unwilling to drink any broth? That’s been my situation for many weeks now, and it’s my excuse. My fingers feel heavy on this paper, and it seems like it’s three-and-twenty miles to finish this half-sheet. I have nothing to say; nothing seems more important than anything else. I feel flatter than an ignored denial or a pancake; emptier than Judge Parke's wig without a head in it; duller than a country stage when no one’s performing—a mere nothing, an “o”! I only acknowledge life through an occasional painful cough and a constant phlegmy ache in my chest. I’m tired of the world; life seems tired of me. My day has faded into twilight, and I don’t think it’s worth wasting candles on. My wick has a thief in it, but I can’t find the courage to trim it. I feel suffocated; I can’t tell veal from mutton; nothing interests me. It’s twelve o’clock, and Thurtell* is just now being executed, with Jack Ketch eagerly rolling up his greasy sleeves to carry out the grim task; yet I can’t even muster a groan or a moral thought. If you told me the world was ending tomorrow, I’d just say, “Will it?” I don’t even have the energy to dot my i's, let alone tidy my eyebrows; my eyes are dull; my brain has gone off to visit a distant relative in Moorfields, and didn’t say when it would return; my skull is a vacant attic on Grub Street—not even a joint stool left in it; my hand writes, not me, out of habit, like a chicken running around a bit after its head is chopped off. Oh, for a strong case of gout, colic, toothache—a bug in my ear, a fly in my eye; pain proves life—sharper pain means a stronger sign of life; but this numbness, this death! Have you ever had a stubborn cold, a six or seven-week unending chill and suspension of hope, fear, conscience, and everything? Yet I try everything I can to cure it. I try wine, spirits, smoking, and snuff in heavy doses; but they all just seem to make it worse, not better. I sleep in a damp room, but it doesn’t help; I come home late at night, yet there’s no visible improvement! Who will rescue me from this death?
*Hanged that day for the murder of Weare.
*Hanged that day for the murder of Weare.
{†}¤An ant
An ant
It is just fifteen minutes after twelve. Thurtell is by this time a good way on his journey, baiting at Scorpion, perhaps. Ketch is bargaining for his cast coat and waistcoat; and the Jew demurs at first at three half-crowns, but on consideration that he may get somewhat by showing 'em in the town, finally closes. C. L.
It’s just fifteen minutes past twelve. Thurtell is well on his way now, maybe stopping at Scorpion. Ketch is trying to negotiate for his old coat and waistcoat, and the Jew hesitates at first over three half-crowns, but after thinking it over and realizing he can make a bit by showing them in town, he eventually agrees. C. L.
Notes.
Notes.
The danger of not adapting your method to your auditor is well illustrated by the beginning of Lamb's next letter to the same person:
The risk of not adjusting your approach to suit your audience is clearly shown at the start of Lamb's next letter to the same person:
“My dear sir,―That peevish letter of mine, which was meant to convey an apology for my incapacity to write, seems to have been taken by you in too serious a light,―it was only my way of telling you I had a severe cold.”
“My dear sir,―That grumpy letter of mine, which was meant to apologize for my inability to write, seems to have been taken by you way too seriously,―it was just my way of letting you know I had a bad cold.”
Lamb's letter is filled with about every figure of speech known to rhetoricians: It will be a useful exercise to pick them out.
Lamb's letter is packed with nearly every figure of speech that rhetoricians know about: It will be a helpful exercise to identify them.
Any person who does not have a well developed sense of humor will hardly see the force of the reference to Thurtell, the murderer. It is a whimsical way of indicating by a specific example how empty the writer's brain was, forcing him to reflect on such a subject in so trivial a manner.
Any person who doesn't have a well-developed sense of humor will hardly understand the reference to Thurtell, the murderer. It's a quirky way of showing, through a specific example, how empty the writer's mind was, making him think about such a topic in such a trivial way.
Observe the occasional summing up of the meaning, curiously repeating exactly the same thing―“Did you ever have a very bad cold―?” “Did you ever have an obstinate cold―?” The very short sentences summarize the very long ones. The repetition is meant to give the impression of being clumsy and stupid. In describing harshness we use words that are harsh, in describing awkwardness we use words that are awkward, in describing brightness and lightness we use words that are bright and light, in the very words themselves giving a concrete illustration of what we mean.
Notice how sometimes the meaning is summed up, oddly repeating the same thing—“Did you ever have a really bad cold?” “Did you ever have a stubborn cold?” The short sentences capture the essence of the long ones. This repetition is meant to seem clumsy and foolish. When we describe harshness, we use harsh words; when we describe awkwardness, we use awkward words; when we talk about brightness and lightness, we choose words that are bright and light, providing a concrete illustration of what we mean through the words themselves.
CHAPTER V.
RIDICULE:
Poe.
Poe.
I have said that humor is good-natured and winning. This is always true, though the winning of one reader may be at the expense of some other. Humor used to win one at the expense of another is called satire and sarcasm. The simplest form of using satire and sarcasm is in direct ridicule.
I’ve mentioned that humor is friendly and engaging. This is always the case, although making one person feel good might come at someone else’s expense. Humor that makes one person feel better by putting down another is known as satire and sarcasm. The most straightforward way to use satire and sarcasm is through direct ridicule.
Ridicule, satire, and sarcasm are suitable for use against an open enemy, such as a political opponent, against a public nuisance which ought to be suppressed, or in behalf of higher ideals and standards. The one thing that makes this style of little effect is anger or morbid intensity. While some thing or some one is attacked, perhaps with ferocity, results are to be obtained by winning the reader. So it comes about that winning, good-natured humor is an essential element in really successful ridicule. If intense or morbid hatred or temper is allowed to dominate, the reader is repulsed and made distrustful, and turns away without being affected in the desired way at all.
Ridicule, satire, and sarcasm can be effective against a clear enemy, like a political rival, a public nuisance that needs to be addressed, or in support of greater ideals and standards. The main thing that makes this approach ineffective is when it's fueled by anger or unhealthy intensity. When something or someone is attacked, perhaps aggressively, the goal is to engage the reader. This is why good-natured humor is a vital component of successful ridicule. If overwhelming or toxic anger takes over, the reader feels turned off and becomes distrustful, leading them to walk away without being impacted in the way you intended.
The following, which opens a little known essay of Edgar Allan Poe's, is one of the most perfect examples of simple ridicule in the English language. We may have our doubts as to whether Poe was justified in using such withering satire on poor Mr. Channing; but we cannot help feeling that the workmanship is just what it ought to be when ridicule is employed in a proper cause. Perhaps the boosting of books into public regard by the use of great names is a proper and sufficient subject for attack by ridicule.
The following, which opens a little-known essay by Edgar Allan Poe, is one of the best examples of straightforward mockery in the English language. We might question whether Poe was right to use such harsh satire against poor Mr. Channing, but we can't help but feel that the execution is exactly what it should be when mockery is used for a just cause. Maybe promoting books into public favor by using big names is a valid and adequate topic for ridicule.
WILLIAM ELLERY CHANNING.
By Edgar Allan Poe.
By Edgar Allan Poe.
In speaking of Mr. William Ellery Channing, who has just published a very neat little volume of poems, we feel the necessity of employing the indefinite rather than the definite article. He is a, and by no means the, William Ellery Channing. He is only the son* of the great essayist deceased… It may be said in his favor that nobody ever heard of him. Like an honest woman, he has always succeeded in keeping himself from being made the subject of gossip. His book contains about sixty-three things, which he calls poems, and which he no doubt seriously supposes to be such. They are full of all kinds of mistakes, of which the most important is that of their having been printed at all.
In talking about Mr. William Ellery Channing, who just released a neat little book of poems, we feel the need to use the indefinite article instead of the definite one. He is a, and definitely not the, William Ellery Channing. He is just the son* of the great essayist who has passed away… It can be said in his favor that no one has ever heard of him. Like a respectable person, he has managed to avoid becoming the center of gossip. His book has about sixty-three pieces, which he refers to as poems, and which he likely genuinely believes to be so. They are full of all sorts of errors, the most significant being that they were published at all.
They are not precisely English―nor will we insult a great nation by calling them Kickapoo; perhaps they are Channingese. We may convey some general idea of them by two foreign terms not in common use―the Italian pavoneggiarsi, “to strut like a peacock,” and the German word for “sky-rocketing,” Schwarmerei. They are more preposterous, in a word, than any poems except those of the author of “Sam Patch;” for we presume we are right (are we not?) in taking it for granted that the author of “Sam Patch” is the very worst of all the wretched poets that ever existed upon the earth.
They aren’t really English—nor would we disrespect a great nation by calling them Kickapoo; maybe they’re Channingese. We can give you a rough idea of them with two uncommon foreign terms—the Italian pavoneggiarsi, “to strut like a peacock,” and the German word for “sky-rocketing,” Schwarmerei. In short, they’re more ridiculous than any poems except those by the author of “Sam Patch;” we assume we’re correct (aren’t we?) in believing that the author of “Sam Patch” is the absolute worst of all the terrible poets who ever lived on this earth.
In spite, however, of the customary phrase of a man's “making a fool of himself,” we doubt if any one was ever a fool of his own free will and accord. A poet, therefore, should not always be taken too strictly to task. He should be treated with leniency, and even when damned, should be damned with respect. Nobility of descent, too, should be allowed its privileges not more in social life than in letters. The son of a great author cannot be handled too tenderly by the critical Jack Ketch. Mr. Channing must be hung, that's true. He must be hung in terrorem ——and for this there is no help under the sun; but then we shall do him all manner of justice, and observe every species of decorum, and be especially careful of his feelings, and hang him gingerly and gracefully, with a silken cord, as Spaniards hang their grandees of the blue blood, their nobles of the sangre azul.
Despite the usual saying about a guy “making a fool of himself,” I doubt anyone ever acts foolishly by choice. So, we shouldn’t be too hard on a poet. They deserve some understanding, and even when criticized, they should be treated with respect. Nobility by birth should have its privileges, not just in society but also in literature. The son of a great writer shouldn’t be dealt with too harshly by the critical executioner. Mr. Channing has to face consequences, that's true. He has to be punished in terrorem ——and for this, there’s no avoiding it; but we will treat him fairly, maintain decorum, be sensitive to his feelings, and execute him gently and gracefully, using a silk cord, like the Spaniards do with their blue-blooded nobility, their nobles of the sangre azul.
*Really the nephew.
*Really the nephew.*
To be serious, then, as we always wish to be, if possible, Mr. Channing (whom we suppose to be a very young man, since we are precluded from supposing him a very old one), appears to have been inoculated at the same moment with virus from Tennyson and from Carlyle, etc.
To be serious, then, as we always want to be, if we can, Mr. Channing (whom we assume is a very young man, since we can’t think of him as a very old one) seems to have been influenced at the same time by both Tennyson and Carlyle, among others.
Notes.
Notes.
The three paragraphs which we have quoted illustrate three different methods of using ridicule. The first is the simple one of contemptuous epithets——“calling names,” as we put it in colloquial parlance. So long as it is good-humored and the writer does not show personal malice, it is a good way; but the reader soon tires of it. A sense of fairness prevents him from listening to mere calling of names very long. So in the second paragraph Poe changes his method to one more subtile: he pretends to apologize and find excuses, virtually saying to the reader, “Oh, I'm going to be perfectly fair,” while at the same time the excuses are so absurd that the effect is ridicule of a still more intense and biting type. In the third paragraph Poe seems to answer the reader's mental comment to the effect that “you are merely amusing us by your clever wit” by asserting that he means to be extremely serious. He then proceeds about his business with a most solemn face, which is as amusing in literature as it is in comic representations on the stage.
The three paragraphs we've quoted demonstrate three different ways to use ridicule. The first is the straightforward approach of contemptuous name-calling—what we casually refer to as “calling names.” As long as it’s good-natured and the writer doesn’t express personal resentment, it works well; however, readers quickly lose interest. Their sense of fairness prevents them from tolerating mere name-calling for long. In the second paragraph, Poe shifts to a more subtle method: he pretends to apologize and make excuses, essentially telling the reader, “Oh, I'm going to be totally fair,” while the excuses are so ridiculous that they create a type of ridicule that’s even sharper and more biting. In the third paragraph, Poe seems to respond to the reader's unspoken thought that “you’re just entertaining us with your cleverness” by insisting that he intends to be very serious. He then continues with a completely serious demeanor, which is just as funny in writing as it is in comedic performances on stage.
In practising upon this type of writing one must select a subject that he feels to be decidedly in need of suppression. Perhaps the most impersonal and easy subject to select for practice is a popular novel in which one can see absurdities, or certain ridiculous departments in the newspapers, such as the personal-advice column. Taking such a subject, adapt Poe's language to it with as little change as possible.
In practicing this type of writing, one must choose a subject that clearly needs to be criticized. Perhaps the most impersonal and straightforward topic for practice is a popular novel where one can spot absurdities, or some silly sections in newspapers, like the personal advice column. Taking such a subject, adapt Poe's language to it with minimal alteration.
CHAPTER VI.
THE RHETORICAL, IMPASSIONED AND LOFTY STYLES:
Macaulay and De Quincey. The familiar style of the humorist is almost universal in its availability. It is the style of conversation, to a great extent―at least of the best conversation,―of letter-writing, of essay-writing, and, in large part, of fiction. But there are moments when a different and more, hard and artificial style is required. These moments are few, and many people never have them at all. Some people try to have them and thereby fall into the fault of “fine writing.” But it is certainly very important that when the great moment comes we should be prepared for it. Then a lofty and more or less artificial style is demanded as imperatively as the key-stone of an arch when the arch is completed except for the key-stone. Without the ability to write one lofty sentence, all else that we have said may completely fail of its effect, however excellent in itself.
Macaulay and De Quincey. The familiar style of humor is almost universally accessible. It reflects the way we talk, especially in good conversations, as well as in writing letters, essays, and much of fiction. However, there are times when a different, more formal and polished style is needed. These instances are rare, and many people never experience them. Some try to force it and end up with the pitfall of "fine writing." Yet, it's crucial that when the significant moment arrives, we are ready for it. At that point, a grand and somewhat artificial tone is as necessary as the keystone of an arch when everything else is in place but that essential piece. Without the ability to craft one elevated sentence, everything else we've expressed may completely lose its impact, no matter how well-written it is.
There are three kinds of prose which may be used on such occasions as we have described. The lowest and most common of these, as it is the most artificial and most easily acquired, is the rhetorical, or oratorical, style, the style of all orators, the style which is called eloquence. Of course we may find specimens of it in actual oratory, but it is best illustrated in its use for written compositions in Macaulay. The next variety, more rarely used, was especially developed if not actually invented by De Quincey and was called by him impassioned prose.
There are three types of prose that can be used in situations like the ones we've discussed. The lowest and most common of these, since it’s the most artificial and easiest to master, is the rhetorical or oratorical style, the style of all speakers, often referred to as eloquence. While we can find examples of it in actual speeches, it's best demonstrated in written works by Macaulay. The next type, which is used less frequently, was particularly developed, if not actually created, by De Quincey and is known as impassioned prose.
It would seem at first that language could go no higher; but it does mount a little higher simply by trying to do less, and we have loftiness in its plain simplicity, as when man stands bareheaded and humble in the presence of God alone.
It might initially seem that language couldn't reach greater heights; however, it actually rises a bit higher when it tries to do less. We find greatness in its straightforward simplicity, much like when a person stands respectfully and humbly before God.
Macaulay's style is highly artificial, but its rotundity, its movement, its impressive sweep have made it popular. Almost any one can acquire some of its features; but the ease with which it is acquired makes it dangerous in a high degree, for the writer becomes fascinated with it and uses it far too often. It is true that Macaulay used it practically all the time; but it is very doubtful it Macaulay would have succeeded so well with it to-day, when the power of simplicity is so much better understood.
Macaulay's style is quite artificial, but its fullness, its rhythm, and its strong impact have made it popular. Almost anyone can pick up some of its traits; however, the ease of doing so can be quite risky because the writer becomes so captivated by it that they use it way too often. It's true that Macaulay practically used it all the time, but it's very questionable whether he would have achieved the same success today, when the value of simplicity is much more appreciated.
De Quincey's “impassioned prose” was an attempt on his part to imitate the effects of poetry in prose. Without doubt he succeeded wonderfully; but the art is so difficult that no one else has equalled him and prose of the kind that he wrote is not often written. Still, it is worth while to try to catch some of his skill. He began to write this kind of composition in “The Confessions of an English Opium Eater,” but he reached perfection only in some compositions intended as sequels to that book, namely, “Suspiria de Profundis,” and “The English Mail Coach,” with its “Vision of Sudden Death,” and “Dream-Fugue” upon the theme of sudden death.
De Quincey's “passionate writing” was his effort to bring the impact of poetry into prose. There’s no doubt he succeeded impressively; however, the craft is so challenging that no one has been able to match his level, and the type of prose he wrote isn't common. Still, it's worthwhile to try to capture some of his talent. He started writing this style in “The Confessions of an English Opium Eater,” but he truly perfected it in later works intended as sequels, specifically “Suspiria de Profundis,” and “The English Mail Coach,” which includes his “Vision of Sudden Death” and “Dream-Fugue” on the theme of sudden death.
What we should strive for above all is the mighty effect of simple and bare loftiness of thought. Masters of this style have not been few, and they seem to slip into it with a sudden and easy upward sweep that can be compared to nothing so truly as to the upward flight of an eagle. They mount because their spirits are lofty. No one who has not a lofty thought has any occasion to write the lofty style; and such a person will usually succeed best by paying very little attention to the manner when he actually comes to write of high ideas. Still, the lofty style should be studied and mastered like any other.
What we should aim for above all is the powerful impact of clear and elevated thinking. There have been many masters of this style, and they seem to effortlessly rise into it with a sudden and smooth ascent that can be best compared to the soaring flight of an eagle. They achieve this because their spirits are high. Anyone without an elevated thought has no reason to write in an elevated style; and such a person will usually do best by focusing very little on the style when they actually write about profound ideas. Still, the elevated style should be studied and mastered just like any other.
It is to be noted that all these styles are applicable chiefly if not altogether to description. Narration may become intense at times, but its intensity demands no especial alteration of style. Dialogue, too, may be lofty, but only in dramas of passion, and very few people are called upon to write these. But it is often necessary to indicate a loftier, a more serious atmosphere, and this is effected by description of surrounding details in an elevated manner.
It’s important to note that all these styles mainly apply to description, if not entirely. Narration can be intense at times, but its intensity doesn’t require a special change in style. Dialogue can also be elevated, but only in passionate dramas, and very few people need to write those. However, it’s often necessary to create a more serious atmosphere, and this is done by describing the surrounding details in a more elevated way.
One of the most natural, simple, and graceful of lofty descriptions may be found in Ruskin's “King of the Golden River,” Chapter III, where he pictures the mountain scenery:
One of the most natural, simple, and graceful lofty descriptions can be found in Ruskin's “King of the Golden River,” Chapter III, where he depicts the mountain scenery:
It was, indeed, a morning that might have made any one happy, even with no Golden River to seek for. Level lines of dewy mist lay stretched along the valley, out of which rose the massy mountains,―their lower cliffs in pale gray shadow, hardly distinguishable from the floating vapor, but gradually ascending till they caught the sunlight, which ran in sharp touches of ruddy color along the angular crags, and pierced in long, level rays, through their fringes of spear-like Pine. Far above, shot up splintered masses of castellated rock, jagged and shivered into myriads of fantastic forms, with here and there a streak of sunlit snow, traced down their chasms like a line of forked lightning; and, far beyond, and far above all these, fainter than the morning cloud, but purer and changeless, slept in the blue sky, the utmost peaks of the eternal snow.
It was truly a morning that could make anyone happy, even without a Golden River to search for. Flat lines of dewy mist lay stretched out across the valley, from which the massive mountains rose— their lower cliffs in soft gray shadow, barely distinguishable from the floating vapor, but gradually rising until they caught the sunlight, which highlighted the sharp edges of the rugged crags with bright touches of red, and streamed in long, even rays through their fringes of sharp Pine. Far above, jagged remnants of castle-like rock shot up, broken and shattered into countless whimsical shapes, with streaks of sunlit snow tracing down their crevices like lines of forked lightning; and, far beyond and high above all this, fainter than the morning clouds but purer and unchanging, lay in the blue sky the highest peaks of eternal snow.
If we ask how this loftiness is attained, the reply must be, first, that the subject is lofty and deserving of lofty description. Indeed, the description never has a right to be loftier than the subject. Then, examining this passage in detail, we find that the words are all dignified, and in their very sound they are lofty, as for instance “massy,” “myriads,” “castellated,” “angular crags.” The very sound of the words seems to correspond to the idea. Notice the repetition of the letter i in “Level lines of dewy mist lay stretched along the valley.” This repetition of a letter is called alliteration, and here it serves to suggest in and of itself the idea of the level. The same effect is produced again in “streak of sunlit snow” with the repetition of s. The entire passage is filled with alliteration, but it is used so naturally that you would never think of it unless your attention were called to it.
If we ask how this grandeur is achieved, the answer must be, first, that the subject is grand and worthy of a grand description. In fact, the description can never be grander than the subject itself. Now, looking closely at this passage, we see that the words are all dignified, and their very sound is elevated, such as “massy,” “myriads,” “castellated,” “angular crags.” The sound of these words seems to match the idea perfectly. Notice the repetition of the letter i in “Level lines of dewy mist lay stretched along the valley.” This repetition of a letter is called alliteration, and here it naturally evokes the idea of level. The same effect occurs again in “streak of sunlit snow” with the repetition of s. The whole passage is rich with alliteration, but it’s used so smoothly that you wouldn’t even notice it unless someone pointed it out to you.
Next, we note that the structure rises gradually but steadily upward.
We never jump to loftiness, and always find it necessary to climb there.
Next, we observe that the structure rises gradually but consistently upward.
We never leap to great heights, and always find it essential to make our way up there.
“Jumping to loftiness” is like trying to lift oneself by one's boot-straps: it is very ridiculous to all who behold it. Ruskin begins with a very ordinary sentence. He says it was a fine morning, just as any one might say it. But the next sentence starts suddenly upward from the dead level, and to the end of the paragraph we rise, terrace on terrace, by splendid sweeps and jagged cliffs, till at the end we reach “the eternal snow.”
“Jumping to loftiness” is like trying to pull yourself up by your own shoelaces: it looks pretty silly to everyone watching. Ruskin starts with a simple statement. He says it was a nice morning, just like anyone else would say. But the next sentence quickly ascends from the flat ground, and by the end of the paragraph we go up, layer by layer, through impressive slopes and sharp cliffs, until we finally reach “the eternal snow.”
Exercise.
Workout.
The study of the following selections from Macaulay and De Quincey may be conducted on a plan a trifle different from that heretofore employed.
The study of the following selections from Macaulay and De Quincey can be conducted in a way that's a bit different from what we've done before.
The present writer spent two hours each day for two weeks reading this passage from Macaulay over and over: then he wrote a short essay on “Macaulay as a Model of Style,” trying to describe Macaulay's style as forcibly and skillfully as Macaulay describes the Puritans. The resulting paper did not appear to be an imitation of Macaulay, but it had many of the strong features of Macaulay's style which had not appeared in previous work. The same method was followed in the study of De Quincey's “English Mail Coach,” with even better results. The great difficulty arose from the fact that these lofty styles were learned only too well and were not counterbalanced by the study of other and more universally useful styles. It is dangerous to become fascinated with the lofty style, highly useful as it is on occasion.
The writer spent two hours every day for two weeks reading this passage from Macaulay over and over again. Then, he wrote a short essay titled “Macaulay as a Model of Style,” attempting to describe Macaulay's writing style as powerfully and skillfully as Macaulay describes the Puritans. The finished paper didn’t come off as a copy of Macaulay, but it featured many strong aspects of his style that hadn’t been present in earlier work. The same approach was taken with De Quincey’s “English Mail Coach,” with even better results. The main challenge was that these elevated styles were absorbed too well, without being balanced by the study of other, more widely applicable styles. It’s risky to get too caught up in the elevated style, valuable as it can be at times.
If the student does not feel that he is able to succeed by the method of study just described, let him confine himself to more direct imitation, following out Franklin's plan.
If the student feels he can't succeed with the study method just described, he should stick to direct imitation, following Franklin's plan.
THE PURITANS.
(From the essay on Milton.)
(From the essay on Milton.)
By T. B. Macaulay.
By T.B. Macaulay.
We would speak first of the Puritans, the most remarkable body of men, perhaps, which the world has ever produced. The odious and ridiculous parts of their character lie on the surface. He that runs may read them; nor have there been wanting attentive and malicious observers to point them out. For many years after the Restoration, they were the theme of unmeasured invective and derision. They were exposed to the utmost licentiousness of the press and of the stage, when the press and the stage were most licentious. They were not men of letters; they were, as a body, unpopular; they could not defend themselves; and the public would not take them under its protection. They were therefore abandoned, without reserve, to the tender mercies of the satirists and dramatists. The ostentatious simplicity of their dress, their sour aspect, their nasal twang, their stiff posture, their long graces, their Hebrew names, the Scriptural phrases which they introduced on every occasion, their contempt of human learning, their destestation of polite amusements, were indeed fair game for the laughers. But it is not from the laughers alone that the philosophy of history is to be learnt. And he who approaches this subject should carefully guard against the influence of that potent ridicule which has already misled so many excellent writers.
We should start by talking about the Puritans, probably the most remarkable group of people the world has ever seen. The unpleasant and silly aspects of their character are obvious. Anyone can see them; there have always been keen and critical observers ready to highlight these traits. For many years after the Restoration, they were the target of extreme criticism and mockery. They faced the worst excesses of the press and theater during a time when both were highly irreverent. They were not known as intellectuals; as a group, they were unpopular; they couldn't defend themselves; and the public refused to stand up for them. As a result, they were completely left to the mercies of satirists and playwrights. Their showy simplicity in dress, their serious demeanor, their distinctive accents, their rigid posture, their lengthy prayers, their biblical names, the scriptural phrases they used in every situation, their disdain for academic knowledge, and their aversion to refined entertainment were all easy targets for comedians. However, understanding history should not come solely from comedians. Anyone who studies this topic should be careful to avoid the strong influence of mockery that has already misled many talented writers.
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
Those who roused the people to resistance, who directed their measures through a long series of eventful years, who formed out of the most unpromising materials, the finest army that Europe has ever seen, who trampled down King, Church, and Aristocracy, who, in the short intervals of domestic sedition and rebellion, made the name of England terrible to every nation on the face of the earth, were no vulgar fanatics. Most of their absurdities were mere external badges, like the signs of freemasonry, or the dress of the friars. We regret that these badges were not more attractive. We regret that a body to whose courage and talents mankind has owed inestimable obligations had not the lofty elegance which distinguished some of the adherents of Charles the First, or the easy good-breeding for which the court of Charles the Second was celebrated. But, if we must make our choice, we shall, like Bassanio in the play, turn from the specious caskets which contain only the Death's head and the Fool's head and fix on the plain leaden chest which conceals the treasure.
Those who inspired the people to resist, who guided their actions through many eventful years, who created the greatest army Europe has ever seen from the most unlikely sources, who crushed the King, the Church, and the Aristocracy, and who, during brief moments of domestic strife and rebellion, made England a name feared by every nation on earth, were not ordinary fanatics. Most of their eccentricities were just superficial symbols, like the signs of freemasonry or the robes of friars. We wish those symbols had been more appealing. We wish that a group to whom humanity owes countless debts for their courage and skills had possessed the refined elegance that characterized some of Charles the First's supporters or the relaxed charm for which Charles the Second's court was famous. However, if we must choose, we will, like Bassanio in the play, turn away from the attractive boxes that only hold a skull and a fool's head and focus on the plain lead chest that hides the treasure.
The Puritans were men whose minds had derived a peculiar character from the daily contemplation of superior beings and eternal interests. Not content with acknowledging in general terms an overruling Providence, they habitually ascribed every event to the will of the Great Being, for whose power nothing was too vast, for whose inspection nothing was too minute. To know him, to serve him, to enjoy him, was with them the great end of existence. They rejected with contempt the ceremonious homage which other sects substituted for the pure worship of the soul. Instead of catching occasional glimpses of the Deity through an obscuring veil, they aspired to gaze full on his intolerable brightness, and to commune with him face to face. Hence originated their contempt for terrestrial distinctions. The difference between the greatest and the meanest of mankind seemed to vanish, when compared with the boundless intervals which separated the whole race from him on whom their eyes were constantly fixed. They recognized no title to superiority but his favor; and, confident of that favor, they despised all the accomplishments and all the dignities of the world. If they were unacquainted with the works of philosophers and poets, they were deeply read in the oracles of God. If their names were not found in the registers of heralds, they were recorded in the Book of Life. If their steps were not accompanied by a splendid train of menials, legions of ministering angels had charge over them. Their palaces were houses not made with hands; their diadems crowns of glory which should never fade away. On the rich and the eloquent, on nobles and priests, they looked down with contempt: for they esteemed themselves rich in a more precious treasure, and eloquent in a more sublime language, nobles' by the right of an earlier creation, and priests by the imposition of a mightier hand. The very meanest of them was a being to whose fate a mysterious and terrible importance belonged, on whose slightest action the spirits of light and darkness looked with anxious interest, who had been destined, before heaven and earth were created, to enjoy a felicity which should continue when heaven and earth should have passed away. Events which shortsighted politicians ascribed to earthly causes, had been ordained on his account. For his sake empires had risen, and flourished, and decayed. For his sake the Almighty had proclaimed his will by the pen of the Evangelist, and the harp of the prophet. He had been wrested by no common deliverer from the grasp of no common foe. He had been ransomed by the sweat of no vulgar agony, by the blood of no earthly sacrifice. It was for him that the sun had been darkened, that the rocks had been rent, that the dead had risen, that all nature had shuddered at the suffering of her expiring God.
The Puritans were individuals whose thoughts were shaped by constant reflection on higher beings and eternal matters. Instead of just acknowledging a higher power in general, they attributed every event to the will of the Great Being, whose power was limitless and whose attention was focused on even the smallest details. For them, knowing, serving, and enjoying Him was the main purpose of life. They dismissed the elaborate rituals that other faiths offered in place of true worship. Rather than catching occasional glimpses of the Divine through a veil, they aimed to see His overwhelming brightness directly and to have a personal conversation with Him. This led them to disregard earthly distinctions. The differences between the richest and the poorest seemed insignificant compared to the vast separation between humanity and the Divine, to whom their gaze was constantly directed. They recognized no superiority except His favor; confident in that favor, they looked down on worldly achievements and status. While they may not have known the works of philosophers and poets, they were well-versed in the teachings of God. Their names might not appear in noble records, but they were written in the Book of Life. Their paths weren’t followed by a grand entourage, but they had legions of ministering angels watching over them. Their homes were not built by human hands; their crowns were ones of glory that would never fade. They regarded the wealthy and articulate, as well as nobles and priests, with disdain; they believed they possessed a far more valuable treasure and spoke a more profound language, considering themselves nobles by virtue of a higher creation and priests by the authority of a stronger hand. Even the lowest among them mattered considerably, with a fate of mysterious and significant importance, whose smallest actions were observed with interest by the spirits of light and darkness, destined to enjoy a happiness that would outlast the world. Events that shortsighted politicians attributed to earthly causes had been arranged for his sake. Empires had risen, thrived, and fallen because of him. The Almighty had revealed His will through the writings of the Evangelist and the songs of the prophet for his benefit. He had been saved by no ordinary deliverer from an unusual enemy. He had been redeemed not by the common pain of ordinary suffering, nor by any earthly sacrifice. It was for him that the sun darkened, that the rocks split, that the dead rose, and that all of nature trembled at the suffering of her dying God.
Thus the Puritans were made up of two different men, the one all self-abasement, penitence, gratitude, passion, the other proud, calm, inflexible, sagacious. He prostrated himself in the dust before his Maker: but he set his foot on the neck of his king. In his devotional retirement, he prayed with convulsions, and groans, and tears. He was half maddened by glorious or terrible illusions. He heard the lyres of angels or the tempting whispers of fiends. He caught a gleam of the Beatific Vision, or woke screaming from dreams of everlasting fire. Like Vane, he thought himself intrusted with the sceptre of the millienial year. Like Fleetwood he cried in the bitterness of his soul that God had hid his face from him. But when he took his seat in the council, or girt on his sword for war, these tempestuous works of the soul had left no perceptible trace behind them.
Thus, the Puritans were made up of two very different types of men: one was all about self-humiliation, repentance, gratitude, and passion, while the other was proud, calm, unyielding, and wise. He threw himself down in the dust before his Creator, but he also stepped on the neck of his king. In his private moments of devotion, he prayed with convulsions, groans, and tears. He was half-mad with glorious or horrifying visions. He heard the lyres of angels or the tempting whispers of demons. He caught glimpses of the Beatific Vision or woke up screaming from nightmares of eternal fire. Like Vane, he believed he was given the scepter for the thousand-year reign. Like Fleetwood, he cried out in despair that God had turned away from him. But when he took his place in the council or strapped on his sword for battle, these turbulent struggles of his soul left no visible mark on him.
People who saw nothing of the godly but their uncouth visages, and heard nothing from them but their groans and their whining hymns, might laugh at them. But those had little reason to laugh who encountered them in the hall of debate or in the field of battle. These fanatics brought to civil affairs a coolness of judgment and an immutability of purpose which some writers have thought inconsistent with their religious zeal, but which were in fact the necessary effects of it. The intensity of their feelings on one subject made them tranquil on every other. One overpowering sentiment had subjected to itself pity and hatred, ambition and fear. Death had lost its terrors, and pleasure its charms.
People who only saw the gods' rough appearances and only heard their groans and whiny hymns might find them amusing. But those who faced them in debates or on the battlefield had little reason to laugh. These fanatics brought a calm judgment and unwavering determination to civil matters, which some writers might think contradicts their religious fervor, but was actually a natural result of it. The intensity of their feelings about one issue made them composed about everything else. One overwhelming emotion took control of both pity and hatred, ambition and fear. Death had lost its fear, and pleasure its allure.
They had their smiles and their tears, their raptures and their sorrows, but not for the things of this world. Enthusiasm had made them Stoics, had cleared their minds from every vulgar passion and prejudice, and raised them above the influence of danger and of corruption. It sometimes might lead them to pursue unwise ends, but never to choose unwise means. They went through the world like Sir Artegal's iron man Talus with his flail, crushing and trampling down oppressors, mingling with human beings, but having neither part nor lot in human infirmities, insensible to fatigue, to pleasure, and to pain, not to be pierced by any weapon, not to be withstood by aһ barrier.
They had their smiles and their tears, their highs and their lows, but not because of worldly things. Their enthusiasm turned them into Stoics, freeing their minds from every petty passion and bias, lifting them above the influence of danger and corruption. Sometimes it might lead them to chase foolish goals, but never to use foolish methods. They moved through the world like Sir Artegal's iron man Talus with his flail, crushing and trampling down oppressors, interacting with people but having no share in human weaknesses, unaffected by exhaustion, pleasure, or pain, impervious to any weapon, and unstoppable by any barrier.
Such we believe to have been the character of the Puritans. We perceive the absurdity of their manners. We dislike the sullen gloom of their domestic habits. We acknowledge that the tone of their minds was often injured by straining after things too high for mortal reach: and we know that, in spite of their hatred of Popery, they too often fell into the worst vices of that bad system, intolerance and extravagant austerity, that they had their anchorites and their crusades, their Dunstans and their De Montforts, their Dominics and their Escobars. Yet, when all circumstances are taken into consideration, we do not hesitate to pronounce them a brave, a wise, an honest, and a useful body.
We believe this to be the true nature of the Puritans. We see the absurdity of their behaviors. We don't like the gloomy atmosphere of their home lives. We admit that their mindset was often hampered by aiming for ideals too lofty for humans to achieve. We also recognize that, despite their disdain for Catholicism, they frequently fell into the worst vices of that flawed system: intolerance and extreme harshness. They had their hermits and their crusades, their Dunstans and their De Montforts, their Dominics and their Escobars. However, when we consider all the factors, we confidently say they were a brave, wise, honest, and useful group.
Notes.
Notes.
The most casual examination of Macaulay's style shows us that the words, the sentences, and the paragraphs are all arranged in rows, one on this side, one on that, a column here, another just like it over there, a whole row of columns above this window, and a whole row of columns above that window, just as bricks are built up in geometrical design. Almost every word contains an antithesis. The whole constitutes what is called the balanced structure.
A simple look at Macaulay's style reveals that the words, sentences, and paragraphs are organized in a way that resembles rows—one on each side, a column here, a similar one over there, a full row of columns above this window, and another row above that window, much like bricks arranged in a geometric pattern. Almost every word has an opposite. Together, this forms what is known as the balanced structure.
We see also that Macaulay frequently repeats the same word again and again, and the repetition gives strength. Indeed, repetition is necessary to make this balanced structure: there must always be so much likeness and so much unlikeness―and the likeness and unlikeness must just balance.
We also notice that Macaulay often repeats the same word over and over, and this repetition adds power. In fact, repetition is essential for creating this balanced structure: there needs to be the right amount of similarity and difference—and the similarity and difference must perfectly balance each other.
We have shown the utility of variation: Macaulay shows the force there is in monotony, in repetition. In one sentence after another through an entire paragraph he repeats the same thing over and over and over. There is no rising by step after step to something higher in Macaulay: everything is on the dead level; but it is a powerful, heroic level.
We’ve demonstrated the value of variation: Macaulay highlights the strength of monotony and repetition. In sentence after sentence throughout an entire paragraph, he keeps repeating the same idea. There’s no build-up or progression to something greater in Macaulay’s work; everything stays on the same flat level, but it’s a strong, heroic level.
The first words repeated and contrasted are press and stage. The sentence containing these words is balanced nicely. In the following sentence we have four short sentences united into one, and the first clause contrasts with the second and the third with the fourth. The sentence beginning “The ostentatious simplicity of their dress” gives us a whole series of subjects, all resting on a single short predicate―“were fair game for the laughers.” The next sentence catches up the, word “laughers” and plays upon it.
The first words that are repeated and contrasted are "press" and "stage." The sentence using these words is nicely balanced. In the next sentence, four short sentences are combined into one, with the first clause contrasting with the second, and the third with the fourth. The sentence starting with “The ostentatious simplicity of their dress” presents a whole series of subjects, all anchored by a single short predicate—“were fair game for the laughers.” The following sentence picks up on the word “laughers” and plays with it.
In the second paragraph we have as subject “those” followed by a whole series of relative clauses beginning with “who,” and this series again rests on a very short predicate―“were no vulgar fanatics.”
In the second paragraph, we have as the subject “those” followed by a series of relative clauses starting with “who,” and this series is based on a very brief predicate―“were no vulgar fanatics.”
And so on through the entire description, we find series after series, contrast after contrast; now it is a dozen words all in the same construction, now a number of sentences all beginning in the same way and ending in the same way.
And so on throughout the whole description, we see series after series, contrasts after contrasts; sometimes it’s a dozen words all structured the same, other times it’s several sentences that all start and end the same way.
The first paragraph takes up the subject of the contrast of those who laughed and those who were laughed at. The second paragraph enlarges upon good points in the objects of the examination. The third paragraph describes their minds, and we perceive that Macaulay has all along been leading into this by his series of contrasts. In the fourth paragraph he brings the two sides into the closest possible relations, so that the contrast reaches its height. The last short paragraph sums up the facts.
The first paragraph addresses the difference between those who laughed and those who were the subject of laughter. The second paragraph expands on the positive aspects of the subjects being examined. The third paragraph explores their thoughts, showing how Macaulay has been guiding us through this with his series of contrasts. In the fourth paragraph, he connects both sides as closely as possible, amplifying the contrast. The final brief paragraph summarizes the key points.
This style, though highly artificial, is highly useful when used in moderation. It is unfortunate that Macaulay uses it so constantly. When he cannot find contrasts he sometimes makes them, and to make them he distorts the truth. Besides, he wearies us by keeping us too monotonously on a high dead level. In time we come to feel that he is making contrasts merely because he has a passion for making them, not because they serve any purpose. But for one who wishes to learn this style, no better model can be found in the English language.
This style, while very artificial, is quite useful when used in moderation. It's unfortunate that Macaulay employs it so frequently. When he can't find contrasts, he sometimes invents them, and in doing so, he distorts the truth. Additionally, he tires us out by keeping us stuck on a monotonous high level. Eventually, we start to feel that he's creating contrasts simply because he loves to do it, not because they have any real purpose. However, for anyone looking to learn this style, there’s no better model available in the English language.
DREAM-FUGUE
On the Theme of Sudden Death.*
On the Theme of Sudden Death.*
By Thomas De Quincey.
By Thomas De Quincey.
*“The English Mail-Coach” consists of three sections, “The Glory of Motion,” “vision of Sudden Death,” and “Dream-Fugue.” De Quincey describes riding on the top of a heavy mail-coach. In the dead of night they pass a young couple in a light gig, and the heavy mail-coach just escapes shattering the light gig and perhaps killing the young occupants. De Quincey develops his sensations in witnessing this “vision of sudden death,” and rises step by step to the majestic beauty and poetic passion of the dream-fugue.
*“The English Mail-Coach” is divided into three sections: “The Glory of Motion,” “Vision of Sudden Death,” and “Dream-Fugue.” De Quincey talks about riding on top of a heavy mail coach. In the middle of the night, they pass a young couple in a light carriage, and the heavy mail coach narrowly avoids crashing into the light carriage and possibly injuring the young couple. De Quincey explores his feelings as he witnesses this “vision of sudden death” and gradually elevates to the stunning beauty and poetic intensity of the dream-fugue.*
“Whence the sound
Of instruments, that made melodious chime,
Was heard, of harp and organ; and who moved
Their stops and chords, was seen; his volant touch
Instinct through all proportions, low and high,
Fled and pursued transverse the resonant fugue.”
“From where the sound
Of instruments that created beautiful music,
Was heard, from harp and organ; and who was moving
Their stops and chords, was seen; his swift touch
Naturally navigating through all ranges, low and high,
Fled and chased across the resonant fugue.”
Paradise Lost, Book XI.
Paradise Lost, Book 11.
Tumultuosissimamente.
Tumultuously.
Passion of sudden death! that once in youth I read and interpreted by the shadows of thy averted signs!―rapture of panic taking the shape (which amongst tombs in churches I have seen) of woman bursting her selpuchral bonds―of woman's ionic form bending forward from the ruins of her grave with arching foot, with eyes upraised, with clasped, adoring hands―waiting, watching, trembling, praying for the trumpet's call to rise from dust forever! Ah, vision too fearful of shuddering humanity on the brink of mighty abysses!―vision that didst start back, that didst reel away, like a shivering scroll before the wrath of fire racing on the wings of the wind! Epilepsy so brief of horror, wherefore is it that thou canst not die? Passing so suddenly into darkness, wherefore is it that still thou sheddest thy sad funeral blights upon the gorgeous mosaic of dreams? Fragments of music too passionate, heard once and heard no more, what aileth thee, that thy deep rolling chords come up at intervals through all the worlds of sleep, and after forty years, have lost no element of horror?
Passion from sudden death! That once in my youth I read and interpreted through the shadows of your turned-away signs!—the thrill of panic taking the form (which I have seen among tombs in churches) of a woman breaking her funeral chains—of a woman’s elegant figure leaning forward from the ruins of her grave with an arched foot, with eyes lifted, with clasped, adoring hands—waiting, watching, trembling, praying for the trumpet's call to rise from dust forever! Ah, a vision too terrifying of trembling humanity on the edge of mighty abysses!—a vision that shrank back, that reeled away, like a shivering scroll before the wrath of fire racing on the wind! Brief horror, why is it that you cannot die? Passing so quickly into darkness, why is it that you still cast your sad funeral shadows upon the beautiful mosaic of dreams? Fragments of music too passionate, heard once and never again, what’s wrong with you, that your deep rolling chords emerge at intervals through all the worlds of sleep, and after forty years, have lost none of their horror?
I.
Lo, it is summer―almighty summer! The everlasting gates of life and summer are thrown open wide; and on the ocean tranquil and verdant as a savannah, the unknown lady from the dreadful vision and I myself are floating―she upon a fairy pinnace, and I upon an English three-decker.
Look, it’s summer—amazing summer! The eternal gates of life and summer are wide open; and on the ocean, calm and green like a savannah, the mysterious woman from the terrifying vision and I are drifting—she on a magical boat, and I on a big English warship.
Both of us are wooing gales of festive happiness within the domain of our common country, within that ancient watery park, within that pathless chase of ocean, where England takes her pleasure as a huntress through winter and summer, from the rising to the setting sun. Ah, what a wilderness of floral beauty was hidden, or was suddenly revealed, upon the tropic islands through which the pinnace moved! And upon her deck what a bevy of human flowers―young women how lovely, young men bow noble, that were dancing together, and slowly drifting toward us amidst music and incense, amidst blossoms from forests and gorgeous corymbi from vintages, amidst natural carolling, and the echoes of sweet girlish laughter. Slowly the pinnace nears us, gaily she hails us, and silently she disappears beneath the shadow of our mighty bows. But then, as at some signal from heaven, the music, and the carols, and the sweet echoing of girlish laughter,―all are hushed. What evil has smitten the pinnace, meeting or overtaking her? Did ruin to our friends couch within our own dreadful shadow? Was our shadow the shadow of death? I looked over the bow for an answer, and, behold! the pinnace was dismantled; the revel and the revellers were found no more; the glory of the vintage was dust; and the forests with their beauty were left without a witness upon the seas. “But where,” and I turned to our crew― “where are the lovely women that danced beneath the awning of flowers and clustering corynibi? Whither have fled the noble young men that danced with them?” Answer there was none. But suddenly the man at the masthead, whose countenance darkened with alarm, cried out, “Sail on the weather beam! Down she comes upon us; in seventy seconds she also will founder,”
Both of us are enjoying waves of festive happiness in our shared homeland, in that ancient watery playground, in that endless stretch of ocean, where England has her fun like a huntress throughout the year, from dawn to dusk. Ah, what a wild display of floral beauty was hidden, or suddenly revealed, on the tropical islands where the small boat glided! And on her deck, what a group of beautiful people—young women so lovely, young men so noble—were dancing together, slowly drifting towards us amidst music and sweet scents, surrounded by blooms from forests and vibrant clusters from vineyards, with natural singing and the echoes of cheerful girl laughter. Slowly the small boat approached us, cheerfully greeting us, and then silently disappeared beneath the shadow of our powerful vessel. But then, as if some sign from above had been given, the music, the singing, and the sweet echoes of girl laughter—all fell silent. What misfortune had struck the small boat, confronting or catching up with her? Did disaster for our friends lurk within our own dreadful shadow? Was our shadow the shadow of death? I looked over the bow for an answer, and, behold! the small boat was in ruins; the celebration and revelers were gone; the glory of the vineyard had turned to dust; and the beautiful forests were left without a witness on the seas. “But where,” I turned to our crew—“where are the lovely women who danced under the flowered awning and the clustered vines? Where have the noble young men that danced with them?” There was no answer. But suddenly the man at the masthead, whose face darkened with worry, shouted, “Sail on the weather beam! It’s coming down on us; in seventy seconds it will also sink!”
II.
I looked to the weather side, and the summer had departed. The sea was rocking, and shaking with gathering wrath. Upon its surface sat mighty mists, which grouped themselves into arches and long cathedral aisles. Down one of these, with the fiery pace of a quarrel from a crossbow, ran a frigate right athwart our course. “Are they mad?” some voice exclaimed from our deck. “Do they woo their ruin?” But in a moment, as she was close upon us, some impulse of a heady current or local vortex gave a wheeling bias to her course, and off she forged without a shock. As she ran past us, high aloft amongst the shrouds stood the lady of the pinnace. The deeps in malice opened ahead to receive her, the billows were fierce to catch her. But far away she was borne upon the desert spaces of the sea: whilst still by sight I followed her, she ran before the howling gale, chased by angry sea-birds and by maddening billows: still I saw her, as at the moment when she ran past us, standing amongst the shrouds, with her white draperies streaming before the wind. There she stood, with hair dishevelled, one hand clutched amongst the tackling―rising, sinking, fluttering, trembling, praying―there for leagues I saw her as she stood, raising at intervals one hand to heaven, amidst the fiery crests of the pursuing waves and the raving of the storm; until at last, upon a sound from afar of malicious laughter and mockery, all was hidden forever in driving showers; and afterwards, but when I know not, nor how.
I looked to the side where the weather was worse, and summer had left us. The sea was rocking and shaking with growing anger. Mighty mists settled on its surface, forming arches and long cathedral-like aisles. Down one of these, like an arrow from a crossbow, a frigate raced directly across our path. “Are they crazy?” someone shouted from our deck. “Are they inviting disaster?” But in an instant, as she got close to us, some surge of a strong current or local whirlpool changed her direction, and she sped away without a jolt. As she passed us, high up among the ropes stood the lady of the pinnace. The dark depths opened up ahead to swallow her, and the fierce waves were eager to catch her. But far away, she was carried across the empty spaces of the sea: while I could still see her, she sped before the howling wind, chased by angry seagulls and raging waves: I still saw her, just as she rushed past us, standing among the ropes, with her white garments billowing in the wind. There she stood, with her hair tousled, one hand gripping the rigging—rising, sinking, fluttering, trembling, praying—there for miles I saw her as she stood, occasionally raising one hand to the heavens, amidst the fiery crests of the chasing waves and the howling storm; until finally, at the sound of distant malicious laughter and mockery, everything was lost forever in driving rain; and after that, but I don’t know when, nor how.
Notes.
Notes.
De Quincey's “Dream-Fugue” is as luxuriant and extravagant a use of metaphor as Macaulay's “Puritans” is of the use of antithesis and the balanced structure. The whole thing is a metaphor, and every part is a metaphor within a metaphor.
De Quincey's “Dream-Fugue” features a rich and extravagant use of metaphor, just as Macaulay's “Puritans” employs antithesis and balanced structure. The entire piece is a metaphor, with each section serving as a metaphor within a metaphor.
This is much more than mere fine writing. It is a metaphorical representation of the incident he has previously described. In that incident he was particular struck by the actions of the lady. The young man turned his horse out of the path of the coach, but some part of the coach struck one of the wheels of the gig, and as it did so, the lady involuntarily started up, throwing up her arms, and at once sank back as in a faint. De Quincey did not see her face, and hence he speaks in this description of “averted signs?” The “woman bursting her sepulchral bonds” probably refers to a tomb in Westminster Abbey which represents a woman escaping from the door of the tomb, and Death, a skeleton, is just behind her, but too late to catch her “arching foot” as she flies upward―presumably as a spirit.
This is much more than just elegant writing. It's a symbolic depiction of the event he described earlier. In that situation, he was particularly struck by the lady's actions. The young man steered his horse away from the coach's path, but part of the coach hit one of the gig's wheels, and as it did, the lady suddenly jumped up, raising her arms, and then collapsed back as if fainting. De Quincey didn't see her face, which is why he talks about “averted signs.” The “woman bursting her sepulchral bonds” likely refers to a tomb in Westminster Abbey that shows a woman escaping from a tomb, with Death—a skeleton—right behind her, but too late to catch her “arching foot” as she ascends, presumably as a spirit.
So every image corresponds to a reality, either in the facts or in De Quincey's emotion at the sight of them. The novice fails in such writing as this because he becomes enamored of his beautiful images and forgets what he is trying to illustrate. The relation between reality and image should be as invariable as mathematics. If such startling images cannot be used with perfect clearness and vivid perception of their usefulness and value, they should not be used at all. De Quincey is so successful because his mind comprehends every detail of the scene, and through the images we see the bottom truth as through a perfect crystal. A clouded diamond is no more ruined by its cloudiness than a clouded metaphor.
So every image relates to a reality, either in the facts or in De Quincey's feelings when he sees them. The beginner struggles with this kind of writing because they become so attached to their beautiful images that they forget what they’re trying to illustrate. The connection between reality and image should be as consistent as math. If such striking images can't be used with complete clarity and a clear understanding of their usefulness and value, they shouldn't be used at all. De Quincey succeeds because his mind grasps every detail of the scene, and through the images, we see the underlying truth as if looking through a perfect crystal. A cloudy diamond is no more compromised by its cloudiness than a cloudy metaphor.
As in Ruskin's description of the mountain, we see in this the value of the sounds of words, and how they seem to make music in themselves. A Word lacking in dignity in the very least would have ruined the whole picture, and so would a word whose rotund sound did not correspond to the loftiness of the passage. Perhaps the only word that jars is “English three-decker”―but the language apparently afforded De Quincey no substitute which would make his meaning clear.
As in Ruskin's description of the mountain, we recognize the importance of the sounds of words and how they create a kind of music on their own. A word that lacks dignity, even slightly, would have destroyed the entire picture, just as a word whose round sound didn't match the grandness of the passage would do. The only word that feels out of place is “English three-decker”―but it seems that De Quincey had no other word that would clearly convey his meaning.
CHAPTER VII.
RESERVE:
Thackeray.
Thackeray.
It has been hinted that the rhetorical, impassioned, and lofty styles are in a measure dangerous. The natural corrective of that danger is artistic reserve.
It has been suggested that the rhetorical, passionate, and elevated styles are somewhat risky. The natural remedy for that risk is artistic restraint.
Reserve is a negative quality, and so it has not been emphasized by writers on composition as it ought to be. But if it is negative, it is none the less real and important, and fortunately we have in Thackeray a masterly example of its positive power.
Reserve is a negative trait, and because of that, it hasn't been highlighted by writers on composition as much as it should be. But even if it's negative, it's still a significant and real quality, and luckily, we have Thackeray as a brilliant example of its positive influence.
Originally reserve is to be traced to a natural reticence and modesty in the character of the author who employs it. It may be studied, however, and cultivated as a characteristic of style. As an artistic quality it consists in saying exactly what the facts demand, no more, no less―and to say no more especially on those occasions when most people employ superlatives. Macaulay was not characterized by reserve. He speaks of the Puritans as “the most remarkable body of men the world ever produced.” “Most” is a common word in his vocabulary, since it served so well to round out the phrase and the idea. Thackeray, on the other hand, is almost too modest. He is so afraid of saying too much that sometimes he does not say enough, and that may possibly account for the fact that he was never as popular as the overflowing Dickens. The lack of reserve made Dickens “slop over” occasionally, as indelicate critics have put it; and the presence of reserve did more than any other one thing to give Thackeray the reputation for perfect style which all concede to him.
Initially, reserve comes from a natural shyness and modesty in the author's character who uses it. However, it can be studied and developed as a style element. As an artistic quality, it involves saying exactly what the facts require—nothing more, nothing less—especially refraining from using superlatives when most people would. Macaulay was not known for his reserve. He referred to the Puritans as “the most remarkable body of men the world ever produced.” “Most” is a frequent term in his vocabulary, fitting nicely to complete phrases and ideas. Thackeray, on the other hand, is almost too modest. He’s so cautious about saying too much that sometimes he doesn’t say enough, which might explain why he was never as popular as the overflowing Dickens. Dickens's lack of reserve sometimes caused him to “slop over,” as some harsh critics have described it; meanwhile, Thackeray's reserve significantly contributed to his widely acknowledged reputation for perfect style.
One of the most famous passages in all of Thackeray's works is the description of the battle of Waterloo in “Vanity Fair,” ch. XXXII:
One of the most famous passages in all of Thackeray's works is the description of the battle of Waterloo in “Vanity Fair,” ch. XXXII:
All that day, from morning till past sunset, the cannon never ceased to roar. It was dark when the cannonading stopped all of a sudden.
All day long, from morning until after sunset, the cannon kept roaring. It was dark when the cannon fire suddenly stopped.
All of us have read of what occurred during that interval. The tale is in every Englishman's mouth; and you and I, who were children when the great battle was won and lost, are never tired of hearing and recounting the history of that famous action. Its remembrance rankles still in the bosoms of millions of the countrymen of those brave men who lost the day. They pant for an opportunity of revenging that humiliation; and if a contest, ending in a victory on their part, should ensue, elating them in their turn, and leaving its cursed legacy of hatred and rage behind to us, there is no end to the so called glory and shame, and to the alternation of successful and unsuccessful murder, in which two high-spirited nations might engage. Centuries hence, we Frenchmen and Englishmen might be boasting and killing each other still, carrying out bravely the Devil's code of honor.
All of us have heard about what happened during that time. The story is on every Englishman's lips; and you and I, who were kids when the great battle was fought, never get tired of hearing and telling the story of that famous event. Its memory still stings for millions of the countrymen of those brave men who lost the day. They long for a chance to avenge that humiliation, and if a conflict results in a victory for them, boosting their spirits while leaving behind a legacy of hatred and anger for us, there’s no limit to the so-called glory and shame, and to the cycle of mutual violence that two proud nations might engage in. Centuries from now, we French and English might still be boasting and killing each other, bravely following the Devil's code of honor.
All our friends took their share, and fought like men in the great field. All day long, while the women were praying ten miles away, the lines of the dauntless English infantry were receiving and repelling the furious charges of the French horsemen. Guns which were heard in Brussels were ploughing up their ranks, and comrades falling, and the resolute survivors closing in. Towards evening, the attack of the French, repeated and resisted so bravely, slackened in its fury. They had other foes besides the British to engage, or were preparing for a final onset. It came at last; the columns of the Imperial Guard marched up the hill of Saint Jean, at length and at once to sweep the English from the height which they had maintained all day and spite of all; unscared by the thunder of the artillery, which hurled death from the English line,―the dark rolling column pressed on and up the hill. It seemed almost to crest the eminence, when it began to wave and falter. Then it stopped, still facing the shot. Then, at last, the English troops rushed from the post from which no enemy had been able to dislodge them, and the Guard turned and fled.
All our friends took their share and fought bravely in the great field. All day long, while the women were praying ten miles away, the fearless English infantry was holding off the fierce charges of the French cavalry. Cannons that could be heard in Brussels were tearing through their ranks, with comrades falling and the determined survivors closing in. By evening, the French attacks, fierce and repeated, started to lose their intensity. They had other enemies besides the British to contend with, or were gearing up for a final assault. It finally came; the columns of the Imperial Guard marched up the hill of Saint Jean, ready to drive the English from the position they had held all day, despite everything. Undeterred by the thunder of the artillery, which unleashed death from the English line, the dark, rolling column pressed on and up the hill. It almost reached the top when it began to sway and falter. Then it stopped, still facing the gunfire. Finally, the English troops charged from their position, from which no enemy had been able to dislodge them, and the Guard turned and fled.
No more firing was heard at Brussels,―the pursuit rolled miles away.
Darkness came down on the field and city; and Amelia was praying for
George, who was lying on his face, dead, with a bullet through his heart.”
No more gunfire was heard in Brussels; the chase had moved miles away.
Darkness fell over the field and the city; and Amelia was praying for
George, who was lying face down, dead, with a bullet through his heart.”
Who before ever began the description of a great victory by praising the enemy! And yet when we consider it, there is no more artistically powerful method than this, of showing how very great the enemy was, and then saying simply, “The English defeated them.”
Who has ever started describing a great victory by praising the enemy? Yet, when we think about it, there’s no more effective way to highlight how formidable the enemy was than to say, “The English defeated them.”
But Thackeray wished to do more than this. He was preparing the reader for the awful presence of death in a private affliction, Amelia's loss of her husband George. To do this he lets his heart go out in sympathy for the French, and by that sympathy he seems to rise above all race, to a supreme height where exist the griefs of the human heart and God alone.
But Thackeray wanted to do more than that. He was getting the reader ready for the harsh reality of death in a personal tragedy, Amelia's loss of her husband George. To achieve this, he expresses his compassion for the French, and through that compassion, he seems to rise above all races, reaching a higher place where the sorrows of the human heart and God alone exist.
With all this careful preparation, the short, simple closing paragraph― the barest possible statement of the facts―produces an effect unsurpassed in literature. The whole situation seems to cry out for superlatives; yet Thackeray uses none, but remains dignified, calm, and therefore grand.
With all this careful preparation, the short, simple closing paragraph―the barest possible statement of the facts―creates an effect unmatched in literature. The whole situation seems to demand superlatives; yet Thackeray uses none, instead staying dignified, calm, and therefore grand.
The following selection serves as a sort of preface to the novel “Vanity Fair.” It is quite as remarkable for the things it leaves unsaid as for the things it says. Of course its object is to whet the reader's appetite for the story that is to follow; but throughout the author seems to be laughing at himself. In the last paragraph we see one of the few superlatives to be found In Thackeray―he says the show has been “most favorably noticed” by the “conductors of the Public Press, and by the Nobility and Gentry.” Those capital letters prove the humorous intent of the superlative, which seems to be a burlesque on other authors who praise themselves. One of the criticisms had been that Amelia was no better than a doll; and Thackeray takes the critics at their word and refers to the “Amelia Doll,” merely hinting gently that even a doll may find friends.
The following selection serves as a sort of preface to the novel “Vanity Fair.” It’s just as notable for what it doesn’t say as for what it does. Its purpose is definitely to spark the reader's interest in the upcoming story; however, throughout, the author seems to be poking fun at himself. In the last paragraph, we see one of the few superlatives found in Thackeray—he states that the show has been “most favorably noticed” by the “conductors of the Public Press and by the Nobility and Gentry.” Those capital letters highlight the humorous intent behind the superlative, which appears to mock other authors who boast about themselves. One criticism had been that Amelia was just a doll; and Thackeray takes those critics at their word, referring to the “Amelia Doll” and gently suggesting that even a doll can find friends.
BEFORE THE CURTAIN.
(Preface to “Vanity Fair.”)
(Preface to “Vanity Fair.”)
By W. M. Thackeray.
By W. M. Thackeray.
As the Manager of the Performance sits before the curtain on the boards, and looks into the Fair, a feeling of profound melancholy comes over him in his survey of the bustling place. There is a great quantity of eating and drinking, making love and jilting, laughing and the contrary, smoking, cheating, fighting, dancing, and fiddling: there are bullies pushing about, bucks ogling the women, knaves picking pockets, policemen on the lookout, quacks (other quacks, plague take them!) bawling in front of their booths, and yokels looking up at the tinselled dancers and poor old rouged tumblers, while the light-fingered folk are operating upon their pockets behind. Yes, this is Vanity Fair; not a moral place certainly; nor a merry one, though very noisy. Look at the faces of the actors and buffoons when they come off from their business; and Tom Fool washing the paint off his cheeks before he sits down to dinner with his wife and the little Jack Puddings behind the canvas. The curtain will be up presently, and he will be turning over head and heels, and crying, “How are you?”
As the Performance Manager sits in front of the curtain on stage and looks out at the Fair, a deep feeling of sadness washes over him as he surveys the lively scene. There’s a lot of eating and drinking, flirting and breaking hearts, laughing and the opposite, smoking, scamming, fighting, dancing, and playing music. There are bullies shoving people around, guys checking out the women, pickpockets at work, police keeping an eye on things, quacks (more quacks, damn them!) shouting in front of their booths, and locals gazing up at the flashy dancers and worn-out tumblers, while the petty thieves work their magic on the unsuspecting. Yes, this is Vanity Fair; definitely not a moral place, nor a particularly joyful one, even though it’s very loud. Just look at the faces of the performers and clowns when they finish their acts; and there’s Tom Fool washing off his makeup before sitting down to dinner with his wife and little Jack Puddings behind the curtain. The show will start soon, and he’ll be tumbling around and shouting, “How are you?”
A man with a reflective turn of mind, walking through an exhibition of this sort, will not be oppressed, I take it, by his own or other people's hilarity. An episode of humor or kindness touches and amuses him here and there,―a pretty child looking at a gingerbread stall; a pretty girl blushing whilst her lover talks to her and chooses her fairing; poor Tom Fool, yonder behind the wagon mumbling his bone with the honest family which lives by his tumbling; but the general impression is one more melancholy than mirthful. When you come home, you sit down, in a sober, contemplative, not uncharitable frame of mind, and apply yourself to your books or your business.
A man with a thoughtful mindset, walking through an exhibition like this, won’t be overwhelmed by his own laughter or that of others. A moment of humor or kindness catches his attention here and there—a cute child looking at a gingerbread stand; a sweet girl blushing while her boyfriend talks to her and picks out a treat; poor Tom Fool over there behind the wagon, mumbling to himself as he shares a bone with the family that supports themselves by his antics. But the overall feeling is more somber than joyful. When you get home, you sit down, in a serious, reflective, yet not unkind mood, and focus on your books or your work.
I have no other moral than this to tag to the present story of “Vanity Fair.” Some people consider Fairs immoral altogether, and eschew such, with their servants and families; very likely they are right. But persons who think otherwise, and are of a lazy, or a benevolent, or a sarcastic mood, may perhaps like to step in for half an hour, and look at the performances. There are scenes of all sorts; some dreadful combats, some grand and lofty horse-riding, some scenes of high life, and some of very middling indeed; some love-making for the sentimental, and some light comic business; the whole accompanied by appropriate scenery, and brilliantly illuminated with the Author's own candles.
I have no other moral to attach to the current story of “Vanity Fair.” Some people view fairs as completely immoral and avoid them, along with their families and staff; they might be right. But those who disagree and are feeling lazy, generous, or sarcastic might enjoy dropping by for half an hour to check out the shows. There are all kinds of scenes: some intense battles, some impressive horse riding, some glimpses of high society, and some quite average ones; some romantic moments for the sentimental, and some light-hearted comedy; all set against fitting backdrops and brightly lit with the Author's own candles.
What more has the Manager of the Performance to say?―To acknowledge the kindness with which it has been received in all the principal towns of England through which the show has passed, and where it has been most favorably noticed by the respected conductors of the Public Press, and by the Nobility and Gentry. He is proud to think that his Puppets have given satisfaction to the very best company in this empire. The famous little Becky Puppet has been pronounced to be uncommonly flexible in the joints, and lively on the wire: the Amelia Doll, though it has had a smaller circle of admirers, has yet been carved and dressed with the greatest care by the artist: the Dobbin Figure, though apparently clumsy, yet dances in a very amusing and natural manner: the Little Boy's Dance has been liked by some; and please to remark the richly dressed figure of the Wicked Nobleman, on which no expense has been spared, and which Old Nick will fetch away at the end of this singular performance.
What else does the Performance Manager have to say?—He wants to express gratitude for the kindness shown towards the show in all the major cities of England where it has been presented, receiving positive attention from respected editors of the Public Press, as well as the Nobility and Gentry. He feels proud that his Puppets have pleased the best audiences in the empire. The famous little Becky Puppet has been described as incredibly flexible and lively: the Amelia Doll, while having a smaller fan base, has been crafted and dressed with great attention to detail by the artist: the Dobbin Figure, though it looks a bit clumsy, dances in a very entertaining and natural way: the Little Boy's Dance has been enjoyed by some; and please notice the richly dressed figure of the Wicked Nobleman, for which no expense has been spared, and which Old Nick will take away at the end of this unique performance.
And with this, and a profound bow to his patrons, the Manager retires, and the curtain rises.
And with this, and a deep bow to his supporters, the Manager steps back, and the curtain goes up.
London, June 28, 1848.
London, June 28, 1848.
CHAPTER VIII.
CRITICISM:
Matthew Arnold and Ruskin.
Matthew Arnold and Ruskin.
The term “criticism” may appropriately be used to designate all writing in which logic predominates over emotion. The style of criticism is the style of argument, exposition, and debate, as well as of literary analysis; and it is the appropriate style to be used in mathematical discussions and all scientific essays.
The term “criticism” can rightly refer to any writing where logic takes precedence over emotion. The style of criticism encompasses argumentation, exposition, and debate, along with literary analysis; and it is the suitable style for mathematical discussions and all scientific essays.
Of course the strictly critical style may be united with almost any other. We are presenting pure types; but very seldom does it happen that any composition ordinarily produced belongs to any one pure type. Criticism would be dull without the enlivening effects of some appeal to the emotions. We shall illustrate this point in a quotation from Ruskin.
Of course, the strictly critical style can be combined with almost any other style. We are presenting pure types; however, it's rare for any composition usually created to fit into just one pure type. Criticism would be boring without some engaging appeal to emotions. We'll illustrate this point with a quote from Ruskin.
The critical style has just one secret: It depends on a very close definition of work in ordinary use, words do not have a sufficiently definite meaning for scientific purposes. Therefore in scientific writing it is necessary to define them exactly, and so change common words into technical terms. To these may be added the great body of words used in no other way than as technical terms.
The critical style has just one secret: It relies on a very precise definition of work in everyday use; words don’t have a clear enough meaning for scientific purposes. Therefore, in scientific writing, it’s essential to define them accurately and transform common words into technical terms. Additionally, there’s a large collection of words used solely as technical terms.
Of course our first preparation for criticism is to master the technical terms and technical uses of words peculiar to the subject we are treating. Then we must make it clear to the reader that we are using words in their technical senses so that he will know how to interpret them.
Of course, our first step in preparing for criticism is to understand the technical terms and specific uses of words related to the topic we’re discussing. We also need to clarify to the reader that we’re using these words in their technical meanings so that they know how to interpret them.
But beyond that we must make technical terms as we go along, by defining common words very strictly. This is nicely illustrated by Matthew Arnold, one of the most accomplished of pure critics. The opening paragraphs of the first chapter of “Culture and Anarchy”―the chapter entitled “Sweetness and Light”―will serve for illustration, and the student is referred to the complete work for material for further study and imitation.
But beyond that, we need to create technical terms as we proceed by defining common words very precisely. This is well illustrated by Matthew Arnold, one of the most skilled critics. The opening paragraphs of the first chapter of “Culture and Anarchy”—the chapter titled “Sweetness and Light”—will be a good example, and the student is encouraged to refer to the complete work for more material for further study and imitation.
From “Sweetness and Light.”
From “Sweetness and Light.”
The disparagers of culture, [says Mr. Arnold], make its motive curiosity; sometimes, indeed, they make its motive mere exclusiveness and vanity. The culture which is supposed to plume itself on a smattering of Greek and Latin is a culture which is begotten by nothing so intellectual as curiosity; it is valued either out of sheer vanity and ignorance, or else as an engine of social and class distinction, separating its holder, like a badge or title, from other people who have not got it. No serious man would call this culture, or attach any value to it, as culture, at all. To find the real ground for the very different estimate which serious people will set upon culture, we must find some motive for culture in the terms of which may lie a real ambiguity; and such a motive the word curiosity gives us.
The critics of culture, [says Mr. Arnold], claim its motivation is curiosity; at times, they argue it's simply about exclusivity and vanity. The culture that's thought to flaunt a bit of Greek and Latin isn't driven by anything as intellectual as curiosity; it's valued either out of sheer vanity and ignorance or as a tool for social and class distinction, setting its possessor apart, like a badge or title, from those who lack it. No serious person would call this culture or consider it valuable as culture at all. To understand the very different views that serious people have about culture, we need to find a motivating factor for culture that may contain a real ambiguity; and that motive is captured by the word curiosity.
I have before now pointed out that we English do not, like the foreigners, use this word in a good sense as well as in a bad sense. A liberal and intelligent eagerness about the things of the mind may be meant by a foreigner when he speaks of curiosity, but with us the word always conveys a certain notion of frivolous and unedifying activity. In the Quarterly Review, some little time ago, was an estimate of the celebrated French critic, M. Sainte-Beuve, and a very inadequate estimate it in my judgment was. And its inadequacy consisted chiefly in this: that in our English way it left out of sight the double sense really involved in the word curiosity, thinking enough was said to stamp M. Sainte-Beuve with blame if it was said that he was impelled in his operations as a critic by curiosity, and omitting either to perceive that M. Sainte-Beuve himself, and many other people with him, would consider that this was praiseworthy and not blameworthy, or to point out why it ought really to be accounted worthy of blame and not of praise. For as there is a curiosity about intellectual matters which is futile, and merely a disease, so there is certainly a curiosity,―a desire after the things of the mind simply for their own sakes and for the pleasure of seeing them as they are,―which is, in an intelligent being, natural and laudable. Nay, and the very desire to see things as they are implies a balance and regulation of mind which is not often attained without fruitful effort, and which is the very opposite of the blind and diseased impulse of mind which is what we mean to blame when we blame curiosity. Montesquieu says: ‘The first motive which ought to impel us to study is the desire to augment the excellence of our nature, and to render an intelligent being yet more intelligent.’ This is the true ground to assign for the genuine scientific passion, however manifested, and for culture, viewed simply as a fruit of this passion; and it is a worthy ground, even though we let the term curiosity stand to describe it.
I have mentioned before that we English don’t use the word "curiosity" in both a positive and negative way like foreigners do. For a foreigner, curiosity can imply an enthusiastic and intelligent interest in intellectual matters. But for us, it often carries the connotation of a trivial and unhelpful pursuit. In the Quarterly Review, there was an evaluation of the famous French critic, M. Sainte-Beuve, and in my opinion, it was quite lacking. Its inadequacy mainly stemmed from the fact that it missed the dual meaning of the word curiosity. It was enough to say that M. Sainte-Beuve was driven by curiosity in his critical work, which was meant to criticize him, without recognizing that M. Sainte-Beuve, along with many others, would actually view that characteristic as commendable rather than blameworthy. It also failed to explain why curiosity deserves criticism rather than praise. There is indeed a type of curiosity about intellectual topics that is pointless and merely a flaw, but there is also a curiosity—a desire for knowledge simply for its own sake and the pleasure of understanding things as they are—that is natural and admirable in an intelligent person. Furthermore, the desire to see things as they are indicates a balance and regulation of the mind that isn’t easily achieved without substantial effort, and this is the opposite of the blind and unhealthy impulse that we intend to criticize when we speak of curiosity. Montesquieu states: "The first motive that should drive us to study is the desire to enhance the excellence of our nature and to make an intelligent being even more intelligent." This is the true basis for genuine scientific passion, in whatever form it appears, and for culture viewed simply as a product of this passion; and it is a valid reason, even if we continue to use the term curiosity to describe it.
Starting with exact definitions of words, it is easy to pass to exact definitions of ideas, which is the thing we should be aiming at all the time. The logical accuracy of our language, however, is apparent throughout.
Starting with clear definitions of words, it's easy to move to clear definitions of ideas, which is what we should always strive for. However, the logical accuracy of our language is evident throughout.
Matthew Arnold does not embellish his criticism, nor does he make any special appeal to the feelings or emotions of his readers. Not so Ruskin. He discovers intellectual emotions, and makes pleasant appeals to those emotions. Consequently his criticism has been more popular than Matthew Arnold's. As an example of this freer, more varied critical style, let us cite the opening paragraphs of the lecture “Of Queens' Gardens”——in “Sesame and Lilies”:
Matthew Arnold doesn't sugarcoat his criticism or target the feelings or emotions of his readers. Ruskin, on the other hand, taps into intellectual emotions and makes engaging appeals to those feelings. As a result, his criticism has gained more popularity than Matthew Arnold's. To illustrate this more relaxed and diverse critical style, let's look at the opening paragraphs of the lecture “Of Queens' Gardens”——in “Sesame and Lilies”:
From “Sesame and Lilies.”
From "Sesame and Lilies."
It will be well … that I should shortly state to you my general intention… The questions specially proposed to you in my former lecture, namely How and What to Read, rose out of a far deeper one, which it was my endeavor to make you propose earnestly to yourselves, namely, Why to Read I want you to feel, with me, that whatever advantage we possess in the present day in the diffusion of education and of literature, can only be rightly used by any of us when we have apprehended clearly what education is to lead to, and literature to teach. I wish you to see that both well directed moral training and well chosen reading lead to the possession of a power over the ill-guided and illiterate, which is, according to the measure of it, in the truest sense kingly;* conferring indeed the purest kingship that can exist among men. Too many other kingships (however distinguished by visible insignia or material power) being either spectral, or tyrannous; spectral―that is to say, aspects and shadows only of royalty, hollow as death, and which only the “likeness of a kingly crown have on;” or else tyrannous―that is to say, substituting their own will for the law of justice and love by which all true kings rule.
It’s important for me to briefly outline my overall intention. The questions I previously posed to you in my last lecture—specifically, How and What to Read—emerged from a much deeper question that I wanted you to seriously consider for yourselves: Why Read? I want you to understand, just as I do, that whatever advantages we have today in the spread of education and literature can only be truly beneficial when we clearly grasp what education aims for and what literature has to teach us. I wish for you to recognize that both properly guided moral education and carefully chosen reading provide us with a certain power over those who lack guidance and knowledge, which, depending on the extent of it, can be genuinely noble; in fact, it grants the purest form of leadership that can exist among people. Too many other forms of leadership—though they may have visible symbols or tangible power—are either illusory or oppressive; illusory, meaning they are merely appearances and shadows of true nobility, as empty as death, wearing only the "likeness of a kingly crown;" or oppressive, meaning they impose their own will in place of the laws of justice and love that all true leaders follow.
*The preceding lecture was entitled “Of Kings's Treasures.”
*The previous lecture was titled “Of Kings's Treasures.”
There is then, I repeat (and as I want to leave this idea with you, I begin with it, and shall end with it) only one pure kind of kingship, ―an inevitable or eternal kind, crowned or not,―the kingship, namely, which consists in a stronger moral state and truer thoughtful state than that of others, enabling you, therefore, to guide or to raise them. Observe that word “state” we have got into a loose way of using it. It means literally the standing and stability of a thing; and you have the full force of it in the derived word “statue”―“the immovable thing.” A king's majesty or “state,” then, and the right of his kingdom to be called a State, depends on the movelessness of both,―without tremor, without quiver of balance, established and enthroned upon a foundation of eternal law which nothing can alter or overthrow.
There is, as I mentioned before (and I want to leave you with this idea, starting and ending with it), only one genuine type of kingship—an inevitable or eternal form, whether crowned or not. It’s the kingship that arises from a stronger moral character and a more profound thoughtfulness than others, enabling you to lead or uplift them. Notice that we’ve been using the word “state” loosely. It literally means the condition and stability of something; you can see this in the related word “statue”—“the unchanging thing.” A king’s majesty or “state,” and the legitimacy of his kingdom as a State, relies on the steadfastness of both—without shaking, without loss of balance, grounded and established on an everlasting law that nothing can change or destroy.
Believing that all literature and all education are only useful so far as they tend to confirm this calm, beneficent, and therefore kingly, power,―first over ourselves, and, through ourselves, over all around us,―I am now going to ask you to consider with me further, what special portion or kind of this royal authority, arising out of noble education, may rightly be possessed by women; and how far they also are called to a true queenly power,―not in their households merely, but over all within their sphere. And in what sense, if they rightly understood and exercised this royal or gracious influence, the order and beauty induced by such benignant power would justify us in speaking of the territories over which each of them reigned as ‘Queens' Gardens.’
Believing that all literature and education are only valuable as they support this calm, positive, and therefore royal power—first over ourselves, and then, through ourselves, over everything around us—I now invite you to consider with me what specific aspect or type of this royal authority, stemming from a noble education, women may rightfully hold; and to what extent they too are called to a true queenly power—not just in their homes, but over everything within their influence. And in what way, if they fully understood and applied this royal or gracious influence, the order and beauty created by such benevolent power would allow us to refer to the areas over which each of them rules as 'Queens' Gardens.'
Here still is the true critical style, with exact definitions; but the whole argument is a metaphor, and the object of the criticism is to rouse feelings that will lead to action.
Here still is the true critical style, with exact definitions; but the whole argument is a metaphor, and the purpose of the criticism is to stir emotions that will inspire action.
It will be observed that words which by definition are to be taken in some sort of technical sense are distinguished to the eye in some way. Matthew Arnold used italics. Ruskin first places “state” within quotation marks, and then, when he uses the word in a still different sense, he writes it with a capital letter―State. Capitalization is perhaps the most common way for designating common words when used in a special sense which is defined by the writer―or defined by implication. This is the explanation of the capital letters with which the writings of Carlyle are filled. He constantly endeavors to make words mean more than, or something different from, the meaning they usually have.
It can be noted that words meant to be understood in a specific technical sense are visually highlighted in some way. Matthew Arnold used italics. Ruskin first puts “state” in quotation marks, and then, when he uses the word in a different context, he writes it with a capital letter—State. Capitalization is probably the most common method for identifying everyday words when used in a special sense defined by the writer—or implied. This explains the capital letters that fill Carlyle's writings. He continually tries to make words mean more than, or something different from, their usual definitions.
The peculiar embellishments of the critical writer are epigram, paradox, and satire. An epigram is a very short phrase or sentence which is so full of implied meaning or suggestion that it catches the attention at once, and remains in the memory easily. The paradox is something of the same sort on a larger scale. It is a statement that we can hardly believe to be true, since it seems at first sight to be self-contradictory, or to contradict well known truths or laws; but on examination we find that in a peculiar sense it is strictly true. Satire is a variation of humor peculiarly adapted to criticism, since it is intended to make the common idea ridiculous when compared with the ideas which the critic is trying to bring out: it is a sort of argument by force of stinging points. We may find an example of satire in its perfection in Swift, especially in his “Gulliver's Travels”―since these are satires the point of which we can appreciate to-day. Oscar Wilde was peculiarly given to epigram, and in his plays especially we may find epigram carried to the same excess that the balanced structure is carried by Macaulay. More moderate epigram may be found in Emerson and Carlyle. Paradox is something that we should use only on special occasion.
The unique features of critical writing are epigrams, paradoxes, and satire. An epigram is a very short phrase or sentence packed with implied meaning or suggestion that grabs attention right away and is easy to remember. A paradox is similar but on a larger scale. It’s a statement that seems hard to believe because it appears to be self-contradictory or goes against well-known truths or laws; however, upon closer inspection, we find that it is true in a specific sense. Satire is a type of humor that's specifically suited for criticism, as it aims to make common ideas seem absurd when compared to the ideas the critic is trying to emphasize: it serves as a form of argument supported by sharp points. A perfect example of satire can be found in Swift, particularly in his “Gulliver's Travels”—these are satires whose points we can still appreciate today. Oscar Wilde was notably fond of epigrams, especially in his plays, where epigrams are carried to the same extent as the balanced structure was by Macaulay. More moderate examples of epigrams can be found in Emerson and Carlyle. We should use paradoxes only on special occasions.
CHAPTER IX.
THE STYLE OF FICTION:
Narrative, Description, and Dialogue.
Storytelling, Descriptions, and Conversation.
Dickens.
Dickens.
In fiction there are three different kinds of writing which must be blended with a fine skill, and this fact makes fiction so much the more difficult than any other sort of writing. History is largely narrative, pure and simple, newspaper articles are description, dramas are dialogue, but fiction must unite in a way peculiar to itself the niceties of all three.
In fiction, there are three different types of writing that must be skillfully blended together, which makes fiction more challenging than any other kind of writing. History is primarily a straightforward narrative, newspaper articles are descriptive, and dramas are all about dialogue. However, fiction uniquely combines the nuances of all three.
We must take each style separately and master it thoroughly before trying to combine the three in a work of fiction. The simplest is narrative, and consists chiefly in the ability to tell a plain story straight on to the end, just as in conversation Neighbor Gossip comes and tells a long story to her friend the Listener. A writer will gain this skill if he practise on writing out tales or stories just as nearly as possible as a child would do it, supposing the child had a sufficient vocabulary. Letter-writing, when one is away from home and wishes to tell his intimate friends all that has happened to him, is practice of just this sort, and the best practice.
We need to focus on each style individually and get really good at it before we try to blend all three in a piece of fiction. The easiest one is narrative, which mainly involves the ability to tell a straightforward story from beginning to end, similar to how Neighbor Gossip shares a lengthy tale with her friend the Listener. A writer will build this skill by writing out stories or tales as closely as possible to how a child would do it, assuming the child has a decent vocabulary. Writing letters to close friends when you’re away from home and want to share everything that’s happened to you is exactly this kind of practice, and it’s the best kind.
Newspaper articles are more descriptive than any other sort of writing. You have a description of a new invention, of a great fire, of a prisoner at the bar of justice. It is not quite so spontaneous as narrative. Children seldom describe, and the newspaper man finds difficulty in making what seems a very brief tale into a column article until he can weave description as readily as he breathes.
Newspaper articles are more descriptive than any other type of writing. You get a detailed account of a new invention, a major fire, or a prisoner in court. It’s not quite as spontaneous as storytelling. Kids usually don’t describe things, and journalists struggle to turn what seems like a short story into a full column until they can incorporate descriptions as easily as they breathe.
Dialogue in a story is by no means the same as the dialogue of a play: it ought rather to be a description of a conversation, and very seldom is it a full report of what is said on each side.
Dialogue in a story is definitely not the same as dialogue in a play: it should be more like a description of a conversation, and it's rarely a complete account of everything that’s said on both sides.
Description is used in its technical sense to designate the presentation of a scene without reference to events; narrative is a description of events as they have happened, a dialogue is a description of conversation. Fiction is essentially a descriptive art, and quite as much is it descriptive in dialogue as in any other part.
Description is used in a technical sense to mean the presentation of a scene without referencing events; narrative is a description of events as they occurred, and dialogue is a description of conversation. Fiction is fundamentally a descriptive art, and it is just as descriptive in dialogue as in any other part.
The best way to master dialogue as an element by itself is to study the novels of writers like Dickens, Thackeray, or George Eliot. Dialogue has its full development only in the novel, and it is here and not in short stories that the student of fiction should study it. The important points to be noticed are that only characteristic and significant speeches are reproduced. When the conversation gives only facts that should be known to the reader it is thrown into the indirect or narrative form, and frequently when the impression that a conversation makes is all that is important, this impression is described in general terms instead of in a detailed report of the conversation itself.
The best way to master dialogue on its own is to study the novels of writers like Dickens, Thackeray, or George Eliot. Dialogue really comes into its own in novels, so that's where fiction students should focus on it, not in short stories. Key points to notice are that only distinct and meaningful speeches are included. When a conversation just states facts the reader should already know, it gets put into indirect or narrative form. Often, if the overall impression of a conversation is what matters most, that impression is described in broad terms rather than through a detailed account of the conversation itself.
So much for the three different modes of writing individually considered. The important and difficult point comes in the balanced combination of the three, not in the various parts of the story, but in each single paragraph. Henry James in his paper on “The Art of Fiction,” says very truly that every descriptive passage is at the same time narrative, and every dialogue is in its essence also descriptive. The truth is, the writer of stories has a style of his own, which we may call the narrative-descriptive-dialogue style, which is a union in one and the same sentence of all three sorts of writing. In each sentence, to be sure, narrative or description or dialogue will predominate; but still the narrative is always present in the description, and the description in the dialogue, as Mr. James says; and if you take a paragraph this fact will appear more clearly, and if you take three or four paragraphs, or a whole story, the fusion of all three styles in the same words is clearly apparent.
So much for the three different modes of writing when looked at separately. The important and challenging issue lies in the balanced blend of the three, not just in the various parts of the story, but in each individual paragraph. Henry James, in his essay "The Art of Fiction," accurately states that every descriptive passage is also a narrative, and every dialogue inherently has a descriptive aspect. The reality is that a storyteller has their own style, which we can call the narrative-descriptive-dialogue style, blending all three types of writing into a single sentence. In each sentence, narrative, description, or dialogue may take the lead; however, narrative is always present in the description and description in the dialogue, as Mr. James points out. If you examine a paragraph, this fact becomes clearer, and if you look at three or four paragraphs, or an entire story, you'll see the combination of all three styles within the same words is distinctly evident.
It is impossible to give fixed rules for the varying proportion of description, narration, or dialogue in any given passage. The writer must guide himself entirely by the impression in his own mind. He sees with his mind's eye a scene and events happening in it. As he describes this from point to point he constantly asks himself, what method of using words will be most effective here? He keeps the impression always closely in mind. He does not wander from it to put in a descriptive passage or a clever bit of dialogue or a pleasing narrative: he follows out his description of the impression with faithful accuracy, thinking only of being true to his own conception, and constantly ransacking his whole knowledge of language to get the best expression, whatever it may be. Now it may be a little descriptive touch, now a sentence or two out of a conversation, now plain narration of events. Dialogue is the most expansive and tiring, and should frequently be relieved by the condensed narrative, which is simple and easy reading. Description should seldom be given in chunks, but rather in touches of a brief and delicate kind, and with the aim of being suggestive rather than full and detailed.
It’s impossible to set fixed rules for how much description, narration, or dialogue should be in any passage. The writer needs to rely entirely on the impression in their own mind. They visualize a scene and the events happening within it. As they describe this step by step, they constantly ask themselves which words will be most effective at that moment. They keep the impression firmly in mind and don’t stray from it to insert a lengthy description, a witty exchange, or an engaging story; instead, they faithfully follow the impression they have, focused on staying true to their vision and digging deep into their vocabulary to find the best expression, whatever that may be. Sometimes it might be a small descriptive detail, other times a few lines of dialogue, or straightforward narration of events. Dialogue can be expansive and exhausting, so it should often be balanced with brief and easy-to-read narrative sections. Description should rarely be dumped in large sections but rather presented in small, subtle touches meant to suggest rather than fully detail.
Humor, and especially good humor, are indispensable to the most successful works of fiction. Above all other kinds of writing, fiction must win the heart of the reader. And this requires that the heart of the writer should be tender and sympathetic. Harsh critics call this quality sentiment, and even sentimentality. Dickens had it above all other writers, and it is probable that this popularity has never been surpassed. Scott succeeded by his splendid descriptions, but no one can deny that he was also one of the biggest hearted men in the world. And Thackeray, with all his reserve, had a heart as tender and sympathetic as was ever borne by so polished a gentleman.
Humor, especially good humor, is essential to the most successful works of fiction. More than any other type of writing, fiction needs to connect with the reader's heart. This means the writer must have a tender and sympathetic heart. Harsh critics label this quality as sentiment or even sentimentality. Dickens had it more than any other writer, and it’s likely that his popularity has never been matched. Scott gained success with his amazing descriptions, but no one can deny that he was also one of the most big-hearted men in the world. And Thackeray, despite his reserve, had a heart as tender and sympathetic as anyone who is as refined as he was.
As an almost perfect example of the blending of narrative, description, and dialogue, all welded into an effective whole by the most delicate and winning sentiment, we offer the following selection from Barbox Bros. & Co., in “Mugby Junction.”
As a nearly perfect example of combining storytelling, description, and dialogue, all seamlessly united by the most subtle and appealing emotion, we present the following excerpt from Barbox Bros. & Co., in “Mugby Junction.”
POLLY.
By Charles Dickens.
By Charles Dickens.
Although he had arrived at his journey's end for the day at noon, he had since insensibly walked about the town so far and so long that the lamplighters were now at their work in the streets, and the shops were sparkling up brilliantly. Thus reminded to turn towards his quarters, he was in the act of doing so, when a very little hand crept into his, and a very little voice said:
Although he reached his destination for the day by noon, he had unknowingly wandered around the town for so long that the lamplighters were now at work in the streets, and the shops were lighting up brilliantly. Just as he remembered to head back to his place, a tiny hand slipped into his, and a tiny voice said:
“O! If you please, I am lost!”
“Oh! Please, I’m so lost!”
He looked down, and saw a very little fair-haired girl.
He looked down and saw a tiny fair-haired girl.
“Yes,” she said, confirming her words with a serious nod. “I am, indeed.
I am lost.”
“Yes,” she said, confirming her words with a serious nod. “I am, indeed.
I am lost.”
Greatly perplexed, he stopped, looked about him for help, descried none, and said, bending low:
Greatly confused, he stopped, looked around for assistance, saw none, and said, bending down:
“Where do you live, my child?”
“Where do you live, my child?”
“I don't know where I live,” she returned. “I am lost.”
“I don’t know where I live,” she replied. “I’m lost.”
“What is your name?”
“What's your name?”
“Polly.”
“Polly.”
“What is your other name?”
“What's your other name?”
The reply was prompt, but unintelligible.
The response was quick, but confusing.
Imitating the sound, as he caught it, he hazarded the guess, “Trivits?”
Imitating the sound as he heard it, he took a guess, “Trivits?”
“O no!” said the child, shaking her head. “Nothing like that.”
“O no!” said the child, shaking her head. “Nothing like that.”
“Say it again, little one”
“Say it again, kiddo”
An unpromising business. For this time it had quite a different sound.
An unpromising business. This time, it had a completely different vibe.
He made the venture: “Paddens?”
He took the leap: “Paddens?”
“O no!” said the child. “Nothing like that.”
“O no!” said the child. “Nothing like that.”
“Once more. Let us try it again, dear.”
“Let’s try it again, my dear.”
A most hopeless business. This time it swelled into four syllables. “It can't be Tappitarver?” $ªזđ said Barbox Brothers, rubbing his head with his hat in discomfiture.
A completely hopeless situation. This time it stretched out to four syllables. “It can't be Tappitarver?” $ªזđ said Barbox Brothers, rubbing his head with his hat in frustration.
“No! It ain't,” the child quietly assented.
“No! It isn’t,” the child quietly agreed.
On her trying this unfortunate name once more, with extraordinary efforts at distinction, it swelled into eight syllables at least.
On her attempt to use this unfortunate name again, making an extraordinary effort to stand out, it stretched to at least eight syllables.
“Ah! I think,” said Barbox Brothers, with a desperate air of resignation, “that we had better give it up.”
“Ah! I think,” said Barbox Brothers, with a weary sense of defeat, “that we might as well just let it go.”
“But I am lost,” said the child nestling her little hand more closely in his, “and you'll take care of me, won't you?”
“But I’m lost,” said the child, gripping his hand tighter. “And you’ll take care of me, right?”
If ever a man were disconcerted by division between compassion on the one hand, and the very imbecility of irresolution on the other, here the man was. “Lost!” he repeated, looking down at the child. “I am sure I am. What is to be done!”
If there was ever a man confused by the clash between compassion and the sheer foolishness of indecision, it was him. “Lost!” he said again, gazing down at the child. “I know I am. What should I do?”
“Where do you live?” asked the child, looking up at him wistfully.
“Where do you live?” asked the child, gazing up at him with longing.
“Over there,” he answered, pointing vaguely in the direction of the hotel.
“Over there,” he replied, pointing loosely toward the hotel.
“Hadn't we better go there?” said the child.
“Shouldn't we go there?” said the child.
“Really,” he replied, “I don't know but what we had.”
“Honestly,” he replied, “I don’t know about what we had.”
So they set off, hand in hand;―he, through comparison of himself against his little companion, with a clumsy feeling on him as if he had just developed into a foolish giant;―she, clearly elevated in her own tiny opinion by having got him so neatly out of his embarrassment.
So they set off, hand in hand;—he, feeling awkward like a goofy giant next to his little companion;—she, clearly feeling proud of herself for helping him out of his embarrassment.
“We are going to have dinner when we get there, I suppose?” said Polly.
“We're going to have dinner when we get there, right?” asked Polly.
“Well,” he rejoined, “I―yes, I suppose we are.”
“Well,” he replied, “I―yeah, I guess we are.”
“Do you like your dinner?” asked the child.
“Do you like your dinner?” the child asked.
“Why, on the whole,” said Barbox Brothers, “yes, I think I do.”
“Why, overall,” said Barbox Brothers, “yeah, I think I do.”
“I do mine,” said Polly “Have you any brothers and sisters?”
“I do,” said Polly. “Do you have any brothers or sisters?”
“No, have you?”
“No, have you?"
“Mine are dead.”
"My pets are dead."
“O!” said Barbox Brothers. With that absurd sense of unwieldiness of mind and body weighing him down, he would not have known how to pursue the conversation beyond this curt rejoinder, but that the child was always ready for him.
“O!” said Barbox Brothers. With that ridiculous feeling of clumsiness in both mind and body dragging him down, he wouldn’t have known how to keep the conversation going beyond this short reply, but the child was always ready for him.
“What,” she asked, turning her soft hand coaxingly in his, “are you going to do to amuse me, after dinner?”
“What,” she asked, gently turning his hand in hers, “are you going to do to keep me entertained after dinner?”
“Upon my soul, Polly,” exclaimed Barbox Brothers, very much at a loss,
“I have not the slightest idea!”
“Honestly, Polly,” exclaimed Barbox Brothers, clearly puzzled,
“I don’t have a clue!”
“Then I tell you what,” said Polly. “Have you got any cards at the house?”
“Then let me tell you something,” said Polly. “Do you have any cards at home?”
“Plenty,” said Barbox Brothers, in a boastful vein.
"Lots," said Barbox Brothers, confidently.
“Very well. Then I'll build houses, and you shall look at me. You mustn't blow, you know.”
“Alright. Then I’ll build houses, and you can watch me. Just don’t blow, okay?”
“O no!” said Barbox Brothers. “No, no, no! No blowing! Blowing's not fair.”
“O no!” said Barbox Brothers. “No, no, no! No blowing! Blowing isn’t fair.”
He flattered himself that he had said this pretty well for an idiotic monster; but the child, instantly perceiving the awkwardness of his attempt to adapt himself to her level, utterly destroyed his hopeful opinion of himself by saying, compassionately: “What a funny man you are!”
He thought he had expressed this pretty well for a clueless monster; but the child, quickly noticing the awkwardness of his attempt to connect with her, completely shattered his hopeful self-image by saying, sympathetically: “What a funny man you are!”
Feeling, after this melancholy failure, as if he every minute grew bigger and heavier in person, and weaker in mind, Barbox gave himself up for a bad job. No giant ever submitted more meekly to be led in triumph by all-conquering Jack, than he to be bound in slavery to Polly.
Feeling, after this sad failure, as if he got bigger and heavier physically with each passing minute, and weaker mentally, Barbox resigned himself to being a lost cause. No giant ever accepted being led in triumph by all-conquering Jack more willingly than he accepted being enslaved to Polly.
“Do you know any stories?” she asked him.
“Do you know any stories?” she asked him.
He was reduced to the humiliating confession:
He was forced to make the humiliating confession:
“What a dunce you must be, mustn't you?” said Polly.
“What a fool you must be, right?” said Polly.
He was reduced to the humiliating confession:
He was forced to make the embarrassing confession:
“Would you like me to teach you a story? But you must remember it, you know, and be able to tell it right to somebody else afterwards?”
“Do you want me to tell you a story? But you have to remember it and be able to share it with someone else afterward.”
He professed that it would afford him the highest mental gratification to be taught a story, and that he would humbly endeavor to retain it in his mind. Whereupon Polly, giving her hand a new little turn in his, expressive of settling down for enjoyment, commenced a long romance, of which every relishing clause began with the words: “So this,” or “And so this.” As, “So this boy;” or, “So this fairy;” or “And so this pie was four yards round, and two yards and a quarter deep.” The interest of the romance was derived from the intervention of this fairy to punish this boy for having a greedy appetite. To achieve which purpose, this fairy made this pie, and this boy ate and ate and ate, and his cheeks swelled and swelled and swelled. There were many tributary circumstances, but the forcible interest culminated in the total consumption of this pie, and the bursting of this boy. Truly he was a fine sight, Barbox Brothers, with serious attentive face, an ear bent down, much jostled on the pavements of the busy town, but afraid of losing a single incident of the epic, lest he should be examined in it by-and-by and found deficient.
He claimed that it would give him great mental satisfaction to learn a story, and that he would try hard to remember it. Then Polly, giving his hand a little twist that showed she was ready to enjoy, started telling a long tale, every interesting part beginning with “So this,” or “And so this.” Like, “So this boy;” or, “So this fairy;” or “And so this pie was four yards wide and two yards and a quarter deep.” The story's excitement came from the fairy intervening to punish the boy for his greedy appetite. To do this, the fairy made the pie, and the boy ate and ate and ate, until his cheeks got bigger and bigger. There were lots of other details, but the main interest came from the boy completely finishing the pie and then bursting. Honestly, Barbox Brothers, he was quite a sight, with a serious look on his face, an ear bent down, getting jostled on the bustling streets, but worried about missing any part of the story, afraid he might be quizzed on it later and found wanting.
Exercise. Rewrite this little story, locating the scene in your own town and describing yourself in the place of Barbox Bros. Make as few changes in the wording as possible.
Exercise. Rewrite this short story, setting the scene in your own town and describing yourself in place of Barbox Bros. Make as few changes to the wording as possible.
CHAPTER X.
THE EPIGRAMMATIC STYLE:
Stephen Crane.
Stephen Crane.
A peculiarly modern style is that in which very short sentences are used for pungent effect. If to this characteristic of short sentences we add a slightly unusual though perfectly obvious use of common words, we have what has been called the “epigrammatic style,” though it does not necessarily have any epigrams in it. It is the modern newspaper and advertisement writer's method of emphasis; and if it could be used in moderation, or on occasion, it would be extremely effective. But to use it at all times and for all subjects is a vice distinctly to be avoided.
A uniquely modern style uses very short sentences for a strong impact. If we also include a slightly unconventional but entirely clear use of everyday words, we get what’s referred to as the “epigrammatic style,” even though it doesn’t have to include any actual epigrams. This is the approach that modern newspaper and advertisement writers use for emphasis, and if it were applied in moderation or occasionally, it would be very effective. However, using it all the time and for every topic is a flaw that should definitely be avoided.
Stephen Crane's “The Red Badge of Courage” is written almost wholly in this style. If we read three or four chapters of this story we may see how tiring it is for the mind to be constantly jerked along. At the same time, in a brief advertising booklet probably no other style that is sufficiently simple and direct would be as likely to attract immediate attention and hold it for the short time usually required to read an advertisement.
Stephen Crane's “The Red Badge of Courage” is mostly written in this style. If we read three or four chapters of this story, we can see how exhausting it is for the mind to be continually pulled along. At the same time, in a short advertising booklet, likely no other style that is simple and direct would be as effective in grabbing immediate attention and keeping it for the brief time usually needed to read an advertisement.
Crane's style has a literary turn and quality which will not be found in the epigrammatic advertisement, chiefly because Crane is descriptive, while the advertiser is merely argumentative. However, the advertisement writer will learn the epigrammatic style most surely and quickly by studying the literary form of it.
Crane's style has a literary flair and quality that you won't find in the catchy advertisement, mainly because Crane is descriptive, while the ad writer is just trying to make a point. However, the ad writer will definitely learn the catchy style more effectively and quickly by studying its literary form.
From “The Red Badge of Courage.”
From “The Red Badge of Courage.”
The blue haze of evening was upon the field. The lines of forest were long purple shadows. One cloud lay along the western sky partly smothering the red.
The blue haze of evening covered the field. The lines of trees cast long purple shadows. One cloud stretched across the western sky, partly hiding the red.
As the youth left the scene behind him, he heard the guns suddenly roar out. He imagined them shaking in black rage. They belched and howled like brass devils guarding a gate. The soft air was filled with the tremendous remonstrance. With it came the shattering peal of opposing infantry. Turning to look behind him, he could see sheets of orange light illumine the shadowy distance. There were subtle and sudden lightnings in the far air. At times he thought he could see heaving masses of men.
As the young man walked away from the scene, he suddenly heard the guns roar. He imagined them shaking with black anger. They belched and howled like brass devils guarding a gate. The soft air filled with the tremendous noise. Along with it came the deafening sound of enemy infantry. Turning to look back, he could see flashes of orange light illuminating the shadowy distance. There were brief but intense flashes in the far air. At times, he thought he could see large groups of men moving.
He hurried on in the dusk. The day had faded until he could barely distinguish place for his feet. The purple darkness was filled with men who lectured and jabbered. Sometimes he could see them gesticulating against the blue and somber sky. There seemed to be a great ruck of men and munitions spread about in the forest and in the fields…
He rushed on in the twilight. The day had dimmed to the point where he could hardly see where to step. The deepening darkness was filled with men who were talking loudly and arguing. Occasionally, he could see them waving their arms against the blue, gloomy sky. There appeared to be a huge crowd of men and weapons scattered throughout the forest and fields...
His thoughts as he walked fixed intently upon his hurt. There was a cool, liquid feeling about it and he imagined blood moving slowly down under his hair. His head seemed swollen to a size that made him think his neck to be inadequate.
His thoughts were focused intensely on his injury as he walked. There was a cool, liquid sensation, and he pictured blood slowly trickling beneath his hair. His head felt so swollen that he thought his neck couldn't support it.
The new silence of his wound made much worriment. The little blistering voices of pain that had called out from his scalp were, he thought, definite in their expression of danger. By them he believed that he could measure his plight. But when they remained ominously silent he became frightened and imagined terrible fingers that clutched into his brain.
The new silence of his wound caused him a lot of concern. The small, blistering voices of pain that had been coming from his scalp felt like a clear warning to him. He thought he could gauge his situation by them. But when they stayed ominously quiet, he grew anxious and imagined terrifying fingers gripping his brain.
Amid it he began to reflect upon various incidents and conditions of the past. He bethought him of certain meals his mother had cooked at home, in which those dishes of which he was particularly fond had occupied prominent positions. He saw the spread table. The pine walls of the kitchen were glowing in the warm light from the stove. Too, he remembered how he and his companions used to go from the school-house to the bank of a shaded pool. He saw his clothes in disorderly array upon the grass of the bank. He felt the swash of the fragrant water upon his body. The leaves of the overhanging maple rustled with melody in the wind of youthful summer.
Amid this, he started to think about different events and situations from the past. He remembered certain meals his mom had cooked at home, where his favorite dishes were the main attractions. He could see the laid-out table. The pine walls of the kitchen were shining in the warm light from the stove. He also recalled how he and his friends would walk from the schoolhouse to the edge of a shaded pool. He pictured his clothes scattered on the grass by the bank. He felt the cool, fragrant water on his skin. The leaves of the overhanging maple rustled melodically in the summer breeze.
Exercise.
Workout.
After reading this passage over a dozen times very slowly and carefully, and copying it phrase by phrase, continue the narrative in Crane's style through two more paragraphs, bringing the story of this day's doing to some natural conclusion.
After reading this passage more than twelve times very slowly and carefully, and rewriting it phrase by phrase, continue the story in Crane's style for two more paragraphs, bringing the events of this day to a natural conclusion.
CHAPTER XI.
THE POWER OF SIMPLICITY:
The Bible, Franklin, Lincoln.
The Bible, Franklin, Lincoln.
We have all heard that the simplest style is the strongest; and no doubt most of us have wondered how this could be, as we turned over in our minds examples of what seemed to us simplicity, comparing them with the rhetorical, the lofty, and the sublime passages we could call to mind.
We’ve all heard that the simplest style is the strongest; and no doubt most of us have wondered how this could be, as we thought about examples of what seemed simple to us, comparing them with the rhetorical, the grand, and the elevated passages we could remember.
Precisely this wonder was in the minds of a number of very well educated people who gathered to attend the dedicatory exercises of the Gettysburg monument, and Abraham Lincoln gave them one of the very finest illustrations in the whole range of the world's history, of how simplicity can be stronger than rhetoric. Edward Everett was the orator of the day, and he delivered a most polished and brilliant oration. When he sat down the friends of Lincoln regretted that this homely countryman was to be asked to “say a few words,” since they felt that whatever he might say would be a decided anticlimax. The few words that he did utter are the immortal “Gettysburg speech,” by far the shortest great oration on record. Edward Everett afterward remarked, “I wish I could have produced in two hours the effect that Lincoln produced in two minutes.” The tremendous effect of that speech could have been produced in no other way than by the power of simplicity, which permits the compression of more thought into a few words than any other style-form. All rhetoric is more or less windy. The quality of a simple style is that in order to be anything at all it must be solid metal all the way through.
Exactly this wonder was in the minds of several highly educated people who came together to attend the dedication of the Gettysburg monument, and Abraham Lincoln provided one of the best examples in all of history of how simplicity can be more powerful than elaborate speech. Edward Everett was the main speaker that day, and he delivered a polished and impressive oration. When he finished, Lincoln's friends worried that this straightforward country man would only be asked to “say a few words,” as they felt whatever he said would be an obvious letdown. The few words he spoke became the legendary “Gettysburg speech,” easily the shortest great oration on record. Edward Everett later commented, “I wish I could have produced in two hours the impact that Lincoln achieved in two minutes.” The immense impact of that speech could only be achieved through the strength of simplicity, which allows for the expression of more thought in fewer words than any other style. All rhetoric tends to be somewhat inflated. The hallmark of a simple style is that, to be meaningful, it must be solid and substantial throughout.
The Bible, the greatest literary production in the world as atheists and Christians alike admit, is our supreme example of the wonderful power of simplicity, and it more than any other one book has served to mould the style of great writers. To take a purely literary passage, what could be more affecting, yet more simple, than these words from Ecclesiastes?
The Bible, regarded by both atheists and Christians as the greatest literary work in the world, is our top example of the amazing power of simplicity, and it has shaped the writing style of many great authors more than any other book. To cite a purely literary passage, what could be more moving yet more straightforward than these words from Ecclesiastes?
From “Ecclesiastes.”
From "Ecclesiastes."
Remember now thy Creator in the days of thy youth, while the evil days come not, nor the years draw nigh, when thou shalt say, I have no pleasure in them; while the sun, or the light, or the moon, or the stars, be not darkened, nor the clouds return after the rain: In the day when the keepers of the house shall tremble, and the strong men shall bow themselves, and the grinders cease because they are few, and those that look out of the windows be darkened; and the doors shall be shut in the streets, when the sound of the grinding is low, and he shall rise up at the voice of the bird, and all the daughters of music shall be brought low; also when they shall be afraid of that which is high, and fears shall be in the way, and the almond tree shall flourish, and the grasshoppers shall be a burden, and desire shall fail: because man goeth to his long home, and the mourners go about the streets: Or ever the silver cord be loosed, or the golden bowl be broken, or the pitcher be broken at the fountain, or the wheel broken at the cistern. Then shall the dust return to the earth as it was: and the spirit shall return unto God who gave it.
Remember your Creator in the days of your youth, before the difficult days come and the years approach when you’ll say, “I find no pleasure in them." Before the sun, light, moon, and stars are darkened, and the clouds return after the rain: On the day when the guards of the house tremble, and the strong men bow down, and the grinders stop because they are few, and those looking out of the windows are darkened; and the doors will be shut in the streets when the sound of grinding is low, and you will rise at the sound of a bird, and all the music will be quieted; also when you’re afraid of heights, and fears are in your path, and the almond tree blossoms, and the grasshoppers become a burden, and desire fails: because people go to their eternal home, and mourners walk the streets: before the silver cord is snapped, or the gold bowl is broken, or the pitcher shatters at the fountain, or the wheel is broken at the cistern. Then the dust will return to the earth as it was, and the spirit will return to God who gave it.
This is the sort of barbaric poetry that man in his natural and original state might be supposed to utter. It lacks the nice logic and fine polish of Greek culture; indeed its grammar is somewhat confused. But there is a higher logic than the logic of grammar, namely the logic of life and suffering. The man who wrote this passage had put a year of his existence into every phrase; and that is why it happens that we can find here more phrases quoted by everybody than we can even in the best passage of similar length in Shakspere or any other modern writer.
This is the kind of raw poetry that someone in their natural and original state might be expected to express. It doesn’t have the careful logic and smooth polish of Greek culture; in fact, its grammar is a bit messy. But there’s a deeper logic than just grammatical structure, which is the logic of life and suffering. The person who wrote this passage invested a year of their life into every phrase; that’s why we can find more phrases quoted by everyone here than in even the best passages of similar length by Shakespeare or any other modern writer.
We see in proverbs how by the power of simplicity an enormous amount of thought can be packed into a single line. Some of these have taken thousands of years to grow; and because so much time is required in the making of them, our facile modern writers never produce any. Their fleeting epigrams appear to be spurious coin the moment they are placed side by side with Franklin's epigrams, for instance. Franklin worked his proverbs into the vacant spaces in his almanac during a period of twenty-five years, and then collected all those proverbs into a short paper entitled, “The Way to Wealth.” It may be added, also, that he did not even originate most of these sayings, but only gave a new stamp to what he found in Hindu and Arabic records. For all that, Poor Richard's Almanac is more likely to become immortal than even Franklin's own name and fame.
We can see in proverbs that a simple line can hold a huge amount of thought. Some of these have taken thousands of years to develop, and because it takes so long to create them, our quick modern writers never create anything like them. Their short sayings seem fake the moment they're compared to Franklin's epigrams, for example. Franklin included his proverbs in the empty spaces of his almanac over a span of twenty-five years, and then collected them into a brief paper called “The Way to Wealth.” It’s worth mentioning that he didn’t invent most of these sayings but simply gave a fresh twist to what he found in Hindu and Arabic texts. Still, Poor Richard's Almanac is more likely to be remembered forever than even Franklin's own name and legacy.
The history of Bacon's essays is another fine example of what simplicity can effect in the way of greatness. These essays were originally nothing more than single sentences jotted down in a notebook, probably as an aid to conversation. How many times they were worked over we have no means of knowing; but we have three printed editions of the essays, each of which is immensely developed from what went before.
The history of Bacon's essays is another great example of what simplicity can achieve in terms of greatness. These essays started as nothing more than single sentences written in a notebook, likely to help with conversation. We have no way of knowing how many times they were revised; however, we have three printed editions of the essays, each of which is significantly more developed than the previous one.
In reading the following lines from Franklin, let us reflect that not less than a year went to the writing of every phrase that can be called great; and that if we could spend a year in writing a single sentence, it might be as well worth preserving as these proverbs. Some men have been made famous by one sentence, usually because it somehow expressed the substance of a lifetime.
In reading the following lines from Franklin, let's remember that it took at least a year to craft every phrase that could be considered great; and that if we could dedicate a year to writing a single sentence, it might be just as valuable as these proverbs. Some people have become famous for one sentence, usually because it somehow captured the essence of a lifetime.
From “Poor Richard's Almanac.”
From "Poor Richard's Almanac."
Father Abraham stood up and replied, “If you would have my advice, I will give it you in short; for a word to the wise is enough, and essay words won't fill a bushel, as POOR RICHARD says.”
Father Abraham stood up and replied, “If you want my advice, I’ll give it to you straight; a word to the wise is enough, and excessive words won’t fill a bushel, as POOR RICHARD says.”
They all joined him and desired him to speak his mind; and gathering them around him, he proceeded as follows:
They all gathered around him and urged him to share his thoughts; and once they were settled, he began as follows:
Friends, says he, and neighbors! The taxes are indeed very heavy; and if those laid on by the Government were the only ones we had to pay, we might the more easily discharge them; but we have many others, and much more grievous to some of us. We are taxed twice as much by our idleness, three times as much by our Pride, and four times as much by our Folly; and from these taxes the Commissioners cannot ease or deliver us by allowing an abatement. However, let us hearken to good advice, and something may be done for us, God helps them that helps themselves, as POOR RICHARD says in his Almanac of 1733. It would be thought a hard government that should tax its people one tenth part of their time, to be employed in its service. But idleness taxes many of us much more; if we reckon all that is spent in absolute sloth, or doing of nothing; with that which is spent in idle employments or amusements that amounts to nothing. Sloth, by bringing on disease, absolutely shortens life. Sloth, like Rust, consumes faster than Labor wean; while the used keg is always bright, as POOR RICHARD says. But dost thou love Life? Then do not squander time! for that's the stuff Life is made of, as POOR RICHARD says.
Friends and neighbors! The taxes are really heavy; and if the ones imposed by the Government were the only ones we had to pay, we might manage them more easily. But we have many other taxes that are much harder for some of us to bear. We are taxed twice as much by our laziness, three times as much by our pride, and four times as much by our foolishness; and for these taxes, the Commissioners can't help or relieve us by offering any deductions. However, let’s listen to good advice, and something may be done for us, God helps those who help themselves, as POOR RICHARD says in his Almanac of 1733. It would be considered a harsh government that taxed its people one-tenth of their time to be used in its service. But laziness costs many of us much more if we account for all that is wasted in complete idleness or doing nothing, along with what is spent on meaningless tasks or entertainment. Laziness, by causing illness, actually shortens life. Laziness, like rust, consumes faster than labor wears; while the used keg is always bright, as POOR RICHARD says. But do you love life? Then do not waste time! because that's the stuff life is made of, as POOR RICHARD says.
How much more time than is necessary do we spend in sleep? forgetting that the sleeping fox catches no poultry; and that there will be sleeping enough in the grave, as POOR RICHARD says.
How much more time than we need do we spend sleeping? forgetting that the sleeping fox catches no poultry; and that there will be plenty of sleep in the grave, as POOR RICHARD says.
If Time be of all things the most precious, wasting of Time must be (as POOR RICHARD says) the greatest prodigality; and since, as he elsewhere tells us, Lost time is never found again; and what we call Time enough! always proves little enough, let us then up and be doing, and doing to the purpose: so, by diligence, shall we do more with less perplexity. Sloth makes all things difficult, but Industry all things easy, as POOR RICHARD says: and He that riseth late, must trot all day; and shall scarce overtake his business at night. While Laziness travels so slowly, that Poverty soon over-takes him, as we read in POOR RICHARD who adds, Drive thy business! Let not that drive thee! and Early to bed and early to rise, Makes a man healthy, wealthy, and wise.
If time is the most precious thing, wasting time must be the biggest waste, as Poor Richard says. And since, as he also tells us, lost time is never found again, and what we think is enough time always turns out to be too little, let’s get up and get to work, and work with purpose. By being diligent, we'll accomplish more with less stress. Laziness makes everything difficult, but hard work makes everything easier, as Poor Richard says. He who wakes up late has to rush all day and will barely catch up on his tasks by night. While laziness travels so slowly that poverty soon catches up, as we read in Poor Richard, who adds, “Keep your tasks moving! Don’t let them control you!” and “Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy, and wise.”
As Franklin extracted these sayings one by one out of the Arabic and other sources, in each case giving the phrases a new turn, and as Bacon jotted down in his notebook every witty word he heard, so we will make reputations for ourselves if we are always picking up the good things of others and using them whenever we can.
As Franklin pulled these sayings one by one from Arabic and other sources, rephrasing them each time, and as Bacon noted down every clever thing he heard, we too can build our own reputations by consistently gathering the best ideas from others and using them whenever we can.
THE GETTYSBURG SPEECH
By Abraham Lincoln.
By Abraham Lincoln.
Fourscore and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this continent a new nation, conceived in liberty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal. Now we are engaged in a great civil war, testing whether that nation, or any nation so conceived and so dedicated, can long endure. We are met on a great battlefield of that war. We have come to dedicate a portion of that field as a final resting-place for those who here gave their lives that that nation might live. It is altogether fitting and proper that we should do this.
Eighty-seven years ago, our ancestors created a new nation on this continent, built on the idea of freedom and committed to the belief that all people are created equal. Now, we are caught up in a significant civil war, testing whether that nation, or any nation founded on such principles, can survive for long. We are gathered on a major battlefield of that war. We have come to dedicate a part of that field as a final resting place for those who gave their lives here so that that nation could continue to exist. It is entirely appropriate and necessary that we do this.
But in a larger sense we cannot dedicate, we cannot consecrate, we cannot hallow this ground. The brave men, living and dead, who struggled here, have consecrated it far above our poor power to add or detract. The world will little note, nor long remember, what we, say here, but it can never forget what they did here. It is for us, the living, rather to be dedicated here to the unfinished work which they who fought here have thus far so nobly advanced. It is rather for us to be here dedicated to the great task remaining before us,―that from these honored dead we take increased devotion to that cause for which they gave the last full measure of devotion,―that we here highly resolve that these dead shall not have died in vain,―that this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of freedom,―and that government of the people, by the people, for the people, shall not perish from the earth.
But in a bigger sense, we can't dedicate, we can't consecrate, we can't make this ground sacred. The brave men, both living and dead, who fought here have already made it sacred far beyond our limited ability to add or take away from it. The world will hardly notice or remember what we say here, but it can never forget what they did here. It’s up to us, the living, to dedicate ourselves to the unfinished work that those who fought here have so nobly advanced. It’s up to us to commit ourselves to the great tasks that lie ahead, that from these honored dead we take a renewed dedication to the cause for which they gave everything, that we pledge here that their deaths were not in vain, that this nation, under God, will have a new birth of freedom, and that government of the people, by the people, for the people, will not disappear from the earth.
CHAPTER XII.
HARMONY OF STYLE:
Irving and Hawthorne.
Irving and Hawthorne.
A work of literary art is like a piece of music: one false note makes a discord that spoils the effect of the whole. But it is useless to give rules for writing an harmonious style. When one sits down to write he should give his whole thought and energy to expressing himself forcibly and with the vital glow of an overpowering interest. An interesting thought expressed with force and suggestiveness is worth volumes of commonplaces couched in the most faultless language. The writer should never hesitate in choosing between perfectness of language and vigor. On the first writing verbal perfection should be sacrificed without a moment's hesitation. But when a story or essay has once been written, the writer will turn his attention to those small details of style. He must harmonize his language. He must polish. It is one of the most tedious processes in literature, and to the novice the most difficult on which to make a beginning. Yet there is nothing more surely a matter of labor and not of genius. It is for this that one masters grammar and rhetoric, and studies the individual uses of words. Carried to an extreme it is fatal to vitality of style. But human nature is more often prone to shirk, and this is the thing that is passed over from laziness. If you find one who declaims against the utmost care in verbal polish, you will find a lazy man.
A piece of literary art is like a song: one wrong note creates a discord that ruins the overall effect. But it doesn’t help to set rules for writing in a harmonious style. When you sit down to write, you should put all your thoughts and energy into expressing yourself powerfully and with the passionate intensity of genuine interest. An interesting idea conveyed with strength and insight is worth more than many bland statements written in perfect language. The writer should never hesitate to choose between flawless language and impact. In the first draft, verbal perfection should be sacrificed without hesitation. Once a story or essay is drafted, the writer can then focus on the finer details of style. They need to harmonize their language. They need to polish it. This is one of the most tedious tasks in writing, and for beginners, it’s often the hardest to start. Yet, it’s undeniably a matter of hard work and not of talent. This is why one learns grammar and rhetoric and studies the specific uses of words. Taken to an extreme, it can kill the vitality of style. However, human nature often tends to avoid hard work, and this is what's neglected out of laziness. If you encounter someone criticizing the need for careful word choice, you will likely find a lazy person.
The beginner, however, rarely knows how to set to work, and this chapter is intended to give some practical hints. We assume that the student knows perfectly well what good grammar is, as well as the leading principles of rhetoric, and could easily correct his faults in these if he should see them. There are several distinct classes of errors to look for: faults of grammar, such as the mixing of modes and tenses, and the agreement of verbs and particles in number when collective nouns are referred to; faults of rhetoric, such as the mixing of figures of speech; faults of taste, such as the use of words with a disagreeable or misleading atmosphere about them, though their strict meaning makes their use correct enough; faults of repetition of the same word in differing senses in the same sentence or paragraph; faults of tediousness of phrasing or explanation; faults of lack of clearness in expressing the exact meaning; faults of sentimental use of language, that is, falling into fine phrases which have no distinct meaning―the most discordant fault of all; faults of digression in the structure of the composition.
The beginner, however, often doesn’t know how to get started, and this chapter aims to provide some practical tips. We assume that the student is well aware of what good grammar is and knows the main principles of rhetoric, and could easily fix any mistakes if he notices them. There are several distinct types of errors to watch for: grammatical errors, like mixing up verb moods and tenses, and ensuring that verbs and subjects agree in number when collective nouns are involved; rhetorical errors, such as confusing figures of speech; issues of taste, like using words that have an unpleasant or misleading connotation, even though their literal meaning might seem correct; errors from repeating the same word with different meanings in the same sentence or paragraph; problems with overly wordy phrases or explanations; lack of clarity when stating the exact meaning; sentimental language that falls into flowery phrases without a clear meaning—this is the most jarring mistake; and structural digressions in the composition.
This list is comprehensive of the chief points to look for in verbal revision. Faults of grammar need no explanation here. But we would say, Beware. The most skilled writers are almost constantly falling into errors of this kind, for they are the most subtle and elusive of all, verbal failings. There is, indeed, but one certain way to be sure that they are all removed, and that is by parsing every word by grammatical formula it is a somewhat tedious method, but by practice one may weigh each word with rapidity, and it is only by considering each word alone that one may be sure that nothing is passed over. In the same way each phrase or sentence, or figure of speech, should be weighed separately, for its rhetorical accuracy.
This list covers the main points to consider in verbal revision. Grammar mistakes need no explanation here. However, we advise caution. Even the most skilled writers often fall into these types of errors because they're the most subtle and hard to catch. The only guaranteed way to make sure they’re all corrected is by analyzing every word using grammatical rules. It’s a bit of a tedious method, but with practice, you can evaluate each word quickly, and it’s only by looking at each word individually that you can be sure nothing is overlooked. Similarly, each phrase, sentence, or figure of speech should be assessed separately for rhetorical accuracy.
Faults of taste are detected by a much more delicate process than the application of formulæ, but they almost invariably arise (if ones native sense is keen) from the use of a word in a perfectly legitimate and pure sense, when the public attaches to it an atmosphere (let us call it) which is vulgar or disagreeable. In such cases the word should be sacrificed, for the atmosphere of a word carries a hundred times more weight with the common reader than the strict and logical meaning. For instance, the word mellow is applied to over-ripe fruit, and to light of a peculiarly soft quality, if one is writing for a class of people who are familiar with the poets, it is proper enough to use the word in its poetic sense; but if the majority of the readers of one's work always associate mellow with over-ripe fruit, to use it in its poetic sense would be disastrous.
Faults in taste are identified through a much more sensitive process than just applying rules, but they usually come from using a word in its completely legitimate and pure meaning when the public attaches a vibe (let's call it) that is lowbrow or unpleasant. In these situations, the word should be dropped, because the vibe of a word matters a hundred times more to the average reader than its strict and logical meaning. For example, the word mellow refers to over-ripe fruit and light that has a uniquely soft quality. If you’re writing for an audience that is familiar with poetry, it’s perfectly fine to use the word in its poetic sense; however, if most of your readers always associate mellow with over-ripe fruit, using it poetically would be a huge mistake.
The repetition of the same word many times in succeeding phrases is a figure of speech much used by certain recognized writers, and is a most valuable one. Nor should one be afraid of repetition whenever clearness makes it necessary. But the repetition of the same word in differing senses in adjoining phrases is a fault to be strictly guarded against. The writer was himself once guilty of perpetrating the following abomination: “The form which represented her, though idealized somewhat, is an actual likeness elevated by the force of the sculptor's love into a form of surpassing beauty. It is her form reclining on a couch, only a soft, thin drapery covering her transparent form, her head slightly raised and turned to one side, and having concentrated in its form and posture the height of the whole figure's beauty.” Careful examination will show that form, used five times in this paragraph, has at least three very slightly differing meanings, a fact which greatly adds to the objectionableness of the recurrence of the sound.
The repetition of the same word multiple times in consecutive phrases is a common figure of speech used by certain well-known writers, and it’s quite effective. One shouldn't shy away from repetition when it’s necessary for clarity. However, using the same word with different meanings in nearby phrases is a mistake that should be avoided. The writer once made this mistake in the following example: “The form that represented her, while somewhat idealized, is a true likeness elevated by the sculptor's love into a form of extraordinary beauty. It is her form lounging on a couch, with only a soft, thin drapery covering her delicate form, her head slightly lifted and turned to one side, capturing in its shape and posture the peak of the entire figure's beauty.” A close look reveals that "form," used five times in this paragraph, has at least three very slightly different meanings, which significantly increases the problem of the word's repetition.
A writer who has a high regard for accuracy and completeness of expression is very liable to fall into tediousness in his explanations, he realizes that he is tedious, but he asks, “How can I say what I have to say without being tedious?” Tediousness means that what is said is not worth saying at all, or that it can be said in fewer words. The best method of condensation is the use of some pregnant phrase or comparison which rapidly suggests the meaning without actually stating it. The art of using suggestive phrases is the secret of condensation.
A writer who really values accuracy and thoroughness in what they say is likely to become boring in their explanations. They know they’re being dull, but they wonder, “How can I express what I need to say without being boring?” Boring content implies that what’s being said isn’t worth saying at all, or it could be said more concisely. The best way to condense is by using a powerful phrase or comparison that quickly conveys the meaning without explicitly stating it. Mastering the use of suggestive phrases is the key to being concise.
But in the rapid telling of a story or description of a scene, perhaps no fault is so surely fatal as a momentary lapse into meaningless fine phrases, or sentimentality. In writing a vivid description the author finds his pen moving even after he has finished putting down every significant detail. He is not for the moment sure that he has finished, and thinks that to complete the picture, to “round it up,” a few general phrases are necessary. But when he re-reads what he has written, he sees that it fails, for some unknown reason, of the power of effect on which he had counted. His glowing description seems tawdry, or overwrought. He knows that it is not possible that the whole is bad:
But in quickly telling a story or describing a scene, perhaps no mistake is more damaging than suddenly slipping into pointless flowery language or sentimentality. When writing a vivid description, the author might find his pen still moving even after he's documented every important detail. For a moment, he isn’t sure he’s done and thinks that to finish the picture, to “wrap it up,” a few general phrases are needed. But when he reads what he's written again, he realizes it lacks the impact he was counting on, and his vibrant description feels cheap or overly dramatic. He knows it can't be that the whole thing is bad:
But where is the difficulty?
But what's the challenge?
Almost invariably the trouble will be found to be in some false phrase, for one alone is enough to spoil a whole production. It is as if a single flat or sharp note is introduced into a symphony, producing a discord which rings through the mind during the whole performance.
Almost always, the problem will be due to some misleading phrase, because even one can ruin an entire work. It's like introducing a single flat or sharp note into a symphony, creating a discord that resonates in the mind throughout the entire performance.
To detect the fault, go over the work with the utmost care, weighing each item of the description, and asking the question, Is that an absolutely necessary and true element of the picture I had in mind? Nine times out of ten the writer will discover some sentence or phrase which may be called a “glittering generality,” or that is a weak repetition of what has already been well said, or that is simply “fine” language―sentimentality of some sort. Let him ruthlessly cut away that paragraph, sentence, or phrase, and then re-read. It is almost startling to observe how the removal or addition of a single phrase will change the effect of a description covering many pages.
To find the mistake, carefully review your work, considering each part of the description and asking yourself, "Is this an absolutely necessary and accurate part of the picture I envisioned?" Most of the time, you'll notice some sentence or phrase that could be called a “glittering generality,” or a weak rephrasing of something that’s already been expressed well, or just "nice" language—some form of sentimentality. Be ruthless in cutting that paragraph, sentence, or phrase, then read it again. It's almost shocking to see how the addition or removal of just one phrase can change the impact of a description that spans several pages.
But often a long composition will lack harmony of structure, a fault very different from any we have mentioned, Hitherto we have spoken of definite faults that must be cut out. It is as often necessary to make additions.
But often a long piece of writing will lack a harmonious structure, which is a flaw very different from any we’ve mentioned. Until now, we have talked about specific faults that need to be removed. Sometimes, it’s just as important to make additions.
In the first place, each paragraph must be balanced within itself. The language must be fluent and varied, and each thought or suggestion must flow easily and smoothly into the next, unless abruptness is used for a definite purpose. Likewise each successive stage of a description or dialogue must have its relative as well as its intrinsic value. The writer must study carefully the proportions of the parts, and nicely adjust and harmonize each to the other. Every paragraph, every sentence, every phrase and word, should have its own distinct and clear meaning, and the writer should never allow himself to be in doubt as to the need or value of this or that.
First of all, each paragraph needs to be balanced on its own. The language should be smooth and varied, with each thought or suggestion transitioning easily and seamlessly into the next, unless a jarring effect is used intentionally. Similarly, each step in a description or conversation must have its own significance as well as its value in relation to the overall piece. The writer must carefully examine the proportions of the parts and adjust and harmonize each one with the others. Every paragraph, every sentence, every phrase and word should have a clear and distinct meaning, and the writer should never question the necessity or value of any part.
To secure harmony of style and structure is a matter of personal judgment and study. Though rules for it cannot be given, it will be found to be a natural result of following all the principles of grammar, rhetoric, and composition. But the hard work involved in securing this proportion and harmony of structure can never be avoided or evaded without disastrous consequences. Toil, toil, toil! That should be every writer's motto if he aspires to success, even in the simplest forms of writing.
To achieve a balance of style and structure requires personal judgment and effort. Although there aren’t strict rules for it, you'll find that it naturally comes from adhering to the principles of grammar, rhetoric, and composition. However, the effort needed to achieve this balance and harmony in structure cannot be avoided without serious consequences. Work hard, work hard, work hard! That should be every writer's motto if they want to succeed, even in the simplest types of writing.
The ambitious writer will not learn harmony of style from any single short selection, however perfect such a composition may be in itself. It requires persistent reading, as well as very thoughtful reading, of the masters of perfect style. Two such masters are especially to be recommended,―Irving and Hawthorne. And among their works, the best for such study are “The Sketchbook,” especially Rip Van Winkle and Legend of Sleepy Hollow, by Irving, and “The Scarlet Letter” and such short stories as “The Great Stone Face,” by Hawthorne. To these may be added Thackeray's “Vanity Fair,” Scott's “Ivanhoe,” and Lamb's “Essays of Elia.” These books should be read and re-read many times; and whenever any composition is to be tested, it may conveniently be compared as to style to some part of one or other of these books.
The ambitious writer won’t learn style harmony from just one short piece, no matter how perfect it might be on its own. It takes consistent and careful reading of the masters of great style. Two notable masters to focus on are Irving and Hawthorne. Among their works, the best for this study are “The Sketchbook,” especially “Rip Van Winkle” and “The Legend of Sleepy Hollow” by Irving, and “The Scarlet Letter” along with short stories like “The Great Stone Face” by Hawthorne. You can also consider Thackeray's “Vanity Fair,” Scott's “Ivanhoe,” and Lamb's “Essays of Elia.” These books should be read and re-read several times, and whenever you want to evaluate a piece of writing, it can be helpful to compare its style to parts of any of these books.
In conclusion we would say that the study of too many masterpieces is an error. It means that none of them are fully absorbed or mastered. The selections here given,* together with the volumes recommended above, may of course be judiciously supplemented if occasion requires; but as a rule, these will be found ample. Each type should be studied and mastered, one type after another. It would be a mistake to omit any one, even if it is a type that does not particularly interest the student, and is one he thinks he will never wish to use in its purity: mastery of it will enrich any other style that may be chosen: If it is found useful for shaping no more than a single sentence, it is to be remembered that that sentence may shape the destinies of a life.
In conclusion, we would say that studying too many masterpieces is a mistake. It means that none of them are fully understood or mastered. The selections provided here,* along with the recommended volumes mentioned above, can certainly be wisely supplemented if needed; but generally, these will be more than enough. Each type should be studied and mastered, one after another. It would be a mistake to skip any one, even if it's a type that doesn’t particularly interest the student, and is one they think they will never want to use in its pure form: mastering it will enhance any other style they choose. If it turns out to be useful for crafting just a single sentence, it's important to remember that sentence could shape the course of a life.
*A fuller collection of the masterpieces of style than the present volume contains may be found in “The Best English Essays,” edited by Sherwin Cody.
*A more complete collection of stylish masterpieces than what is included in this volume can be found in “The Best English Essays,” edited by Sherwin Cody.*
CHAPTER XIII.
IMAGINATION AND REALITY.―THE AUDIENCE.
So far we have given our attention to style, the effective use of words.
So far, we've focused on style, which is the effective use of words.
We will now consider some of those general principles of thought end expression which are essential to distinctively literary composition; and first the relation between imagination and reality, or actuality.
We will now look at some of the general principles of thought and expression that are crucial for distinctive literary composition; and first, the relationship between imagination and reality, or what is real.
In real life a thousand currents cross each other, and counter cross, and cross again. Life is a maze of endless continuity, to which, nevertheless, we desire to find some key. Literature offers us a picture of life to which there is a key, and by some analogy it suggests explanations of real life. It is of far more value to be true to the principles of life than to the outer facts. The outer facts are fragmentary and uncertain, mere passing suggestions, signs in the darkness. The principles of life are a clew of thread which may guide the human judgment through many dark and difficult places. It is to these that the artistic writer must be true.
In real life, a thousand different paths intersect, and then intersect again. Life is a maze of endless connections, yet we still want to find some kind of key. Literature gives us a version of life that has a key, and through some similarities, it offers insights into real life. It's much more important to stay true to the principles of life than to focus on surface-level details. Those outer details are scattered and uncertain, just fleeting hints, signs in the dark. The principles of life are like a thread that can lead human judgment through many dark and challenging situations. These are the principles the artistic writer must remain faithful to.
In the real incident the writer sees an idea which he thinks may illustrate a principle he knows of. The observed fact must illustrate the principle, but he must shape it to that end. A carver takes a block of wood and sets out to make a vase. First he cuts away all the useless parts: The writer should reject all the useless facts connected with his story and reserve only what illustrates his idea. Often, however, the carver finds his block of wood too small, or imperfect. Perfect blocks of wood are rare, and so are perfect stories in real life. The carver cuts out the imperfect part and fits in a new piece of wood. Perhaps the whole base of his vase must be made of another piece and screwed on.
In the real situation, the writer notices an idea that he believes can illustrate a principle he knows. The fact he observes must demonstrate the principle, but he has to shape it for that purpose. A sculptor takes a block of wood and starts to create a vase. First, he carves away all the unnecessary parts: the writer should discard all the irrelevant facts related to his story and keep only what supports his idea. However, the sculptor often finds that his block of wood is too small or flawed. Perfect blocks of wood are uncommon, and so are perfect stories in real life. The sculptor removes the imperfect section and fits in a new piece of wood. Maybe the entire base of the vase needs to be made from a separate piece and attached securely.
It is quite usual that the whole setting of a story must come from another source. One has observed life in a thousand different phases, just as a carver has accumulated about him scores of different pieces of wood varying in shape and size to suit almost any possible need. When a carver makes a vase he takes one block for the main portion, the starting point in his work, and builds up the rest from that. The writer takes one real incident as the chief one, and perfects it artistically by adding dozens of other incidents that he has observed. The writer creates only in the sense that the wood carver creates his vase. He does not create ideas cut of nothing, any more than the carver creates the separate blocks of wood. The writer may coin his own soul into substance for his stories, but creating out of one's mind and creating out of nothing are two very different things. The writer observes himself, notices how his mind works, how it behaves under given circumstances, and that gives him material exactly the same in kind as that which he gains from observing the working of other people's mind.
It’s pretty common for the entire setting of a story to come from another source. People have experienced life in countless ways, just like a sculptor has gathered many pieces of wood in various shapes and sizes to fit almost any need. When a sculptor makes a vase, they start with one block for the main part, using that as the foundation for the rest. Similarly, a writer takes one real incident as the main focus and enhances it creatively by adding many other incidents they’ve observed. A writer only creates in the way that a woodworker creates their vase. They don’t pull ideas out of thin air, just like the sculptor doesn’t create separate pieces of wood from nothing. A writer might infuse their own experiences into their stories, but creating from one’s mind and creating out of nothing are two very different processes. The writer observes themselves, notices how their mind works and reacts in different situations, which gives them material that’s just as valid as what they get from watching how other people think.
But the carver in fashioning a vase thinks of the effect it will produce when it is finished, on the mind of his customer or on the mind of any person who appreciates beauty; and his whole end and aim is for this result. He cuts out what he thinks will hinder, and puts in what he thinks will help. He certainly does a great deal more than present polished specimens of the various kinds of woods he has collected. The creative writer―who intends to do something more than present polished specimens of real life―must work on the same plan. He must write for his realer, for his audience.
But the carver, when creating a vase, thinks about the impact it will have when it's finished, on the mind of his customer or anyone who appreciates beauty; his entire goal is to achieve this result. He removes what he believes will detract from it and adds what he thinks will enhance it. He definitely does much more than just showcase polished examples of the different types of wood he has gathered. The creative writer—who aims to do more than just show polished examples of real life—must follow the same approach. He must write for his audience, for the people who will experience it.
But just what is it to write for an audience? The essential element in it is some message a somebody. A message is of no value unless it is to somebody in particular. Shouting messages into the air when you do not know whether any one is at hand to hear would be equally foolish whether a writer gave forth his message of inspiration in that way, or a telegraph boy shouted his message in front of the telegraph off{i}ce in the hope that the man to whom the message was addressed might be passing, or that some of him friends might overhear it.
But what does it mean to write for an audience? The key element is having a message meant for someone specific. A message has no value unless it’s directed at a particular person. Yelling messages into the void when you don't know if anyone is around to hear would be just as silly, whether a writer shares their inspiring message that way, or a messenger shouts their message in front of the telegraph office hoping that the intended recipient might walk by, or that some of their friends might overhear.
The newspaper reporter goes to see a fire, finds out all about it, writes it up, and sends it to his paper. The paper prints it for the readers, who are anxious to know what the fire was and the damage it did. The reporter does not write it up in the spirit of doing it for the pleasure there is in nor does he allow himself to do it in the manner his mood dictates. He writes so that certain people will get certain facts and ideas. The facts he had nothing to do with creating, nor did he make the desire of the people. He was simply a messenger, a purveyor.
The newspaper reporter goes to cover a fire, gathers all the details, writes the story, and sends it to his newspaper. The paper publishes it for the readers, who are eager to learn about the fire and the damage it caused. The reporter doesn’t write it for the enjoyment of it, nor does he let his mood influence how he writes. He writes so that specific people receive specific facts and ideas. He had no role in creating the facts, nor did he influence the readers' desire for information. He was simply a messenger, a deliverer.
The producer of literature, we have said, must write for an audience; but he does not go and hunt up his audience, find out its needs, and then tell to it his story. He simple writes for the audience that he knows, which others have prepared for him. To know human life, to know what people really need, is work for a genius. It resembles the building up of a daily paper, with its patronage and its study of the public pulse. But the reporter has little or nothing to do with that. Likewise the ordinary writer should not trouble himself about so large a problem, at least until he has mastered the simpler ones. Writing for an audience if one wants to get printed in a certain magazine is writing those things which one finds by experience the readers of that magazine, as represented in the editor, want to read. Or one may write with his mind on those readers of the magazine whom he knows personally. The essential point is that the effective writer must cease to think of himself when he begins to write, and turn his mental vision steadily upon the likes or needs of his possible readers, selecting some definite reader in particular if need be. At any rate, he must not write vaguely for people he does not know. If he please these he does know, he may also please many he does not know. The best he can do is to take the audience he thoroughly understands, though it be an audience of one, and write for that audience something that will be of value, in the way of amusement or information or inspiration.
The writer of literature, as we've mentioned, needs to create work for an audience; however, they don't go out searching for their audience, discovering what they want, and then telling them their story. They simply write for the audience they already know and that others have introduced to them. Understanding human life and what people truly need is a task for a genius. It’s similar to putting together a daily newspaper, considering its support and analyzing public interest. But the reporter doesn't have much to do with that. Similarly, the average writer shouldn't concern themselves with such a vast issue, at least until they’ve mastered the simpler challenges. Writing for an audience in order to get published in a specific magazine means producing content that they have learned from experience that the magazine's readers, as represented by the editor, want to engage with. Alternatively, a writer might focus on those magazine readers they know personally. The key point is that an effective writer should stop thinking about themselves once they start writing and instead concentrate on the interests or needs of potential readers, even choosing a specific reader if necessary. In any case, they shouldn’t write vaguely for people they don’t know. If the writer can resonate with those they do know, they may also connect with many others they don’t. The best approach is to focus on an audience they fully understand, even if it’s just one person, and write something valuable for them, whether it’s entertainment, information, or inspiration.
CHAPTER XIV.
THE USE OF MODELS IN WRITING FICTION.
We have seen how a real incident is worked over into the fundamental idea for a composition. The same principle ought to hold in the use of real persons in making the characters in, a novel, or any story where character-drawing is an important item. In a novel especially, the characters must be drawn with the greatest care. They must be made genuine personages. Yet the ill-taste of “putting your friends into a story” is only less pronounced than the bad art or drawing characters purely out of the imagination. There is no art in the slavish copying of persons in real life. Yet it is practically impossible to create genuine characters in the mind without reference to real life. The simple solution would seem to be to follow the method of the painter who uses models, though in so doing he does not make portraits. There was a time in drawing when the school of “out-of-the-headers” prevailed, but their work was often grotesque, imperfect, and sometimes utterly futile in expressing even the idea the artist had in mind. The opposite extreme in graphic art is photography. The rational use of models is the happy mean between the two. But the good artist always draws with his eye on the object, and the good writer should write with his eye on a definite conception or some real thing or person, from which he varies consciously and for artistic purpose.
We have seen how a real incident is transformed into the central idea for a composition. The same principle should apply when using real people to create characters in a novel or any story where character development is essential. In a novel particularly, characters need to be crafted with utmost care. They should be depicted as believable individuals. However, the poor taste of “putting your friends into a story” is only slightly less noticeable than the poor artistry of creating characters purely from the imagination. There’s no skill in mindlessly copying real people. Yet, it's nearly impossible to create authentic characters in your mind without referencing real life. The straightforward solution seems to be following the method of a painter who uses models, even though he doesn’t create exact portraits. There was a time in drawing when the "out-of-the-head" school thrived, but their work often turned out to be bizarre, flawed, and sometimes completely ineffective in conveying even the artist’s intended idea. The opposite extreme in visual art is photography. The thoughtful use of models strikes a balance between the two extremes. However, a good artist always keeps their eye on the subject, and a good writer should focus on a specific concept or some real thing or person, from which they consciously deviate for artistic purposes.
The ordinary observer sees first the peculiarities of a thing. If he is looking at an old gentleman he sees a fly sitting upon the bald spot on his head, a wart on his nose, his collar pulled up behind. But the trained and artistic observer sees the peculiarly perfect outline of the old man's features and form, and in the tottering, gait bent shoulders, and soiled senility a straight, handsome youth, fastidious in his dress and perfect in his form. Such the old man was once, and all the elements of his broken youth are clearly visible under the hapless veneer of time for the one who has an eye to see. This is but one illustration of many that might be offered. A poor shop girl may have the bearing of a princess. Among New York illustrators the typical model for a society girl is a young woman of the most ordinary birth and breeding, misfortunes which are clearly visible in her personal appearance. But she has the bearing, the air of the social queen, and to the artist she is that alone. He does not see the veneer of circumstances, though the real society girl would see nothing else in her humble artistic rival.
The average person first notices the odd details of something. If they’re looking at an older man, they might see a fly resting on his bald head, a wart on his nose, or his collar sticking up in the back. But a trained and artistic observer sees the surprisingly perfect outline of the old man's features and figure, and in the shaky, bent posture and worn-down old age, they can discern a straight, handsome youth who was fastidious about his appearance and perfect in form. That is who the old man once was, and all the traces of his lost youth are clearly visible beneath the unfortunate layer of time for anyone who knows how to look. This is just one example among many that could be given. A struggling shop girl might carry herself like a princess. Among New York illustrators, the typical model for a high-society girl is often a young woman from the most ordinary background, her hardships evident in her appearance. Yet she carries herself with the poise and grace of a social queen, and to the artist, she embodies that completely. They don’t see the superficial details of her situation, while the true society girl would see nothing else in her less fortunate artistic counterpart.
In drawing characters the writer has a much larger range of models from which to choose, in one sense. His models are the people he knows by personal association day by day during various periods of his life, from childhood up. Each person he has known has left an impression on his mind, and that impression is the thing he considers. The art of painting requires the actual presence in physical person of the model, a limitation the writer fortunately does not have. At the same time, the artist of the brush can seek new models and bring them into his studio without taking too much time or greatly inconveniencing himself. The writer can get new models only by changing his whole mode of life. Travel is an excellent thing, yet practically it proves inadequate. The fleeting impressions do not remain, and only what remains steadily and permanently in the mind can be used as a model by the novelist.
In creating characters, a writer has a much broader selection of models to draw from. These models are the people he interacts with daily throughout different stages of his life, from childhood onward. Each person he has encountered has left a mark on his memory, and that mark is what he reflects on. The art of painting demands the physical presence of the model, a limitation that writers thankfully don't face. Meanwhile, a painter can find new models and invite them to his studio without much hassle or delay. For writers, acquiring new models requires a complete change in their lifestyle. Travel is great, but in practice, it often falls short. The fleeting impressions don't stick, and only what remains clear and lasting in the mind can serve as a model for the novelist.
But during a lifetime one accumulates a large number of models simply by habitually observing everything that comes in one's way. When the writer takes up {the} pen to produce a story, he searches through his mental collection for a suitable model. Sometimes it is necessary to use several models in drawing the same character, one for this characteristic, and another for that. But in writing the novelist should have his eye on his model just as steadily and persistently as the painter, for so alone can he catch the spirit and inner truth of nature; and art. If it is anything, is the interpretation of nature. The ideal character must be made the interpretation of the real one, not a photographic copy, not idealization or glorification or caricature, unless the idealization or glorification or caricature has a definite value in the interpretation.
But over a lifetime, people gather a lot of examples just by casually observing everything around them. When a writer sits down to create a story, they sift through their mental collection for an appropriate example. Sometimes, it’s necessary to pull from several different examples to define one character, using one for this trait and another for that. However, in writing, the novelist should focus on their example just as intently and consistently as a painter does, as that's the only way to capture the spirit and deeper truth of nature. Art, if it means anything, is the interpretation of nature. The ideal character should interpret the real one, not be a mere photographic copy, nor should it be idealized, glorified, or caricatured, unless that idealization, glorification, or caricature serves a specific purpose in the interpretation.
CHAPTER XV.
CONTRAST.
In all effective writing contrast is far more than a figure of speech: it is an essential element in making strength. A work of literary art without contrast may have all the elements of construction, style, and originality of idea, but it will be weak, narrow, limp. The truth is, contrast is the measure of the breadth of one's observation. We often think of it as a figure of speech, a method of language which we use for effect. A better view of it is as a measure of breadth. You have a dark, wicked man on one side, and a fair, sunny, sweet woman on the other. These are two extremes, a contrast, and they include all between. If a writer understands these extremes he understands all between, and if in a story he sets up one type against another he in a way marks out those extremes as the boundaries of his intellectual field, and he claims all within them. If the contrast is great, he claims a great field; if feeble, then he has only a narrow field.
In all effective writing, contrast is much more than just a figure of speech: it's a crucial part of creating strength. A piece of literary art without contrast may have all the elements of structure, style, and originality, but it will feel weak, limited, and lacking. The truth is, contrast measures the scope of one's observation. We often think of it as a rhetorical device, a language technique we use for effect. A better way to see it is as a measure of breadth. You have a dark, evil man on one side, and a light, cheerful, kind woman on the other. These are two extremes, a contrast, and they encompass everything in between. If a writer understands these extremes, they grasp everything in between, and if in a story they set one type against another, they effectively outline those extremes as the boundaries of their intellectual territory, claiming everything that lies within. If the contrast is significant, they claim a large scope; if it’s weak, then they only have a limited scope.
Contrast and one's power of mastering it indicate one's breadth of thought and especially the breadth of one's thinking in a particular creative attempt. Every writer should strive for the greatest possible breadth, for the greater his breadth the more people there are who will be interested in his work. Narrow minds interest a few people, and broad minds interest correspondingly many. The best way to cultivate breadth is to cultivate the use of contrast in your writing.
Contrast and the ability to master it show the depth of one's thinking, especially in a specific creative effort. Every writer should aim for the widest possible perspective because the broader their outlook, the more people will be drawn to their work. Narrow-mindedness attracts only a few, while broad-mindedness captures many more. The best way to develop breadth is by incorporating contrast into your writing.
But to assume a breadth which one does not have, to pass from one extreme to another without perfect mastery of all that lies between, results in being ridiculous. It is like trying to extend the range of the voice too far. One desires a voice with the greatest possible range; but if in forcing the voice up one breaks into a falsetto, the effect is disastrous. So in seeking range of character expression one must be very careful not to break into a falsetto, while straining the true voice to its utmost in order to extend its range.
But
Let us now pass from the contrast of characters and situations of the most general kind to contrasts of a more particular sort. Let us consider the use of language first. Light conversation must not last too long or it becomes monotonous, as we all know. But if the writer can pass sometimes rapidly from tight conversation to serious narrative, both the light dialogue and the serious seem the more expressive for the contrast. The only thing to be considered is, can you do it with perfect ease and grace? If you cannot, better let it alone. Likewise, the long sentence may be used in one paragraph, and a fine contrast shown by using very short sentences in the next.
Let’s now move from the general contrasts of characters and situations to more specific ones. First, let’s talk about the use of language. Light conversation shouldn’t go on for too long, or it becomes dull, as we all know. However, if the writer can quickly switch from light conversation to serious narrative, both the casual dialogue and the serious tone become more impactful because of the contrast. The only thing to consider is whether you can do it effortlessly and gracefully. If you can’t, it’s better to avoid it. Similarly, you can use a long sentence in one paragraph and create a striking contrast by using very short sentences in the next.
But let us distinguish between variety and contrast. The writer may pass from long sentences to short ones when the reader has tired of long ones, and vice versa, he may pass from a tragic character to a comic one in order to rest the mind of the reader. In this there will be no very decided contrast. But when the two extremes are brought close together, are forced together perhaps, then we have an electric effect. To use contrast well requires great skill in the handling of language, for contrast means passing from one extreme to another in a very short space, and if this, passing is not done gracefully, the whole effect is spoiled.
But let's differentiate between variety and contrast. A writer can switch from long sentences to short ones when the reader gets bored with the longer ones, and vice versa, they might move from a tragic character to a comedic one to refresh the reader's mind. This won't create a strong contrast. However, when the two extremes are placed close together, or even forced together, we get an electric effect. Using contrast effectively requires significant skill in language, because contrast involves moving from one extreme to another in a very brief span, and if this transition isn't done smoothly, the entire effect is ruined.
What has been said of contrast in language, character, etc., may also be applied to contrasts in any small detail, incident, or even simile. Let us examine a few of the contrasts in Maupassant, for he is a great adept in their use.
What has been mentioned about contrasts in language, character, etc., can also be applied to contrasts in any small detail, incident, or even simile. Let’s take a look at some of the contrasts in Maupassant, as he is highly skilled in using them.
Let us take the opening paragraph of “The Necklace” and see what a marvel of contrast it is: “She was one of those pretty and charming girls who are sometimes, as if by a mistake of destiny, born in a family of clerks. She had no dowry, no expectations, no means of being known, understood, loved, wedded, by any rich and distinguished man; and she had let herself be married to a little clerk in the Ministry of Public Instruction.” Notice “pretty and charming”― “family of clerks.” These two contrasted ideas (implied ideas, of course) are gracefully linked by “as if by a mistake of destiny.” Then the author goes on to mention what the girl did not have in a way that implies that she ought to have had all these things. She could not be wedded to “any rich and distinguished man”; “she let herself be married to a little clerk.”
Let’s look at the opening paragraph of “The Necklace” and see how strikingly contrasting it is: “She was one of those pretty and charming girls who are sometimes, as if by a mistake of fate, born into a family of clerks. She had no dowry, no prospects, no way to be recognized, understood, loved, or married by any wealthy and distinguished man; and she had allowed herself to marry a low-ranking clerk in the Ministry of Public Instruction.” Notice “pretty and charming”— “family of clerks.” These two contrasting ideas (implied ideas, of course) are smoothly connected by “as if by a mistake of fate.” Then the author goes on to list what the girl lacked in a way that suggests she deserved all these things. She could not be married to “any wealthy and distinguished man”; “she allowed herself to marry a low-ranking clerk.”
The whole of the following description of Madam Loisel is one mass of clever contrasts of the things she might have been, wanted to be, with what she was and had. A little farther on, however, we get a different sort of contrast. Though poor, she has a rich friend. Then her husband brings home an invitation at which he is perfectly delighted. Immediately she is shown wretched, a striking contrast. He is shown patient; she is irritated. She is selfish in wishing a dress and finery; he is unselfish in giving up his gun and the shooting.
The entire description of Madam Loisel is a blend of sharp contrasts between what she could have been, what she desired to be, and what she actually is and has. A little later, we see a different kind of contrast. Even though she is poor, she has a wealthy friend. Then her husband comes home with an invitation that he is thrilled about. Right away, she appears miserable, which is a striking contrast. He is portrayed as patient, while she is annoyed. She is selfish for wanting a dress and fancy things; he is selfless for giving up his gun and the chance to go shooting.
With the ball the author gives us a description of Madam Loisel having all she had dreamed of having. Her hopes are satisfied completely, it appears, until suddenly, when she is about to go away, the fact of her lack of wraps contrasts tellingly with her previous attractiveness. These two little descriptions―one of the success of the ball, one of hurrying away in shame, the wretched cab and all―are a most forcible contrast, and most skilfully and naturally represented. The previous happiness is further set into relief by the utter wretchedness she experiences upon discovering the loss of the necklace.
With the ball, the author describes Madam Loisel having everything she ever dreamed of. Her hopes seem completely fulfilled, until suddenly, right before she leaves, the fact that she has no wrap highlights her earlier beauty. These two brief descriptions—one showcasing the success of the ball and the other depicting her hurried departure in shame, along with the miserable cab—create a powerful contrast and are portrayed very skillfully and naturally. Her earlier happiness is further emphasized by the sheer misery she feels when she discovers that the necklace is missing.
Then we have her new life of hard work, which we contrast in mind not only with what she had really been having, but with that which she had dreamed of having, had seemed about to realize, and had suddenly lost for ever.
Then we have her new life of hard work, which we compare not only with what she had actually been experiencing, but with what she had hoped to achieve, what she seemed close to realizing, and what she had suddenly lost for good.
Then at last we have the contrast, elaborate, strongly drawn and telling, between Madam Loisel after ten years and her friend, who represents in flesh and blood what she might have been. Then at the end comes the short, sharp contrast of paste and diamonds.
Then finally we have the clear, detailed, and striking contrast between Madam Loisel after ten years and her friend, who embodies what she could have been. At the end, there's the brief, stark contrast between paste and diamonds.
In using contrast one does not have to search for something to set up against something else. Every situation has a certain breadth, it has two sides, whether they are far apart or near together. To give the real effect of a conception it is necessary to pass from one side to the other very rapidly and frequently, for only in so doing can one keep the whole situation in mind. One must see the whole story, both sides and all in between, at the same time. The more one sees at the same time, the more of life one grasps and the more invigorating is the composition. The use of contrast is eminently a matter of acquired skill, and when one has become skilful he uses contrast unconsciously and with the same effort that he makes his choice of words.
In using contrast, you don’t need to look for something to compare against something else. Every situation has a certain depth; it has two sides, whether they’re far apart or close together. To truly convey an idea, it’s important to move quickly and often between one side and the other, because only then can you keep the entire situation in view. You must see the whole story, both sides, and everything in between, all at once. The more you can see at the same time, the more you understand about life, and the more dynamic the composition becomes. Using contrast is primarily a skill that you develop, and once you become skilled, you use contrast naturally, with the same ease as choosing your words.
APPENDIX
Errors in the Use of Words.
Word Usage Errors.
All of. Omit the of.
All
Aggravate. Does not mean provoke or irritate.
Aggravate. Does not mean annoy or irritate.
Among one another. This phrase is illogical.
Among one another. This phrase doesn’t make sense.
And who. Omit the and unless there is a preceding who to which this is an addition.
And who. Omit the and unless there is a preceding who to which this is an addition.
Another from. Should be another then.
Another then.
Anyhow, meaning at any rate, is not to be used in literary composition.
Anyway, meaning at any rate, should not be used in writing.
Any place. Incorrect for anywhere.
Any place. Incorrect for anywhere.
At. We live at a small place, in a large one, and usually arrive at, not in.
At. We live at a small place, in a large one, and usually arrive at, not in.
Avocation. Not to be confused with vocation, a main calling, since avocation is a side calling.
Avocation. Not to be confused with vocation, which is a primary calling, as avocation refers to a secondary calling.
Awful does not mean very.
Awful doesn’t mean very.
Back out. An Americanism for withdraw.
Back out. An American term for withdraw.
Balance. Not proper for remainder, but only for that which makes equal.
Balance. Not suitable for remainder, but only for what makes equal.
Beginner. Never say new beginner.
Beginner. Never say new beginner.
Beside; besides. The first means by the side of, the second in addition to.
Beside; besides. The first means next to, the second in addition to.
Be that as it will. Say, be that as it may.
That said.
Blame on. We may lay the blame on, but we cannot blame it on any one.
Blame on. We might point fingers, but we can't hold anyone solely responsible.
But what. Should be but that.
But that.
Calculate. Do not use for intend.
Calculate. Do not use for intend.
Can. Do not use for may. “May I go with you?” not “Can I go with you?”
Can. Don’t use it for may. “May I go with you?” not “Can I go with you?”
Clever. Does not mean good-natured, but talented.
Clever. Does not mean nice, but skilled.
Demean. Means to behave, not to debase or degrade.
Demean. Means to act, not to lower or degrade.
Disremember. Now obsolete.
Forget. Now obsolete.
Don't. Not to be used for doesn't, after a singular subject such as he.
Don't. Not to be used for doesn't, after a singular subject such as he.
Else. Not follow by but; say, “nothing else than pride.”
Else. Not followed by but; say, “nothing else than pride.”
Expect. Do not use for think, as in “I expect it is so.”
Expect. Do not use for think, as in “I expect that’s the case.”
Fetch. Means to go and bring, hence go and fetch is wrong.
Fetch. Means to go and bring, so saying go and fetch is incorrect.
Fix. Not used for arrange or the like, as “fix the furniture.”
Fix. Not used for arrange or similar uses, like "fix the furniture."
From. Say, “He died of cholera,” not from.
From. Say, “He died of cholera,” not from.
Got. Properly you “have got” what you made an effort to get, not what you merely “have.”
Got. Technically, you “have got” something when you put in the effort to obtain it, not just when you simply “have” it.
Graduate. Say, “The man is graduated from college,” and “The college graduates the man.”
Graduate. Say, “The man graduated from college,” and “The college graduates the man.”
Had ought. Ought never requires any part of the verb to have.
Had ought. Ought never requires any form of the verb to have.
Had rather, had better. Disputed, but used by good writers.
Had rather, had better. Debated, but used by good writers.
Handy. Does not mean near by.
Handy. Does not mean close by.
In so far as. Omit the in.
As far as
Kind of. After these two words omit a, and say, “What kind of man,” not “What kind of a man.” Also, do not say, “kind of tired.”
Kind of. After these two words drop a, and say, “What kind of man,” not “What kind of a man.” Also, don’t say, “kind of tired.”
Lady. Feminine for lord, therefore do not speak of a “sales-lady,” “a man and his lady,” etc.
Lady. The feminine form of lord, so avoid saying “sales-lady,” “a man and his lady,” etc.
Last; latter. We say latter of two, in preference to last; but last of three.
Last; latter. We use latter when referring to two items, instead of last; but we use last when talking about three.
Lay; lie. We lay a thing down, but we ourselves lie down; we say, “He laid the Bible on the table,” but “He lay down on the couch;” “The coat has been laid away,” and “It has lain in the drawer.” Lay, laid, laid——takes an object; lie, lay, lain——does not.
Lay; lie. We lay something down, but we lie down ourselves; we say, “He laid the Bible on the table,” but “He lay down on the couch;” “The coat has been laid away,” and “It has lain in the drawer.” Lay, laid, laid—takes an object; lie, lay, lain—does not.
Learn. Never used as an active verb with an object, a in “I learned him his letters.” We say, “He learned his letters,” and “I taught him his letters.”
Learn. Never used as an active verb with an object, as in "I learned him his letters." We say, "He learned his letters," and "I taught him his letters."
Learned. “A learned man”——pronounce learn-ed with two syllables; but “He has learned his lesson”——one syllable.
Learned. “A learned man”——pronounce learn-ed with two syllables; but “He has learned his lesson”——one syllable.
Like. Do not say, “Do like I do.” Use as when a conjunction is required.
Like. Do not say, “Do like I do.” Use as when a conjunction is needed.
Lives. Do not say, “I had just as lives as not,” but “I had just as Lief.”
Lives. Do not say, “I had just as lives as not,” but “I had just as Lief.”
Lot. Does not mean many, as in “a lot of men,” but one division, as, “in that lot.”
Lot. Does not mean many, as in “a lot of men,” but rather one division, as in “in that lot.”
Lovely. Do not overwork this word. A rose may be lovely, but hardly a plate of soup.
Lovely. Don't overuse this word. A rose can be lovely, but a plate of soup? Not so much.
Mad. We prefer to say angry if we mean out of temper.
Mad. We like to say angry when we mean out of temper.
Mistaken. Some critics insist that it is wrong to say “I am mistaken” when we mean “I mistake.”
Mistaken. Some critics argue that it's incorrect to say "I am mistaken" when we actually mean "I mistake."
Love. We like candy rather than love it. Save Love for something higher.
Love. We like candy more than we love it. Save love for something deeper.
Most. In writing, do not use 'most for almost.
Most. In writing, do not use 'most to mean almost.
Mutual friend. Though Dickens used this expression in one of his titles in the sense of common friend, it is considered incorrect by many critics. The proper meaning of mutual is reciprocal.
Mutual friend. Even though Dickens used this term in one of his titles to mean a common friend, many critics consider it incorrect. The correct meaning of mutual is reciprocal.
Nothing Like. Do not say, “Nothing like as handsome.”
Nothing Like. Do not say, “Nothing like as handsome.”
Of all others. Not proper after a superlative; as, “greatest of all others,” the meaning being “the greatest of all,” or “great above all others.”
Of all others. Not appropriate after a superlative; for example, “greatest of all others,” meaning “the greatest of all,” or “greater than all others.”
Only. Be careful not to place this word so that its application will be doubtful, as in “His mother only spoke to him,” meaning “Only his mother.”
Only. Be careful not to use this word in a way that makes its meaning unclear, like in “His mother only spoke to him,” which implies “Only his mother.”
On to. Not one word like into. Use it as you would on and to together.
On to. Not a single word like into. Use it just like you would use on and to together.
Orate. Not good usage.
Speak. Not good usage.
Plenty. Say, “Fruit was plentiful,” not “plenty.”
Plenty. Say, “Fruit was abundant,” not “plenty.”
Preventative. Should be preventive.
Preventive.
Previous. Say, “previously to,” not “previous to.” Also, do not say, “He was too previous”——it is a pure vulgarism.
Previous. Say, “previously to,” not “previous to.” Also, don’t say, “He was too previous”——it is a pure vulgarism.
Providing. Say, “Provided he has money,” not “Providing.”
Providing. Say, “Provided he has money,” not “Providing.”
Propose. Do not confuse with purpose. One proposes a plan, but purposes to do something, though it is also possible a propose, or make a proposition, to do something.
Propose. Don't confuse with purpose. One proposes a plan, but purposes to do something, although it's also possible to propose or make a suggestion to do something.
Quite. Do not say, “Quite a way,” or “Quite a good deal,” but reserve the word for such phrases as “Quite sure,” “Quite to the edge,” etc.
Quite. Don't say, “Quite a way,” or “Quite a good deal,” but save the word for phrases like “Quite sure,” “Quite to the edge,” etc.
Raise; rise. Never tell a person to “raise up,” meaning “raise himself up,” but to “rise up.” Also, do not speak of “raising children,” though we may “raise horses.”
Raise; rise. Never tell someone to “raise up,” meaning “lift themselves up,” but to “rise up.” Also, don’t say “raising children,” although we can “raise horses.”
Scarcely. Do not say, “I shall scarcely (hardly) finish before night,” though it is proper to use it of time, as in “I saw him scarcely an hour ago.”
Scarcely. Do not say, “I will hardly finish before night,” though it is acceptable to use it regarding time, as in “I saw him barely an hour ago.”
Seldom or ever. Incorrect for “seldom if ever.”
Seldom or ever. Incorrect for “seldom if ever.”
Set; sit. We set the cup down, and sit down ourselves. The hen sits; the sun sets; a dress sits.
Set; sit. We set the cup down and sit down ourselves. The hen sits; the sun sets; a dress sits.
Sewerage; sewage. The first means the system of sewers, the second the waste matter.
Sewerage; sewage. The first refers to the system of sewers, while the second refers to the waste material.
Some. Do not say, “I am some tired,” “I like it some,” etc.
Some. Don't say, “I am some tired,” “I like it some,” etc.
Stop. Say, “Stay in town,” not “Stop in town.”
Stop. Say, “Stay in town,” not “Stop in town.”
Such another. Say “another such.”
Another such.
They. Do not refer to any one, by they, their, or them; as in “If any one wishes a cup of tea, they may get it in the next room.” Say, “If any one … he may …”
They. Do not refer to anyone with they, their, or them; for example, "If anyone wants a cup of tea, they can get it in the next room." Instead, say, "If anyone ... he may ...”
Transpire. Does not mean “occur,” and hence we do not say “Many events transpired that year.” We may say, “It transpired that he had been married a year.”
Transpire. Does not mean “happen,” so we don’t say “Many events transpired that year.” We can say, “It turned out that he had been married for a year.”
Unique. The word means single, alone, the only one so we cannot say, “very unique,” or the like.
Unique. The word means single, alone, the only one so we can't say, “very unique,” or anything like that.
Very. Say, “very much pleased,” not “very pleased,” though the latter usage is sustained by some authorities.
Very. Say, “very much pleased,” not “very pleased,” though the latter usage is supported by some experts.
Ways. Say, “a long way,” not “a long ways.”
Ways. Say, “a long way,” not “a long ways.”
Where. A preposition of place is not required with where, and it is considered incorrect to say, “Where is he gone to?”
Where. A preposition of place isn’t needed with where, and it’s seen as incorrect to say, “Where has he gone to?”
Whole of. Omit the of.
Whole
Without. Do not say, “Without it rains,” etc., in the sense of unless, except.
Without. Don't say, "Without it rains," etc., to mean unless or except.
Witness. Do not say, “He witnessed a bull-fight”; reserve it for “witnessing a signature,” and the like.
Witness. Don't say, “He witnessed a bullfight”; save it for “witnessing a signature,” and things like that.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!